Sinaumedia

Category: General

  • Inventor of Morse Code and a Brief History of Morse Code

    Inventor of Morse Code – In the world of Scouting, you will definitely be taught various things, especially things related to nature. Therefore, when learning and practicing Scouts will be taught how to treat themselves or others who have been injured or are sick, how to survive in the open or cook, to how to communicate. The activity of communicating in Scouts is quite unique because we are taught how to communicate using tools. One tool that can be used to communicate (in Scouting) is a whistle.

    For some people must know a whistle tool. The whistle itself is a tool that can emit a beeping sound when the tool is blown. With the whistle in the Scout equipment attribute, the way to communicate is using Morse code. Like a cipher, we have to memorize the codes in Morse code. This needs to be done so that the whistle can function optimally and the communication can run optimally.

    When talking about Morse code, it is actually not only intended as a means of communication for Scout members, but has been widely used in various tools, such as the telegraph. At the beginning of its appearance, this Morse code was used to send messages between two places that were not close to each other. The telegraph was a communication tool that had a fairly wide and fast reach at that time.

    Thus, it can be said that this Morse code is indeed a code that functions to communicate. It is inconceivable that at that time Morse code was not found, it is likely that we would find it difficult to communicate.

    Who invented morse code? Maybe almost everyone doesn’t know who invented Morse code. In this article, we will explain the inventor of Morse code, so you can find out as soon as possible. So, read this article until it’s finished.

    Definition of Morse Code

    Basically, Morse code is also often referred to as Morse code, both Morse code and Morse code both have an important role in communication tools at that time. What’s more, Morse code is something important in the development of the field of communication between two very different places, so that at that time Morse code was often used as CW ( constant wave ) radio technology.

    Meanwhile, morse code or morse code in the Big Indonesian Language Dictionary (KBBI) means a code in the form of dots and dashes instead of letters, numbers and punctuation used in sending and receiving telecommunications news. Therefore, Morse code can be regarded as a medium that can be used to communicate. In Morse code, it will usually be composed of a period symbol (.) and a line symbol (-). The two symbols will have a certain pattern in order to communicate. In the dot symbol, the sound produced is a short sound. Meanwhile, in the line symbol, the sound produced is a long sound.

    At the beginning of its emergence, this Morse code is thought to have appeared around the 20th century or during the time when the telegraph was invented. Therefore, you can say that Morse code and the telegraph cannot be separated because, when Morse code was sent via telegraph, it was one of the communication media that had a fairly wide and fast reach at that time. Due to its wide and fast reach, almost every office in the world uses telegraph to communicate. However, after the invention of the telephone, the use of Morse code and the telegraph began to decrease and shifted to the telephone.

    In addition, in 1997, Morse code was also discontinued as an official communications module for the International Navy. The replacement for Morse code as a Navy module is the GMDSS system. Unlike the telegraph, which uses radio waves, the GMDSS system uses satellites to carry out long-distance communications between ships and international land towers.

    Even though Morse code is rarely used as a medium of communication, Morse code is still listed in the International Civil Aviation Organization’s radiotelephone guidelines or shortened to ICAO. In general, in Morse code, the most frequently used signal is the “SOS” signal (··· ––– ···). The “SOS” signal is a signal that is often used to signal a danger and this signal has been agreed upon in various international maritime agreements.

    Although Morse code is seen to be used more often as a medium of long-distance communication, Morse code is also often used in Scouting activities. Morse code for Scouts uses a whistle as its medium. In addition, the morse code in Scouting is one of the conditions for obtaining a Special Mark of Proficiency. So, can you use Morse code in Scout activities?

    Thus, several signals originating from Morse code have been agreed upon by many countries, especially those directly related to the marine world. In addition, Morse code is arguably one of the media which is the forerunner of humans being able to communicate remotely.

    A Brief History of Morse Code

    The following discussion is a brief history of Morse code. Talking about the history of Morse code can be said to be quite important because we can find out the origins of Morse code being created in this world.

    The history of the emergence of Morse code or Morse code is always related to the beginning of the telegraph being used as a medium for communication. The emergence of the telegraph was motivated by the sending of messages that took a long time to reach the destination. Then, around the 1800s to 1900s, a communication tool known as the telegraph began to appear. Telegraph is a communication tool that can send and receive messages over long distances.

    Morse codes consist of letter codes and numeric codes. Each letter of the alphabet contained in a telegraph message can be sent by tapping on it within the dash symbol and dot symbol. The line symbol indicates that the signal is long and the dot symbol indicates that the signal is short.

    Every message sent by telegraph operators uses Morse codes. At that time, Morse codes were better known as telegrams. From there, Morse codes were used more often to support telegraph machines so that messages sent arrived properly. With the use of the telegraph machine which was increasingly being used, it had even become a necessity at that time, Morse codes were increasingly recognized by many people.

    Morse code also underwent development, so that the Morse code that was first used was different from the Morse code that we know today. The Morse code used today is the Morse code that was officially established at the Conference that took place in Berlin in 1851.

    The Morse code used in this telegraph machine was invented by a man named Samuel Finley Breese Morse, or better known as Samuel Morse. He is also assisted by his partner named Alfred Vail and

    Morse Code Inventor Biography

    His interest in drawing emerged when Samuel Morse was studying at Yale College. At one time, Samuel Morse tried to make a statue made of clay and he made a statue of Hercules. After the teacher saw the statue made by his student, then advised Samuel Morse to take part in the competition. Sure enough, while participating in the competition, Samuel Morse managed to win for his work, so that in the end his self-confidence increased.

    After believing that the world of drawing was “his world”, Samuel Morse and several other painters began to try to establish the National Academy and he became its first president. Then, he chose to become a painter from seven in the morning until midnight. In fact, he was also chosen as one of the painters in the circular room in the US Capitol.

    After working in the world of drawing for a long time, Samuel Morse became interested in the world of electricity when he saw electromagnetic phenomena that occurred when he sailed from Europe to America around the 1830s. The electromagnetic idea that interested Samuel Morse originated with Cooke and Wheatstone.

    His interest in the electromagnetic field made Samuel Morse want to increase his knowledge by studying the sciences that came from an American physicist named Joseph Henry. After studying electromagnetic Joseph Henry, then Samuel Morse began to develop an electric telegraph using a single circuit or single circuit in 1835. Then, Samuel Morse operated his telegraph for the first time at New York University.

    When developing the electric telegraph in 1837, Samuel Morse did not work alone, but was assisted by two of his friends, namely Leonard Gale and Alfred Vail. The workings of the electric telegraph developed by Samuel Morse is by pressing the operator button. In this case, the purpose of pressing the telegraph operator’s button was to complete the electrical circuit. After the electric circuit appears, then the electrical signal will move through the cable until the message can be received properly.

    In the same year (1837), Samuel Morse and his two friends began patenting his newest telegraph. When applying for a patent, he explained that the telegraph he made contained lines and dots. These lines and dots serve to represent numbers and letters, so they can produce words that can be read. These symbols and lines are now known as Morse code or Morse code.

    After the success of developing and perfecting his telegraph, Samuel Morse began sending messages for the first time using his telegraph. The first message was about “What is God doing!”. The success of Samuel Morse in making a telegraph, apparently made many companies at that time start using Samuel Morse’s telegraph and start building telegraph networks from Washington to Buffalo and Boston.

    Samuel Morse died on April 2, 1872 in New York City at the age of 80. He died due to pneumonia, then was buried in the Greenwood cemetery, Brooklyn, United States. Samuel Morse who has passed away left important and historic discoveries for the world. Even the invention of the telegraph and Morse code or Morse code at that time was used by the military. The military uses the telegraph and Morse code for the purpose of conducting long-distance communications and exchanging messages.

    How to Memorize Morse Code

    To memorize Morse code is divided into 3 methods, namely:

    1. Koch’s method

    The Koch method is a method commonly used to memorize Morse code with a gradual system. When using this method, we will start with two letters that can be repeated many times. The intervals in this method use the letters E and T.

    2. Substitution Method

    The substitution method is a method of memorizing Morse code which is usually used in Scouting activities. The equivalent letter in this method is the letter “O”. the letter “O” as a line symbol (-) and the vowels A, I, U, E, O are used as dot symbols (.).

    3. Grouping Method

    The grouping method is a method of memorizing Morse code by grouping each letter of the alphabet.

    Benefits of Morse Code

    The Morse code that was created and developed by Samuel Morse has several benefits, including:

    1. Can Be Used On Telegraphs

    The first benefit of Morse code is that it can be used in telegraphs. With Morse code, the telegraph can function properly, so that every message sent via telegraph can be received properly by the recipient. Therefore, Morse code cannot be separated from the telegraph. Not only that, Morse code also played a role in the development of the telegraph at that time, so that the military also used the telegraph to send and receive messages.

    2. As a Communication Media

    It’s no stranger that Morse code is very useful for communicating over long distances. Until now, Morse code is still used as a medium of communication, especially in emergencies and dangers. Morse code “SOS” will usually be used to send aid. In addition, the Morse code “SOS” is more often used in the marine world, both national maritime and international maritime.

    3. Can be used in Scout Activities

    The next benefit of Morse code is that it can be used in Scout activities. Every Scout activity will definitely be explained how to use Morse code. In Scouting activities, Morse code is usually used using a whistle. Whistle is a tool that when blown will produce a sound, priit . In Scouting activities, Morse code is used to call members to gather somewhere.

    4. Can Give Secret Messages

    The last benefit that can be felt by using Morse code is being able to send secret messages. In this case, the secret message in question is a message that can only be read by certain individuals or people. Therefore, the benefits of Morse code for secret messages are usually only used in the field of intelligence. In addition, the Morse codes used are only known by individuals and groups who have mutually agreed.

    Conclusion

    After discussing the biography of the inventor of Morse code to the benefits of Morse code, it can be said that Morse code has a very important role and is always related to the development of the telegraph. Currently, Morse code is rarely used by many people because of the invention of the telephone, so that cellphones are more effective and efficient when used. However, in the marine world, one of the Morse codes that are still used is the Morse code “SOS” which functions to give distress signals and ask for help.

    Source: From various sources

  • Inventor of Balancing Notes and History of Balancing Notes

    Inventor of Not Beams – Music, who is not familiar with that term, almost everyone will recognize that term, even children already know it. Some children have been taught more about music, but some others know little about music. It’s no stranger to music being loved by many people because sometimes when you play music or listen to music you will feel happy, sad, and so on. Those feelings make music more colorful and feels more “alive”.

    As many people already know that there are people who prefer to play music and there are also those who prefer to listen to music, not even a few also like to play music and at the same time like to listen to music, if you include listening to or playing music more? Whatever the choice, the point is that music always entertains us.

    In general, someone who listens to music or plays music will follow the development of age and era. For example, when children are old they will like children’s music, when teenagers will like youth music, and so on. In addition, the development of music must follow the times and the music tastes of the listeners. So, it is natural for someone to like more than one type of music.

    Everyone who plays music knows the term tone, but someone who only listens to music is usually less familiar with the tone. Things like that are natural because someone who plays music needs to know the tone so that the music being played is pleasing to the ear. What’s more, for musicians who are definitely able to process notes into something special.

    Talking about tone cannot be separated from the name of notation, there are various types of notation, one of which is beam notation. Usually, this block notation already exists in Elementary School (SD) art subjects, but not all of them study it. In addition, the omo block notation has actually been around for a long time or around 500 AD. Who invented block notation? To find out who invented musical notes, you can see the following review.

    Definition of Balancing Notes

    It is common or mandatory that musical notation must be present in a piece of music. Therefore, musical notation is a system used for writing musical works. In general, the standard of musical notation that exists today is beam notation or better known as musical notes. Each musical note written always represents the duration and pitch of the note when it is played. The pitch of the note is described vertically and the duration or rhythm is described horizontally. In addition, the duration of the note is usually shown in the form of beats.

    Some historical records say that the word “note beam” comes from the Dutch language, namely noten balk which means the notes in music that use five horizontal lines to position the note points. Therefore, in musical notation, the five-lined stave system is the basis. When reading musical notes, we need to know what the tempo, beat, dynamics, and instrumentation will be used. In addition, the musical notes will be placed on the stave and the musical notes will be read from left to right.

    In the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), musical notes are notes that are not denoted by numbers, but by lines, circles, and other signs.

    When reading musical notes, we will definitely see different notes. It is these different note positions that will determine the duration or rhythm of the tone and pitch when it is played later. Therefore, when you first started learning musical notes, you shouldn’t be surprised why there are so many different notes.

    In musical notes, when reading them, there are usually note intervals between spaces or between lines. First, the terts interval is two notes separated by a stave or the notes are in two adjacent spaces (top and bottom). Second, the second interval is two notes close together, one note in the space and one note in the stave.

    Basically, every note in a musical note has a different or different frequency. With these different frequencies, each note placement on the stave is made according to the high and low of the note itself. Not only that, beam notation is often referred to as absolute notation, why is that? Because beam notation has a fairly high benchmark for a fixed tone, which is around (a=440 Hz). Therefore, beam notation is very effective when used when playing music.

    Talking about musical notes feels incomplete if you don’t discuss the beats of each musical note. In general, there are 6 beats in musical notes, namely: 4 beats, 2 beats, 1 beat, 1/2 beat, 1/4 beat, 1/8 beat. For more details, you can see the table below.

    From the picture above it can be said that the smaller the value of a note, the more flags on a note. In addition, notes that already have a cavity may not be given an additional flag.

    The History of Balancing Notes

    Talking about musical notes cannot be separated from music. Music itself has actually been around for thousands of years, so music can be said to be part of human culture and art. There are already many artistic heritages related to music, such as musical instruments, songs, and many more. Every legacy that occurs in the field of music art and music knowledge, generally comes from kingdoms or countries, such as Rome, Greece, Egypt, China, and others.

    Musical games with complete compositions (songs and lyrics) began to occur and were developed by the ancient Greeks. At that time, complete musical compositions were known as Seikilos Epitaph . In fact, relics of complete musical compositions have been engraved on tombstones in Turkey which are thought to have existed since the 1st century.

    After the emergence of complete musical compositions, a notation similar to “sol-fa” or western solmization appeared, which used the letters A to G. Notations similar to “sol-fa” grew in the Byzantine Empire (Byzantine). The empire grew and developed during the time of the Roman empire. Some people say that the use of “sol-fa” notation is almost the same as “Boethian notation”. “Boethian notation” is a notation that was discovered and developed by a Roman philosopher named Boethius, he developed his notation around the 6th century. In addition, Boethius was the first person to use the 14 letters of the alphabet in making notations.

    Slowly but surely music notation continues to experience development from churches in European countries. The early appearance of musical notation in Europe was used to perform choirs in churches. At that time, the notation was positioned at the top of the word or syllable of the text of a song to be sung. The development of musical notation that occurred at that time was known as Plainchant or Gregorian Chant . At that time also to determine the high and low of a tone only from the previous tone.

    Apparently, the notation problem continues to be repaired or perfected by using a 1 tone line at the beginning to using 4 stave lines. Talking about the stave which consists of 4 pieces, it is always connected with Guido of Arezzo. He was someone who was already an expert in the field of music theory at that time. In fact, Guido is also believed to be the inventor of musical notes which at that time replaced the neumatic notation.

    In a note that is quite famous and entitled Micrologus . The notes contain singing and a way to teach Gregorian chant , as well as discussing polyphonic musical composition. Some historical records say that this Micrologus existed around 1025 or 1026 AD.

    Apart from that, Guido is also quite known for his solfege . In the early appearance of Guido’s solfege consisted of only 6 notes and was often known as the hexachord . The 6 notes in question are ut, re, mi, fa, sol, la. Then, along with the times, not ut , in some countries changed to do . In addition, the number of notes was also added to seven with the addition of the note ti ( si ) by many people. Until finally, the notes we know become “solmization” of seven notes. Even the seven-tone “solmization” has been used in many countries and has become a standard in playing a piece of music.

    Not only changes to notes and additions to Guido’s notes, but music that continues to evolve makes old musical notes or musical notes also develop. Other developments occurred in the stave where previously there were only 4 lines, now there are 5 stave lines. These 5 staves are the staves that we know and use today.

    Although, Guido is believed to be the inventor of musical notes, it is a pity that his name is not well known by some people. This could happen because at that time, the discovery of Guido’s notes was very little publicized.

    Inventor of Balancing Notes

    After discussing the history of musical notes briefly, it can be said that the inventor of musical notation or musical notes is Guido of Arezzo and he is also known as Guido Aretinus. He is thought to have been born in 991 or 992 AD and is also known as an expert in music theory. However, some historical records, some say that Guido came from Italy and some say he came from France. If seen based on the works that have been created or made, the use of language tends to lead to Italian.

    Not only as a music theorist, but Guido is a Benedictine monk from Arezzo. He studied at the Benedictine Monastery or at that time known as Pomposa Abbey. His love for music, he also poured by teaching singing. Until 1025, he felt he was experiencing a mismatch with some “people” in the church, so he chose to leave the church. Even though he had left the church, Guido still taught singing at the cathedral school owned by a bishop from Arezzo.

    While at Pompisa, Guido began to develop a new way of writing Gregorian Chant . He uses a stave of 4 lines and uses a clef. Each Gregorian Chant was rewritten by Guido and presented to Pope John XIX.

    Guido, who was very interested in the world of music, continued to develop the notation he found, by practicing listening to each note and reading pre-existing scores. Until one day, in a hymn to Saint John the Baptist which is quite famous with the title Ut queant laxis , Guido makes a melody by creating 6 notes, namely ut, re, mi, fa, sol, la . The six notes were named by Guido as the hexachord . It was from Guido’s six that modern “solmization” began to emerge.

    Along with the times, there was a change in the name of the note ut that was made by Guido, the note was changed to the word do . The word do occurred around the 1600s and was taken from the first syllable of the family name “doni”. Changing the name not ut to do is named Giovanni Battista Doni. Apart from that, there is also an addition to Guido’s hexachord , namely ti . However, in some countries there are those who replace the word ti with the word si . This is done so that the initial letters do not experience the sameness. As for someone who replaces the word ti into a wordthe is Sarah Ann Glover.

    Beam Note Section

    When we study musical notes, we will definitely see the shape of the musical notes which consist of the musical note flags, the stem of the musical notes, and the heads of the musical notes. For more details, see the image below.

    Advantages and Disadvantages of Balancing Notes

    Excess Balancing Notes

    Quoted from various sources that there are three advantages of musical notes, namely:

    1. Musical notes have become a standard in music applied by many countries, including Indonesia. In fact, it can be said to be the language of world music.

    2. Each note has a different symbol, so readers and users will easily understand it.

    3. The values ​​contained in the note are very clear, such as dynamic markings or the high and low of a note that are easy to understand.

    Lack of Balancing Notes

    Quoted from various sources, there are three drawbacks to musical notes, namely:

    1. Writing musical notes is very difficult, so only certain people can actually write them.

    2. Not flexible, especially when there is a change in the basic tone.

    3. It takes a long time to write musical notes because it requires high accuracy.

    Conclusion

    Musical notes are one of the basics that need to be learned and understood in playing music. This needs to be done because using the right musical notes will produce special notes, which will result in complete musical compositions (songs and lyrics) that are pleasant to hear. In learning musical notes you can do it yourself, but it would be nice to be taught by experts so that the knowledge received can be maximized. More importantly, learning musical notes is not easy, so it takes a lot of enthusiasm and patience.

    Source: From various sources

  • Inventor of Airplanes: This is the History of His Discovery

    Inventor of Airplanes – Has Sinaumed’s ever traveled by airplane? That’s right, we must be familiar with one of the biggest transportation. Based on the sophistication of aircraft technology, does Sinaumed’s know who the genius inventor of the airplane is? As one of the greatest inventions in the world, airplanes have a long history of discovery until now we can even fly hundreds of miles in the air.

    Airplane Inventor

    The Wright Brothers (Wright Brother) are Orville (born August 19, 1871) and Wilbur Wright (born April 16, 1867) who are two American siblings who are believed to be the inventors of airplanes. On December 17, 1903, they succeeded in making an airplane with its first human-controlled flight. Two years after its invention, the two brothers developed a “flying machine” into the shape of a winged airplane, as we know it today.

    Although not the first aircraft inventors to manufacture experimental aircraft, the Wright brothers were the first brothers to control aircraft so that they could steer the aircraft with the wings firmly attached. Their invention based on the first hot air balloon flight invented by French citizens Joseph Montgolfier and Etienne Montgolfier occurred in 1782, after which a German named Ferdinand von Zeppelin detained passengers and goods in 1900.

    The following year, the Zeppelin balloon completed the airlift to the Zeppelin shipwreck on a transatlantic voyage in New Jersey. The year 1936 before World War II, marked the end of the Zeppelin era. After the Wright era, the aircraft has undergone many changes in design, shape, and engine to meet the needs of aviation.

    The work of the two brothers is interdependent, so they are included in the list together and can explain the history of the invention of the airplane. Wilbur Wright was born in 1867 in Milville, Indiana, while Orville Wright (his younger brother) was born in 1871 in Dayton, Ohio. Both boys went to college, but neither had a diploma. Wright two brothers of seven children.

    In 1878, his father bought a toy helicopter for the youngest of two children. The toy is made of bamboo and rubber and the propeller rotates. Wilbur and Orville played with it until it broke. Then they make their own toys. They stated that the experience of playing with bamboo dragonflies was the source of their love for airplane engines.

    Both have a gift for mechanics and are interested in the problem of people flying in the sky. In 1892 they joined the business, selling, repairing and manufacturing of bicycles. With this transaction, the fund has added research in its objective, namely aviation. In 1899 they started to focus on aviation itself. In December 1903, after more than four years of struggle, his efforts succeeded brilliantly.

    The Wright brothers learned to fly gliders together. First they learn how to work kites, then paragliders. The following year, they brought gliders large enough to carry humans to Kitty Hawk, North Carolina. This aircraft is being tested. They then built and worked on a complete glider in 1901 and built it in 1902.

    This third glider is a combination of the most important inventions. Many of the basic patents applied for in 1903 related to this glider, not to earlier aircraft. They managed to fly the third glider more than 1000 times. The two Wright brothers have been some of the best and most experienced glider pilots in the world since they started building electric airplanes.

    Experience in the air with the glider is the essence of his third and most important success. Many who have attempted to build airplanes before have absolute apprehension about how their work will spread. The Wright brothers soon realized that the main problem was how to control the plane once it was in the air.

    For this reason, they spend most of their time and attention on the question of how to achieve aircraft stability in flight. They managed to build three main categories of devices to control the aircraft, which resulted in a successful demonstration. The Wright brothers also made significant contributions to wing design. They realized that the discovery data that was originally sent could not serve as a guide.

    For this reason, they created their own wind tunnel and worked on more than 2000 different types of wing surface shapes. The key point of the experiment was that the two brothers were able to make their own maps to explain that the air pressure on a wing depends on the shape of the wing. This information is used in aircraft wing work.

     

    Attempts to use aviation engines in the first half of the 19th century tended to fail. The bright steam engines were too heavy for air traffic. The internal combustion engine was invented when the Wright brothers appeared. However, these engines are intended for general engineering purposes only and are too heavy for use in aircraft aviation. When no factory could produce a mechanical design that was light enough, the Wright brothers developed their own (with the help of a mechanic).

    This shows their intelligence, as they can come up with better engine designs in a relatively short amount of time than almost any other manufacturer. In addition, the Wright brothers had developed their own propeller design which they used in 1903 with a 66% success rate.

    The first flight occurred on December 17, 1903, at Kill Devil Hills near Kitty Hawk, North Carolina. That day, the two brothers made two flights each. The first flight made by Orville Wright lasted 12 seconds and covered 120 feet. Wilbur Wright’s final flight took 59 seconds and covered 852 feet. The plane they called the Flyer I (now Kitty Hawk) cost less than $1,000.

    The plane had a wingspan of 40 feet, weighed about 750 pounds, was equipped with a 12 hp engine, and only 170 pounds. The original aircraft is now in the Washington, DC Aerospace Museum. After flying in Kitty Hawk, the Wright brothers returned to their hometown of Dayton. So they designed and manufactured a second plane, the Flyer II. With this second aircraft, they made 105 flights in 1904, but did not attract public attention.

    The improved and more practical Flyer III aircraft was produced in 1905. They often flew around the city of Dayton, but many still do not believe that the so-called airplane was born. In 1908, his findings dispelled all common fears and suspicions. Wilbur Wright flew his plane to France, performed aerial acrobatics, and organized a company to sell his work.

    Meanwhile, Orville Wright gave a similar demonstration in the United States. Unfortunately, the plane crashed on September 17, 1908. This was the only misfortune that the two of them had. One passenger died and Orville broke his leg and two ribs, but he recovered quickly. The successful flight led the US government to sign a US Department of Defense aircraft manufacturing contract.

    In 1909 the government procurement budget was carried out including a $30,000 air force contract. A patent lawsuit was filed between the Wright brothers and their rivals, but in 1914 their charges were dismissed by the courts. Needless to say, Wilbur Wright contracted typhoid fever in 1912 and died at the age of 45. Orville Wright, who sold his stake in the company in 1915, lived until 1948.

    In fact there have been many researchers or inventors of airplanes, but it was undoubtedly the Wright brothers who pioneered the more comprehensive invention of airplanes. The invention of the airplane is an absolute phenomenon for both peaceful and war purposes.

    Flying has been a human dream for centuries. They want to soar in the clouds on a flying carpet, just like the Arabian Midnight fairy tale. It was the genius of the Wright brothers who actually flew in a plane and made this dream come true, rather than sitting cross-legged on a fairytale rug.

     

     

    History of the Development of the Discovery of Airplanes

    1. “The Phoenix” by Ibn Firnas (852)

    Armed with a simple falcon-shaped device attached to a silk cloak and a wooden frame, Ibn Firnas glided down a hill in Cordoba (Spain) witnessed by the Moomin poet Ibn Sa’id, in the fall of 852.

    2. Gliders (1050)

    The flight was not very successful, but the apparatus used by Firnas received a lot of attention from scientists. Two centuries after Firnas, a priest from Malmesbury, England improved Firnas’ plan by adding a tail, he called the tool a glider. He managed to fly for 15 minutes at a distance of 200 meters from the church tower.

    3. Ornithopter (1488)

    Discovered in 1488 by the Italian scientist Leonardo da Vinci. This concept is called ornithopter. The term comes from the Greek words, ornito meaning bird and pteron meaning wing. This tool uses the working principle of bird and insect wings. Da Vinci thought that humans would be quite heavy if only supported by sturdy wings. Therefore, humans need more dynamic wings to fly longer and farther.

    4. Airships (1709)

    Author Francesco Lana de Terzi concluded that an object could be lighter than air if it used a large copper chamber to store gas. The space is used as a transport power. Air circulation must be maintained as well as possible so that objects can still fly. This work inspired the invention of the airship by Bartolomeo Gusmao, a Portuguese in 1709. This was the first human flight without wings.

    5. Hot Air Balloon (1783)

    Two brothers, Joseph and Jack Montgolfier, were able to fly an object in 1783 using the airship principle. They replaced the copper material with giant silk balls. There is a slit at the bottom of the ball for burning straw. Hot air is a source of energy. A box without a lid is attached to the ball. Passengers get into the box.

     

    6. Monoplanes (1790s)

    After the “fly lighter than air” experiment without wings, scientists started to think again with wings. Sir George Cayley, a British explorer, designed a simple airplane and its working principles in the late 18th century. He is believed to be the inventor of the modern airplane. Scientists William Samuel Henson and John Stringfellow worked together to perfect the use of wings. They created a single-winged steam-powered aviation engine in 1840.

    7. Zeppelins (1900)

    Ferdinand Adolf Heinrich August von Zeppelin was a German aviation expert who had created a large cigar-shaped hot air balloon that was easy to maneuver. Because of the airship principle, this plane called Zeppelin can fly more accurately. The aircraft is equipped with fins, engines and ladders. In 1900, Zeppelin successfully completed its first flight test. This wingless aircraft made its first commercial flight in 1909.

    8. Biplanes (1903)

    Two brothers from the United States, Orville and Wilbur Wright, built a two-bladed aircraft with a 12 hp engine. They call it a flyer. Wright invited the media and the general public for a test flight at Kitty Hawk Hill on December 17, 1903. With the pilot lying under the wing, the aircraft could fly at an altitude of 36 meters for 12 seconds. This success is seen as a new milestone in the development of winged and powered aircraft.

    9. Fixed Wing (1904)

    In 1904, a paper on the fixed wing concept of the modern aircraft was published in Germany. Professor Ludwig Prandtl’s work is seen as a new milestone in aerodynamic technology (the science of air friction in solid bodies). Fixed-wing is a concept that allows airplanes to fly without wings because they can balance air friction. This technology increases the lift of the aircraft.

    10. Triple (1908)

    Four years after Prandtl’s work was published, the Dreiflugler was introduced in France. The addition of wings was designed to improve performance and ease of handling, but the technology didn’t help. In fact, it makes it difficult for the pilot to maneuver.

    11. Fabre Hydravion (1910)

    For the first time in history, a single-winged aircraft landed on the surface of the water in 1910. The aircraft was named after its manufacturer, Fabre Hydravion. At the same time, Andre Billing introduced the first airplane simulation engine.

    12. Boeing 247 (1933)

    With the end of World War I, aircraft technology, especially aircraft with two or more people, developed rapidly. Boeing, the American aircraft manufacturer, introduced the first commercial airplane in 1933. Two pilots were required to fly and land this aircraft. This aircraft has twin engines and single wing.

    13. Heinkel HE178 (1937)

    The jet engine was invented by Englishman Frank Whittle in 1930, but until 1937 all modern airplanes still used propellers. The development of jet aircraft began in 1937. Two years later, an airplane equipped with a jet engine could fly. The use of jet engines has changed the shape of the wings. The wings are no longer rectangular. A slightly oblong edge, just below or just below the torso. This aircraft was known as the Heinkel HE 178 and was manufactured by the German aircraft company Heinkel.

    14. Supersonic (1947)

    This plane can fly faster than the speed of sound. The Bell X1 is the world’s first supersonic aircraft. Its first flight took place on October 14, 1947 by American pilot Chuck Yeager. The most famous supersonic aircraft is the Concorde, a joint venture between England and France.

    15. Commercial Jets (1949)

    After World War II, the British developed jet aircraft for commercial purposes and successfully developed this with the support of the British aircraft manufacturer De Havilland. Comet De Havilland first flew from London to South Africa in July 1949.

     

     

    16. Fokker 28 (1967)

    This aircraft has been the backbone of Indonesia’s regional aviation (short and medium haul flights that can accommodate 35,100 passengers) since 1971. The aircraft first flew on May 9, 1967 and quickly received worldwide attention. Several airlines around the world enjoy it, including Garuda Indonesia. Fokker 28 is believed to suit the characteristics of Indonesian runways which are not yet fully paved. This aircraft last flew in Indonesia in 2001.

    17. Boeing 747 (1970)

    Tracing the success of the Fokker aircraft company, Boeing did not want to be outdone. The world’s largest passenger aircraft was introduced in 1970. This 70 meter long and 59 meter wide aircraft is known as the jumbo jet. This aircraft is divided into two decks / floors. The 747, which can accommodate 400 passengers, remains the longest operating aircraft.

    As Boeing’s rival, Airbus does not want to lose. After building the largest B707 of its time in 1969, Boeing built the B747. It is even bigger and in 2005 it was the largest airplane in history. Later, Airbus built the giant A380. The standard version has 854 passenger seats, which will be 525 if it is designed for three classes, namely Executive, Business, Economy.

    Well, that’s an explanation of the inventor of the airplane and the history of its development. If Sinaumed’s is interested in the invention of other airplanes or other great inventions, then you can visit sinaumedia’s book collection at www.sinaumedia.com , such as the following book recommendations: #Friends Without Limits.

  • Introduction to Microeconomics: Definition, Theory, Purpose and Scope

    Microeconomic Theory – Is Sinaumed’s looking for references on microeconomic theory? That’s right, sometimes there are still many people who cannot distinguish between micro and macro economics. Even though this theoretical study will often be encountered by Sinaumed’s when studying economics. In order to get to know and understand more about the study of the theory, here is a specific explanation of microeconomic theory, starting from the definition, objectives, scope, problems, and examples of practice: 

    Definition of Microeconomics

    The definition of microeconomics is a study of economics specifically to study the behavior of consumers and a company and determine market prices and the quantity of inputs, goods and services to be traded. Microeconomics is also referred to as microeconomics which can directly influence decision making regarding the supply and demand for goods or services. 

    So, the definition of microeconomics is having the main goal for companies, namely analyzing the market and how the mechanism is to form relative prices for products or services. Microeconomic theory also studies demand and supply curves so that it helps understand the relationship between changes in wages, the right pattern of work, and understanding what cost variables are in the production of certain goods and services. 

     Aspects in analyzing microeconomics include: cost and benefit analysis, demand and supply theory, elasticity, market models, industry, production theory, and price theory. This aspect of analysis can play a role in helping to analyze market failures and theoretically describe conditions in a perfectly competitive market. To understand the broader meaning of microeconomics, the following is the definition of microeconomics based on the opinions of experts:

    1. According to Mary A Marchant and William M Snell

    Microeconomics is the study of individuals, households and a firm in making decisions within a larger economic process. 

    2. According to David A. Moss

    Microeconomics is a step of analysis of a decision made by an individual or group, starting from the factors to the form of consideration of costs and benefits. 

    3. According to Adam Smith

    Microeconomics is a rational consideration in making decisions made by business people. 

    4. According to NG Mankiw 

    Microeconomics is a study of science that discusses the role of individual economic actors in household and corporate matters to make decisions and how they interact in the market. 

    5. According to Sadono Sukirno in his book entitled Introduction to Microeconomics

    Microeconomics is a branch of economics that studies the behavior of consumers, companies and their inventors. This microeconomic theory serves to analyze how all forms of decisions and their behavior then affect the supply and demand for goods or services. The convenience of this can determine the price, supply, and demand for these goods or services. 

    6. According to David Ricardo

    Microeconomics is a condition where economic actors already have information about the ins and outs of a particular market. Thus, microeconomics is becoming a determining factor in the global economic market. 

    7. According to Marshal and Pigou

    Microeconomics is a form of high mobility in the market, so that economic actors can immediately adapt and adjust to changes in the market. 

    Microeconomics Goals

    In practice, microeconomics has the following main objectives in economics:

    1. Can perform analysis on the mechanisms that form the relative price of products, both in the form of goods and services and their applications from limited sources among the many alternative uses
    2. Can carry out market failure analysis, namely when the market fails to produce efficient results and explain various theoretical and strategic situations that require a market with a form of perfect competition

    Scope of Microeconomics

    1. Interaction in the Goods Market

    In this economic concept there must be interaction in the goods market. The market is a place that becomes a meeting between supply and demand transactions. This place then becomes a meeting between sellers and buyers to make real buying and selling transactions. 

    2. Seller and Consumer Behavior

    Sellers and consumers have a rational nature, where sellers want maximum profits, while consumers or buyers need optimal satisfaction, both in terms of quality and price of goods and services. The behavior of sellers and buyers can be analyzed using assumptions and it is necessary to pay attention to their economic activities which are carried out rationally and openly. 

    3. Factor Market Interaction of Production 

    The scope of microeconomics also involves market interaction with factors of production, where sellers have products to meet the needs of factors of production which they do by becoming buyers too. Meanwhile, buyers or consumers then need money to be able to continue to meet their needs and satisfaction. 

    4. Use Value Theory

    Use value in microeconomic theory is a way to study how an item can generate benefits or satisfaction for buyers or consumers who use the goods or services. 

    5. Market Structure Theory

    The theory of market structure is to explain the form of market classification based on a number of existing companies, characteristics, and types of products. This theory also discusses aspects of convenience for companies or producers to enter and exit a market scheme. A market structure that is generally non-competitive will occur if the company does not have the power and ability to influence the quantity of certain goods and their prices. 

    Meanwhile, if the company has the power or ability to influence the quantity of certain goods and prices, then the market structure becomes a competitive market structure.  

    6. Price Elasticity

    Price elasticity is a useful form of analysis for studying how the prices of certain goods or services are formed in a market. Price formation is influenced by the large number of requests in the market. 

    7. Industry 

    In microeconomic theory it also discusses how the flow of product circulation, both goods and services, can be formed in the market. This theory will then analyze production, producer, consumer, and distribution goods in terms of what makes it possible or rational to make the right economic decisions. 

    8. Input Markets

    The scope of the input market learns about how producers obtain production materials at the minimum possible cost and can produce goods or services that have a higher selling value. This means that in this scope it discusses the product process itself from the start which does not yet have as high a value as when it reaches the consumer or buyer. 

    Microeconomic Theory

    1. Price Theory

    In theory, prices are usually carried out in the price formation process, factors that can affect changes in demand and supply in the market. In addition, it also examines the relationship between demand and supply prices, as well as the shape of the market and the concept of elasticity of demand and supply.

    Price theory also discusses the balance that occurs between sellers and buyers, where both of them will carry out a bidding process until an agreement is reached at a certain price. 

    2. Production Theory

    Production theory is used as a basis for analyzing the levels and costs required for a particular production process.

    This analysis is then carried out on all matters related to the cost of producing goods and services in the market. The combination of factors that occur in microeconomics needs to be determined by producers in order to get maximum profits. 

    3. Distribution Theory

    Distribution theory aims to analyze labor wages, profits, and the amount of interest that must be paid to owners of capital. This theory becomes the activity of distributing products from producers to final consumers through distribution channels.

    Generally, this theory in microeconomics is used as a material for consideration of ordering time, product durability, and the distance between producers and consumers. Distribution is not only a matter of distributing a product from producers to consumers, but also forms of business promotion and packaging of products or forms of services. 

    4. Consumption Theory 

    This theory refers to consumer religious behavior in the context of fulfilling a need. Consumption theory will also discuss the occurrence of a market demand curve which is considered as a derivative of the individual customer demand curve. In addition, it also discusses the occurrence of a decrease in the curve that can use this theoretical approach. 

    Microeconomics Problems

    In microeconomics, economic actors can certainly face problems or obstacles that are economic in nature or related to the economy. The application of microeconomic theory is what can make the best choice from various alternative choices that suit the needs and conditions of the problem at hand. This can happen because there are activities of producing or consuming goods and services. 

    In this situation economic actors need to make decisions with the aim that available resources can be used efficiently. In addition, this choice can also create better welfare for economic actors and even more broadly. The following are economic problems that can occur in the scheme of microeconomic theory:  

    1. The Problem of Scarcity

    The problem of scarcity can occur because of an imbalance between people’s needs and the available factors of production. Factors of production that can be used to produce these goods are limited. That is why people find it difficult to obtain all the goods they want. In the end, people make the decision to choose other options so that they can still meet their needs. 

    2. Community Needs

    In microeconomics there must be problems related to community needs because basically community needs are a form of need and desire to consume goods or services. Generally, these are goods or services imported from abroad. Even so, it remains the most produced domestically. In microeconomic theory, it shows that people’s desire to obtain goods and services can be divided into two forms, as follows:

    • Desire followed by the ability to buy or called effective demand
    • A desire that is not followed by the ability to buy

    Example of Microeconomics

    In practice, microeconomics can be seen when producers and consumers carry out rational economic activities. The following is an example of the occurrence of microeconomics that applies in Indonesia:

    1. Request

    Demand is an example of microeconomics that shows the amount of goods and services demanded and the ability to buy for consumers at a certain price level and time. When there is demand when the price of goods or services is higher, the amount of demand for goods or services will decrease. Conversely, if the price of goods or services decreases, the higher the demand of buyers for goods or services. 

    2. Offer

    In addition to demand, there is supply which is also an example of microeconomics which shows the amount of goods or services available for sale or offered to consumers at a certain price level and period of time. Actors who make offers are producers, where the higher the price, the higher the quantity supplied. Conversely, if the price decreases, the quantity of goods or goods offered will also decrease.  

    3. Consumer and producer behavior

    The behavior of consumers and producers is also an example in microeconomics which shows the activities and processes carried out by economic actors in selecting, searching, buying, evaluating, and using goods or services for certain needs. 

    4. Price

    Price is of course part of microeconomics because it has a relationship with the value of goods. Price is an element of the marketing mix that shows a profit. The price function in microeconomic theory is a measuring tool that shows the value of a good or service. So when the price is determined it is influenced by economic conditions, demand and supply curves, as well as costs which can continue to change. 

    5. Inside Charge

    Internal costs are sacrifices that are used by companies or individuals to get more benefits from the various economic activities they carry out. These internal costs can affect price changes, for example high raw material costs cause an increase in the price of the product itself. These costs are also commonly referred to as costs because they are incurred for output according to the target to be achieved. 

    6. Market

    The market is the place where buying and selling activities occur, namely bringing them together to obtain a sale and purchase agreement. The market is then not only interpreted as a physical form, but can take a broader form, such as a marketplace or buying and selling activities online using the internet. 

    When talking about microeconomic theory, it cannot be separated from macroeconomics. Both have a fundamental difference, namely the scope that includes it. If microeconomics has an effort to find factors that contribute to decisions and their possible impact on the general market, then macroeconomics discusses the holistic study of the structure, performance, behavior, and processes of economic policy-making at the national level. 

    So, that’s an explanation of the introduction to microeconomics , starting from the definition, goals, scope, problems, and examples. Can Sinaumed’s understand it? Most people may still have difficulty distinguishing between micro and macro economics. The two economic theories both discuss the same economic objects, such as producers, consumers, prices, impacts, and so on.

  • Intervals Are: Properties, Types, How to Do Intervals

    The interval is – In Mathematics there is material that discusses the comparison of the sizes of two or more things, namely inequality. To carry out its function, an inequality requires several signs such as < (less than), < (less than or equal to), > (more than), > (more than or equal to).

    For example, you want to say that the value of x is “less than” a, then it can be written as “x<a”. Or you want to say that the value of x is “more than or equal to” a, if written it will be “x>a”.

    So, to understand inequality material, you have to know the properties of inequality, intervals, and ways to solve inequalities. In this article, we will focus on intervals by alluding a little to the nature of inequalities. Listen to the end, OK!

    Properties of Inequality

    Inequalities in mathematics have certain properties, including:

    Nature 1

    “The sign of the inequality will never change if you subtract or add it with other numbers or mathematical expressions.”

    For example, if there is an inequality that says a > b then this means:

    a + c > b + c and a – c > b – c

    But if the inequality is a < b, then it means:

    a + c < b + c and a – c < b – c To make it more understandable, let’s try to enter a real example like this: x + 6 > 8 -> x + 6 – 6 > 8 – 6 -> x > 2

    Nature 2

    “The sign of the inequality also won’t change if you divide or multiply it by a positive number.”

    For example, there is an inequality which states that a > b and c > 0, it means:

    ac > bc and a/c > b/c

    For example, an inequality 4x > 12 if each side is divided by 4 (positive) then the result will be like this:

    4x/4 ≥ 12/ 4 -> x ≥ 3

    Nature 3

    “The sign of the inequality is reversed when divided or multiplied by a negative number.”

    If the inequality a > b and c < 0, it means ac < bc and a/c < b/c. Be careful, quite a few people forget that they have to flip signs after multiplying or dividing an inequality. For example like this: -3x > 9 can only be solved by dividing the right and left sides by the number -3 or you can also multiply each side by the number -⅓. Why so? Yes because if the inequality is multiplied by a negative number, then the sign will be reversed.

    If written in full it would be like this: -3x > 9 -> 3x/-3 < 9/3 -> x < -3. Property 4 “If the inequality is raised to a power, then the sign can be reversed or not, depending on the odd or even rank.” For example, if there is an inequality a > b > 0, this means:

    a2 > b2 > 0
    a3 > b3 > 0
    a4 ​​> b4 > 0
    a5 > b5 > 0
    and so on. Generally an > n if a is a natural number

    If a < b < 0, then it becomes: a2 > b2 > 0
    a3 < b3 < 0 a4 ​​> b4 > 0
    a5 < b5 < 0 And so on. Generally, an > bn if n is even and an < bn if n is odd.

    Definition of Intervals

    When studying inequalities you will definitely find a line of real numbers in it. This is a one-to-one combination between the points in the horizontal straight line and the numbers in the real set.

    Simply put, the number line is a ruler for placing each real number in order based on its value. Like the example below:

    In the picture you can see that you can know or estimate the position of each number on a straight line. For example the integers (0, 2, and 4) occupy their respective places where 0 is to the left of 2 and 2 to the left of 4.

    Or the rational number (4/5) whose position is on the left–almost close to–1 because the value of 4/5 is equal to 0.8. Likewise with the irrational number (root 2) which is to the left of the number 2 because its value is 1.4.

    Every real number has a position on the number line and you can determine the position of a number by looking at the positions of other numbers that are close in value.

    Now, in this number line there is something called an interval or a set of real numbers that is limited by one or two number boundaries. For example, like 2 < x < 5. This set of real numbers can be understood as the set of numbers whose value is greater than 2 but less than 5.

    This means that there are numbers 3, 4, 8/3, 10, -5, and ½ which are part of the set. The numbers 3, 4, and 8/3 are numbers that enter the set and are called interior points. While the numbers 10, -5, ½ are outside the set and are called exterior points.

    From this explanation it can be concluded that the interval is a set that is part of the real number line which has at least 2 different real numbers and all the real numbers that are in between.

    Types of Intervals

    Generally the interval is divided into several types, namely:

    1. Open Intervals

    This is an interval that does not include the extreme points to which it is included but includes all values ​​that fall between them. Open intervals are represented by:

    a < x < b or (a;b).

    For example 2 < x < 6 can be written (2,6) which means the set of all real numbers whose values ​​are greater than 2 and less than 6. This means that 2 and 6 are interval boundaries that are outside the interval itself (exterior point). If depicted on a number line it will be like this:

    The sign in numbers 2 and 6 is a circle without content because they do not enter into the set of real numbers in that interval.

    2. Closed intervals

    This is an interval type that includes the extremes of the interval as well as all values ​​in between. Closed intervals are represented by: a ≤ x ≤ b or [a; b].

    For example 0 < x < 72 can be written as [0, 72] which means the set of real numbers with values ​​greater than or equal to 0 and less than or equal to 72.

    The difference between closed intervals and open intervals lies in the boundary of the interval that enters the interior point. If depicted on a number line it would be like this:

    The interval boundaries 0 and 72 are circles that have this because these boundaries enter into the subset of the set or interior points.

    3. Semi Open Intervals

    The third type is an interval that only includes one of the extreme values ​​between the two, so that the other extreme values ​​are excluded. Including right end and left end, can be included or can be excluded. Semi-open intervals are represented by a ≤ x < b or a < x ≤ b

    For example, you have a semi-open interval (1, 5], so you will have a set of numbers whose value is greater than 1 and less than or equal to 5, but 1 is not included, yes. If you describe it more or less like this:

    4. Infinite intervals

    Infinite intervals are often referred to as infinite intervals. This is a type of interval that has an infinite value at either or both ends where the infinite end will be the open end. Meanwhile, if both ends have infinity then it will become a real line.

    Infinite intervals are represented by a ≤ x or x ≤ a, which will be [a, ∞) or (-∞, a). Or it can also be written like this: [a; ∞).

    For example you have an infinite interval [1; ∞), then you will have a set of numbers whose value is greater than or equal to 1 and so on until infinity. If described more or less like this:

    5. Limited Intervals

    The last type, namely bounded intervals, has two other categories, namely right bounded intervals and left bounded intervals. So, right and left here mean the maximum and minimum of each number.

    For example, a right-open interval means no maximum and a left-open interval has no minimum.

    How to Write Intervals

    The limits that an interval has are usually indicated by “brackets”. For semi-open intervals and open intervals, square brackets are used. For example like [a ; b] for open intervals and [a ; b and a ; b] for semi-open intervals.

    When writing intervals, the intervals are always written in ascending order and never in descending order. If the parentheses are closed, any boundary points are included while if the parentheses are open, the endpoints are omitted.

    For example, the set of integers { 0 ; 1 ; 2 ; 3 ; 4 ; 5 ; 6 ; 7 ; 8 ; 9}. This set contains all integers from 0 to 9 inclusively.

    However, not all sets are written using integers like that, there are also abstract sets which are written using letters and these are usually found in algebra materials.

    Some letters that are often used in abstract sets are:

    You’ll also find math marks tasked with indicating the two sets of real numbers and the interactions they have. At first, these signs can seem very complicated and abstract, but with enough practice, they can seem simple and easier to work with.

    Apart from showing two sets of real numbers, these mathematical signs can also be used to visualize mathematical data which is usually used when you want to see the interactions that exist in an interval.

    Here are the most frequently used signs:

    Intervals Example

    To make it easier for you to understand the concept of intervals, here are examples of intervals, classifications, and numbers entered.

    Ways to Complete Intervals

    You can complete an interval by reading and planning it and then seeing what will be included and what will not be included. But remember, pay attention to the direction of the symbols “> (more than)” and “< (less than)” because they determine the end point of an interval. For example like this:

    Closed Intervals

    A closed interval is an interval that has an endpoint. Thus you can use two different ways when there are two real numbers that interact with x.

    [a ; b] = a ≤ x ≤ b [a ; b] = a ≤ x < b

    ]a ; b] = a < x ≤ b

    ]a ; b[= a < x < b If the brackets are closed, it means that x is greater than or equal to b.

    Meanwhile, if the brackets are opened, it means that x is more than and less than b. Open Interval Open interval is the interval in which a and b are two different numbers.

    [a ; ∞[= x ≥ a ]a ; ∞[= x > a

    ]- ∞ ; b] = x ≤ b

    ]- ∞ ; b[= x < b

    Well, this open interval doesn’t include the endpoints so you won’t know where the endpoints are.

    Types of Interaction Between Intervals

    The slice that exists between the interval [a ; b] with [c ; d] is a set of real numbers x located at [a ; b] and [c ; d]. This condition is denoted by the symbol ∩.

    Try to imagine that a, b, c, and d are integers with intersection I like this:

  • Interrogative Sentences: Definition, Characteristics, Types and Example Sentences

    Interrogative sentences are – A sentence is the smallest unit of spoken or written language that expresses a complete thought. In spoken form, sentences are pronounced in a loud ascending and descending pitch, interrupted by pauses, and ending with a final intonation followed by silence which prevents the mixing or assimilation of sounds or other phonological processes.

    In written form, Latin sentences begin with a capital letter and end with a period (.), a question mark (?), or an exclamation point (!); At the same time, it also includes various punctuation marks such as commas (, ), colons (:), hyphens (-), and spaces. Periods, question marks, and exclamation points correspond to ending sentiments, while other punctuation marks correspond to pauses. Spaces after periods, question marks, and exclamation points represent silence.

    Sinaumed’s friends , If you watch talk shows on television or anywhere else, you will definitely find a scene where the host will gather information from the source by asking several questions.

    Without realizing it, the moderator will definitely use interrogative sentences when communicating with speakers or resource persons. This application is based on how the question sentence works to understand it.

    In Indonesian there are several types of sentences. When viewed based on the syntactic category, sentences are grouped into four types, namely declarative sentences, imperative sentences, exclamative sentences, and imperative sentences.

    From the KBBI V perspective, interrogative sentences are defined as the types of sentences used to express or contain questions. Interrogative sentences are certainly not foreign words in everyday life. Of course this expression is often used by the community, both in written and oral form.

    Sinaumed’s friends , on this occasion, we will review what an interrogative sentence is, starting from its definition, characteristics, types and examples. Let’s see the review!

    What are Interrogative Sentences?

    Interrogative sentences are interrogative sentences whose components consist of 5W + 1H elements (what, when, who, why, where, and how). Generally, interrogative sentences function as asking for answers about something, from a listener (opposite) or reader.

    According to the Big Indonesian Dictionary, interrogative sentences mean showing or containing questions. So it can be interpreted that what is meant by interrogative sentences is a type of sentence that states a question, another name for interrogative sentences is interrogative sentences. The purpose of this sentence is to ask for information about something.

    Interrogative sentences have different intonation patterns from declarative sentences. According to Ramlan (2005, 28), the intonation pattern of news sentences ends in a low tone, while the intonation pattern of interrogative sentences ends in an ascending tone.

    According to Awaludin in his e-book development of Indonesian language syntax textbooks, interrogative sentences are sentences that are presented to elicit responses in the form of answers. The end of a question sentence is a question mark (?).

    According to Yunus (2009:133) According to its meaning, interrogative sentences or interrogative sentences are usually used to ask something or someone. If we want to know the answer to something, we ask for it and the sentences used are interrogative sentences.

    According to Markhamah (2011: 73), interrogative sentences or interrogative sentences are sentences whose contents ask something or someone to the listener or reader. These sentences are often called interrogative sentences.

    Quotations from the book Pragmatics (2005:78) R. Kunjana Rahardi, interrogative sentences are sentences that are formed or uttered with the aim of asking something to the interlocutor. In other words, when the speaker wants to know the answer to something, a situation, the speaker uses interrogative sentences to the interlocutor.

    In addition, R. Kunjana Rahardi also stated on page 79 of the same book that answers “yes”, “no”, “already”, “not yet” and “no” are also called general questions. While those that require answers in the form of information are called sub-questions.

    Lindawati in a journal entitled Indonesian Interrogative Sentences : A Study of Forms and Functions (2016) states that interrogative sentences can be identified not only from their sentence structure, but also from the speaker’s attitude when asking questions.

    Maryanto (2014: 43) In the book Self-Expression Indonesian and Academic Class X SMA/MAK (2014:43) Interrogative sentences mentioned in Maryanto’s work can be further divided into two types, namely interrogative sentences that require “yes” or “no”. , and interrogative sentences that require answers in the form of information.

    Interrogative sentences can be said to be sentences whose contents expect a reaction or answer. The reactions or answers varied and could be in the form of acknowledgments, justifications, explanations or opinions from the audience. These sentences are usually marked with question words like ” what”, “who”, “when”, “how” and “how much”.

    Characteristics of Interrogative Sentences

    • Interrogative sentences always end with a question mark (?)
    • Interrogative sentences always contain question words or (5W+1H), like what, who, when, where, why, and how
    • In spoken language, interrogative sentences have a rising intonation pattern
    • Interrogative sentences can be used to ask for a “yes” or “no” answer or ask for information about something from the other person or reader
    • The particle kah- which is added to the questioner’s particle means to emphasize the question. For example: Have you taken a shower?

    Types of Interrogative Sentences

    According to Chaer (1988:397) there are several types of interrogative sentences, namely:

    1. Interrogative Sentences Asking for Recognition: yes – no , or yes – no.

    Interrogative sentences asking for a yes-no or yes-no answer can form:

    1. Provide question intonation in the clause; In intonation written language, this question tone is replaced or denoted by a question mark.

    Example:

    • Palestine attacked again by Israel?
    • They cooperate with officials?

    Sentence answers to questions like that can be in short form, but can also be in full form. For example, the answer to the question sentence above.
    Example:

    • Yes or yes, Israel is attacking Palestine again
    • No, they will not cooperate with officials or not.
    1. Place the question word what or whether before the sentence.

    Example:

    • Did Israel attack Beirut again?
    • Do they work with people?

    The answer is the same as above.

    Give a question particle to the part or element of the sentence you want to ask. In this case, the interrogative sentence gets the particle kah, which indicates the particle kah is usually placed at the beginning of the sentence.

    • Do they work with officials?
    • Is the bathroom dark?

    The answer sentence is also constructed in the same way as the answer sentence of the question sentence above.

    2. Interrogative Sentences Asking for Information Regarding One of the Sentence Elements.

    Question sentences that require an answer in the form of information about a sentence element are formed from the question words who, what, where, how much and when. Usually accompanied by a question particle. This interrogative sentence is placed in the part of the sentence in question. Usually, the sentence order is changed by placing the question word at the beginning of the sentence.

    1. To ask about someone or several people, the question word is used and is usually placed at the beginning of the sentence. If the question about who is at the beginning of the sentence, it can be given or attached to the particle – kah; but if it is at the end of a sentence, it cannot be completed with the -kah particle.

    Example:

    • Who’s that guy sitting over there?

    Answer:

    – Mr. Mayor or – The person sitting there is Mr. Mayor

    • To whom did you give the letter? Answer:

    – For the teacher. or – I give the letter to the teacher

    1. To ask something that is not a person or personification, use the question word what is usually placed at the beginning of a sentence. If the question word is at the beginning of the sentence, it can be given or attached to the -kah particle; but if it is at the end of a sentence, it cannot be completed with the -kah particle.

    Example:

    • What’s in the cupboard?

    Answers: – Books or – The contents of this cupboard are books

    • What is this cake made of?

    Answer: Flour and sugar or – Cassava mixed with sweet potato and coconut

    1. Asking where the object is, what question words are used.

    When a question word is at the beginning of a sentence, whether or not it can be a particle (but usually isn’t); If at the end of a sentence, can’t it be given a particle?

    Example:

    • Where’s the book?

    Answer:

    – It’s in my pocket… or – I put it back in the library

    • Which child are you?

    Answer:

    – That’s the one in the red shirt or – Oh, it’s not here anymore.

    1. If you want to ask about the amount or amount, then you have to use the question word which is usually found at the beginning of the sentence. If you want to get the question particle, you must put the particle after the auxiliary number or object name.

    Example:

    • How much does it cost?

    Answer:
    Rp. 3000.00 or – Not expensive, only IDR 3000.00

    • How tall is the national monument?

    Answer:

    – Ten sheets or – I need ten sheets

    1. To ask when, you have to use the question word when or when, which is usually placed at the beginning of the sentence. In this case it can also be accompanied by a particle kah; but if the question word is at the end of the sentence, the particle doesn’t need to be used.

    Example:

    • When will your brother come?

    Answer:- this afternoon. or – my brother I will come in the afternoon

    • When did East Timor join our country?

    Answer: – 1976 or – East Timor was annexed by our country in 1976.

    If you want to ask when an event started, you should use the question word since when; and to ask for a time limit for holding an event, you must use the question word until when.

    3. Interrogative Sentences Asking Reasons

    Interrogative sentences asking for answers in the form of reasons are usually formed with the question word why or why is placed at the beginning of the sentence and can also be equipped with question particles. If the question word why or why is at the end of the sentence, the question particle cannot be used.

    Example:

    Why are you often late?
    Answer:
    – because my house is far away. or – because it is difficult to find a vehicle

    (43) Why is the child only crying?
    Answer:

    – he lives with his mother. or – stomach hurts.

    4. Interrogative Sentences Asking for Other People’s Opinions or Thoughts.

    Interrogative sentences ask for opinions or thoughts of others. Interrogative sentences that ask for events or opinions are usually formed with question words as in sentences and can also be equipped with interrogative particles. But when the question word appears at the end of a sentence, the question particle should not be used.

    Example:

    • How do you lift a rock this big? J

    Answer:
    – with a pulley machine or pulled together – amai

    • He once tricked us, if now he’s tricking us again, how about that?

    Answer:

    – We will report to the authorities or – we must no longer trust him

    Functions of Interrogative Sentences

    Like other sentences, interrogative sentences (question sentences) have functions and uses in Indonesian. So what are these functions, as follows:

    • First, interrogative sentences are used to ask questions (Ramlan, 2005).
    • Second, interrogative sentences are also used to ask for answers in the form of clarification, information or confirmation.
    • Third, interrogative sentences serve a specific purpose that is not meant to ask for an answer. This goal is called a hidden question. In addition, interrogative sentences in rhetorical interrogative sentences function to ask questions without answers.

    4 Differences between Imperative, Declarative and Interrogative Sentences

    The difference from imperative, declarative and interrogative sentences, namely:

    1. Imperative Sentences

    Imperative sentences or imperative sentences are sentences whose function is to instruct others to follow the orders we tell them. Apart from declarative sentences, interrogative sentences and exclamations, these sentences are also classified into types of sentences because of their function. The characteristics associated with this sentence are:

    • There are examples of using an exclamation point (!) at the end of a sentence.
    • It is often preceded by the words no or please.
    • Sometimes it contains the particle -lah or -kan in a word. The goal is to control other people.
    • Sometimes the intonation goes up and sometimes it goes down.
    • What I need is a response from the other person subject to the statement, when the response follows the intent conveyed to the other by the command statement.

    2. Declarative Sentences

    Declarative sentences or declarative sentences are sentences whose function is to express something to someone without waiting for an answer from the other. Like imperative clauses, declarative clauses have several characteristics, these characteristics include:

    • Use a period (.) at the end of a sentence.
    • Sentence intonation is usually flat or neutral.
    • It serves to convey something to others, be it news or important information.
    • No response or reaction is required from the person to whom this statement is made.

    3. Interrogative Sentences

    Interrogative sentences or interrogative sentences are sentences whose function is to ask something from another person, be it news or information. In contrast to declarative sentences that do not expect a response from other people, declarative sentences actually require responses from other people who are subject to the sentence. However, there are also types of interrogative sentences that do not require an answer from the other person, namely rhetorical sentences.

    From the discussion above, we can conclude that the difference between imperative, declarative, and interrogative sentences is:

    Sentence Functions

    Imperative sentences are used to regulate other people, while declarative sentences provide information or news to other people. Interrogative sentences are sentences whose function is to ask someone else to do something. The use of punctuation in it Imperative sentences use an exclamation point (!) at the end of the sentence, while declarative sentences use a period (.) at the end of the sentence. On the other hand, interrogative sentences use a question mark (?) at the end of the sentence.

    Use of Special Words or Particles in It

    The words don’t/please are often used in imperative sentences. Otherwise, the particle -lah/-kan is often added to prepositions. At the same time, interrogative words are often used in interrogative sentences. Otherwise, the particle -kah is often added to the preposition in this sentence. On the other hand, a declarative sentence does not use a specific word or particle in it.

    Feedback from Others on the Sentence

    Imperative sentences really need a response from others in the form of following orders. Meanwhile, interrogative sentences really need a response from another person who is the subject of the sentence, in the form of an answer or explanation. On the other hand, declarative sentences do not require any reaction from the other person who is the subject of the sentence, whether it’s someone else’s answer or action.

    Closing

    Sinaumed’s friends, this is an article about the meaning, characteristics, types and examples of interrogative sentences. With this article, it is hoped that you will be able to find out about interrogative sentences.

  • Interrogation Is: Definition, Purpose, and Explanation of Interrogative Sentences

    Interrogation is a series that is quite important in the investigative process carried out by investigators. The purpose of interrogation is to obtain information about a crime. Not infrequently, there is also news about violence committed by investigators during the interrogation process.

    This kind of interrogation is included in coercive communication which is a communication technique. The diversity of the characters of each individual makes investigators have to use various types of communication techniques in interrogating, be it coercive, persuasive, informative communication, as well as human relations.

    Interviews and interrogations are important investigative techniques or tools. Where the interview itself is non-accusatory. In this non-accusatory way, we can develop a respectful relationship with the people they interview.

    But on the other hand, the purpose of interrogation is to find out what actually happened, who was involved in it, and so on.

    Definition of Interrogation

    Interrogation is an examination of a person through verbal questions, generally carried out by the police to help facilitate the examination process.

    Interrogation is a legal method of gathering evidence as well as tactical communication to obtain statements that actually happened. In this context, the examination of suspects, namely affected persons and witnesses by criminal prosecution authorities in criminal proceedings or administrative violations as part of cases being resolved will be urgently needed.

    This interrogation is not a normal legal action, but as a process of communication which is a special social action. Therefore, interrogation is not only aimed at exchanging information, but is also useful for demonstrating the power and influence of the investigative agency.

    In the process of interrogation, of course we must know the type of sentence that corresponds to the information we want to get. Therefore, we need to understand interrogative sentences and their various types so that the interrogation process can produce results that are in accordance with the information we want to know. The following is an explanation.

    Interrogative Sentences 

    In Indonesian, a sentence can be interpreted as a collection of words that are arranged in an orderly manner based on certain formation rules. The formation of sentences in Indonesian varies, depending on the type of sentence formed. One type of sentence formation is grouping based on its communicative value. In this grouping process, sentences can be divided into five types, one of which is interrogative sentences.

    This interrogative sentence is a sentence made to provoke a response from the other person in the form of an answer. That means, someone intends to know the answer to the question asked.

    Interrogative sentences can also be called interrogative sentences. Formally, this sentence is marked by the presence of a question word. For example, what, who, when, why, how, and so on. In writing, this sentence will end with a question mark.

    According to the Big Indonesian Dictionary or KBBI, this interrogative sentence has the meaning of showing or containing a question. So, we can conclude that what is meant by an interrogative sentence is a type of sentence that states a question. It should be understood that this interrogative sentence has a different notation pattern from the news sentence.

    Meanwhile, according to Ramlan (2005, 28), the intonation pattern of news sentences will end in a low tone, while the intonation pattern of this interrogative sentence will end in a high tone.

    According to Awaludin in the e-book development of Indonesian syntax textbooks, interrogative sentences are sentences that are presented to elicit responses in the form of answers. The end of this interrogative sentence is usually a question mark.

    Then according to Yunus (2009:133), this interrogation sentence is usually used to ask something or someone. If we want to know the answer to something, then we need to ask for it and the sentences used are interrogative sentences.

    Forms of Interrogative Sentences

    In practice, these interrogative sentences are divided into two types, the following is a full explanation:

    1. Total Interrogative Sentences

    This total interrogative sentence is useful for asking all the information in the question. Generally, this sentence is used to ask for approval or disapproval from the other person. This total interrogative sentence functions to demand two possible responses, namely yes or no responses.

    2. Partial Interrogative Sentences

    Partial interrogative sentences are interrogative sentences that aim to ask some information from the questions submitted. Where this one sentence is generally conveyed using question words whose types and types are determined by the nature of the object intended in the sentence. For example, sentences used to ask about “personified” things, then the words used are “who” or “from whom”, “for whom”, “when” which is to ask for the time, and other question words used based on the context of the sentence .

    Types of Interrogative Sentences

    According to Chaer (1988:397), there are several types of interrogative sentences, including:

    1. Interrogative Sentences Asking for Confession: Yes – No, or Yes – No

    Interrogative sentences asking for yes or no and yes or no answers can form the following:

    1. Give intonation to clause questions, where in written language intonation, the question tone will be replaced or denoted by a question mark.

    For example:

    • You attack the victim with a weapon?
    • You cooperate with other criminals?

    Answer sentences of this kind of interrogative sentences can be short, but can also be complete. For example, the answer to the question sentence above is:

    • Yes or no, I attack the victim with a gun.
    • Yes or No, I cooperate with other criminals.
    1. Place the interrogative sentence what or whether before the sentence

    For example:

    • Did you attack the victim with a weapon?
    • Are you working with other criminals?

    The answer is the same as the answer described above.

    1. Give the particle whether in interrogative sentences

    In this case, the interrogative sentence is added with the particle kah, which indicates that the particle kah will usually be placed at the beginning of the sentence.

    For example:

    • Cooperate with other criminals?
    • Did the victim who was attacked die?

    The answer sentence will also be constructed in a similar way to the answer sentence from the previous question.

    2. Interrogative Sentences Asking for Information About One of the Sentence Elements

    Question sentences that require an answer in the form of information about a sentence element are formed from the question words who, what, where, when, and how much. Generally, the sentence will be accompanied by the particle kah. The question sentence will be placed in the questioned part of the sentence. Usually, the order of the sentences is changed by placing the question word at the beginning of the sentence:

    1. To ask about someone or several people use interrogative sentences and are generally placed at the beginning of the sentence. If the question about who is at the beginning of the sentence can be given or attached to the -kah particle, but if it is at the end of the sentence, it cannot be equipped with -kah particle.

    For example:

    – Who is that man sitting over there?

    Answer: Mr. Mayor or – The person sitting there is Mr. Mayor

    – Who did you give the letter to? Answer:

    Answer: For the teacher. or – I give the letter to the teacher

    1. To ask something that is not a person or person, use the question word what, which is usually placed at the beginning of a sentence. If the question word is at the beginning of the sentence, then it can be given or attached to the -kah particle, but if the word is at the end of the sentence, then it cannot be equipped with -kah particle.

    For example:

    – What’s in the cupboard?

    Answer: Books or The contents of my cupboard are books

    – What is this cake made of?

    Answer: Flour and sugar or – Cassava mixed with sweet potato and coconut

    1. To ask where the object is, what question word should be used. When the question word is at the beginning of the sentence, “whether” can be in the form of a particle or not, but if it is at the end of the sentence, then “whether” cannot be given a particle “?”

    For example:

    – Where is the book?

    Answer: It’s in my pocket… or – I returned it to the library

    – Which of your children?

    Answer: That’s the one wearing the red shirt or – Oh, it’s not here anymore.

    1. If you want to ask about the amount or amount, then you have to use the question word which is generally at the beginning of the sentence. If you want to get a question particle, you have to put the particle after the auxiliary number or the name of the object.

    Example:

    – How much does it cost?

    Answer: Rp. 3,000.00 or Not too expensive, only Rp. 3,000.00

    – How tall is the national monument?

    Answer: 10 sheets or I only need 10 sheets

    1. To ask the time, you have to use the question word when or if, which is usually at the beginning of the sentence. In this case, it can also be accompanied by the particle -kah, but if the question word is at the end of the sentence, then the particle doesn’t need to be used.

    Example:

    – When will your brother come?

    Answer:- this afternoon or my brother will come this afternoon

    – When did East Timor join our country?

    Answer: 1976 or East Timor was annexed by the Indonesian state in 1976.

    If you want to ask when an event will start, you have to use the question word since when and to ask for a time limit related to holding an event, you have to use the question word until when.

    3. Interrogative Sentences Asking Reasons

    Interrogative sentences to ask for answers in the form of reasons are generally formed with the question words “why” or “why” which are usually placed at the beginning of the sentence and can be supplemented with question particles. If the question word “why” or “why” is at the end of the sentence, the question particle cannot be used.

    For example:

    – Why are you often late?

    Answer: because my house is far away. or – because it is difficult to find a vehicle

    – Why is the child only crying?

    Answer: he lives with his mother. or – stomach hurts.

    4. Interrogative Sentences Asking for an Opinion and Thoughts from Others

    Interrogative sentences that ask for opinions or thoughts from other people are interrogative sentences that usually ask for events or opinions that are formed with question words such as those in sentences and can be equipped with interrogative particles. But when the question word is at the end of the sentence, the question particle cannot be used.

    For example:

    – How do you lift a rock this big? J

    Answer: with a pulley machine or pulled together – amai

    – He once deceived us, if now he deceives us again, how?

    Answer: We will report to the authorities or we can no longer trust them anymore

    Functions of Interrogative Sentences

    As with other types of sentences, these interrogative sentences have functions and uses in Indonesian. The following are some of the functions of interrogative sentences, including:

    1. Interrogative sentences are usually used to ask a question.
    2. This interrogative sentence is also usually used to ask for answers in the form of information, clarification, and confirmation.
    3. Question sentences usually serve a specific purpose that is not intended to ask for an answer. This goal is called a hidden question. In addition, the interrogative sentence in a rhetorical interrogative sentence usually functions to ask a question without an answer.

    Difference between Imperative, Declarative and Interrogative Sentences

    The following are some of the differences between imperative, declarative, and also interrogative sentences, including:

    1. Imperative Sentences

    Imperative sentences or what are called imperative sentences are sentences that function to order others to follow the orders we give them. Apart from interrogative sentences, declarative sentences, and also exclamations, this one sentence is also categorized into types of sentences because of its function. The characteristics of imperative sentences include:

    • There are examples of using exclamation marks at the end of sentences.
    • This sentence is often preceded by the word no or please.
    • Sometimes it contains the particle -lah or -kah in a word. The goal is to control other people.
    • The intonation rises and falls.
    • e. All that is needed is a response from another person who submits to the statement, when the response follows the intent conveyed to the other person through the commanding statement.

    2. Declarative Sentences

    Declarative sentences or so-called declarative sentences are sentences that function to express something to someone without waiting for an answer from other people. Like the imperative clause, this declarative clause has several characteristics, including:

    • Use periods at the end of sentences.
    • Intonation in sentences is generally flat or neutral.
    • Serves to convey something to someone, be it news or important information.
    • No response or reaction is required from the person to whom this statement is made.

    3. Interrogative Sentences

    Interrogative sentences or what are called interrogative sentences are sentences that function to ask other people for something, be it information or news. Unlike the case with declarative sentences which do not wait for a response from other people, interrogative sentences instead wait for responses from other people who are subject to the sentence. However, there are types of interrogative sentences that do not require an answer from the other person, namely rhetorical sentences.

    From the explanation above, it can be said that interrogation is an examination of someone through verbal questions. This is an explanation of what interrogation is and some explanations about interrogative sentences that can be used in the interrogation process.

    For Sinaumed’s who want to know more deeply about what interrogation is, you can read related books by visiting sinaumedia.com .

    To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

    Author: Umm

    Reference:

    • https://www.serasanciptaabadi.com/teknik-introgasi-2/
    • https://sinaumedia.com/literasi/kalimat-interrogative-ada/
    • https://id.wikipedia.org/wiki/Interrogation

  • Interpersonal Communication : Interpersonal Communication

    Intrapersonal communication leads to a communication within a person. This is a process of thinking, evaluating, feeling, and interpreting an event in one’s mind.

    Intrapersonal communication is the purest and most basic form of human communication. At every moment in life, humans receive messages through their eyes, skin, ears, nose or other sense organs.

    Before starting to answer or respond to the message, humans carry out intrapersonal communication to themselves based on perceptions and previous experiences.

    Different people may respond to a single message differently because of these differences in their perceptions and experiences.

    The discussion concluded that this intrapersonal communication occurs when someone has communicated with himself. It is a basic form of communication. When someone gets a message or observes something, the response depends on intrapersonal communication.

    Definition of Interpersonal Communication

    Interpersonal communication will occur when both individuals are involved in the communication process. In a broader sense,

    Interpersonal communication is an exchange of ideas, information, opinions and feelings related to personal, social, organizational, family, national and international events between two people who are in the same location.

    Communicating with interpersonal becomes a basic need for human survival. People engage in interpersonal communication not only at home or in the office but also when they are walking, working, traveling, reading newspapers, shopping, or watching games and movies.

    In general, interpersonal communication will take place with face-to-face conversations. However, this can be a telephone dialogue if the individual connects emotionally.

    We can conclude that in these two individuals exchanging feelings, views, and attitudes about any issue, this is also said to be interpersonal communication.

    You can learn about
    Ngalimun’s Interpersonal Communication

    Understanding Interpersonal Communication According to Experts 

    Quoting from the journal “Interpersonal Communication” written by Drs. Syahrul Abidin, MA, there are several meanings of understanding interpersonal communication according to experts, namely:

    1. Joe Ayres

    According to him, there is no the same meaning among experts when defining interpersonal communication. Some people mark that this communication as a level of the process of ongoing communication between humans.

    1. Dean Barnlund

    Dean Barnlund said that interpersonal communication is a communication process that involves connecting other people. Interpersonal communication will occur during interactions that focus on verbal and nonverbal cues and reciprocate each other. If there is no process of verbal or nonverbal exchange, then this cannot be said to be an interpersonal communication process.

    1. Gerald Miller

    Gerald Miller separates interpersonal communication and not it as interpersonal communication. The difference lies in sociology (group membership) or cultural. This interpersonal communication is based on perceptions and reactions to the unique psychological characteristics of individuals.

    1. John Stewart and Gary D’Angelo

    He said that interpersonal communication focuses on a quality of communication that is established from each individual. By having a relationship with one another, it has feelings, is unique, useful, and self-reflective. In communication a person can act and choose his role as a communicator as well as a communicator.

    1. Joseph DeVito

    Joseph DeVito defines interpersonal communication as the process of sending and receiving messages to two people or small groups of people that provide a feedback effect.

    1. Barnlund Johannessen

    Barnlund Johannessen describes interpersonal communication when people meet face to face, interact, and focus on verbal and nonverbal exchanges.

    1. Effendi

    According to Effendi, interpersonal communication is communication that can occur between two people and have a conversation. In this contact can be face to face or by telephone so that it can lead to reciprocity.

    The Difference Between Intrapersonal And Interpersonal Communication

    Intrapersonal and interpersonal are two basic forms of human communication. In both types of communication it spreads to all aspects of human life. From the cradle to the grave, humans will continue to carry out intrapersonal communication.

    Below are the main differences between these two types of communication:

    Means

    Intrapersonal communication can occur when a person communicates with himself. As well as interpersonal communication is an exchange of information, ideas, opinions, even feelings between two people.

    Natural

    In Intrapersonal Communication this can occur in the form of sensing, thinking and even self-evaluation. This interpersonal communication will occur in the form of exchange and exchange of information and ideas between people.

    People Involved

    In an intrapersonal communication only the communicator is involved in intrapersonal communication. And in this Interpersonal communication involves two people in communication.

    Media Use

    This intrapersonal communication is a type of communication that does not require any media. And in interpersonal communication, people need to use verbal and nonverbal media to be able to communicate.

    Information flow

    Intrapersonal communication on the exchange of information does not go beyond one’s mind. As well as in interpersonal communication here, information passes from one mind to another.

    Visibility

    Intrapersonal communication would be invisible in nature. And in interpersonal communication itself is visible.

    You can learn about Interpersonal Communication: Human Behavior in Educational Organizations
    by Edi Harapan & Syarwani Ahmad, Dr. Edi Harapan, M,Pd

     

    Interpersonal and Intrapersonal Communication Theory

    After knowing the differences between these two forms of communication according to experts, the following are interpersonal and intrapersonal communication theories that we need to know, namely:

    Constructivism

    The theory of constructivism will be introduced by Jesse Delia. This theory states the factors behind individuals who communicate according to their wishes and how there can be far more successful communicators than other messengers.

    Symbolic Interactionism

    The theory of interaction symbolism is a part of the sociological perspective that is influenced by many theorists, such as George Herbert Mead and Herbert Blumer. This theory provides an overview related to the use of language as a communication tool in forming meaning in individuals.

    This will relate to the ability to understand the style of communication that will be used in order to be able to convey about oneself, as well as in choosing language in interacting with others through symbols to be able to form society. At the same time, it is useful as well as one’s ability to apply communication as a way to build personal branding.

    Attribution Theory

    Attribution theory is a theory to be able to understand how each individual describes his own behavior and the behavior of others. Because humans tend to be motivated to be able to understand personality and explain their behavior patterns. This is according to the theory of Fritz Heider.

    Fundamental Interpersonal Relationship Orientation Theory

    Can we realize that every individual will be motivated to be able to fulfill inclusion and the need to feel belonging? Then on the control, namely the need to form interactions with the surrounding environment, as well as affection as the need to want to be liked, and establish relationships. This theory was introduced by William Schutz.

    Action Assembly Theory

    In the theory of action assembly theory aims to be able to explain where our thoughts come from, then how can we interpret these thoughts in verbal and nonverbal communication. This action assembly theory has been introduced by an expert named John Green.

    Communication Accommodation Theory

    In principle, apart from focusing on background and how individuals modify communication behavior, of course, situations will always be different. This theory has been developed by Howard Giles, et al.

    Social Penetration Theory

    In the theory of social penetration theory describes how self-disclosure can move a relationship or communication process from the superficial to the intimate part. This is the first theory introduced by Irving Altman and Dalmas Taylor about how changes in communication patterns affect changes in a relationship.

    Interpersonal Communication Classification

    It has been quoted by Muhammad (2004, p. 159-160) who has described the classification of an interpersonal communication into an intimate interaction, social conversation, interrogation as well as in an examination and interview.

    Intimate interactions

    Intimate interactions include communication between family members, good friends, and people who have strong emotional ties.

    Social conversation

    Social conversation becomes an interaction to be able to please someone simply. In this type of face-to-face communication it is very important for an informal relationship development in the organization.

    Interrogation or examination

    Interactions that occur between someone who is in control, can ask or even demand information from others.

    Interview

    The interview is a way of interpersonal communication in which two people are involved in a question and answer conversation.

    You can learn about the Theory of Interpersonal Communication
    by M. Budyatna Leila Mona Ganiem

     

    Interpersonal Communication Purposes

    As many as 6 objectives have been explained, including:

    Finding Yourself.

    One that can be an objective of interpersonal communication is to find personal and personal. When we are involved in interpersonal encounters with other people, we learn a lot about ourselves and others. This interpersonal communication also provides an opportunity for us to be able to talk about what we like, as well as about ourselves. By discussing ourselves with others, we also provide a source of feedback that will be tremendous in our feelings, thoughts, and behavior.

    Discovering the Outside World.

    Only with interpersonal communication can we understand more about ourselves and also other people with whom we communicate.

    Forming And Maintaining Meaningful Relationships.

    In a person’s greatest desires will be the form of maintaining a relationship with other people.

    Changing Attitude And Behavior.

    A lot of time that we can use to be able to change the attitude and behavior of others with interpersonal encounters

    For Play and Fun.

    In deep play includes all activities that can have the main goal of seeking pleasure. Talking with friends about our activities on weekends, discussing sports, telling stories and funny stories in general, these are talks to pass the time.

    To help.

    Psychologists, clinical psychologists, and therapists use interpersonal communication techniques in their professional activities to direct their clients. We can all also be useful in helping others in our interpersonal interactions in everyday life. Our example can be to encourage a friend when experiencing a breakup.

    Interpersonal Communication Effectiveness

    An effectiveness in Interpersonal Communication certainly starts with five general qualities, as follows:

    1. Openness

    This quality of openness will refer to at least three aspects of interpersonal communication.

    • Effective interpersonal communicators must be able to open up with their interlocutors. That doesn’t mean that you have to reveal the entire contents of his life history.
    • This aspect of openness leads to the willingness of communicators to be able to react honestly with incoming stimuli.
    • The third aspect concerns the “ownership” of feelings and thoughts. Being open means admitting that the feelings and thoughts expressed are ours and we are also responsible for them.
    •  

    2. Empathy

    Henry Backrack (1976) defines empathy as ”a person’s ability to be able to ‘know’ what is being experienced by another person at a certain moment. Empathy is feeling something the same as others who are experiencing it, being in the same boat and also feeling the same feelings in the same way.

    3. Supportiveness

    Effective interpersonal relationships are relationships where there is an attitude of support (supportiveness). The concept is based on the work of Jack Gibb. Open and empathetic communication cannot take place in an unsupportive environment. We can show our support by being descriptive, not evaluative, spontaneous, not strategic, provisional, not too sure.

    4. Positive attitude (positiveness)

    We can communicate our positive attitude to interpersonal communication in two ways:

    • By expressing our positive attitude positively, we can encourage people to become interacting friends. A positive attitude that refers to at least two aspects of an interpersonal communication.
    • This positive feeling for the communication situation is generally very important for effective interaction.
    •  

    5. Equality

    There will never be two people who are truly equal in all respects. Despite this inequality, in interpersonal communication it will be more effective if the atmosphere is equal. That is, it requires a tacit acknowledgment that both parties are equally valuable or valuable, and that each of these parties has something important to contribute.

    You can learn about Interpersonal Communication: A Psychological Review
    by Dr. A. Supratiknya

    Characteristics of Interpersonal Communication

    There are five aspects that characterize interpersonal communication, including:

    • This interpersonal communication will usually occur spontaneously and without any purpose in advance. That is, in general this interpersonal communication will occur by chance or without a plan so that it will occur spontaneously.
    • This type of communication has both planned and unplanned consequences.
    • Interpersonal communication will generally take place reciprocally. One of the characteristics of interpersonal communication is the existence of alternating reciprocity in giving and receiving information between communicators and communicants who take turns which will create a dialogic atmosphere.
    • Interpersonal communication is mostly in an atmosphere of closeness or intimacy. To be able to lead in an atmosphere of closeness, familiarity of course on these two parties, communicators and communicants must have the courage to open their hearts, and be ready to accept openness to other parties.
    • Interpersonal communication at its stage will be more prominent in the psychological approach compared to the sociological one. This is because the elements of familiarity and closeness are limited to two or a maximum of three individuals who can be involved. In the end it is these factors that can affect a person’s psyche that are easier to be revealed in such communication.

    Interpersonal Communication Process 

    De Vito describes a general model of interpersonal communication. Based on the journal “Interpersonal Communication Process of Deaf-Speech Impaired Subordinates with Their Superiors” written by Immanuel Khomala Wijaya, this section of the model is used for interpersonal communication processes.

    1. Sender (Source) and Recipient (Receiver) Message

    In interpersonal communication there are two or more people who communicate. One person will send the message while the other person receives and translates the message. In communicating itself there is a process of decoding and encoding.

    Decoding is an activity to give meaning to the message conveyed. Meanwhile, encoding itself is an activity of producing messages. In both these activities describe the process of an interpersonal communication. An example of encoding interpersonal communication is when speaking or writing. Meanwhile, decoding is done when listening and reading.

    2. Message (message)

    The message is a signal that can work as a stimulus for the communicant (receiver). The message itself can take the form of taste, smell, sound, visuals, and their combinations. This message can be carried out by accident, planned, as well as just talking. In interpersonal communication can send and receive messages that can be expressed verbally and non-verbally. Nonverbal messages can be in the form of mouth, hand, and even eye gestures.

    3. Feedback (feedback)

    In the process of conveying the message will receive a feedback process. Feedback is a reaction that appears when someone conveys a message. The person receiving this message can hear as well as write to the message.

    4. Opening sentence

    This opening sentence will contain a collection of information that can be given as an introduction, before the main information. This opening sentence or feedforward can aim to convince the person receiving the message so that it can be understood better.

    5. Channels or Media

    In this communication process requires media to be able to channel the message to the recipient. The media in an interpersonal communication itself can be in the form of e-mail, telephone, or meeting in person.

    6. Noise (obstacles)

    In an interpersonal communication there are obstacles that interfere. These barriers can hinder the recipient of the message in processing the information. People who will receive this message may misunderstand. An example of an obstacle to interpersonal communication is when the power goes out which can cause communication channels to be obstructed.

  • International Organizations: Definition, History, Types and Membership Indonesian

    International organizations are organizations that are formed and are members of more than one country that are made voluntarily on the basis of common ground, the aim of which is to create world peace in the system of international relations.

    International organizations generally have countries as members, but often other entities can also apply for membership. Both make international law and are governed by it.

    This paper will discuss the definition, history, types, functions and organizational structure for international organizations.

    Definition and role of international organizations

    International organizations can be defined, according to the International Law Commission as organizations that are established by treaties or other instruments governed by international law and have their own international legal personality. According to Quincy Wright, international organization is the art of creating and managing general and regional organizations consisting of independent nations to facilitate cooperation in the same aims and objectives.

    International organizations were born out of the need for cooperation. Along with social development, dependence on others is increasing, this applies in domestic society and also in the international community. This general problem requiring concerted action was first felt on the non-political front. Initially international organizations were formed to meet the needs of cooperation during the industrial revolution.

    International organizations have a role as a forum for fostering cooperation and preventing the intensity of conflict among fellow members. In addition, international organizations are also a vehicle for negotiations and produce decisions that are mutually agreed upon and mutually beneficial to the parties involved. International organizations also act as independent institutions in carrying out activities such as social activities, humanity and environmental preservation assistance.

    International organizations have a role in political, economic and social issues. In social issues, international organizations play a role in securing and maintaining fair and humane working conditions for men, women and children in the territory of the organization’s members. In addition, international organizations play a role in promoting and assisting Red Cross organizations that aim to improve health, prevent poets and reduce suffering around the world.

    Sinaumed’s can study various international organizations and forms of rules, cultural and other social norms related to the book Regime & International Organization by Citra Hennida.

     

    History of international organizations

    The beginning of the process of forming international organizations dates back to the 19th century. Innovations related to the rise of industrialization, communications and methods of transport led to the creation of special purpose bodies that were formerly called public international unions.

    The union is designed to facilitate government cooperation in addressing economic and social issues. The most famous unions include the Telegraphic Union (1985) and the Universal Postal Union (1874). The two organizations are the surviving organizations as specialized agencies of the United Nations.

    In the political field, efforts to institutionalize the European great powers were made at the Congress of Vienna in 1815. At that time European governments envisioned the European family of states as an organized entity. Finally, this concept was extended by the Hague Conferences in 1899 and 1907. At the Hague Conference, small extra-European states were also allowed to participate in political deliberations.

    Toward the end of the 19th century, the Pan American Union and inter-American confederations began to form. These conferences reinforced the Monroe Doctrine and Simon Bolivar’s assertions by promoting the notion that the states of the Western Hemisphere were distinct subgroups within a larger multi-state system. In the early 19th century it provided most of the foundations for the development of international organizations since World War I.

    The differences that emerged between political and non-political bodies, between big countries and small countries, between regional and non-regional organizations during this period were very significant in the course of subsequent international organizations. In this period, basic patterns of organizational structure and procedures were developed. During this period, the expansion of the concept of international organizations to include other entities outside the European state system has also begun.

    During this period the development of international institutions had the dual objective of promoting coordinated responses by states to problems of peace relations in an era of economic, social and technical interdependence. In addition, institutions recognizing the need to moderate conflicts in the political and military fields became very operative during this period.

    The creation of the League of Nations and the International Labor Organization at the end of World War I was the first attempt to combine these organizations into one general organization. The League of Nations was the first general international organization.

    The League of Nations at that time brought together the threads of the council of the great powers, the general conference of statesmen and the international bureau. The League of Nations is a multipurpose organization that was formerly focused on the political and security goals of war and world peace.

    After World War II, the League of Nations was replaced by the United Nations. The United Nations became a public organization that inherited and learned from the good and bad experiences of the League of Nations. The United Nations is becoming a central component of a varied and decentralized system of international institutions.

    The organizational plan formulated in the United Nations Charter calls for the coordination of specialized agencies by a central agency, especially that of the Economic and Social Council and the utilization and control of regional bodies mainly through the Security Council.

    The organizational system in the post-World War I era involved specialized agencies that were newly formed and coordinated by the United Nations (UN) . By that time the post-1945 system had involved the development of various kinds of local organizations which for the most part functioned independently without ties to the central organization.

    Therefore, the term United Nations System can be used appropriately to refer to the United Nations and its specialized agencies. However, the term United Nations does not cover a number of regional organizations that have developed independently.

    Types of international organizations

    International organizations are organizations that have members from more than one country. Some international organizations are very large, for example business companies. There are also international organizations which are small in size and dedicated to specific goals such as the conservation of a species. Following are the types of international organizations.

    1. International Governmental Organizations (IGOs)

    Intergovernmental organizations or IGOs ​​are formed because many governments create international organizations. There are more than 300 intergovernmental organizations worldwide. The intergovernmental organization consists of sovereign states. Intergovernmental organizations are an important aspect of international law.

    One of the best known and largest intergovernmental organizations is the United Nations (UN). The United Nations was created at the end of World War II, with the aim of avoiding future wars. The main goal of the UN itself is to maintain peace throughout the world.

    The United Nations has several special subgroups such as the World Health Organization (WHO) or the World Health Organization. WHO has a responsibility to provide guidance on international health matters and to set health standards.

    Besides WHO, there are also organizations that focus on culture such as the United Nations Educational Scientific and Cultural Organizations (UNESCO). There are also several countries that form multi-state organizations with economic, political and military objectives such as the United States, Canada, European countries, which are members of the North Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO). NATO is a defense organization. Countries that are members of NATO have had agreements to support each other during conflicts.

    2. International Nongovernmental Organizations (INGOs or NGOs)

    Unlike intergovernmental organizations, INGOs are made up of individuals, not corporations or governments. INGOs serve a variety of functions and represent a variety of interests. Non-governmental actors are organizations that have no affiliation with the government but play an important role in international politics.

    3. Multinational Corporations

    Some international groups are looking for profits. An example is the Toyota company, the world’s largest automaker. Toyota itself is a multinational company. Toyota is headquartered in Japan and has factories around the world including China, the United States and South Africa.

    Toyota sells and manufactures cars in various countries. Multinational companies like Toyota must consider local culture and traditions when setting up factories and products in a particular country.

    Another multinational company is Atlanta-based Coca-Cola. Apart from that there are also diamond companies de Beers based in South Africa and Adidas based in Germany.

    4. Non-profit Organizations

    Non-profit organization means this organization is not looking for material gain. Non-profit organizations usually have the same focus or interest as the environment, humanitarian aid and even entertainment. One example of a non-profit organization is the National Geographic Society.

    The National Geographic Society was formed in 1888 and is based in Washington DC The National Geographic Society is one of the largest scientific and educational institutions in the world. The organization focuses on exploration, geography, archeology and natural sciences.

    Another international organization with more specific interests is the International Olympic Committee, an international non-profit organization based in Switzerland. The International Olympic Committee regulates the Olympics, sports and athletes from around the world.

    Another well-known non-profit organization is The Red Cross or Red Cross. The Red Cross is tasked with providing assistance to areas experiencing difficulties. The Red Cross is an organization based in Switzerland.

    5. Other International Organizations<

    Some international organizations combine all three types of organizations. They create income or profits to support themselves. There are also international organizations that do not have these goals, for example, organized religion.

    Sometimes, religion can directly influence government. For example, the Israeli government supports Jews and Judaism around the world. Jews from other countries have legal entry into Israel and can establish citizenship.

    Organized religion can also influence government indirectly. For example the priests and bishops of the Catholic Church. They influenced their large congregation.

    Catholics are led by the Pope whose head office is in the Vatican, Italy. The Catholic Church is also run like an international company. Local priests, nuns and bishops work with their congregations to make life better for their communities. This is similar to the way international companies regulate their members in other countries.

    With the various international organizations that exist, their objectives also vary, such as humanitarian, cultural, social, economic activities, maintenance of order, security, and international peace. Sinaumed’s can learn all of that in the book Why? International Organization which is packaged in an attractive way.

     

    Organizational structure of international organizations

    The following is the international organizational structure:

    1. Headquarters
    International organizations set up and also improve the head office.

    2. Membership
    In international organizations, there are two types of membership namely; original members or founders and other members who follow. These two members govern the same laws and facilities.

    3. Objectives
    International organizations have several objectives. And the main role of international organizations is to achieve these goals.

    4. Organs
    International organizations have at least one main organ to carry out the tasks of international organizations.

    5. Plenary Board
    The plenary body is the policy-making body for the organization. All members occupy the plenary body. The name of the plenary body is the general assembly, assembly, etc. The main function of the plenary body is to control the budget, adopt agreements, etc.

    6. Executive body
    The executive body is a small body consisting of a number of elected members. For example the UN security council has 5 elected members.

    6. Secretariat
    The Secretariat is a permanent administrative body. The main function of the secretariat is to coordinate the organization.

    7. Decision-Making
    International organizations establish a voting system for every decision-making. The voting system can be based on single or majority vote.

    8. Membership Expulsion and Monitoring
    International organizations have the option of expulsion of membership. International membership can be suspended for any reason.

    9. Amendments
    Agreements of international organizations can be changed in accordance with the rules and regulations.

    Indonesia’s membership in international organizations

    The following is a list of Indonesia’s membership in international organizations:

    1. Inter-Parliamentary Union (IPU) – Member since 1974
    2. Association of Secretary General of Parliaments (ASGP) – Member since 1976
    3. The Parliamentary Union of Islamic Countries (PUIC) – Member since 1999
    4. ASEAN Inter-Parliamentary Assembly (AIPA) – Member since 1977
    5. International Organization of Supreme Audit Institutions (INTOSAI) – Member since 1956
    6. Asian Organization of Supreme Audit Institutions (ASOSAI) – Member since 1979
    7. International Association of Anti Corruption Authorities (IAACA) – Member since 2006
    8. International Association of Prosecutors (IAP) – Member since 2006
    9. Attorney General’s Forum China – ASEAN – Member since 2004
    10. Center on Integrated Rural Development for the Asia and Pacific (CIRDAP) Member since 1979
    11. Sub Regional Office of the Center on Integrated Rural Development for Asia and the Pacific in Southeast Asia (SOCSEA) – Member
    12. United Nations Organization (UN) – Member since 1950
    13. Association of the Southeast Asian Nations (ASEAN) – Member since 1967
    14. Asia Pacific Economic Cooperation (APEC) – Member since 1989
    15. United Nations Development Program (UNDP) – Member since 1950
    16. International Organization of Securities Commissions (IOSCO) – Member
    17. World Customs Organization (WCO) – Member
    18. International Fund for Agricultural Development (IFAD) – Member since 1977
    19. OPEC Fund – Contributors
    20. World Trade Organization (WTO) – Member since 1994
    21. International Textiles and Clothing Bureau (ITCB) – Member since 1984
    22. Association of Natural Rubber Producing Countries (ANRPC) – Member since 1970
    23. International Pepper Community (IPC) – Member since 1977
    24. Asian and Pacific Coconut Community (APCC) – Member since 1969
    25. International Coffee Organization (ICO) – Member
    26. ASEAN Promotion Center on Trade, Investment and Tourism (APCTIT) / ASEAN – Japan Center – Member since 1981
    27. Bureau International des Expositions (BIE) – Member
    28. Global System of Trade Preferences (GSTP) – Member
    29. Animal Production and Health Commission (APHCA) for Asia and the Pacific – Member since 1977
    30. Center for Alleviation of Poverty through Secondary Crops Development in Asia and the Pacific (CAPSA) – Member since 1982
    31. Food and Agriculture Organization (FAO) – Member since 1949
    32. Office International des Epizooties (OIE) / World Organization for Animal Health – Member since 1954
    33. World Food Program (WFP) – Member since 2006
    34. International Cocoa Organization (ICCO) – Observer (in the process of becoming a member)
    35. FAO Representative Office in Jakarta – Member since 1980
    36. International Sugar Organization (ISO) – Observer
    37. ASEAN Animal Health Trust Fund (AHTF) – Member since 2006
    38. International Treaty on Plant Genetic Resources for Food and Agriculture (IT-PGRFA) – Member since 2006
    39. International Seed Testing Association (ISTA) – Member since 2006

    Book Recommendations & Related Articles

    International Organization Books

    1. Why? International Organization (International Organization)

    2. Law of International Organizations

    Source:

    • kemlu.go.id
    • Cogan, Jacob Katz et al. 2016. The Oxford Handbook of International Organizations.
    • Iqbal, Sajid. 2007. An Introduction to International Organizations. Caravan Enterprises Lahore: Pakistan.
    • Politicalscienceview.com. The Function of International Organization. University of Political Science. Accessed from: https://www.politicalscienceview.com/the-functions-of-international-organizations/

  • International Cooperation: Definition, Purpose, Benefits, Forms and Examples

    Understanding International Cooperation – Every country certainly needs other countries, so that the country can make its population prosperous. In fact, no country is capable of working and building its own country independently without assistance from other countries.

    Therefore, every country has a relationship and even cooperates with other countries. The cooperation carried out by the two countries is known as international cooperation.

    The main goal of international cooperation is to mutually benefit and benefit the two cooperating countries, but still comply with the political and economic guidelines of the cooperating countries.

    International cooperation is also carried out so that a country can increase its economic potential.

    For more details, Sinaumed’s needs to listen to this one article to the end in order to better understand the material on international cooperation.

    Definition of International Cooperation

    International cooperation can be interpreted in general as cooperation involving countries all over the world and most of the countries in the world.

    International economic cooperation is intended to provide benefits to each country. International cooperation is a cooperative relationship between two or more countries to achieve certain goals.

    International cooperation is carried out between countries to meet the needs of the people and other interests.

    At a glance, that is the meaning of international cooperation. There are several experts who express opinions regarding the notion of international cooperation. The following is the definition of international cooperation according to experts.

    1. Perwita and Yani

    Perwita and Yani stated that international cooperation is a system of relations based on international life and is divided into various fields such as ideology, economy, socio-culture, politics, environment, health, defense and security.

    2. Dougherty and Pfaltzgraff

    International cooperation according to Dougherty and Pfaltzgraff is a relationship that is forged between countries and there is no element of violence or coercion and is legalized under international law in an effort to give freedom to build its own country.

    3. Holsty

    Holsti argues that cooperation is a collaboration that is carried out by every country when it sees that there are national problems that occur in their country. This problem is considered to need to be handled properly because it can threaten the unity and integrity of the country, therefore the state is trying to solve the problem by establishing cooperation with other countries.

    4. Charles Armor McCleland

    The definition of international cooperation according to Charles he put forward through his writing entitled Theory and the International System in 1966. In his writings, Charles argued that international cooperation is all forms of interaction that exist between people and countries and are carried out by the government and its citizens.

    5. Koesnadi Kartasasmita

    Koesnadi believes that international cooperation is the result of international relations and the result of increasing complexity in human life in the international community.

    6.Willian D Coplin

    William also expressed his opinion regarding international cooperation through his writing entitled Introduction to International Politics: A Theoretical Overview (1971), according to him international cooperation is cooperation that was originally formed for one reason, namely the state wants to carry out new and good routine interactions to achieve common goals.

    7. Theodore A Couloumbis and James H Wolfe

    Couloumbis and Wolfe argue that international cooperation is international relations in the form of interactions between citizens of a country with other countries. Couloumbis and Wolfe put forward this understanding through their writing entitled Introduction to International Relations in 1986.

    That is the understanding of international cooperation in general and according to some experts, from this understanding some experts reveal that international cooperation is carried out to achieve a goal. What is the purpose of this collaboration? Here’s an explanation.

    International Cooperation Objectives

    As explained by experts regarding the notion of international cooperation. This international cooperation is carried out by several countries that want to achieve common goals. The main goal, of course, is to gain mutual benefit. But there are several other objectives of international cooperation.

    1. Strengthen Friendship

    The first goal of international cooperation is to strengthen friendship between cooperating countries. By strengthening friendship or relations between countries, it will prevent these countries from feeling hostile.

    2. Creating World Peace

    In line with the first goal, friendship that is established between cooperating countries can create world peace.

    World peace is of course what everyone dreams of. Because with the creation of peace, a better situation will also be created.

    3. Increasing Economic Growth

    This third goal is a goal that every country generally wants to achieve, because one of the factors for a country to establish cooperation is to be able to support and increase economic growth in the country.

    An example is Indonesia which is a developing country. Because it is still developing, Indonesia wants to achieve its goal of becoming a developed country so that it carries out various kinds of international cooperation, such as exports and imports.

    4. Expanding the Workforce

    Through international cooperation, a country can carry out a student exchange program so that it can form new experts.

    The birth of new experts will have a good impact on the country. In addition, citizens who have become experts can create new jobs and expand the existing workforce in the country.

    5. Improving Progress in Various Fields

    Countries that establish international cooperation with other countries hope that this cooperation can increase the country’s progress in various fields.

    With international cooperation, it is hoped that it will bring equal progress in various fields.

    6. To Complement State Needs

    Different geographical conditions and climatic conditions make it difficult for several countries to fulfill the country’s needs, such as harvesting food from crops.

    Therefore, international cooperation has a goal to be able to complement the needs of these countries.

    For example, like Indonesia which is an agricultural country, Indonesia certainly has more rice reserves compared to countries that do not have land for farming, like most countries in Europe. Therefore several other countries have established international cooperation with Indonesia to be able to complement their country’s needs.

    7. Prevent Conflict

    In line with the second goal, international cooperation also has the goal of being able to prevent conflicts between countries.

    By establishing cooperation, a close friendship will be formed with the cooperating countries, so as to minimize conflicts with countries that agree to work together.

    Sinaumed’s, those are the seven goals that a country wants to achieve when establishing international cooperation with other countries. Then, does international cooperation have benefits that can be obtained by a country? Of course, the answer is that international cooperation allows countries to benefit from this cooperation. What are the benefits of international cooperation? Give me an explanation.

    Benefits of International Cooperation

    International cooperation certainly has many benefits that can be felt by citizens and governments of countries that cooperate, what are the benefits?

    1. Advancing the country’s economy, the progress of a country’s economy can be seen from travel or export transactions and imports of goods and services carried out by that country.
    2. Get opportunities and opportunities to be able to seek knowledge and technology in more developed countries.
    3. Strengthen the country’s bargaining power and position in the eyes of the international community.
    4. Capital from foreign countries can enter more easily, when the development of the country’s economic activities is better through international cooperation.
    5. With international cooperation, it will increase the demand for goods and services from a country, thereby reducing the basic price per unit in that country.
    6. Countries that cooperate internationally can also import goods that have a higher price.
    7. The workforce will become smarter, improve skills and creativity because the workforce is required to be smart, creative in carrying out export activities to other countries rapidly.
    8. Countries that establish international cooperation will find it easier to obtain raw materials and auxiliary materials that can be used for the production process.
    9. International cooperation can open up new jobs, thereby reducing the unemployment rate in the country.
    10. Maintain the price of goods and remain stable by importing or exporting excess or shortage of goods to other countries.
    11. International cooperation can accelerate the national development of a country, the method is by borrowing funds through the World Bank.
    12. International cooperation can make a country take steps to prevent the destruction or oblivion of a culture in that country.
    13. International cooperation can make a country improve its country’s defense and security sector.

    Those are the thirteen benefits that can be obtained by a country when conducting international cooperation with other countries. After knowing the meaning, purpose and benefits of international cooperation, has Sinaumed’s understood international cooperation more deeply?

    If not, the following authors present examples of international cooperation.

    Kinds & Forms of International Cooperation

    International cooperation has three forms, so that it is clearer the author will describe the three forms of international cooperation along with these examples.

    1. Bilateral Cooperation

    Bilateral international cooperation is cooperation carried out by two countries. Bilateral cooperation has the goal of being able to foster relationships that have previously existed and then re-establish cooperative relations in trade.

    An example is cooperation between Indonesia and Asia Pacific in the form of economic and trade agreements in Asia Pacific and involving several other countries such as Africa, the Middle East, Eastern Europe, Western Europe to Latin America.

    Another example of bilateral international cooperation is cooperation between Indonesia and Saudi Arabia regarding the pilgrimage.

    2. Multilateral Cooperation

    Multilateral cooperation is the opposite of bilateral cooperation. Multilateral cooperation is cooperation that is established by several countries and is not limited to regions or regions.

    Multilateral cooperation has two types of members, namely main members and active members. Main members are countries that have medium power, while active members are small countries that play a limited role or it can be said that they also have less power than the main members.

    An example of multilateral international cooperation is

    • North American Free Trade Agreement or (NAFTA)
    • Organization of Petroleum Exporting Countries or (OPEC)
    • United Nations (UN) or the United Nations (UN)
    • World Trade Center Organization (WTO)
    • International Monetary Fund (IMF)
    • World Bank or World Bank Economic and Social Council (ECOSOC)
    • Organization of Islamic Cooperation (OIC) Non-Aligned Movement (NAM)

    3. Regional Cooperation

    Regional cooperation is a form of cooperation carried out by countries in a region or region. The aim of regional cooperation is to create free trade in countries that are in certain regions or regions.

    There are a number of regional collaborations that are certainly familiar to Sinaumed’s’ ears, for example, such as the regional commission relations by the United Nations in the East Asia, Europe and Latin America regions.

    Another example of regional cooperation is as follows.

    • Association of Southeast Asian Nations (ASEAN) , is an association consisting of nations in the Southeast Asian region and was formed on August 8, 1967.
    • Asia Pacific Economic Cooperation (APEC) , is cooperation carried out by countries or nations in the Asia Pacific region in the economic field. This one multilateral cooperation is a special cooperation forum in the economic field that was first coined by Bob Hawke.
    • European Union (EU) or European Union

    Some Examples of International Cooperation

    International cooperation is cooperation carried out by countries around the world and is not limited to regions or regions. Examples of international cooperation are as follows.

    1. World Trade Organization (WTO)

    This one international collaboration has the goal of being able to discuss and solve problems regarding trade that exists between countries. The WTO has several principles, namely the principle of trade liberalization, non-discrimination, and the stability of trade relations between countries.

    2. International Monetary Fund (IMF)

    This one collaboration is in the form of an organization and is a collaboration that can provide loans to countries that need loan funds. Generally, countries that need funds from loans are countries that have unstable currency values ​​and are unable to pay debts. The IMF has a goal of increasing international financial stability.

    3. South East Asia Treaty Organization (SEATO)

    This one organization is a form of cooperation established to prevent the growth of communism in the Southeast Asian region. This cooperation was established by a military pact.

    4. Australia, New Zealand, United States (ANZUS)

    This international cooperation is a military pact established to prevent the development of communism in the three regions of the country.

    5. North Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO)

    This one military pact is in the North Atlantic and was established to achieve the goal of eliminating all forms of international political disputes, preventing military threats that occur in international circles, trying to resolve disputes in a peaceful way and defending member states from NATO.

    6. Asian-African Conference (KAA)

    This one organization is certainly very familiar to Sinaumed’s’ ears, KAA is a non-aligned organization that was founded in 1955 to be precise on April 18 to 24. KAA was founded to achieve the goal of creating peace and tranquility in the lives of countries in the Asia-Africa region.

    Sinaumed’s, that is a brief explanation of international cooperation. You can also learn more about international cooperation through books available at sinaumedia.

    Because, sinaumedia as #FriendsWithoutLimits will continue to present quality and interesting books for all Sinaumed’s. Let’s study and read together! Buy the book right now!

    Author: Khansa Amira

  • Interesting facts about Sunan Muria and his various relics

    Sunan Muria is one of the Wali Songo who is known for his quite unique way of preaching, namely by using the free course method. It should be noted that Sunan Muria is one of the children of Sunan Kalijaga and Dewi Saroh, who is the daughter of Sheikh Maulana Ishaq.

    The name Sunan Kalijaga may be familiar to most people. He is a Wali Songo figure who is quite influential in the spread of Islam in the island of Java. He is a Wali Allah who is the son of the Duke of Tuban.

    Not far from his father, Sunan Muria also had an influence in spreading Islam in Java. It is not known exactly when Sunan Muria was born, but in history it is recorded that he died in 1551. Even though he is good at preaching, Sunan Muria chose to preach in remote areas compared to urban areas.

    Get to know Sunan Muria

    Raden Umar Said or better known as Sunan Muria is one of the Wali Songo who lives in the Mount Muria area. Muria’s name was taken from his last residence, namely on the slopes of Mount Muria, 18 kilometers to the north from the Holy City. Besides having pious morals, he is also known to have supernatural powers in battle.

    There is one version which says that Sunan Muria is the son of Sunan Kalijaga. Historians named AM Noertjahjo and Solihin Salam are sure of this version. Based on his research, the marriage between Sunan Kalijaga and Dewi Saroh bint Maulana Ishaq produced three children, namely Sunan Muria, Dewi Rukayah, and also Dewi Sofiah.

    There is another version which reveals that Sunan Muria is the son of Raden Usman Haji or Sunan Ngudung. R. Darmowasito’s work, Pustoko Darat Agung, which contains history and also genealogies of Javanese walis and kings, reveals that Sunan Muria was the son of Raden Usman Haji. In fact, there are also those who say that he is of Chinese descent.

    In a book entitled The Collapse of the Hindu-Javanese Empire and the Emergence of Islamic Countries in the Archipelago (1968), Prof. Dr. Slamet Muljana revealed that Sunan Muria’s father, Sunan Kalijaga, was none other than a Chinese captain named Gan Sie. Sunan Muria is said to be not good at speaking Chinese because he has mingled with the Javanese.

    Slamet himself refers to an ancient manuscript found in the Sam Po Kong Temple, Semarang in 1928. The New Order government at that time was worried that Slamet’s discovery could cause a public uproar. As a result, Slamet’s work was included in the list of books banned by the Attorney General’s Office in 1971. Unfortunately, there has been no further study of the various versions.

    So far, Usman Hasyim’s work entitled Sunan Muria: Between Facts and Legend (1983), can be classified as an initial study that attempts to trace the lineage of Sunan Muria more scientifically. He also attempted to distinguish folklore from fact. For example, about Sunan Muria as a Chinese descendant.

    Umar tried to collect a number of opinions from historians. As it turned out, the validity of the ancient text was still in doubt, because it was mixed with folk tales. However, Umar admits that he is sometimes forced to rely on his interpretation in tracing Sunan Muria’s footsteps. As a result, Umar tended to believe more in the version that Sunan Muria was the son of Sunan Kalijaga.

    How to Preach Sunan Muria

    From the various versions, no one doubts Sunan Muria’s reputation in doing his preaching. His moderate style, following Sunan Kalijaga, is infiltrating through various Javanese cultural traditions. For example, the custom of feasts that are held on certain days after someone’s death, such as nelung dino to nyewu, which is not prohibited. It’s just that traditions that have a clinical smell, such as burning incense or offering offerings, have been replaced by praying or praying.

    Apart from that, Sunan Muria also preached through various kinds of Javanese arts. For example, he wrote macapat, Javanese songs, sinom and also kinanti songs which are believed to be the works of Sunan Muria, which are still preserved today. Through these songs, he invites his people to practice Islamic teachings.

    Therefore, Sunan Muria preferred to preach to the common people compared to the nobility. That is why the preaching area is quite wide and spread to various regions. Starting from the slopes of Mount Muria, Kudus, remote Pati, Juana, to the north coast.

    It was this way of preaching that caused Sunan Muria to be known as a sunan who likes to preach topo ngeli. That means, by “immersing yourself” in society. The targets of Sunan Muria’s da’wah were fishermen, traders, sailors, and other common people. He is the only wali who still maintains gamelan and wayang as tools of da’wah to convey Islamic teachings.

    The skills of farming, trading, and also fishing are his favorite. Sunan Muria was used as a mediator in the internal conflicts that existed in the Sultanate of Demak (1518-1530). He is known as someone who can solve various kinds of problems no matter how complicated the problem is.

    The solution is also always acceptable to all conflicting parties. Sunan Muria preached from Tayu, Jepara, Juana, to the vicinity of Kudus and Pati. One of the results of his da’wah through art media is the song Sinom and Kinanti.

    The place of preaching itself is around Mount Muria, then expanded again to Tayu, Kudus, Juana, and the slopes of Mount Muria. He is known as Sunan Muria because he lives on Mount Muria. Until now, the Sunan Muria tomb complex in Colo Village has never been empty of pilgrims. In a day, the place can be visited by 15,000 pilgrims who come from various regions.

    Interesting Facts about Sunan Muria

    The following are some interesting facts about Sunan Muria during his lifetime, including:

    1. Sunan Muria likes to live in the interior

    There is one unique thing that Sunan Muria has. Even though his name is very well known and he is a very influential figure in the Sultanate of Demak, Sunan Muria prefers to live in remote areas and away from downtown life. He also decided to stay and settle down on Mount Muria. Mount Muria is one of the mountains on the north coast of Central Java. The place itself is located in the northeast of Semarang City.

    Mount Muria is included in three district areas, namely Kudus Regency, Jepara Regency, and also Pati Regency. It is said that one of the reasons why Sunan Muria chose to preach in the interior was because he felt that people in remote villages did not gain knowledge of Islamic teachings.

    In addition, the economic conditions of the people there are classified as underprivileged. So that Sunan Muria wanted to preach while at the same time advancing the economic life that was there. Even though the center of his preaching was on Mount Muria, Sunan Muria’s influence was very broad. His preaching could even reach the areas of Tayu, Jepara, Juwana, and also the area around Kudus.

    2. Modifying Old Javanese Cultural Traditions

    The Javanese people, who at that time had quite strong cultural traditions, made it difficult for Islamic teachings to be accepted. Therefore, Sunan Muria, who has high tolerance, also modifies old Javanese old traditions with Islamic teachings. So, it can be said that Sunan Muria did not preach black and white. He acculturated Javanese culture with Islamic teachings. One strategy is to modify the tradition of offerings.

    The Javanese people, who at that time mostly adhered to Hinduism, Buddhism, and also animism, were taught not to offer food to the spirits of their ancestors, but to distribute food to their neighbors who were around them. Therefore, if someone has an intention, they can gather neighbors and pray for the ancestors together in the Islamic way. The local people at that time named it the Kenduri tradition.

    This tradition is now better known as sending prayers which are carried out before the month of Ramadan, before weddings, until before carrying out other big events. The goal itself is still the same, praying for the ancestors or relatives who have died. However, they do not present offerings, but send prayers by reciting verses from the Al-Quran and also blessings.

    3. Preaching by Providing Free Skills Courses

    Sunan Muria is known for his way of preaching which can be said to be different from other methods of preaching. Where he chose the preaching method by giving free courses to the local community. It is known, if people who live in remote areas have less knowledge and skills. Sunan Muria then provided special skills courses for farmers, traders, sailors, and fishermen. In the course, the community will be given knowledge about how to grow crops, how to trade, catch fish, make boats, and more.

    After teaching a free course on these skills, then Sunan Muria will teach them Islamic teachings. By building the trust of the community, Sunan Muria can more easily spread the teachings of Islam there.

    Not only the people living on Mount Muria and its surroundings, but people from outside the city to outside Java also came to see Sunan Muria to get the free course. That is what later made Sunan Muria known to people from outside Central Java.

    4. Sunan Muria Preaching with Art

    The form of struggle from Sunan Muria in spreading the teachings of Islam is by preaching and combining it with art. Not much different from his father and teacher, namely Sunan Kalijaga. Sunan Muria has the ability to perform a puppet like his father. One of the puppet stories that is often performed by Sunan Muria is Topo Ngeli.

    In the Topo Ngeli story, there is a main character named Dewa Ruci who is the master of the Majapahit Kingdom. Dewa Ruci is said to mingle with the local community, especially the common people. By mingling with the common people, Dewa Ruci then establishes kinship and eliminates social status.

    In fact, he also often held puppet shows based on his father’s compositions such as Dewi Ruci, Semar Ambarang, Dewa Srani, Jamus Kalimasada, Begawan Ciptaning, and many more. When masterminding, he will include Islamic elements in the puppet show. Thus, the people who watch the show can learn about Islam.

    5. Death of Sunan Muria

    No reliable information has been found about when Sunan Muria died. However, some data states that Sunan Muria died in 1560 AD He was buried in Celo Village, Dawe District, Kudus. Currently, his burial place is located at the top of Mount Muria. To get to the cemetery, visitors have to climb hundreds of steps to get to the tomb complex.

    Relics of Sunan Muria

    As one of the most influential figures, surely he has so many relics. The following are some relics of Sunan Muria, among others:

    1. The mosque at the top of Mount Muria

    This mosque is located at an altitude of 1,600 meters above sea level. Inside this mosque, there are several objects that were used by Sunan Muria during his lifetime. To be able to reach this mosque, visitors must walk as far as 3 km. This mosque has undergone many changes, but some parts are still maintained today.

    One part that is maintained is the place of the priesthood. The form of the mosque’s imam is indented. This has the meaning that Muslims must prioritize the interests of the hereafter rather than world affairs. The structure of the building is still the same as the original condition of the mosque. Other objects that are still being maintained are drums made of teak wood with carvings of dragons and roosters.

    2. The Sacred Gentong Water Site

    This water barrel site is near the Sunan Muria burial complex. Where this site is usually visited when the visitors have finished pilgrimage. The water from the site is believed to be able to cure various kinds of strange diseases that are medically incurable.

    3. Parijoto

    Parijoto is a fruit that has the size of a peanut, is pink when it is still unripe, and will be black when it is ripe, and has a sour taste. This fruit has a fairly good nutritional content and is suitable for pregnant mothers. In addition, this fruit is also said to be one of Sunan Muria’s heritage. Pregnant women often look for pari jot because it is believed to be good for the unborn baby.

    4. Hajj fern

    Pakis Haji is a plant that is believed to have originated from the supernatural power of Sunan Muria. In general, this one plant is used to repel rats. When visiting the tomb area, visitors can see the Hajj fern being sold there. This Hajj fern has a brown parallelogram batik motif. The base is bone white and slightly brown.

    If it can be described, this plant at first glance looks like a python. The people believe that this pilgrimage fern can save the rice fields which are threatened with crop failure due to the rat plague. In ancient times, rats ate rice in the fields, then the farmers complained to Sunan Muria. Then, Sunan Muria gave the idea to use the pilgrim fern as a way to fight these rat pests.

    This is an explanation of the history of Sunan Muria and some interesting facts about it. For Sinaumed’s who want to know more about Sunan Muria and other Walisongo, you can read related books by visiting sinaumedia.com .

    •  

  • Intercultural Communication: Definition, Functions, and Forms

    Intercultural communication is a process of communication that occurs between people who have different cultures, be it different races, ethnicities, socio-economics, or a combination of all these differences. Intercultural communication continues to grow, especially when humans can freely communicate because of technological developments.

    Culture is a way of life that develops and is embraced by the community and continues from generation to generation. Communication that is established because of differences is the result of diversity, experiences, values, and also perspectives from each culture. Hamid Mowlana said that intercultural communication is a human flow across national boundaries . Meanwhile, Fred E. Jandt said that intercultural communication is a face-to-face interaction between people who have differences in their culture.

    Definition of Intercultural Communication

    Guo-Ming Chen and William J. Sartosa said that intercultural communication is a process of negotiation or exchange of symbolic systems that guide human behavior and limit them in carrying out their functions as a group. Furthermore, intercultural communication is carried out by:

    1. By negotiating to involve humans in intercultural meetings which also discuss a theme that is being contested. The symbol itself does not have a meaning but it can mean something in a context and that meaning is negotiated or fought for.
    2. Through the exchange of symbol systems that depend on agreement between the subjects involved in the communication, a decision is made to participate in the process of assigning the same meaning.
    3. As a guide a cultural behavior that is not programmed but useful because it has an influence on our behavior.
    4. Shows the function of a group so that we can distinguish ourselves from other groups and identify with various ways.

    In addition, the study of intercultural communication is rooted in several other scientific studies, such as sociolinguistics, sociology, cultural anthropology, and psychology. Of the four scientific studies, psychology is the main reference in explaining cross-cultural communication, especially cross-cultural psychology.

    The Role of Language in Intercultural Communication

    Communication that occurs between cultures is often heard. This is because their different culture or lifestyle will create misunderstandings between the two individuals. Thus, it is necessary to have something that can reduce the level of misunderstanding between the two individuals so that conflict does not occur. It can be found in both verbal and nonverbal language.

    The Nature of Intercultural Communication

    There are several kinds of the nature of intercultural communication, namely:

    1. Enculturation

    Enculturation refers to the process by which culture or culture is transmitted from one generation to the next. We can learn culture, not inherit it. Culture is transmitted through learning, not through genes. And for parents, groups, friends, schools, religious institutions, and government agencies are the main teachers in the field of culture.

    2. Acculturation

    Acculturation refers to the process by which one’s culture is modified through contact or direct exposure to other cultures.

    Intercultural Communication Function

    1. Personal Functions

    Personal function is a communication function that is shown through communication behavior originating from an individual. Here’s the identity on the private function:

    a. Declare Social Identity

    In the process of intercultural communication there are several individual communication behaviors that can be used to express social identity. The behavior is expressed through language actions both verbally and non-verbally.

    It is from language behavior that self and social identity can be known, for example, one can know the origin of one’s ethnicity, religion, or level of education.

    b. Declare Social Integration

    The essence of the concept of social integration is accepting unity and unity between individuals, between groups but still recognizing the differences that each element has. And it should also be understood that one of the goals of communication is to give the same meaning to the message that is shared between the communicator and the communicant.

    In the case of intercultural communication involving cultural differences between the communicator and the communicant, social integration is the main goal of communication. And the main principle in the process of exchanging intercultural communication messages is that I treat you as your culture treats you and not as I wish. In this way communicators and communicants can increase the social integration of their relationships.

    c. Increase knowledge

    Often in interpersonal and intercultural communication we gain shared knowledge, learn from each other’s culture.

    d. Escape

    Sometimes we communicate with other people to escape or find a way out of the problems we are facing. We call such communication choices functioning as communication to create complementary and symmetrical relationships. Complementary relations are always carried out by two parties having different behaviors.

    Behavior in a person functions as a complementary behavioral stimulus from another. In a complementary relationship, the difference between the two parties is maximized. Conversely, a symmetrical relationship is carried out by two people who mirror each other’s behavior.

    2. Social Functions

    a. Supervision Social Function

    The first social function is supervision. The practice of intercultural communication between communicators and communicants of different cultures functions to supervise one another. In any process of intercultural communication this function is useful for informing “developments” about the environment.

    This function is mostly carried out by the mass media which routinely disseminates the development of events that occur around us even though the events occur in a different cultural context.

    b. Bridge

    In the process of intercultural communication, the communication function carried out between two people of different cultures is a bridge for the differences between them.

    The bridging function can be controlled through the messages they exchange, the two of them will explain each other’s different interpretations of a message so as to produce the same meaning. This function is carried out by various communication contexts including mass communication.

    c. Value Socialization

    The function of socialization is a function to teach and introduce the cultural values ​​of a society to other people.

    d. Entertain

    The entertaining function also often appears in the process of intercultural communication. For example watching traditional dances. This entertainment is included in the category of intercultural entertainment.

    3. Expressing Social Identity

    With intercultural communication, the individual can show his own social identity.

    4. Expressing Social Integration

    Intercultural communication can unite and unite between individuals in these interactions.

    5. Increase Knowledge

    Intercultural communication can also provide new insights, even insights that the individual has never known.

    6. Relationship Interaction

    In addition, intercultural communication can also create complementary and harmonious relationships.

    Principles of Intercultural Communication

    1. Relativity of Language

    It is the general idea that language influences thinking as well as behavior that has been voiced most by linguistic anthropologists. In the late 1920’s and throughout the 1930’s, it was proposed that language characteristics influence the cognitive processing of words.

    Because the world’s languages ​​differ so much in terms of their semantic characteristics and structure, it seems reasonable to say that people who speak different languages ​​will also differ in how they perceive and think about the world.

    2. Language as a Mirror of Culture

    Language certainly reflects a culture. The greater the cultural differences, the more visible the differences in communication, both in language and in non-verbal cues. The greater the differences between cultures, the more difficult it is to communicate.

    3. Reducing Ambiguity Between Cultures

    Do you know Sinaumed’s, the greater the differences between cultures, the greater the uncertainty and ambiguity in a communication. Much of our communication seeks to reduce this uncertainty so that we can better describe, predict, and explain the behavior of others.

    Due to greater uncertainty and ambiguity, it takes more time and effort to reduce uncertainty and to communicate more meaningfully.

    4. Differences Between Cultures

    The greater the differences between cultures, the greater the self-awareness of the participants during the communication. This has both positive and negative consequences. On the plus side, this self-awareness may make us more alert. it prevents us from saying things that might feel insensitive or inappropriate. And the negative, of course, this will make us too careful, not spontaneous, and lack confidence.

    5. Early Interaction and Differences Between Cultures

    Cross-cultural differences are particularly important in early interactions and gradually diminish in importance as relationships become more intimate. Although we always face the possibility of misperceptions and misjudgments of others, this possibility is especially great in situations of intercultural communication.

    6. Maximizing Interaction Results

    In intercultural communication as in all communication, we certainly try to maximize the outcome of the interaction. The three consequences discussed by Sunnafrank (1989) suggest important implications for intercultural communication. For example, people will interact with other people who they think will lead to positive results.

    This is because intercultural communication is difficult, and maybe Sinaumed’s will avoid it. Thus, for example, Sinaumed’s will choose to talk to classmates who have a lot in common with you rather than people who are very different.

    Second, if we get positive results, we continue to engage and improve our communications. When we get negative results, we start to withdraw and communicate less.

    Third, if we make predictions about the meaning of our behavior that will produce positive results. In communication, Sinaumed’s tries to predict the outcome of, for example, the choice of topic, the position you take, the nonverbal behavior you display, and so on. Then, Sinaumed’s can do what you think will give a positive result and try not to do what you think will give a negative result.

    Forms of Intercultural Communication

    Intercultural communication certainly has its forms. The following forms of intercultural communication, namely:

    1. International Communications

    International Communications or international communication is a form of intercultural communication that occurs between two or more countries. This form can be seen from various kinds of diplomacy and propaganda activities which are often related to intercultural or intercultural and interracial or interracial conditions.

    This form of communication tends to be related to the interests of a country with other countries which include economic, political, defense and other issues.

    2. Interracial Communication

    Interracial communication or interracial communication is a form of communication that occurs when there is an interaction or communication process between individuals or groups of different races. This form of communication has the main characteristic that the communicant and communicator come from different races. Race itself is a classification of a group of individuals based on biological characteristics.

    3. Inter-Ethnic Communication

    Interethnic communication or Interethnic Communication is a form of communication in which the communication process comes from different ethnicities. Ethnic groups are groups of people characterized by a common language and origin. Therefore, inter-ethnic communication is intercultural communication.

    Factors Occurrence of Intercultural Communication

    In the occurrence of intercultural communication there are several factors, namely:

    1. Mobility

    Travel from one country to another is no longer a special thing, or activities like this have become common activities carried out by the community. This happens because of the lucrative business opportunities and guaranteed education. So that there was widespread mobility and there were various cultures that united in one area.

    2. Economy

    Economic factors also affect the existence of intercultural communication. As an example, the country of Indonesia which has a developing economy will experience dependence on countries that have a high level of economy. Thus, there was a transfer of work and there was a unification of the culture within

    Technology has been growing rapidly lately. So that technology is also able to bring a broad culture into an area that can influence the nation’s culture. Therefore, technology is able to make intercultural communication easier and more practical. Even sooner or later, technology can have an impact on cultural exchange on a large scale.

    4. Immigration

    It’s not strange anymore, when we walk in our own house, we see strangers around us. This happened because of immigration activities for an interest. Thus, there was a unification of culture or commonly known as acculturation. Acculturation causes intercultural communication.

    5. Politics

    Political interests also contribute to the impact of the emergence of intercultural communication. Like when the Arab King visited Indonesia, or vice versa, when President Jokowi visited Australia. It is this country visit that brings intercultural communication.

     

    Benefits of Studying Intercultural Communication

    Unlike the case with intercultural communication. Communication that lies in a person’s lifestyle or way of life is different and often creates misunderstandings between individuals when communicating. So, we need to study this intercultural communication.

    If we want to learn this intercultural communication, then we will get benefits in communicating. It’s like when we meet people whose lifestyle is different from ours. This is so that misunderstandings and even disputes do not occur when communicating with that person.

    Then another benefit that we can get is when our position as a third person sees two people fighting because their communication misunderstood each other. So, that’s where we can become a bridge between the two until the misunderstanding is over.

    If Sinaumed’s is interested in studying intercultural communication, you can read books as additional knowledge and information that you can get at www.sinaumedia.com . As #FriendsWithoutLimits, we always give our best so that you have #MoreWithReading information.

  • Intercessory Prayer: Definition and Examples of Prayers

    For Christians, intercessory prayer is no stranger. Prayer itself is a way for Christians to be able to communicate with God, have conversations with God or as a medium to ask and give thanks to God. In Christianity, prayer is also interpreted as sacred.

    Prayer can be done anywhere, such as when going to do work activities, when going to rest at night or getting up early. Prayers are also performed during Sunday services, family worship, youth services, or Sunday school.

    Maybe there are still many who do not understand the meaning of intercessory prayer. Intercessory prayer can be interpreted briefly as humans praying on behalf of others. To understand more fully what intercessory prayer is, Sinaumed’s can listen to the article below.

    What Is Intercessory Prayer?

    As mentioned above, intercessory prayer is praying on behalf of other people, meaning praying for a person or group of people who are not carrying out worship together under the same church roof. More simply, this intercessory prayer means ‘praying for others’.

     

     

    There are several types of intercessory prayer that can be prayed, starting from intercessory prayer for the nation and state of Indonesia, churches and ministries, companies, office friends, relatives, schools, church youth, sick people, enemies or people who persecute and not doing good to us and many more.

    Usually. an intercessory prayer will be recited at the beginning of the service. The priest who prays this prayer can use various languages, both standard Indonesian and regional languages ​​such as Batak, Javanese, Sundanese, Manado or other regional languages. However, it remains at its core, namely praying for the good and safety of other people, both known and unknown.

    Intercessory Prayer in the Bible

    In the Bible itself it is noted about its own intercessory prayer. For example that people must pray for all who have authority (1 Timothy 2: 2), God’s servants (Philippians 1: 19); the church (Psalm 122:6); friends (Job 42:8); countrymen (Romans 10:1); the sick (James 5:14); enemies (Jeremiah 29:7); those who persecute us (Matthew 5: 44); those who banish us (2 Timothy 4: 16) and all people (1 Timothy 2:1).

    In the Bible, intercessory prayer was also first mentioned by Abraham who prayed for Sodom which was full of evil. At that time, Abraham prayed because he knew God would destroy Sodom, which was occupied by Lot, his nephew.

     

    Diligently and earnestly, Abraham offered intercession to God. He begged God that the city could not be destroyed if there were 10 righteous people. But in reality, there are less than 10 righteous people in the City of Sodom. The cities of Sodom and Gomorrah were finally destroyed. Even so, Lot and his two children survived thanks to Abraham’s prayers.

    In addition to Abraham’s story, an intercessory prayer was also prayed by Moses who was assisted by Aaron and Hur as a team of intercessors who determined victory in the wars of the Israelites. Apart from that, it was Daniel who interceded for the Jews who were in exile in Babylon. In addition, there is Nehemiah who intercedes for the destroyed city of Jerusalem, and there is Esther who intercedes for all the Jews in exile.

    Prophetic Intercession

    Prophetic Intercessory Prayer is an intercessory prayer related to prophecy, the voice of God, to be conveyed to the congregation/other people and/or to become a burden for prayer. People who do prophetic intercession, pray not only for the struggles of others but receive the burden of prayer that is in them from the Holy Spirit. He would stop praying after the Holy Spirit gave an answer or confirmed that heaven had heard or responded.

    This intercessory prayer is one of the specifications of intercessory prayer that only people at a certain level of vocation can do. Like a call to be intercessors. In this prayer, God’s message is characteristic.

    It is also stated in the Bible that Peter experienced the same thing in the spirit while praying in the attic of a house in Joppa. God’s message is clear, that God did not want Peter to convey the Gospel exclusively to the Jewish nation but to other nations as well.

    Examples of Intercessory Prayer

    Sinaumed’s can read the examples of intercessory prayer below for daily reading.

    1. Short Intercessory Prayer for Sunday Worship

    Good Lord Jesus, I thank you for the blessings and inclusion that You have given us so that you can gather today to praise and glorify Your name.

    Lord Jesus, there are many things that you want to struggle with on this occasion but let you pray according to what you know about what will happen.

    We ask You, bless this church, your worship activities that you are currently carrying out so that they can add to your body and soul, so that you can worship together with us.

    You also ask to bless the church’s servants, ushers, tamborine players, worship leaders, spiritual singers, Sunday school teachers to the congregation who are currently attending this service.

    Bless also O Lord the congregations in other churches who are both praising and glorifying Your name. Always protect us from evil spirits who want to disturb us and keep us away from you, O God.

    The truth is we still have much to say, but You know better what we want to say. Let this prayer happen according to Your will like when You accompanied us with sunny weather today.

    May You be willing to give joy to this room, may God grant you a long life so that this struggle and worship will be repeated in the future. Amen.

    2. Intercessory Prayer in the Morning

    O good God, we thank you and thank you very much because you have blessed our mornings with full of happiness and joy. Thank you, O God, for giving you a good night’s sleep, cool morning air and a peaceful atmosphere. We are very grateful for your gift this morning which is truly beautiful.

    Lord Jesus, bless my whole family, the people I love like my friends and friends and all Indonesian people and living things on this earth so they can get beautiful and cool mornings like we got.

    Bless also those who are sleep deprived because of work factors so that You give them enough time to rest and are kept away from all diseases. Bless also those who have not been able to find peace in the morning.

    We believe that You will give joy to every creature that believes in You. In the name of the Lord Jesus we pray and ask. Amen.

    3. Intercessory Prayer for the Nation and State

    Most glorious and all-good God, we are grateful for what you have given to make us part of the Indonesian nation which has many ethnic, cultural and linguistic diversity.

    We are grateful because the Indonesian nation is a developing country and is well regarded by the world, so that it becomes a tourist spot for tourists and can advance the economy of each tourist area.

    We are also grateful because the economy is stable, the political conditions are good and the tolerance of religious life is also very good. We are very happy to be able to live and grow in this rich country.

    However, there are still several cases of this nation experiencing setbacks, there are some things that are not good that are still happening in this country. For example, in terms of pursuing justice and law, social inequality is still high, unemployment is still high and there is still a lot of discrimination committed by several other elements.

    However, we ask You, O God, that our country, the Indonesian nation, can become better in the future, always led by wise and good leaders.

    4. Examples of Short and Clear Intercessory Prayers

    The Lord God the Father is eternal in the kingdom of heaven. On this day we still and always give thanks. Lord Jesus, at this time we want to pray for our brothers, our families, our parents, the pastor, may you always bless them. bless them so that we are all guided to enter the path of truth.

    We also pray for the president, vice president and high-ranking state officials, bless them. Give them health and strength so they can carry out their duties and responsibilities properly. We also pray for our sick brothers and sisters, heal them with your love, bless them so that you will give them healing and miracles.

    We also pray for orphans and neglected children, widowers and widows, may You always give them health and strength. Bless also the offering you have given. We know that the offerings are few and not worth the blessings You have given us. May this offering be useful for expanding Your work on this earth.

    Please accept our Prayer, O Father, only in the name of Your son Jesus Christ, Amen.

    5. Long Intercession

    Heavenly Father, we praise and thank You for Your blessings and inclusion, so that today we can gather together to glorify Your name.

    Lord, we ask You, bless this church, and the worship we do. Give us health so we can gather again to praise Your majesty.

    We also pray for our brothers and sisters who have not been able to attend with us. If they are sick, heal them. If they are lazy, knock on their hearts to be moved to come and offer their hearts to worship You.

    Father, we ask that Your servant, as well as Your church, You will always give strength and health to continue to provide the best service for You.

    We do not forget to ask that this pandemic end soon so that life can return and go better than before. Heal those who are sick, help those who have lost their jobs, accompany those who are lonely in their hearts.

    Oh God, bless us too when we start work. Give us health and bless our every work for a decent life so that there will be no misery.

    Find a mate for those who are alone, give the best partner for them so they can build a good, happy and God-fearing household.

    We beg You Father, bless our country so that it becomes a sovereign and prosperous country, far from disaster. Strengthen the faith of our leaders to be able to walk under Your guidance, strengthen their shoulders to do their best for the sake of the nation.

    To be honest, there are still many prayers that we want to convey to You, but we are sure that You have heard them long before our prayers were said.

    In the name of Jesus as our Living Saviour, we have prayed and given thanks, I hope you will hear it, Amen.

    6. Intercessory Prayer for Prosperous Households

    Dear Lord Jesus, thank you for the opportunity to gather with our family that we can do this afternoon. Previously we asked forgiveness for all the sins we have done so far. We realize that these things only double Your heart and our neighbors.

    We want to pray for the well-being of this household and family. Lord Jesus, help us so that we are able to emulate every reflection of love and the greatness of faith in living our daily life. You believe that you have provided every blessing for you and for our prosperous life.

    Thank you God for all the blessings that never run out for our family, father, mother, brothers and sisters. In the name of the Lord Jesus we pray. Amen.

    7. Christmas Worship Intercessory Prayer

    Lord Jesus at night right on Christmas Eve we celebrate Your birthday into the world. With glorious love, let us always follow directions and be a light to our neighbors.

    Bless our Church for preparing this Christmas event in the best possible way. Bless every pastor, caretaker and also all the congregation who have taken part in this celebration of Your birth. Bestow your blessings and mercy and beautiful love for us.

    Always give peace in every Christmas and New Year celebration that will be held around the world. May this warning always remind us of the meaning of holy birth for Christ’s redemption work. Thank you almighty Father. Amen.

    8. Intercessory Prayer Asking for Ease of Life

    Lord Jesus, who is full of blessings and your inclusion to all of us, bestow ease on all of our work affairs so that we can live in prosperity.

    Expand our steps and open the door of Your miracle for the hope of all of us who are in this place. Lord Jesus, bless all of us here and all the people who support our worship activities whenever needed.

    You always give us what we need at the right time. But we are still too proud of what we have today. God, thank you for your endless love for us. Amen.

    9. Intercessory Prayer for Help

    Lord Jesus, the most merciful and merciful, open the way for all of us who are in this Church, we always need healthy bodies for us and our families.

    Lord Jesus, please maintain our good relationship with all the congregation in this Church so that we can help each other in our life’s difficulties and can become easier because of you.

    Jesus we pray to you and ask for your blessings for all of us here so that you will be given the best help in a difficult situation. Amen.

    10. Intercessory Prayer in Study

    Lord Jesus, We ask for Your guidance in carrying out our duties today. Direct your thoughts, your words and your actions so that in you we can start and finish well.

    Guide us so that we can learn in a spirit of love cheerfully, diligently and honestly so that we can work together with You and our friends. Make it easy for us when we have difficulties and difficulties so that we can solve them properly

    And keep us away from all carelessness and negligence. Make us not give up in facing all difficulties. In the rules of this holy spirit and for all time. Amen.

    Sinaumed’s is an explanation of Intercessory Prayer that you can find out from the understanding, meaning to examples of prayer. It would be nice if we always pray for our friends or other people who need our prayers.

    If Sinaumed’s wants to read a book about prayers or other books, Sinaumed’s can read and buy the book at sinaumedia.com .

    To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

    Author: Christin Devina

  • Intentions to take a postpartum bath, starting from understanding it and its procedures

    Intention to take a postpartum bath – As you know, after giving birth, a mother will
    certainly experience a postpartum period.     The postpartum period for a Muslim is certainly not
    able to pray first.     Then, what is prohibited during childbirth? And how do you
    purify it?     Here’s an explanation.

    Definition of Nifas

    Puerperal is blood that comes out of the uterus due to childbirth or after childbirth.
    Postpartum blood comes out for 40 days after giving birth. During the postpartum
    period, a woman is prohibited from praying, fasting and having sex with her husband.

    Puerperal in terms of language comes from the word “na fi sa” which means giving birth.
    Postpartum blood is blood that is stuck and cannot get out of the uterus during pregnancy.
    When giving birth, the blood will come out little by little.

    Blood that comes out before giving birth, accompanied by signs of birth, is also known as puerperal blood.
    In this case, the jurists limit two or three days before giving birth. According to
    Imam Asy-Syafi’i, postpartum blood is blood that comes out of the womb of a woman who previously experienced
    pregnancy, even though the blood that comes out is only a clot of blood.

    The least postpartum period is a few moments after the birth process. Meanwhile, the longest
    postpartum period is forty days, if the postpartum period is more than forty days and coincides with the
    arrival of menstruation before pregnancy, then the days that are more than forty days are
    menstruation.

    However, if the blood that comes out is not during menstruation, then the blood is istihadhah (disease).
    The laws for women who are in childbirth are the same as those for women who are
    menstruating.

    In general, the limit for the duration of the puerperium is 40 days, starting from delivery or before
    delivery accompanied by signs of birth.     Umm Salamah Ra. said, ”
    Women experienced the puerperium during the time of Rasulullah SAW. is for 40
    days”.     (HR. Tirmidhi).

    There are two kinds of blood that comes out of a pregnant woman due to a miscarriage. First,
    it is said to be postpartum blood when what comes out is in human form.     So, women are obliged
    to leave prayer, cannot fast, and cannot have sex with their husbands.

    Second, it is said that blood is damaged (facade) if what comes out is not in human form. In
    this case, the blood that comes out is not said to be postpartum blood, but istihadhah (disease)
    blood.

    “When the nutfah (zygote) has passed forty-two nights (in other narrations; forty nights), then Allah SWT.
    Sent an angel to him, then he formed the nutfah. He made his hearing, his sight, his
    skin, his flesh and his bones.     Then, the angel asked (to Allah SWT), ” O my
    Lord, will he (You determine) to be male or female?”     then Allah then gives a decision “.
    (HR. Muslim).

    The hadith explains that the beginning of the creation of the fetus and the appearance of its limbs after 40 days
    has passed and the fetus is in human form.

    Imam Asy-Syafi’i explained the blood of the puerperium as follows: “ The blood of the puerperal is
    the blood that comes out of the woman’s womb after giving birth.     It’s the same whether
    those who are born are alive or dead, intact or lacking (disabled)”.

    Some scholars say that childbirth during caesarean delivery is the same as that of other women who
    experience childbirth due to normal delivery.     If he sees that his genitals are bleeding, he
    must leave prayer and fasting until he is pure.     However, if she does not see that her genitals
    are bleeding, then she must bathe (purify), pray and fast like a pure woman.

    Definition of Obligatory Bathing for Postpartum or
    Menstruation

    Menstruation, menstruation or menstruation are physiological changes in a woman’s body that occur periodically
    and are influenced by reproductive hormones, either FSH-Estrogen or LH-Progesterone.

    This period is important in terms of reproduction. In humans, this usually occurs every month
    from menarche (first menstruation) to menopause (menstruation stops).

    In women the average menstrual cycle occurs around 28 days, although this is generally accepted, but not all
    women have the same menstrual cycle, sometimes cycles occur every 21 days to 30 days.

    Usually, menstruation occurs on average 5 days, sometimes menstruation can also occur around 2 days to 7
    days, a maximum of 15 days.     If the blood comes out more than 15 days, then it includes blood
    disease.     Generally, blood loss due to menstruation is 10 mL to 80 mL per day but usually with
    an average of 35 mL per day.

    Mandatory bathing is bathing done to remove hadas or major uncleanness. Some things that
    oblige a person to take a junub bath are when finishing menstruation or childbirth, after having intercourse
    with husband and wife, and discharge of semen.

    Bathing must be done so that a person is pure from major hadas before he worships before Allah.
    For verily Allah loves those who are clean and pure.

    So, people who are in childbirth or menstruating are not required to perform acts of worship such as
    praying, fasting, having intercourse and reading or touching the Qur’an before they are truly pure.
    To purify themselves, women must read the obligatory bath prayer after menstruation.

    A sign that menstruation is over is that there are no more blood spots, even if it’s only one line.
    Apart from that, it could also be the appearance of white lumps or white mucus coming out of the
    uterus (farji’).     To find out for sure, Aisyah RA suggested using cotton that was put in the
    farji’.

    The difference between Menstruation, Nifas and Istihadhah

    Asy-Syaikh Abdurrahman bin Nashir As-Sa’di said “ The three kinds of blood come out of one path.
    But the names are different, and so are the laws, because of the different causes of their
    discharge.”     As for puerperal blood, the reason is clear, namely blood that comes out
    of a woman due to childbirth.

    1. Postpartum

    This puerperal blood is the remaining blood that is stuck in the uterus during pregnancy. When
    a woman has given birth to her womb, the blood comes out little by little.     It could be a
    long/long exit time, and sometimes it’s short.     There is no minimum limit for this postpartum
    period.

    As for the maximum time according to the Hambali school of thought, it is 40 days, and if more than 40 days the
    blood still comes out while it does not coincide with the customary arrival of menstruation, then the blood is
    istihadhah blood. .

    2. Menstruation

    Blood that comes out not because of childbirth is menstrual blood as a decree and sunnatullah for a woman.
    Where if the woman is able to get pregnant and give birth, then in general her menstruation will
    come at certain times, according to the circumstances and habits of the woman.     A pregnant woman
    generally does not experience menstruation, because the fetus she contains gets the nutrients with the
    retained blood.

    The discharge of menstrual blood shows the woman’s health and normalcy. On the other hand, the
    absence of menstrual blood indicates a woman’s unhealthy and abnormal condition.

    This meaning is agreed upon by experts in syar’i and medical sciences, even understood by human knowledge
    and habits.     Their experience shows this. That’s why when giving the definition of
    menstruation, scholars say that menstruation is natural blood that comes out of a woman at understandable
    times.

    According to the valid opinion, there is no minimum age limit for a woman to have menstruation.
    Likewise, the minimum time limit for the duration of menstruation, as there is no maximum limit.
    There is also no minimum limit for the sacred period between two menstruations.

    Based on the existing zahir texts of the syar’i, and zahir from the practice of the Muslims it is stated that
    menstruation is the presence of blood, and what is called sacred is the absence of blood even though the time
    increases or decreases, backwards or forwards,

    3. Istihadhah

    As for istihadhah, it is blood that comes out of a woman out of habit and naturalness, due to illness or
    something like that.     If a woman continues to bleed from her genitals without stopping, you can
    find out whether the blood is menstrual blood or istihadhah blood in the following three ways in
    sequence:

    1. If she has a habit of menstruating in a time that is not long enough. Meanwhile, if the
      menstrual period exceeds the usual, it is certain that the area is istihadhah blood.
    2. If it turns out that the woman does not have ‘adat’ and the blood can be distinguished, at some times
      the blood is thick/thick and at other times thin/watery, or at some times the blood is black, at other
      times it is red, or at some times the blood smells rotten/not delicious and at other times it is not
      rotten, then blood that is thick/thick, black in color, and has a foul smell is menstrual blood.
      The other is the blood of istihadhah.
    3. If the woman does not have an ‘adah and cannot distinguish the blood that comes out of her genitals, then in
      every month (during the period of bleeding) she has her period for six or seven days because there are
      hadiths that are related in this regard.

    Then, he took a bath after the six or seven days were over even though the blood was still coming out.
    As much as possible he plugs the place where the blood is coming out (if the blood continues to
    flow) and makes ablution every time he wants to pray.

    Things Prohibited to Do During
    Postpartum and Menstruation

    All that is not permissible during menstruation, it is also not permissible during childbirth, namely prayer,
    fasting, touching and reading the Qur’an, thawaf and sexual intercourse.

    Here are some explanations:

    1. Prayer The Prophet Muhammad saw said, “When menstruation starts, leave the prayer.”
    2. Tawaf The Prophet Muhammad saw said, “Do all what needs to be done when you are performing the pilgrimage,
      but don’t do the tawaf around the Kaaba before you become pure again.”
    3. Having a husband and wife relationship. As Allah says in QS Al-Baqarah: 222 which means
      “They ask you about menstruation. Say, “Menstruation is dirt”.
      Therefore, you should abstain from (not having intercourse) with women during
      their menstruation;       and do not approach them before they are holy. When
      they are pure, then interfere with them where Allah has commanded you.       Indeed, Allah
      loves those who repent and purify themselves.
    4. Reading the Al-Qur’an is highly recommended for women who are not pure, menstruating or postpartum,
      not to read the Al-Quran orally, unless needed.       Dhikr, or saying Allahu Akbar,
      Alhamdulillah, Subhanallah, Bismillah, listening to people reciting the Qur’an, praying, or saying Amin
      to other people’s prayers, all of that is not prohibited.
    5. I’tikaf in the mosque.
    6. Asking her husband for a divorce, or vice versa.

    Intentions and Procedures for Postpartum Bathing

    From the discussion above, it can be said that puerperium is blood that comes out after giving birth.
    After discussing the meaning of childbirth, the next discussion is the intention and procedures for
    bathing postpartum.     The following is the intention for obligatory bathing after childbirth and
    menstruation along with the procedure:

    Intention to take a bath after childbirth

    How to take a mandatory shower after childbirth is almost the same as how to take a mandatory shower after
    menstruation.     It’s just that the prayer or intention that was read earlier is slightly
    different.

    Nawaitul ghusla liraf’il hadatsil nifas lillahi Ta’ala.

    Meaning: “I intend to take a mandatory bath to purify the large hadas from the puerperium because of Allah
    Ta’ala.”

    Postpartum Bath Procedures

    After knowing the intention, it is also necessary to know the procedures for bathing the puerperium.
    As for the procedures for bathing the puerperium, among others.

    1. Reading the intention to take a bath after the puerperium is obligatory
    2. Wash both hands three times
    3. Cleaning the parts around the reproductive organs
    4. Back to washing hands with soap
    5. Take ablution
    6. Start by wetting your head down to the base of your hair three times
    7. Part the hair using your fingers
    8. Wet the whole body evenly

    Intentions and Mandatory Bathing Procedures After
    Menstruation

    Below will be given an explanation of the intention and procedures for obligatory bathing after menstruation.

    1. The intention to bathe after menstruation is mandatory

    Menstruation or menstruation is an event of blood coming out of the uterus of a woman who has reached
    adulthood or baligh.     When a woman is in a state of menstruation, her body will be dirty or
    impure.     So, after the completion of the menstrual period, women are obliged to take a big
    bath.

    Meaning: “I intend to take a mandatory bath to remove large hadas caused by menstruation because of Allah
    ta’ala.”

    2. Mandatory Bathing Procedures After Menstruation

    After knowing the intention of obligatory bathing after menstruation, so that it is more complete an explanation
    will be given regarding the procedures for obligatory bathing after menstruation.

    1. Read basmalah.
    2. Reading the intention of bathing is mandatory.
      Reading the prayer of intention at the
      beginning of the law is obligatory.       This prayer of intention is what distinguishes
      menstrual baths from ordinary baths.       How to read this prayer for the intention of
      bathing menstruation can be silent or out loud.
    3. Wash your hands two or three times.
    4. Flushing the entire left hand with the right hand.
    5. Washing the genitals and other parts with the left hand.
    6. Washing hands after cleaning genitals with soap.
      Clean the genitals with the dirt that sticks
      around them with your left hand.       The parts of the body that are usually dirty and
      hidden are the genitals, rectum, under the armpits, navel, and so
      on.
      After cleaning the genitals, wash your hands by rubbing them with
      dirt or soap.       After cleaning the dirty and hidden body parts, hands need to be washed
      again.
      The procedure for bathing is obligatory after the next menstruation,
      namely rubbing your hands on the ground or walls, then rinsing with water directly or washing them with
      soap and then rinsing.
    7. Perfect ablution like when you want to pray.
    8. When carrying out the mandatory bathing procedure after menstruation, make sure that all skin folds and
      hidden parts are also cleaned.
    9. Pour water over the head three times.
    10. Pouring water on the head three times to the base of the hair and/or scalp by rubbing.
    11. Pouring water all over the body starting from the right contents then to the left side.

    In Islam, the discharge of blood in the female genital area is a big hadas. Therefore, women
    are not allowed to pray, fast, have intercourse, hold and read the Koran.     Women must clean
    themselves first by taking a mandatory bath, then they can perform prayers, read the Koran, have
    intercourse, and fast.

    Thus the discussion about childbirth, the intention to bathe after childbirth to menstruation.
    Hopefully this article is useful for Sinaumed’s.

    To get more information, Sinaumed’s can read books available at sinaumedia.com .
    As #FriendsWithoutLimits we always try to give the best. To support Sinaumed’s in
    adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading
    information.

  • Intentions to Change Fasting and Procedures for Making Up the Fasting of Ramadan

    Intention to Change Fasting – For Muslims, enduring hunger and thirst from sunrise to sunset is an activity that is better known as fasting. Fasting itself is mandatory and some are sunnah.

    Fasting is obligatory in Islam, it is in the month of Ramadan and if it is abandoned, it must be paid for at a later date. As for the intention of fasting to replace the obligatory fast, not all Muslims know about it. On this occasion, we will discuss the intention of fasting for Ramadan and the procedure for making up Ramadan fasts.

    Understanding Fasting

    Before discussing the intention to replace the obligatory fast, we will discuss the meaning of fasting first.

    For Muslims must know about fasting. Fasting is worship that requires humans to carry out worship to hold hunger, thirst, and everything based on Islamic law. Fasting is often carried out by Muslims in order to fulfill the obligatory worship and Sunnah in Islam.

    In Islam, fasting is one of the obligatory acts of worship because it is proven by the fact that fasting is one of the pillars of Islam, which in this case is third.

    Obligatory fasting in Islam is fasting during Ramadan. As the name implies, this Ramadan fasting is carried out in the month of Ramadan when it enters the 1st of the month of Ramadan according to the Hijri calendar.

    Literally, the implementation of Ramadan fasting is carried out for a full month in Ramadan, which means around 29-30 days. In Islam, to carry out fasting, Muslims are obliged to refrain from hunger, thirst and various things that have the potential to cancel fasting.

    The period of fasting itself begins at sunrise which is marked by the entry of the Subuh call to prayer and ends when the sun has set which is marked by the call to prayer for Maghrib. As stated above that fasting is one of the acts of worship that is carried out by enduring hunger and thirst by hoping for the pleasure of Allah SWT alone.

    In addition, fasting itself has other meanings, both the general understanding and the meaning of fasting in Islam.

    In general, fasting is an activity that is considered as a voluntary activity carried out by refraining from food, drink or both, bad behavior and all things that have the potential to break the fast.

    Pure fasting is usually done by refraining from eating and drinking within one day or for 24 hours, or it can also be several days. The length of this fasting period depends on the conditions of the fast.

    Please note that there are other fasts that only limit a person from consuming certain substances or foods. In addition, we also need to know that fasting can also limit a person from various activities related to daily activities or sexual activity.

    Because generally fasting is carried out to perform worship in the Islamic religion, when carrying out fasting the aim is to increase our faith as Muslims in Allah.

    Fasting with such a purpose is usually carried out by someone who has often meditated or monks. In conclusion, fasting is done to restrain oneself by restraining oneself from various kinds of goals and desires.

    In Islam, fasting is often interpreted as an activity that is very useful for suppressing or restraining worldly desires in humans. According to Islam, fasting is called Shaum which comes from Arabic which is an obligatory worship to be carried out when the month of Ramadan has arrived. Therefore, Muslims, especially men, may not leave fasting if their bodies are still healthy.

    Fasting is also carried out for a full month, then it will be closed with the celebration of Eid al-Fitr. The implementation of fasting in accordance with Islamic law is to refrain from eating, drinking and all actions that can break the fast from sunrise to sunset.

    When you want to carry out the obligatory fast, it must begin with the intention that has been stated in the holy book of the Qur’an. Fasting is intended to be able to form and instill exemplary attitudes and increase a Muslim’s piety to Allah SWT.

    Fasting itself is a translation of the original term which comes from Arabic, namely the word Shaum . The word literally means to prevent or restrain.

     

     

    Types of Fasting in Islam

    Fasting in Islam is divided into two laws, namely obligatory fasting and sunnah fasting.

    Compulsory Fasting

    Compulsory fasting is a type of fast that must be observed by Muslims. If a Muslim performs this fast, then he will get a reward. On the other hand, if Muslims do not observe this type of fast, they will be subject to sin. As for what is included in the obligatory fasting in Islam, namely:

    • The obligatory fasting of Ramadan, namely the fasting of Ramadan is carried out throughout the holy month of Ramadan, with an amount of approximately 29 to 30 days.
    • Fasting caused by vows. By making a vow, worship which was originally ruled by sunnah or fardhu kifayah becomes obligatory for that person.
    • Fasting fine or expiation. Penalty fasting is a fast of penance for sins. Kafarat fasting is fasting that is obligatory for someone who intentionally has sex during the day while fasting during Ramadan.
    • Alternate fasting or qadha fasting of Ramadan

    sunnah fasting

    Sunnah fasting is a type of fasting that if done will get a reward. But if you don’t do it, you won’t get sin and reward. The following is a list of fasts that are included in sunnah fasting, namely:

    • Fasting Monday Thursday
    • The six-day sunnah fasting is carried out in the month of Shawwal, except during Eid al-Fitr.
    • Sunnah Fasting of Arafah which is carried out on the 9th of Dzulhijjah for Muslims who do not perform the pilgrimage.
    • Tarwiyah fasting on the 8th of Dzulhijah for Muslims who do not perform the pilgrimage.
    • Fasting of David or a day of fasting a day not, this fast is carried out to emulate the fast of the Prophet David.
    • Tasu’a fast on the 9th of Muharram.
    • Ashura fast on 10 Muharram.
    • Yaumul Bidh fast, around the 13th, 14th and 15th of each month.
    • The Nisfu Sha’ban fast is held in the middle of the month of Sha’ban.
    • Asyhurul Hurum fasting which is done in the month of Dzulqa’dah, Dzulhijjah, Muharram and the month of Rajab.

    Groups of People Who Can Leave Fasting

    Fasting in the month of Ramadan is certainly an obligation for all Muslims who have reached puberty or are adults. However, there are some Muslims who may not be able to fast for the entire month during the month of Ramadan.

    Ramadan fasting is mandatory for all Muslims who meet the requirements. However, for those who cannot complete the full Ramadan fast, Allah SWT provides relief for his people by fasting qadha.

    It’s just that, someone may leave the fast of Ramadan due to certain circumstances. Women who are menstruating cannot fast, someone who is sick is certainly not obliged to fast, as well as those who are on a journey. Here are some people who may leave Ramadan fasting along with their explanations.

    There are four groups that are allowed not to fast during Ramadan and one group that is prohibited from fasting. Even though it is permissible not to fast, these four groups are still required to make up for their fast at a later date. Here are four groups that are allowed to leave fasting:

    1. A sick person

    Sick people who are allowed not to fast are sick people who, when fasting, can worsen the condition in question. Although not fasting, but the person must pay for the fast.

    2. People who are on a long journey

    The Prophet Muhammad SAW said in a hadith narrated by Muslim, “The Prophet sallallaahu ‘alaihi wasallam while traveling saw people jostling. Then, there is someone who is given shade. Then the Prophet Shallallahu ‘alaihi wasallam said, “Who is this?” People also say, “This is a person who is fasting”. Then the Prophet sallallaahu ‘alaihi wasallam said, “It is not good for someone to fast when he is traveling”.

    So, if someone is traveling long distances while fasting, it is permissible not to fast if his condition is severe and difficult. However, the person is obliged to make up for his fast at a later date.

    3. Elderly people

    Parents who are unable to fast are given leeway not to fast. Instead, the person is required to pay fidyah, namely by feeding the poor every time that person is not fasting. The size of one fidyah is half a sha’ , dates or wheat or rice, which is equal to 1.5 kg of rice.

    4. Pregnant and lactating women

    The Prophet said in the hadith narrated by Ahmad, “Indeed, Allah ‘azza wa Kalla removes half of the prayer from the traveler. Allah also eliminates fasting on travelers, pregnant women and nursing women.

    If a mother who is pregnant and breastfeeding is unable to fast, Allah makes it easy for her not to fast and make up for it at a later date. While one group prohibited from fasting is women in a state of menstruation and childbirth. The Prophet said in the hadith of Bukhari’s history, “Isn’t that during menstruation, a woman doesn’t pray and also doesn’t fast. This is the lack of religion.”

    Women who are menstruating and postpartum are prohibited from fasting during these menstrual and postpartum periods. However, they still have to make up for fasting at a later date.

    Even though it is permissible not to fast during Ramadan, you must make up for it on another day after Ramadan. That is, the debt of fasting must be paid according to the number of missed fasts. This fast is also known as the qada fast. Replacing the Ramadan fast should be done immediately so you don’t forget, so it doesn’t become a sin in the future.

    There is no need to fast consecutively, so the schedule can be adjusted according to one’s own abilities. The procedure for paying the debt of fasting is the same as fasting in general. This activity begins with reading the intention to pay the debt of fasting at night or at dawn.

    The intention to pay the debt of fasting is different from the intention to fast during Ramadan. The intention to pay the debt of fasting must be said because the intention is a mandatory requirement of the fast itself. If you have a fasting debt, pay attention to the reading of the intention of fasting to pay off the debt, along with the procedures summarized in various sources.

     

     

    Understanding and Procedures for Compulsory Fasting

    For Muslims who want to pay their fasting debts, they can do it on any day, as long as that day is not an unlawful day for fasting or, it can also be done on Monday or Thursday to get several fasting rewards at once.

    There are two opinions of scholars regarding the payment of qada fasting. First, the deadline for making up the fasts of Ramadan is until the next Ramadan fast comes. In this case, if someone does not make up the fasting of Ramadan until the next Ramadan arrives, then he is sinful.

    On the other hand, the person is still obliged to make up his fast. In addition, he is also obliged to give fidyah to the poor as much as one mud in every day of fasting as a ransom for negligence because he has passed the deadline for making up the fasts of Ramadan.

    The second opinion is that there is no deadline for making up the fasts of Ramadan. This opinion is the opinion of Hanafiyah scholars, who say that the fasting of Ramadan can be made up at any time, either after the abandoned fasting year of Ramadan or the following years.

    According to Hanafiyah scholars, if a person does not make up the fasts of Ramadan until the next Ramadan fast arrives, then he is not sinful and he is not obliged to give fidyah. So, it is permissible to make up the fast at any time, without a certain deadline.

    Intentions to Change Fasting and Procedures to Change Ramadan Fasts Due to Menstruation, Long Travels, and Sickness

    The reading of the intention to fast for Ramadan due to menstruation is the same as the intention to make up the fast due to other emergency factors such as illness, long trips and so on. The reading is:

    نَوَيْتُ صَوْمَ غَدٍ عَنْ قَضَاءِ فَرْضِ شَهْرِ رَمَضَانَ لِلهِ تَعَالَى

    Latin pronunciation: Nawaitu shauma ghodin an qadha’i fardhi syahri Ramadhana lillahi ta’ala.

    Meaning: “I intend to face the fasting month of Ramadan tomorrow because of Allah SWT”.

    The main thing in replacing Ramadan fasting is intention. After making the intention, the Muslim community in question may not do things that are prohibited, and continue to carry out other obligations, such as praying. The qadha fast ends when the Maghrib call to prayer resounds. The prayer for breaking the fast is as follows:

    Allah

    Latin reading: Allahumma lakasumtu wabika amantu wa’ alaa rizqika afthortu birohmatika yaa arhamar roohimiin .

    Meaning: O Allah because of You I fast, with You I believe. To You I surrender and with Your sustenance I break my fast (fasting), with Your mercy, O Allah, the Most Merciful God.

    It is better if the fasting of Ramadan qadha is done as soon as possible. Even so, in the book Smart Fasting Obligatory and Sunnah written by Nur Solikhin, there are two opinions regarding the order of its implementation, namely:

    1. If the fasts are missed consecutively, they must be replaced sequentially
    2. Qadha fasting does not have to be carried out sequentially.

    The Meaning of Sacrificing Fasting

    The person who is obliged to perform the expiation of fasting is the person who intentionally has sexual intercourse through the genitals or anus. Meanwhile, the person who has sexual intercourse is not subject to a fine for expiation. This applies to both men and women.

    The person who is obliged to fast for expiation is for the person who deliberately breaks his fast with intercourse. Where the person has intercourse even though he knows he is fasting and knows that this act is prohibited during fasting.

    Someone who is obliged to replace a fine or expiate fasting is a person who has had special intercourse during the month of Ramadan. Sexual intercourse in question also includes anal sex, both with humans, corpses and animals, even though sperm does not come out.

    Fines or expatriate fasting are imposed with clear and unquestionable time rules. Where someone has intercourse during the day during Ramadan, it is different if it is already night time, then it is legal for him to have sexual activity.

    Intentions to replace fasting and procedures for changing expatriate fasting

    1. Reading Intentions

    The intention of fasting instead of what is recited for someone who wants to fast kifarat is:

    ‘Nawaitu shauma ghadin likafarati fardlon lillahi ta’ala’.

    Meaning: “I intend to fast tomorrow to carry out fardhu expiation because of Allah Ta’ala.”

    2. Doing Sahur

    Sahur in exchange for fasting for expiation is almost the same as fasting in general, that is, it is not permissible to eat, drink, and things that are prohibited during fasting, from the dawn call to prayer to the Maghrib call to prayer.

    3. Resist Self Lust

    A person who replaces the fast of expiation must be able to restrain his desires so that the fast is not invalidated.

    4. Iftar

    Break the fast according to the advice of the Islamic religion so that you can keep your body healthy.

     

    Sinaumed’s can understand more about fasting by reading books that are available at www.sinaumedia.com . As #Friends Without Limits, sinaumedia always provides the best products, so you have #MoreWithReading information.

  • Intentions, Terms, and Pillars of the Complete Body Prayer

    Pillars of the Body Prayer – The funeral prayer is one of the fardhu kifayah or collective obligations. Therefore, if one person somewhere has carried out the obligation of the funeral prayer, then the obligation for other people has dropped.

    Even so, carrying out the funeral prayer is a recommendation for anyone who knows that a Muslim relative has died. When going to carry out the funeral prayer, there are several pillars that must be carried out, the goal is that the funeral prayer is valid. The following are the complete intentions, terms and pillars of the funeral prayer.

    Requirements for the funeral prayer

    There are several conditions for the funeral prayer that you need to know, here are some of the conditions.

    • As is the case when performing the obligatory and sunnah prayers, when performing the funeral prayer one must cover the private parts, be clean from small and large hadas, be pure in terms of clothing, body and place and must face the Qibla.
    • The corpse that will be prayed must have been washed and shrouded in accordance with the Shari’a.
    • The location of the corpse that will be prayed is next to the Qibla of the person praying it. Except when the corpse prayer is performed over the grave or the unseen prayer.

    The intention of the funeral prayer

    The intention to perform the funeral prayer can be recited in the heart and must coincide with the implementation of takbiratul ihram when praying, as is the case when reading the intention when performing fardhu prayers.

    The following is the pronunciation of the intention to perform the funeral prayer, alone and the male body.

    Ushalli ‘alâ hâdzal mayyiti fardlan lillâhi ta’âlâ 

    Meaning: I intend to perform this man’s funeral prayer fardhu because of Allah Ta’ala.

    If the corpse to be prayed for is a woman, then the following is the intention to perform the funeral prayer.

    Ushalli ‘alâ hâdzihil mayyitati fardlan lillâhi ta’âlâ

    Meaning: I intend to carry out this woman’s funeral prayer fardhu because of Allah Ta’aala.

    When carrying out the funeral prayer in congregation and Sinaumed’s becomes a congregation, then the following are the intentions that must be recited in the heart when carrying out the funeral prayer, whether the corpse is male or female.

    Ushalli ‘alâ man shalla ‘alaihil imâmu ma’mûman fardlan lillâhi ta’âlâ

    Meaning: I intend to perform prayers over the bodies that are prayed by the priest, fardhu because of Allah Ta’ala.

    Pillars of Performing the Body Prayer

    When going to carry out the funeral prayer, there are several pillars that must be carried out so that the funeral prayer is valid and acceptable to Allah. According to Sheikh Muhammad Nawawi Al Bantani, in a book he wrote entitled Tausyih ala Ibni Qasim explains several pillars of the funeral prayer. Here’s an explanation. 

    1. Read intent

    As previously explained, when going to perform the funeral prayer, the intention must be recited in the heart along with the takbiratul ihram.

     

    2. Stand up 

    When performing the funeral prayer, it is obligatory to perform the prayer standing up. This is because the funeral prayer is included in the class of fardhu prayer, whereas when performing fardhu prayer it is obligatory to carry it out standing up.

    However, of course the law of praying standing is different if someone is unable to stand. Therefore, he can perform the funeral prayer sitting down, as is the rule when performing the five daily obligatory prayers.

    3. Perform takbir four times

    When carrying out the funeral prayer, it is included in it to say the takbir four times, including the takbir said when takbiratul ihram.

    Therefore, the funeral prayer will be invalid if the number of takbirs uttered is less than four takbirs. When reading the takbir, it is sunnah to raise both hands parallel to the two shoulders, this movement is the same as when doing the takbir in the five daily fardhu prayers.

    4. Read Surah Al Fatihah

    As with the fardhu prayer, when carrying out the funeral prayer it is obligatory to read the letter al-Fatihah. Read the letter al-Fatihah when the funeral prayer is performed after the first takbir or when takbiratul ihram.

    When reading Surah Al-Fatihah, it is best to lower your voice or read slowly. Reading slowly what is meant is, if you can only hear the reading of the letter al Fatihah yourself, even though the funeral prayer is performed at night.

    According to the sunnah, before reading the letter al Fatihah after takbiratul ihram , it is better to read ta’awwudz in accordance with the strongest opinion, but when praying the body is not sunnah to read iftitah prayers such as fardhu prayers.

    In addition, the funeral prayer should be carried out briefly, therefore it is better not to read the iftitah prayer because it is considered too long to read when carrying out the funeral prayer.

    5. Read blessings

    The fifth pillar of the funeral prayer is reading the sholawat which is read after saying the second takbir. At the funeral prayer, the sholawat can be read briefly, at a minimum, it is in accordance with the validity of the funeral prayer, namely the following.

    Allâhumma shalli ‘alâ sayyidinâ Muhammad

    Meaning: O Allah, give abundance of mercy to the Prophet Muhammad.

    Meanwhile, the perfect sholawat reading is the Abrahamic sholawat, which is a prayer that is read at the end of the final tasyahud when the fardhu prayer is recited, along with the Abrahamic sholawat reading.

    Allâhumma shalli ‘alâ sayyidinâ Muhammad wa ‘alâ âli sayyidinâ Muhammad, kamâ shallaita ‘alâ sayyidinâ Ibrâhîm wa ‘alâ âli sayyidinâ Ibrâhim, wa bârik ‘alâ sayyidinâ Muhammad, wa ‘alâ âli sayyidinâ Muhammad, kamâ bârakta ‘alâ sayyidina Ibrâhîm wa ‘alâ âli sayyidinâ Ibrâhîm fil ‘âlamîna innaka hamîdun majîd.

    It means:

    O Allah, give abundance of grace to the Prophet Muhammad and to the family of the Prophet Muhammad. As You gave an abundance of grace to Prophet Abraham and the families of Prophet Abraham. Give abundance and blessings to the Prophet Muhammad and to the family of the Prophet Muhammad, as You have given an abundance of blessings to the Prophet Abraham and to the families of the Prophet Abraham. Because actually in this universe, only You are the Most Praised and the Most Great.

    6. Pray for the corpse that is prayed for

    The sixth pillar of the funeral prayer is to pray for the body that is prayed for. Praying for the corpse is done after the third takbir during the funeral prayer. Prayers for the bodies, can be read briefly, here is a short prayer for the bodies of men.

    Allâhumaghfir lahu

    Meaning: O Allah, forgive him men.

    Meanwhile, a short prayer when praying for a female body is as follows.

    Allâhumaghfir laâ

    Meaning: O Allah, forgive women.

    However, if you want to read a complete prayer for the body, of course it is permissible. Here is a prayer with the perfect reading for the body of the male sex.

    Allâhummaghfir lahu warhamhu wa ‘âfihi wa’fu anhu wa akrim nuzulahu wa wassi’ madkhalahu waghsilhu bilmâ’i wats tsalji wal baradi, wa naqqihi minal khathâyâ kamâ naqaita ats-tsauba al-abyadh minad danasi, wa abdilhu dâran khairan min dârihi wa ahlan khairan min experthi wa zaujan khairan min zaujihi wa adkhilhu al-jannata wa a’udhu min ‘adzâbil qabri wa min adzâbinnâr

    It means:

    O Allah, forgive him, have mercy on him, set him free and forgive him. Give him a glorious place, widen his grave and bathe him with water, snow or ice. Cleanse him from all faults, as You clean a white garment from all dirt. Then, give him a better home than the house he has in the world, give him a better family than his family in the world, and a better partner than his partner in the world. Then enter him into heaven and give him protection from the torment of the grave and the torment of hell.

    As for the complete prayer addressed to the woman’s corpse during the funeral prayer, it is as follows.

    Allâhummaghfir lahâ warhamhâ wa ‘âfihâ wa’fu anhâ wa akrim nuzulahâ wa wassi’ madkhalahâ waghsilhâ bilmâ’i wats tsalji wal baradi, wa naqqihâ minal khathâyâ kamâ naqaita ats-tsauba al-abyadh minad danasi, wa abdilhâ dâran khairan min dârihâ wa ahlan khairan min experthâ wa zaujan khairan min zaujihâ wa adkhilhâ al-jannata wa a’idzhâ min ‘adzâbil qabri wa min adzâbinnâr

    It means:

    O Allah, forgive him, have mercy on him, and set him free and forgive him. Give him a glorious place, widen his grave and bathe him with water, snow or ice. Cleanse himself from all faults, just as you clean a white shirt from all dirt. Then give him a better home than the house he has in the world, give him a better family than his family in the world, and a better partner than the partner he has in the world. Then, enter him into heaven and protect him from the torment of the grave and the torment of hell.

    After reading the complete prayer for the body according to gender, the person who prays can continue his prayer by saying the fourth takbir. After that, it is sunnah to read a prayer. Here’s the prayer.

    Prayer after the fourth takbir, for a male corpse.

    Allâhumma lâ tahrimnâ ajrahu wa la taftinna ba’dahu waghfir lanâ wa lahu

    It means:

    O Allah, do not forbid us the reward and do not give us slander or trials after his departure. Then forgive us and forgive him.

    Prayer after the fourth takbir, for a woman’s corpse.

    Allâhumma lâ tahrimnâ ajrahâ wa la taftinna ba’dahâ waghfir lanâ wa lahâ

    It means:

    O Allah, do not make it forbidden for us to reward and do not give us slander or trials after his departure. Forgive us and forgive him.

    7. Read greetings

    Greetings can be said after carrying out the fourth takbir and after reading the prayer said after the fourth takbir during the funeral prayer, if the person praying for the corpse reads the sunnah prayer.

    The reading of the greetings during the funeral prayer is the same as the reading of the greetings that are read when carrying out the five daily fardhu prayers. In addition, according to the sunnah when saying greetings, the face can be turned to the right during the first greeting. Then in the second greeting, the face can be turned to the left. This also applies when carrying out the funeral prayer.

    When reading greetings, it is recommended to read greetings perfectly without abbreviating them as follows.

    Peace be upon you, and Allah’s mercy and blessings 

    Meaning: may safety, love, and blessings that come from Allah will pour out on you.

    Those are the seven pillars that must be carried out when performing the funeral prayer. If one of the seven pillars is left out, it is feared that the funeral prayer will become invalid.

     

    Prayer for the Body When the Body’s Gender is Not Known

    Previously, Sinaumed’s already knew the correct intention and pillars to carry out the funeral prayer, both when the body being prayed for was male or female. So, what if you want to pray a corpse, but don’t know the gender of the corpse to pray for?

    According to scholars from the Syafi’iyah school of thought, when one does not know the gender of the corpse to be prayed over, it is free for someone to pray over the corpse. Both the people who recited the opinion that the body was a man or a woman.

    So, intentions, prayers and others can also be adjusted according to the assumptions of the person performing the funeral prayer. This law is also in the Mughnil Muhtaj Book .

    In Asy Syarbini’s book, Mughnil Muhtaj on page one page 343, it is explained about a corpse whose sex is unknown. The following is the description of the book.

    In qiyas, actually if it is not known whether the corpse is male or female, then the word corpse can be pronounced using the word mamluk or other similar pronunciations. Apart from that, it is permissible in prayer to use dhamir mudzakkar or men by wanting the word, namely As Syakhs or Al Mayyit. As well as, it is also permissible to use dhamir muannats or women by using the word al janazah. 

    In accordance with the opinion of scholars from the Shafi’iyah school, it is permissible to use dhamir ‘hu’ or ‘ha when reading a prayer after the third takbir.

    When using dhamir ‘hu’ in someone’s pronunciation in Arabic grammar, it will be classified as a mudzakkar pronunciation or a word that denotes a man. Apart from using dhamir ‘hu’, it is also permissible to say a prayer after the third takbir and use dhamir ‘ha’ in the pronunciation of the corpse because in Arabic grammar, it is classified as the word muannats which refers to women.

    Referring to the contents of the book, therefore the intention that can be pronounced to pray for the corpse if the gender is not known is to use the pronoun for deceased.

    As for the following intentions that can be uttered when going to perform the funeral prayer, if the sex of the corpse is not known, it is sufficient to read the following intention.

    Usholli ala hada mayyiti fardhu lillahi taala. 

    Meaning: I intend to pray for this deceased, as a fardhu prayer for Allah Ta’ala.

    So, by using the choice of the word corpse, it is enough to show the corpse in front and is considered sufficient. Although the person who will pray for him does not actually know the gender of the corpse.

    This is because the deceased’s kara in the intention of the funeral prayer is considered to accommodate the gender of the corpse. Both the corpses were male or female.

    That is an explanation of the intention, pillars and procedures for praying the funeral in accordance with Islamic law and also equipped with the method of praying the funeral, if the sex of the body to be prayed for is not known.

    If Sinaumed’s still wants to find out more about funeral prayers, readings or other cases such as wanting to pray for a corpse at a cemetery, Sinaumed’s can find information and material in the books available at sinaumedia.com

    As #Friends Without Limits, sinaumedia always provides a variety of interesting, original books for Sinaumed’s ! So what are you waiting for? Buy and own the book right now!

  • Intentions of the Votive Fast: Procedures, Consequences, and its Kinds

    Intention of Fasting Nazar – Nazar comes from Arabic which means promise. Promises made can be both good and bad. More specifically, a vow is a promise that we make to undertake an act of worship that was originally not obligatory to become obligatory. As we know that promises must be kept, let alone promises with Allah SWT. to perform an act of worship. If not definitely have to accept sanctions or consequences.

    Nazar was originally a sunnah fast, but it becomes an obligatory fast if someone promises or vows to perform worship because of a vow. Most of the scholars also say that votive fasts are obligatory fasts because of paying promises. However, a vow will not be valid if someone makes a vow on the basis of behavior that is permissible, makruh or unlawful.

    Regarding the vows, it has also been written in the hadith narrated by Bukhari, where Rasulullah SAW. said, “Whoever vows to obey Allah, then fulfill that vow. Whoever vows to disobey Allah, then do not disobey Him.” (Reported by Bukhari).

    Islam allows its followers to make vows. Even Allah SWT. He also praises those who make vows and fulfill their vows. Allah SWT. once said that, “And let them perfect their vows.” (QS Al-Hajj: 29).

    Al Quran Al-Faaiq : Color Tajweed And Translation A5 Hc. Equipped with Transliteration Guidelines, Waqf Signs, Sifir Signs, List of Sajdah Verses, Recitations of Prostration Prayer, Color Tajwid Guide, Asbabun Nujul, Fadhilah Verses, Al-Hadith, Adab of Reading Al-Quran, Prayer of Khatmil Quran.

    Intention of Nazar Fasting

    The intention of fasting vows can be said in the heart or verbally for someone who has made a vow before. In this case, votive fasts include acts of worship. A Muslim who wants to carry it out must read his intention first. Here is the intention of fasting vows.

    نَوَيْتُ صَوْمَ النَّذَرِ لِلّٰهِ تَعَالىَ

    Nawaitu shaumannadzri lillâhi ta’a a la

    Meaning: I intend to fast vows because of Allah ta’aala

    The intention of the votive fast must be recited at night, that is, the night before the votive fast. In the opinion of Fuqaha Syafii said that the votive fast will not be valid if someone reads his intention during the day.

    Ordinances of the Votive Fast

    This votive fast is the same as fasting in general, where we are required to endure hunger and thirst during fasting. In addition, we are also prohibited from doing things that break the fast from sunrise to sunset. For more details, the procedure is as follows.

    • It is obligatory to recite the intention of fasting vows at night before starting the fast;
    • Then, fasting begins with sunnah sahur before the time for imsak arrives;
    • Enduring hunger and thirst and other things that cancel it;
    • Then, breaking the fast at sunset or when the maghrib call to prayer resounds.

    After hearing the maghrib call to prayer, of course, you have to read a prayer to break your fast before eating the food. Here is the prayer for breaking the fast.

    اللهُمَّ لَكَ صُمْتُ وَعَلَى رِزْقِكَ أَفْطَرْتُ فَتَقَبَّلْ مَنِّي إِنَّكَ أَنْتَ السَمِيْعُ الْعَلِيِ

    Allâhumma laka shumtu wa ‘alâ rizqika afthartu, taqabbal minnii innaka antassamii’ul aliim

    Meaning: “O Allah, for You is my fast and for Your sustenance I break my fast, so accept it from me, verily You are All Hearing and All Knowing.”

    As it is said that those who are obliged to fast vows are those who make vows, or agreements with Allah SWT. for what he wants to do. If not, of course he must accept the consequences and sins, and must pay expiation.

    For example, someone vows that he will fast Monday – Thursday for two months if he is accepted at a college he wants. In this case fasting Monday – Thursday which was originally a sunnah fast becomes a mandatory fast because of a vow from that person.

    Not only for Monday – Thursday fasting, vows fasting can also be intended with other fasts such as David’s fast, Ayyamul Bidh fast (white days), Ashura fast (10 Muharam), Arafah fast (9 Zulhijah), six days of fasting in the month of Shawwal, and others. What is not permissible is the vow of fasting during Ramadan, because fasting during Ramadan is a mandatory fast for Muslims in the month of Ramadan.

    Kinds of Nazar

    In general, vows are divided into two, namely vows lajjaj and vows tabarrur. Here is an explanation of both.

    1. Nazar Lajjaj

    Nazar lajjaj is a vow that aims to motivate someone, prevent someone, or to convince someone about a news that has been delivered.

    An example of a vow that is intended as motivation is like, “If I don’t finish this reading book within three days then I will give charity worth IDR 500,000.” The vows that are spoken have a motivational basis for oneself. Where will he be excited to finish his reading book with that vow, because if not he has to pay the vow with alms worth IDR 500,000.00.

    The next example is a vow that aims to prevent, “If I am lazy to study again, I will give charity worth IDR 500,000.” This vow certainly means that someone is not lazy when studying. With this, someone who makes a vow will always study hard, because if not he will give charity worth Rp. 500,000.00.

    The next example is a vow with the aim of convincing someone about a news such as, “If the news that I convey is false, then I will help with your school assignments.” With someone making this vow, the other person will feel confident that the news he gets is true, even though he may not believe it at first.

    2. Nazar Tabarrur

    Nazar tabarrur is also known as votive mujazah. Nazar tabarrur is someone who intends to undertake a service ( qurbah ) without expecting anything else or by relying on it ( marghu fih ).

    An example of a tabarrur vow that does not expect anything else is something like, “I vow to give 1 million rupiah in alms.” After someone says this, it is obligatory for that person to give 1 million rupiah in charity if he already has the money.

    The obligation of the vow that he has said that wanting alms is a broad obligation, where a person is not obliged to immediately give alms, unless he is ready with the money he wants to give alms. However, if he is sure that he will not have 1 million rupiah other than that time, then he is obliged to donate the money before it runs out for other purposes.

    Then the example of tabarrur vows that are hung with something expected, such as “If Allah heals the disease in my body, then I will fast David for one month.” This means that if someone who makes a vow has recovered from his illness, then he is obliged to fast David for one month.

    This book explains the benefits of fasting Monday – Thursday and David’s fast. the benefits obtained include being able to stay young, the body becomes slimmer, more beautiful naturally, the body becomes healthy, is blessed with husnul khatimah, and enters heaven through the door of Ar-Royan.

    Violable and Unbreakable Votives

    Of the various vows, such as the lajjaj vow and the tabarrur vow, the vow that someone who has made a vow can break is the lajjaj vow. This is because the lajjaj vows have the objectives of the vower such as motivation, self-prevention, and to convince others.

    As for tabarrur vows, it does not appear that these vows can be violated. This is because the vows have a specific purpose, so a person who makes a vow must carry out his vows after his goal is achieved.

    In lajjaj vows, the three examples of his behavior can be violated, but of course he must pay a fine according to what he has vowed. As in a motivation vow, if a person does not reach his target then he must carry out his vow, the same goes for self-prevention vows and also vows with the aim of convincing others.

    When you say a lajjaj vow, you are given a choice when you break that vow. You can carry out as the vow says, for example donating 1 million rupiah in alms or you pay a fine of vows, namely yamin expiation .

    Even though someone who utters a lajjaj vow is given two choices when they break it, it is still best to have the one with more value. For example, if someone vows to give 1 million rupiahs in alms, while paying a penalty of expiation by feeding 10 poor people only costs 200 thousand rupiahs, then it is best to do what is promised. Vice versa.

    Consequences of Breaking the Votives

    Saying a vow is not an obligation, but if you make a vow then there will be obligations that you must fulfill according to the vow you made. If you violate the vows that have been spoken then you have to pay a penalty of expiation.

    Some scholars even say that making vows is something that is makruh. This is as written in a hadith which says that, “The Prophet Muhammad Saw. forbidding to say, vows are absolutely not able to refuse something, vows are only issued from people who are curmudgeonly or stingy.” (Reported by Bukhari).

    Another hadith in the hadith narrated by Abu Hurairah says that Rasulullah SAW. said, “Indeed, vows do not bring someone close to what Allah has not predestined.”

    “The outcome of the vows is what God wills. Nazar is only issued by people who are stingy. The person who made the vow took out treasure that he did not really want to spend.” (Reported by Bukhari).

    So, it’s better when you have made your vows, you should immediately pay what has been vowed or promised to Allah SWT. This must be done because Allah SWT. have granted your request and now it’s your turn to keep your promise.

    In QS Al-Hajj verse 29 it is also said that, “Then, let them remove the dirt that is on their bodies and let them complete their vows.”

    If someone has violated his vow, it is obligatory to pay the penalty for expiation which has been explained in QS Al-Maidah verse 89 which reads, “Allah will not punish you because of your unintentional oaths (to swear), but He will punish you because of your unintentional oaths. what you did on purpose. So, the expiation (fines for breaking an oath) is to feed ten poor people from the food you (usually) give to your family, clothe them, or free a slave.

    Whoever is unable to do so, then (his expiation) fasts three days. That is expiation of your oaths if you swear (and you break them). Keep your vows! Thus Allah explains to you His laws so that you may be grateful (to Him).”

    Following are details regarding the expiation fines that must be paid when violating a vow according to QS Al-Maidah verse 89.

    • Feeding 10 poor or underprivileged people;
    • Freed one slave;
    • Giving clothes to 10 poor or underprivileged people.

    If a person cannot carry out the payment of the fines of the three expatriates because of violating a vow, then someone who violates the vow must fast for three days.

    Conclusion

    Nazar is a promise, namely our promise to God to carry out an act, whether it’s worship or alms and other good things. When you want to make a vow, of course it must be based on intention, both in prayer and with a sincere heart. If someone makes a vow with bad intentions then the vow will not be valid.

    The procedure for fasting vows is the same as for other fasts. A person who fasts because of a vow must say his intention at night before fasting, then do sunnah sahur before imsak, hold back hunger and thirst and other things that break the fast, and also break the fast after the call to prayer echoes.

    Nazar is divided into two, namely Nazar Jallaj and Nazar Tabarrur. Both have different purposes. Nazar jalaj has a goal of self-motivation, self-defense, and convincing others. Meanwhile, vows of tabarrur aim to undertake an act of worship by placing hope behind it or not placing any hope, just making a vow.

    If you break your vows, of course you have to carry out what was said in your vows. However, if you don’t do it, you will have to pay the penalty of expiation that was mentioned earlier. If you can’t either then you have to be willing to fast for three days.

    • Procedure for Ablution
    • Names of Angels and Their Duties
    • Definition of Al-Quran and Hadith
    • Definition of Morals
    • Noble Qualities
    • Honest Behavior in Islam
    • Definition of Zakat
    • Pillars of Hajj
    • Understanding Faith In Angels
    • Understanding Aurat
    • List of 99 Asmaul Husna
    • Zakat Fitrah and Zakat Mal
    • Meaning of Tablighi
    • Definition of Zakat Mal
    • The Meaning of the Title Al-Amin Rasulullah SAW
    • Definition of Faith in Language and Terms

    Sinaumed’s, this is a brief explanation regarding the intention of the vows, the procedures, consequences, and also the types of vows. Nazar is certainly a good thing to do, but one must also be responsible for what has been said. If not, then the consequences must be to pay the fines that have been mentioned.

    For those of you who want to learn more about votives and other Islamic laws, you can buy and read books that have been provided by sinaumedia. sinaumedia as #Friends Without Limits has provided books that you can get. Come on Sinaumed’s, buy the book now!

    This book is structured “as” Islamic Law with its branches, but limited to Islamic Civil Law, all of which are an introduction to Islamic Law as a whole.

  • Intensive Reading: Definition, Purpose, Types, & How to Do It

    Intensive Reading – Interest in reading is still relatively low in Indonesia. It is not surprising that the government strongly supports reading awareness from an early age. In fact, one of the keys to the success of developed countries is determined by reading awareness.

    The importance of reading for everyone will provide a lot of knowledge. This knowledge is a mature and mature way of thinking and can be used as a preventive measure.

    Unfortunately, reading culture is still a dream. Speaking of reading, what is meant by intensive reading and how is it different from other ways of reading? Take this opportunity to focus on ascertaining the meaning, purpose, type and method of this intensive reading. The following is a complete explanation that Sinaumed’s can see through:

    Definition of Intensive Reading

    Intensive reading in general is reading activities carefully, thoroughly, and thoroughly. This reading model is used to find reading information. Reading in this way can also be interpreted as an in-depth reading process that involves trying to understand the reader’s problem and the idea of ​​the text from main ideas to descriptive ideas.

    Intensive reading is also known as careful and thorough reading. Why must be careful and thorough? The goal is to have a detailed and comprehensive understanding of the text we read. This reading technique is also commonly referred to as “reading to really learn”.

    Therefore, you need to concentrate as best you can to understand what you have read. So that’s why this discussion is suitable for those who are preparing for UTBK. With this reading technique, you can learn by digging up information in just one read.

    Intensive reading is different from extensive reading. What is the difference between these two ways of reading? The difference between extensive and intensive reading lies in the goal you want to achieve. For example, when Sinaumed’s wants to read widely for entertainment purposes. Although the purpose of reading in depth is for you to fully understand.

    1. Lalremruati

    According to Lalremruati, intensive reading is a type of reading that requires a person to read certain information. This way of reading can be compared to extensive reading. In reading, intensive techniques not only receive information, but also joy and entertainment from the messages read.

     2. Dance

    On the other hand, according to Tarigan, this way of reading does more than just read. So he defines reading with intensive techniques, including reading activities at a higher level. It understands and demands a longer retention period.

    Tarigan also divides this intensive reading into two forms, namely reading the content and reading the language. It is called content review reading because it emphasizes the content of the reading in detail. While reading the language on the other hand is an attempt to demand an understanding of the language used.

    3.Brown

    This is different from Brown’s view which defines this method as reading that requires high concentration. Reading creatively and carefully while reading intensively can be used for reading literature (linguistic studies) or reading critical content studies.

     

     

    Intensive Reading Goals

    Intensive reading is more than just understanding what the author is trying to convey. However, there are several other things you should know, such as the following goals:

    1. Understanding Reading

    The general purpose of reading in this way is to gain reading comprehension. The initial purpose of reading is to understand the content of the reading so that it can develop through other perspectives, perspectives, and experiences from new experiences.

    2. Knowing Structured Text Patterns

    Sometimes we read something based on desire. When we read intensively, whether we realize it or not, we will have knowledge about the structure of the text we read. Now, for literature students, reading in this way can be used to find text patterns and text structures. They practice a lot because it is useful for linguistics

    3. Understand the Author’s Purpose and Purpose

    The real meaning automatically obtained from reading this is to understand the contents of the message the author wants to convey. Whereas, when we talk about the author’s message, we are not only talking about the explicit message, but also what is called the implicit message.

    Especially if the message has not been publicly communicated by the author to the reader. Therefore, not all readers can understand the message. Only readers with extensive reading skills can view written messages.

    4. Become a Linguistic Means

    This linguistic goal is actually related to the study of literature and language. This way of reading can be used not only to gain knowledge and views that the author wants to convey, but also as a means of analyzing existing language structures. This is part of the purpose of reading this method and can indicate whether you are feeling conscious or unconscious. Then you can discuss the types of reading yourself from start to finish.

     

     

    Types of Intensive Reading

    As previously mentioned, according to Tarigan, there are two types of intensive reading as follows:

    1. Read the Contents

    Content reading is a reading activity by understanding the content with the aim of finding interesting, useful, and in-depth reading material. Understanding ideas and messages from writers requires skills in the form of accuracy, critical ability, understanding, and thinking.

    2. Reading Language

    Reading language is said to be a reading activity that requires the reader to understand the language used to compose the reading itself. This way of reading uni is also known as Language Reading and Literary Reading, if the reading is low on the voice or on the heart.

    Language reading studies are generally conducted to analyze linguistic aspects and literary values. According to Tarigan, there are two types of intensive reading. Which of the two types of reading above do Sinaumed’s do more often?

    3. Thorough Reading

    This reading is intended to provide a detailed understanding of the ideas contained in the reading text to identify the composition of the writing and the approach used by the author. Readers in this case must be able to see and relate existing ideas, both the ideas contained in the text and the ideas contained in each paragraph.

    4. Reading Comprehension

    Reading According to Tarigan (1986: 56), reading comprehension is a way of reading that is intended to understand literary standards and norms, critical reviews, written plays, and fictional models.

     

    5. Critical Reading

    Critical Reading is a type of reading that is thoughtful, deliberate, detailed, skeptical, analytical, and goes beyond faultfinding.

    6. Reading Ideas

    This method is a type of reading activity that aims to find, obtain, and use the ideas contained in the reading. According to Tarigan (1986: 56), reading ideas is a reading activity that aims to find answers or further questions from reading. What problems are discussed or explained in reading and what do the characters learn and do?

    7. Reading Foreign Languages

    Reading a foreign language at a lower level generally aims to improve speaking fluency. It also develops vocabulary at a broader level.

    8. Reading Literature

    Reading literature is an activity of reading literary works both for the sake of appreciation and research and research purposes.

     

     

    Intensive Reading Process

    Maybe some people think that reading aloud is just reading. You can see that there are several intensive centralized reading processes like the process below.

    1. Understanding

    The human brain is unique. The brain works the way we want it to. A simple example when reading is an obligation. For example, the teacher is required to read aloud in front of the class without paying attention to the content of the reading and the core message of the content. So let’s just read. The brain does not have the enthusiasm to record the important contents of the reading.

    Another example is the task of memorizing several paragraphs in a book. Oral and memory can memorize several paragraphs. The ability to remember does not necessarily correlate with the ability to understand the completed paragraphs. When understanding a passage, you cannot remember every word exactly.

    But you know the nature and meaning of the contents of the reading. From this we can conclude that intensive reading comprehension is a basic process that must be applied. Understanding itself is a form of interpretation or critical understanding, and we understand the information conveyed.

    2. Interpretation

    The second process of intensive reading is the process of interpretation. When we diligently read, our brain is in a state of focus. If we focus and understand all the sentences conveyed, our brain will automatically think and continue to grow. If you love a particular reading set or series, you will definitely be hooked and impressed.

    The impressions created are our subconscious reactions to information that is interesting to us, new to us, or big news to us. Did you know that interpretations that are easy to remember are usually also easy to maintain in the long or short term. If you keep interpretations for a long time while reading other texts, a lot of important information is stored in the brain.

    Three interpretations from different perspectives are collected, consciously or unconsciously compared and analyzed, which then leads to ideas, ideas and innovations. That’s why reading is very important to come up with something new.

    3. Critical Understanding

    On the other hand, understanding is important as the ability to absorb the necessary information quickly and accurately. This was accidental, not because it was done quickly. But it’s also based on reflex, a long analysis. Technically, God designed the human brain that way, so you don’t need to dig deep here.

    Our brains can automatically analyze and think critically, subject to our normal thoughts, questions, and frequent reading. This is a very simple and intensive reading process. But when we look and explore, it gets really complicated.

     

     

    How to Read Intensive

    Here are ways you can do intensive reading:

    1. Jelly

    Please read carefully first. When we read, we are actually looking for its contents. If you don’t dig into the contents, then only the details of the words will come out as reading material. On the other hand, if you pay attention every time you dig into the contents, you will find many other things.

    Each quest can earn gold or much higher and more valuable reading this way. If you pay more attention to what makes a book useful, it’s not just the author’s fault. But by looking for information carefully on our own. A simple analogy: God has spread knowledge everywhere.

    But not everyone can see what God spreads. Many people seek knowledge through the public domain, educational institutions. In fact, if we are careful, we can receive the knowledge that God has given us. Likewise when reading with intensive techniques. Foresight is required to interpret messages.

    2. Self Preparation

    Actually, it has something to do with evaluating the first point. Your readiness determines the number of messages received. Generalize Baron & Byrne’s theory that a person’s negative emotions affect judgment. When we are happy, cheerful and happy, we can better take messages from the books we read.

    From the case above, it is clear that you need to prepare yourself to be able to read intensively. Of course, the form of self-preparation is the ability to manage and control emotions. That negative and positive emotions affect us in processing information.

    3. References

    How to read intensively it is important to consider references to references. In this era of digitalization and increasing reference choices, we must be selective. Especially now a lot of fake news everywhere. Hoax news is also difficult to distinguish.

    There are also many questionable references to accountability. Now, it is very important to be more careful to avoid such thing. If necessary, look for references in books, magazines and newspapers to avoid ambiguity and misinformation.

    4. Concentration

    Concentration is also important and is a factor that you have to do. If you feel lazy or not feeling well, it is advisable to rest. If you feel good, read on. It’s the same with writing. If you feel lazy and bored, you should turn off the laptop and stop typing. When you feel better, then re-read it.

    This makes reading much more effective when you are in a good mood. At least when the heart is in the mood, our brain is relaxed. You are in a happy situation. This makes it easier to adjust emotions and to focus thoughts and thoughts, including reading. The brain automatically stores important information when we can focus on what we read.

    Difference between Intensive and Extensive Reading

    Intensive extensive
    Reading is done carefully Widely done
    The goal is to understand the content of the reading as a whole Understand content by speed reading
    Research readings Skimming reading for the sake of certain things (for example when buying a book at an online bookstore, you can read skimming by reading the table of contents and synopsis of the book)
    The goal is to gain understanding Used to read survey reading
    Instigates critical thinking in reading Shallow reading
    The goal is to get ideas that are suitable for writers to find new insights to create new things  

    Those are some of the differences between intensive and extensive reading. If you look closely and in context, intensive reading and extensive reading complement each other. So sometimes we need to read extensively, sometimes we need to read intensively. Therefore, it can be adapted to the situation, conditions and intended use.

    Hope this little review of intensive reading helps. If you have questions or other references, Sinaumed’s can visit the sinaumedia book collection for more details at www.sinaumedia.com . Happy reading, #SahabatUnlimited!

  • Integration: Definition, Types, and Formation Factors

    Definition of Integration – It is a common thing that Indonesia has a very diverse culture, so it is also known as a multicultural country. In fact, the designation of the term has reached abroad. It is not without reason why Indonesia can be called a multicultural country, because Indonesia consists of various religions, cultures, ethnic groups and races. Even though they are rich in differences, they can still coexist.

    This diversity that is owned by Indonesia makes the Indonesian people able to live together even though they are different. Like the meaning of the motto Bhineka Tunggal Ika , “different but still one”. The motto taken from the Sutasoma book written by Mpu Tantular illustrates that the unity and integrity of the Unitary State of the Republic of Indonesia (NKRI) must be maintained.

    Even though the differences in Indonesia can be said to be the greatest wealth that has been given by God, behind these differences it is very vulnerable to conflict. Conflicts that occur can occur from individuals to individuals to groups with groups. If a conflict occurs due to differences, then the unity of the Indonesian nation and state can be threatened.

    Of course, it is hoped that conflicts caused by differences between Indonesian people will not occur. Therefore, as fellow Indonesians, we should maintain unity and oneness, which can be started by making all Indonesian people aware that maintaining peace is something that must be done.

    The many differences that exist in Indonesia do not mean that we as fellow Indonesians cannot bring each other down, be it between individuals and individuals, individuals and groups or groups and groups. The nation and state of Indonesia will be stronger if fellow citizens continue to work together and do not bring each other down. That way, unity and oneness will never fade.

    Talking about one unit, it cannot be separated from what is called integrity. Then, what is integrity? For those of you who want to know the answer, you can see this review until it’s finished, Sinaumed’s. In addition, you will find out the types of integration.

    Definition of Integration

    Integration comes from English, namely integration which means unity or rounding. In addition, integration can also be interpreted as a method for coordinating various functions, parts, and tasks that exist in a job. In other words, integration is a way for cooperation that does not conflict with each other in order to achieve a goal.

    Meanwhile, integration can also be interpreted as a safe condition where every ethnic and racial group can live together while maintaining their respective cultures. Therefore, so that fellow Indonesians can live side by side without eliminating the culture of each individual, awareness is needed for all Indonesian people.

    In the Big Indonesian Dictionary or commonly known as the KBBI, integration is assimilation to become a complete or unified whole. Integration will run smoothly and well as long as fellow individuals respect, understand, and respect each other, thus reducing the risk of a conflict that can lead to division.

    The existence of a split caused because the unity and wholeness has been lost or damaged is also called disintegration. It would be nice if fellow Indonesian citizens could maintain one unit so that there would be no divisions that could harm themselves and others. So, start now to realize how important integration is in order to avoid conflict and division.

    Definition of Integration According to Experts

    Experts also express the meaning of integration. The following is the definition of integration expressed by several experts.

    Yron Weiner

    According to Myron Weiner, integration is a process to unite various cultural and social groups into one unified area in order to realize the formation of a national identity.

    Dr. Nazaruddin Sjamsuddin

    Dr. Nazaruddin Sjamsuddin said that integration is a process of uniting a nation which consists of all aspects of life, starting from political aspects, economic aspects, cultural aspects, and social aspects.

    Safroedin Bahar

    Safroedin Bahar stated that integration is a way to perfect a path or goal by uniting every element of a nation that has started to separate.

    Soedjati Djiwadono

    According to Soedjati Djiwadono, integration is a way to maintain national sustainability which can be reconciled with a right in the form of self-determination.

    That is the meaning of integration from several experts. From some of these meanings, it can be said that integration is something that is highly expected in people’s daily lives because with integration, every member of society, even though they have different cultures, can still live in peace and side by side. Therefore, every citizen, especially Indonesian citizens, should maintain unity by maintaining integration.

    Integration Type

    Integration is something that can happen because of a long process, so many people say that integration doesn’t just happen. Integration that is generally known by many people consists of three types, namely cultural integration, social integration, and social integration. Below will be explained in more detail about the types of integration.

    1. Cultural Integration

    Cultural integration is an adjustment between each of the different cultural elements, so that they can achieve a degree of equality or similarity of functions that exist in people’s lives. This cultural integration can occur because a region or country has a lot of culture in it. Without cultural integration, conflicts are likely to occur because there is no mutual respect and respect.

    2. Social Integration

    Social integration is an adjustment between every element that is different from one another in the social life of the community, so that it can create a pattern of life that is the same and peaceful for the community itself. This social integration has actually existed since we lived in an area. Therefore, we also often see that in that area there are many community members who are not compatible with each other, then these community members have not yet implemented social integration.

    3. National Integration

    National integration is a process of adjusting every different element that exists in the life of society nationally. The existence of national integration will create a pattern of life in which every member of the community can carry out their respective functions and roles without any interference from other members of the community. The success of national integration will determine unity and unity. In other words, if national integration cannot be realized, the meaning of unity and oneness will turn into division.

    Of the three types of integration, it can be said that the role of community members in realizing or implementing integration in people’s daily lives is very important. Therefore, community members must be good at adjusting themselves to other community members when living in an area.

    Factors Forming Integration

    Strong integration is not just formed, but there are factors behind it. If these factors work well, successful integration is likely to be achieved. The following will explain the factors that determine whether the integration will be successful or not.

    1. The existence of mixed marriages between one tribe and another

    Integration can be formed through a marriage carried out by a pair of lovers who come from different tribes. With this marriage, it will unite the two large families from different cultures as well, so that one family with another family can respect one another. The integration formed through this marriage signifies that differences can turn into one unit and a feeling of love.

    However, in carrying out mixed marriages between tribes, there are things that need to be noted, namely the two bride and groom must be as happy as they like. In other words, getting married is not due to coercion from other people in order to create a harmonious family, so that two different cultures can unite in one area.

    2. Increasing mutual cooperation behavior

    Indonesia is very much with the life of its people who like to live together. In fact, the habit of gotong royong has existed since the colonial era, so it can be said that mutual cooperation behavior is one of the factors in the formation of integration between community members. Mutual cooperation can build a sense of solidarity, so that each member can live in peace and happiness.

    We can usually see mutual cooperation behavior in Indonesia when a group of community members in an area is building a facility, such as a bridge, a place of worship, a road, and so on. A development that is carried out in mutual cooperation will be easily completed, so that members of the local community can experience the facilities being built more quickly.

    3. Performing Government Functions Properly

    The formation of integrity in a region or country cannot be separated from the role of government, especially in making rules. Without rules regarding integrity, it will be difficult for community members to apply integrity in social life. In making a regulation, the government must be able to act fairly and not harm one party or benefit only one party.

    The function of government that runs well can not only be seen from how to make regulations or laws, but also must be seen from how the government can serve the community well. Simply put, the government must provide maximum service regardless of religion, ethnicity, race, and cultural background.

    4. Improving Communication and Transportation in Each Region

    Factors that can form further integration are improving communication and transportation in each region. This must be done so that each region can be connected easily, so that communication between the people of different regions can run optimally and the economy becomes easier. An increasingly growing economy will easily increase the welfare of the members of the community itself.

    In addition, the development of communication and transportation in each region should be carried out evenly, not just certain areas that will experience this development. With equitable development, there will be no social disparities between regions, so that national integrity can be realized.

    5. Maintain Tolerance, Respect and Appreciation

    Attitudes and behaviors of tolerance, respect and respect are part of the formation of integrity. These three things can be said to have become a unit that is difficult to separate. These three behaviors can actually be taught to children from a young age, so that when they grow up, they are able to apply these three behaviors wisely and at the same time form an integrity.

    By doing these three behaviors, the occurrence of a conflict and division is less likely to occur. In fact, on the contrary, every member of society can live more peacefully and prosperously. We can see the behavior of tolerance, respect and appreciation when there are members of the community who are worshiping and other members of the community do not interfere.

    From the factors explained above, it can be concluded that integration can be realized well as long as all individuals and groups in one region can maintain good relations with each other and build communication and transportation so that each region can be connected.

    In addition, without government assistance or support, the integration process is difficult to materialize. So, the government must be able to carry out its functions and duties properly and correctly.

    Example of Integration Behavior

    Talking about examples of integration behavior is indeed endless, so examples are easily found around us. As for some examples of examples of integration behavior as follows.

    1. Obey the School Rules

    The existence of a rule serves to create a good environment, so students, teachers, and school employees can respect one another. Therefore, when you comply with school rules, then you have implemented integrity. Obeying school rules indicates that you already have a love for school, so you can study optimally.

    2. Implement Mutual Cooperation Behavior

    Mutual cooperation behavior is one of the forming factors of integration, so that mutual cooperation behavior is an example of integration behavior. Mutual cooperation that often occurs in Indonesian society is community service which is usually carried out every few months or once a few weeks. In addition, mutual cooperation behavior can also increase a sense of solidarity among members of the community.

    3. Implementing Mutual Tolerance 

    Similar to mutual cooperation, tolerant behavior is part of the forming factors of integration, so tolerant behavior is included as an example of integrity behavior. Mutual tolerance behavior allows every member of society to appreciate and respect one another.

    4. Mutual Respect for Different Cultures

    Indonesia is very well known for its very diverse culture. Therefore, in order to avoid a conflict caused by cultural differences, we need to have culturally respectful behavior. With this mutual respect behavior makes people aware not to vilify one culture with another.

    5. Obey the Law

    We live in a region or country, there must be a rule or law, so that we as members of society must comply with the law. The behavior of complying with this Law is a form of integration behavior. By complying with the law, members of the public cannot do bad things that can damage unity and unity.

    Conclusion

    This integration must be applied to community members who live socially in one unified area, so as to create an environment that builds a sense of peace and happiness. Forming integration requires cooperation between community members in the same area and community members in different areas. What’s more, the role of government to establish integrity is very influential, especially in serving and making regulations or laws.

    Thus, the integrity that is formed by members of the community and government, the benefits will also be felt by members of the community and government as well. So, never delay to build or form integrity.

    Book Recommendations & Related Articles

    Source: From various sources

  • Integer Is One Of The Data Types In Programming, Let’s Meet Together!

    Integer is – In the world of programming, data is an important part that cannot be forgotten or omitted. The reason is, programming will always be related to the activities of processing data into the information needed.

    So, in order to keep the data consistent and use computer memory more efficiently, a programmer must be familiar with the various types of data used when working.

    Because the data type will help the computer to interpret the value of a variable correctly so that errors are avoided. One type of data that is often used by programmers is integer or integer data.

    In this article, we will discuss this integer data type in full to help those of you who are new to programming. So without further ado, let’s begin!

    Integers Is

    Strictly speaking, a computer program is a collection of pieces of data that are manipulated in various ways. “Data” here is of various types, some are in the form of numbers such as positive and negative numbers, integers, fractional numbers, small numbers, large numbers, and so on. There is also data in the form of characters, such as names, addresses, and others.

    When a programmer works, he must determine the type of information to be used. For example, when creating a program to determine the distance from Indonesia to South Korea, what kind of data is needed so that the information is clear.

    Well, an integer is an integer data type, both positive and negative, with a certain range . In other words, in integer data there are no letters or decimal numbers. Examples of integer data are 1, 59, 899, -20, and so on.

    FYI, to use negative numbers, just add a minus sign (-) in front of the number. Then, for numbers whose value is thousands, tens of thousands, or more, they cannot be written with a separator (both full stop and comma). For example, to write one thousand five hundred, just write 1500 instead of 1500 or 1500.

    Integer Data Value And Representation

    Because it doesn’t recognize letters and decimal numbers, you could say the value of integer data is an integer like you find in Mathematics. Representation here refers to the manner or method of storing the value in computer memory.

    Thus, integer data is divided into two categories, namely signed and unsigned. Signed integers represent negative integer values ​​(-1, -10, and so on) while unsigned integers represent positive integers (1, 10, and so on).

    Then the representation of unsigned integers in the computer is a string of bits that uses a binary number system with varying orders, some are in the form of Big Endian, some are in the form of Little Endian.

    Oh yes, apart from width, size, or precision, integer data also has other variations depending on the number of bits represented by it. For an integer that has n bits it can encode 2n and if the data type is an unsigned integer then the range is from 0 to 2n – 1.

    Usually, a programmer has his own considerations for using the integer data type, for example like:

    • The amount of memory that can be used by the variable
    • The largest and the smallest number that can be stored in a variable
    • Whether the variable handles positive, negative, or only positive (unsigned) storage
    • And others

    Types of Integers in Several Programming Languages

    • C language

    In the C programming language, integer data types are divided into four types, namely byte, short, int, and long which have their own characteristics. The following is a brief explanation for the four types of integer data types:

    Bytes

    The integer byte type is generally used when programmers work with data streams on networks or files. Its function is to carry out processes such as writing or reading data.

    In addition, it can also be used when programmers use binary data that is not supported by other types of the Java programming language.

    An example of a byte integer data type:

    public class Main {
    public static void main(String [] args)
    //Variable declaration
    byte value = 1;
    //Output
    System.out.println(“Value of bytes = ” + value);
    }

    short

    The short type is generally used on computers with a 16-bit capacity, that’s why this type is quite difficult to find nowadays because both laptops and 16-bit computers are becoming rare.

    Short integer data type example

    public class Main {
    public static void main(String[] args)
    //Variable declaration
    short value = 2;
    //result
    System.out.println(“Value of short = ” + value);
    }

    int

    The int type is the most used type today because it represents numbers in programming. In addition, the int type is also considered more efficient than other integer data types.

    Int integer data type example
    public class Main {
    public static void main(String[] args)
    //Variable declaration
    int value = 20;
    //result
    System.out.println(“Value of int = ” + value);
    }

    In theory, any expression that includes a byte, short, and long type, must pass an int procedure to be promoted before entering the calculation process. For example like this:

    public class Main {
    public static void main (String []args)
    //Creates a variable of some data type
    byte value = 1;
    short anotherValue = 2;
    int results = 3;
    int anotherResult;
    //Sum byte, short, and int variables
    anotherResult = value + anotherValue + result;
    //Prints the result
    System.out.println(“Value of result = ” + anotherResult);
    }

    Long

    The last integer data type is more often used when the data value used is more than the capacity range of type int, byte, or short. The reason is because the long type does have the widest range compared to the other types.

    Integer data type example long
    public class Main {
    public static void main (String [] args)
    //
    long value variable declaration = 22121;
    //result
    System.out.println(“Value of long = ” + value);
    }

    All data types above can store negative integers and positive integers. For storing positive and zero integers, you can use the keyword “unsigned” in front of the data type, for example:

    • unsigned short in, 2 bytes, range 0 to 60,000
    • unsigned int, 4 bytes, range 0 to 4,294,900,290

    In addition, below is a table that contains the different ranges of each integer data type:

    Data Type Size (Bit) Range
    Bytes 8 -128 to 127
    short 16 -32768 to 32767
    int 32 -2147483648 to 2147483647
    Long 64 -9223372036854775808 to 9223372036854775807

    The range of each data type above is related to the memory capacity needed to store that number. So the greater the range , the greater the required memory capacity.

    • Pascal language

    In the Pascal programming language, the integer data type can hold 16-bit data, however, because integer itself is a signed data type, it can only be assigned values ​​from -215 to 215-1 or -32768 to 32767. Why is that? ? Because 1 bit is used as a marker for positive or negative.

    • C# language

    In the C# programming language there are several types of integer data types that can be used, namely:

    Bytes

    An unsigned integer with size 8-bit. The same as the System Byte data type in the Microsoft NET Framework.

    Sbyte:

    A signed integer with the same 8-bit size as the System Sybte data type in the Microsoft NET Framework.

    short

    A signed integer with the same 16-bit size as the System Int16 data type in the Microsoft NET Framework.

    Ushort:

    An unsigned integer with the same 16-bit size as the System UInt16 data type in the Microsoft NET Framework.

    int

    A signed integer with the same 32-bit size as the System Int32 data type in the Microsoft NET Framework.

    Uint

    An unsigned integer that has a 32-bit size and is the same as the System UInt32 data type in the Microsoft NET Framework.

    Long

    A signed integer that has a 64-bit size and is the same as the System Int64 data type in the Microsoft NET Framework.

    Ulong
    An unsigned integer that has the same 64-bit size as the System UInt64 data type in the Microsoft NET Framework.

    To make it easier to distinguish integer data type names in the C# programming language and the Microsoft NET Framework, you can see the comparison in the image below:

    • PHP language

    Integer data types can also be found in the PHP programming language which is commonly used to write integer data, such as 25, 100, 300, or others. Integers in PHP can also be positive or negative numbers.

    An example of an integer data type in PHP:
    <?php
    //an example of an integer in PHP
    $sale_price=120000;
    $item_amount=100;
    $shipping_cost=500000;

    echo $selling_price;
    echo “<br />”;
    echo $item_amount;
    echo “<br /”;
    echo $shipping_cost;
    ?>

    In the PHP programming language, integer data types can also be combined with mathematical operations, such as multiplication, addition, division, or subtraction. For example:

    <?php
    // adding integer
    $a=10;
    $b=5;
    $c= $a + $b;

    echo “result is $c”
    echo “<hr>;
    ?>

    How to Write Integer Data Type in C Programming Language

    To be able to learn to write integer data types, Sinaumed’s must first understand what is called a variable. Because the two are related to each other, where the variable is a place to store a value and the data type is the type of value that can be stored in the variable.

    For example, in math class you often meet x and y, right? Now, “x” and “y” are called variables because they are places to store a value. For example x = 3 and y = 4.

    In comparison, variables are the same as containers and data types are the objects that will be stored in the container.

    First, write down the data type first, then write down the variable name and the contents of the data. For example, you want to create a weight variable with an integer (int) data type in the form of the number 59, then the writing becomes:

    int weight = 59;

    Remember, every time you create a variable it must end with a semicolon (;). In addition, you should immediately fill in the data values ​​that you want to store like the example above.

    After that, remember carefully the rules for writing variables in the C programming language, which consist of:

    • Variable names cannot begin with a number or symbol
    • Variable names may not use keywords that already exist in the C programming language such as void, int, if, or something else
    • Variable names are case sensitive, meaning uppercase and lowercase letters are very different. For example the address variable with Address are two different variables.
    • Use an underscore (_) to write a variable name consisting of two or more words, such as home_address, cellphone_number, or something else.

    Example Program With Integer Data Type

    After learning to write the integer data type, next we will try to make a program with the integer data type. To make it easier, you should first download the Codeblocks software.

    If the Codeblocks software is already installed on your laptop, then open the software and create a new program with the name data_integer, then write the code below:

    #include <stdio.h>
    int main(void)
    {
    int number3;

    number3 = 2147483647;

    printf(“Enter number3(int): %d\n”,number3);

    returns 0;
    }

    After that, run the program code, the result will be like this:

    Sinaumed’s can also write code that combines all four types of integer data types in the C programming language, from char, short, int, and long. You do this by creating a new variable for each type of data type, for example:

    #include <stdio.h>
    int main(void)
    {
    first char;
    second short;
    third int;
    fourth long;

    first = 10;
    second = 100;
    third = 1000;
    fourth = 10000;

    printf(“Enter the first variable (char): %d\n”, first);
    printf(“Enter the second (short) variable %d\n”, second);
    printf(“Enter the third variable (int): %d\n”, third);
    printf(“Enter the fourth variable (long): %d\n”, fourth);

    printf(“\n”);
    returns 0;
    }

    When this program code is executed, the output will be like this:

    After defining each variable, then proceed with filling in the variables using numbers. The numbers are free as long as they do not exceed the maximum value each data value can hold.

    In the example above, we use the numbers 10 for the first variable, 100 for the second variable, 1000 for the third variable, and 10000 for the fourth variable. Then each variable is displayed with the printif command.

    Then, what happens if we try to enter a value that is outside the maximum limit that can be accommodated by each type of data? Let’s try it right away:

    #include <stdio. h>

    int main(void)
    {
    first unsigned char;
    second unsigned short;
    third unsigned int;
    fourth unsigned long;

    first = 299;
    second = 65599;
    third = 4294967299;
    fourth = 4294967299;

    printf(“Enter the first variable (char): %d\n”, number1);
    printf(“Enter the second variable (short) %d\n”, number2);
    printf(“Enter the third variable (int): %u\n”, number3);
    printf(“Enter the fourth variable (long): %u\n”, number4);

    printf(“\n”);
    returns 0;
    }

    After running, the results that appear are as follows:

    From the discussion above, it can be said that an integer is a positive or negative integer data type with a certain range . Thus the discussion about integers. Hopefully all the discussion above is useful and can add to your insight. If you want to find books about coding, then you can get them at sinaumedia.com .

    To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

    Author: Gilang Oktaviana Putra

    Source:

    https://kumparan.com/how-to-tekno/integer-ada-tipe-data-dalam-language-pemrograman-1xrO1L2kiwn/full

    https://www.petanikode.com/c-variabel/

    https://www.babastudio.com/blog/Type-Data-Integer-dan-Cara-Penulisan-Integer-PHP

    https://p2k.unkris.ac.id/id3/3065-2962/Integer-Ilmu-Komputer_54824_p2k-unkris.html

    https://www.digitalocean.com/community/tutorials/public-static-void-main-string-args-java-main-method

    Edi Budiman (2015) Fundamentals of algorithms & programming

    Suprapto, et al. (2008) Programming Language for Vocational Schools

  • Inspiring Is: Definition and 5 Indonesian Inspiring Figures

    Inspirational Is – The term “inspirational” must be foreign to You’ minds , because its use is often applied in everyday conversation. Remembering that everyone living in this world will always need inspiration and motivation, especially to live their daily lives. The existence of inspiration and motivation can even make people who are down due to circumstances feel positive energy so they are more enthusiastic about living their lives. Yep, inspiration will always be related to inspiration and figure. The cool term to refer to this inspirational figure is role-modelwhich is mostly used by young people today. So, what is inspirational? How can we determine the inspirational figure in this life? What is the difference between inspiration and motivation? So, so that You can understand these things, let’s look at the following review!

    What Is Inspirational?

    According to the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), the term “inspirational” means ‘inspiring’. While the term “inspiration” can mean ‘inspiration’ which is then defined as ‘thoughts (dreams) that arise from the heart ‘ and ‘something that moves the heart to create (poems, songs, etc.)’ . then these inspirational things become things that make people feel inspired or move their heart in living life, no matter how difficult the situation is.

    The use of the word “inspirational” is also often considered the same as “inspirator” which is a figure or person who inspires others. Yep, an inspiration is a more specific definition that refers to a person or person with a great life story, so that other people who listen to the story feel impressed and moved to do the same thing. For example, a businessman named Merry Riana is often used as an inspirational figure because of the story of her life’s struggles in starting her business from a young age. People who hear or read Merry Riana’s story will usually feel inspired so that their hearts seem to be tapped to have the same passion, especially in starting a business.

    Previously, it was explained that inspiration is related to things that are inspirational, right? Well, feeling inspired doesn’t always have to feel like you have the same passion, but it can also be an encouragement to keep thinking creatively. What’s more, if You is getting an assignment or a job in the field of writing, design, or marketing, he must always get inspiration from an inspirational figure, so it’s easier to do it.

    Reporting from merdeka , the Oxford Dictionary has a specific definition of the term “inspiration”, namely ‘ as a process that occurs when someone sees or listens to something, then that person can have new ideas that are more unique and interesting’ . In contrast to the Cambridge Dictionary which reveals that the word “inspiration” has a definition as ‘someone or something that gives ideas for others to do something more interesting’. From some of these definitions, it can be concluded that things that are inspirational will definitely be related to the mental and emotional state of each individual.

    Meanwhile, the term “inspirational” is more often used in the figure of a person. That is, the use of this term refers more to a real person who usually gives positive energy, both in the work, authority, perspective, and way of speaking. However, the term “inspirational” can also be used in a story or life story from that figure. For example, the figure of Bill Gates is often used as an inspirational figure by many people, especially those who are in the business of technology. So, not only is he an inspirational figure, but the life story of Bill Gates can also be an inspirational story for some people.

    In fact, even if examined from the word class, the words “inspirational” and “inspiration” are already different. The word “inspirational” is an adjective, while the word “inspiration” is a noun.

    Differences Inspiration and Motivation

    Even though both are almost the same, which both influence a person’s mindset to be more enthusiastic and creative in viewing this world, it turns out that both have different things, you know… So, here are some differences between inspiration and motivation, as reported by idntimes .

    Inspiration Motivation
    Can come from anywhere. Starting from reading books, movies, songs, circumstances in the environment, even the people around you. Come from yourself. Even a motivator is actually “only on duty” to stimulate motivation, while the one who can generate it is yourself.
    It seems to be a calling of the soul to do activities that are in accordance with the interests from within. Being the reason or motive behind every thing that is done every day.
    Present new and interesting creative ideas, even from reading a book or listening to a song. Become a reason to help yourself to work harder , especially in getting through the day.
    Become a “pull” so that you can continue to do these things, especially those that are in accordance with yourself. Become an “encouragement” so that you are willing and willing to do something.
    Become a liaison between the things that are inside with every activity that will be carried out. Being a reason for you to do something as best as possible.

    5 Indonesian Inspiring Figures Who Can Become Role-Models

    There are so many people around us who can even be inspirational figures in life. Parents are no exception where they have a high enthusiasm to fight for their children’s lives so that they can be what they are today. In fact, inspirational figures are not always related to famous figures who have successfully owned a well-known company, because even ordinary people can also be inspirational figures. Since the word “inspirational” is an adjective, aka an adjective, the definition of which is also relative. So, here are some inspirational figures that can inspire you to continue living life.

    1. RA. Kartini

    Who knows this fighter for women’s emancipation in Indonesia? Yep, the name Raden Adjeng Kartini who was born in 1879 is included in the ranks of National Heroes as well as being an inspirational figure for Indonesian women. Remembering during the colonial period, the existence of women was so underestimated by society. They think that a woman’s place should be in the kitchen to cook and take care of the children, so that only a small percentage can go to school, and even then they come from respected families.

    Luckily, Kartini came from a noble family in the Jepara area. Yep, Kartini’s father, Raden Mas Adipati Ario Sosroningrat, is a regent, so he can send his son to a European elementary school (ELS). Despite having a privilege , Kartini did not arbitrarily treat ordinary people. Instead, she has thoughts related to women’s emancipation in Indonesia. This thought developed because of his friends in the Netherlands.

    Thanks to her interest in the mindset of women in the European hemisphere, which she knew through magazines, newspapers and books, then Kartini started thinking about advancing women in Indonesia. She really fought for the position of indigenous women who were always seen as having a low social status.

    2. Susi Pudjiastuti

    The former Minister of Maritime Affairs and Fisheries of the Republic of Indonesia in the Working Cabinet of Jokowi and Jusuf Kalla (2014) has always been considered the coolest minister and different from the others. One of His iconic words is “Drown!” when there were 40 foreign fishing vessels entering Indonesian waters. He was not afraid to sink the 40 foreign fishing vessels for the welfare of Indonesia’s seas.

    Before serving as Minister of Maritime Affairs and Fisheries, Susi Pudjiastuti was the owner and president director of PT ASI Pudjiastuti Marine Products, PT ASI Pudjiastuti Aviation (Susi Air Airline), and several exporters of fishery products. Since 2004, she has often received major awards and has been called the figure of “Indonesian Inspiring Women”. Some of these awards include the Tourism Pioneer from the West Java Culture and Tourism Office (2004), Extraordinary Leadership and Significant Contributions to The Economy at APEC (2011), the Ganesha Widya Jasa Aditama Award from ITB (2011), and others.

    3.Jerome Polin

    The name Jerome Polin Sijuang or who is often called Jerome Polin is widely used everywhere. In fact, his name has been included in the ranks of role-models for today’s youth. Actually, even without being a Youtuber, Jerome Polin has become an inspirational figure because he managed to qualify to become a student at Waseda University, Japan, with an applied mathematics study program, even with a scholarship. Considering getting into such a great university, not everyone can do it due to being one of the best private universities in Japan.

    Jerome tried his luck by becoming a Youtuber while studying in Japan with content in the form of tips on learning Japanese. Over time, Jerome’s Youtube content has become more varied, even his friends, who are now called the Waseda Boys, also often appear in his videos. The figure of Jerome is inspiring because apart from being good at math which is the most “scary” subject for many people, he is also fluent in Japanese, has good public speaking, and is currently developing a business with his older brother, Jehian Panangian Sijib, with the Menantea brand .

    4. Maudy Ayunda

    The millennial generation will definitely agree if Maudy Ayunda is appointed as an inspirational figure who should be followed by an example. Even netizens often comment that Maudy Ayunda is an inspirational figure with a complete package! Starting from being academically smart as evidenced by graduating from Oxford University, good at singing, to his extraordinary acting skills in several prominent films. In fact, it was so inspiring, when Maudy Ayunda was appointed to play Mrs. Ainun in the film Habibie and Ainun, people agreed because it was commensurate with Mrs. Ainun’s intelligence.

    Maudy Ayunda’s existence is not only in the Indonesian film and music industry, you know… At Oxford University, she is already familiar with her talents and achievements. In fact, Maudy Ayunda was once appointed as the youngest speaker at an international forum and served as Head of Speaker at the University of Oxford! Wow, how cool!

    5. Rio Haryanto

    Rio Haryanto can be an inspirational figure in the world of sports, especially in four-wheel racing. Yep, Rio Haryanto’s name is increasingly recognized by the people of Indonesia and the world when he successfully passed the GP3 and GP2 races. Even in 2016, Rio was mentioned as one of the youngest racers to take part in the F1 event. Even though he had to experience several accidents on the circuit, Rio did not immediately lose heart. Because he struggled with the dream of becoming a reliable racer, he was willing to lose his youth because he had to focus on training.

    So, that’s a review of what inspirational words are and some inspirational figures that can be emulated by young people. Does You have an inspirational figure who always gives a positive influence to live this life?

  • Inspiration for the design concept of a small shop in front of the house

    Making a small shop in front of the house will look attractive and efficient because it doesn’t require an additional location. Moreover, if the budget we have is still quite small. That wouldn’t be a problem with a small shop in front of the house.

    Turning part of the house into a small shop can keep costs down. Because, we do not need to rent or build a place. Not only that, this one concept is also quite effective for new businessmen. So, it’s only natural that we look for inspiration for the design concept of a small shop in front of the house.

    It should be noted, forming a small shop or stall design certainly requires an appropriate and attractive design. The goal, of course, is to make the atmosphere of the house and shop feel “alive” and attract customers. This article could be a great place to find that design inspiration! Because, we will see various designs that will be suitable for a small shop in front of the house, according to business needs.

    Tips for Making a Minimalist Stall Design

    If you want our shop to attract attention, of course, you need an attractive design. Check out the tips below!

    1. Determine Design Inspiration

    Before making a shop in front of the house, be sure to search and find as much inspiration as possible first. We can try to find as much inspiration as possible about the interior, exterior, or the right material for the shop.

    Of course, we can also look for inspiration on the internet, social media, and even go around ourselves to see the designs in the stalls around the house. Do the math, take a walk.

    2. The design must match the type of stall

    Stalls have various types. We have to make sure the design we choose is in accordance with the type of shop. For example, drink stalls, snack stalls, toy stalls, to basic food stalls.

    For example, the design of a coffee shop definitely needs to look simpler and have an artistic spirit than a shop that sells various basic necessities, this type of shop usually provides small tables and chairs.

    Meanwhile, food stalls must apply a minimalist design and support a larger load of goods. So, make a maximum plan so that the shop doesn’t get the wrong concept later.

    3. Use a Unique and Attractive Stall Display

    Not infrequently, the shop that we will open at home will be side by side with other small shops on the side of the road. So, there’s nothing wrong with making a shop design that stands out more, right?

    The goal, none other than is for passing visitors to become more interested and interested in buying at the stall.

    Making an attractive shop doesn’t have to use flashy colors. It could just use a clean simple concept or a small shop design but looks modern. There are many concepts that can make a shop look more beautiful.

     

    You can learn about Interior Textbook: Internal Environment Principles

    by DYAN AGUSTIN; NINIEK ANGGRIANI

    4. Placement of Products to be Sold

    We usually definitely choose to buy goods in stalls that look clean and orderly. Because, we believe that a tidy place has good product quality. With that in mind, we also have to be able to create stalls whose products are organized.

    If we are going to build a drink shop, we have to make sure the glasses, blender, arrangement of ingredients, and everything in the shop are clean and tidy. In addition, there must also be discipline in product arrangement even if what is being sold is children’s toys.

    5. Make sure buyers feel comfortable while shopping

    Treat buyers well when shopping. Because, the expression “the buyer is king” is not just words. If we open a shop that does not serve customers in a friendly manner, it is not impossible that the image of the shop will not be good.

    According to the type of stall, we need to provide adequate equipment for buyers. For example, like a clean glass in a coffee shop, a clean table in a small restaurant, and so on.

    With good service, even a small shop can be liked by many people and make it more profitable.

    Advantages and Disadvantages of Procuring Stalls in Front of the House

    Opening a small shop or kiosk does not require renting additional space. By utilizing the house as a business stall, we can create a stall that is cost-effective in capital and the salaries of employees or shopkeepers.

    Even so, that does not mean there are no drawbacks at all. In the business world, there are always advantages and disadvantages, that’s what innovation is for.

    What are the advantages and disadvantages of making a stall in front of the house? Check it out below!

    Excess

    1. No Transportation Fees

    One of the cost-effective steps that comes with setting up a shop in front of the house is zero transportation costs, nothing at all. We don’t need to go back and forth from the house to the shop and only need to walk a few steps to open a shop.

    Try to use the terrace, yard or front room of the house to be used as a business stall. That way, the place feels more efficient and expenses incurred can be minimized.

    2. Simpler Legal Rules

    By opening a shop at home, it means that we are included in the class of micro entrepreneurs. Thus, fewer employees are needed (or even not needed at all) and the legal procedures are simpler.

    This is because, based on Law Number 3 of 1982 concerning Compulsory Company Registration Article 6 paragraph (1) letter b, small companies do not need a trading license or register their business with a legal entity.

    Even so, perhaps the business is growing and getting bigger with an income of more than IDR 600 million per year, we will be required to pay taxes.

    3. Less Capital

    Opening a business certainly requires a sizable amount of capital. However, by opening a shop in your own home, the capital required will be less. Our financing is also more efficient because it can be used for other needs, for example restocking basic food products with a longer expiration date.

    Lack

    Apart from the advantages, here are some disadvantages of opening a shop at your own home:

    1. At the Beginning, the Profits Are Still Relatively Small

    Don’t be surprised if the business makes less profit at the start, especially with the concept of a simple shop in front of your own house. Because, initially, the customers who come must only be neighbors around the house or complex, or our own friends.

    Even so, we can overcome this by fixing prices that are more competitive than other stalls. Of course this must be accompanied by buying goods at a lower price than usual. Take advantage of discounts or shopping packages!

    2. The House Is Noisy

    Sooner or later, it is certain that the house which is also the place of business will be more troublesome than usual. This is because a place that was previously used as a means of relaxing or resting has become one with a business location.

    It is possible that there are family members or even our children who feel disturbed and finally protest. We can also lack time to relax with our family, even though we are always at home.

    3. Lack of Socialization

    Nowadays, it’s not uncommon for home-based entrepreneurs to be a little less updated about the times. The reason is, they are busy spending their daily lives taking care of the shop at home.

    This is not good enough because we can lack information about developments around and will be further away from progress, including in marketing techniques.

     

    You can learn about Color Inspiration in Home Interiors

    by Brian Taufik Wicaksono

     

    Important Things in Building a Stall at Home

    Talking about the application of a business concept, there must be some special things that we need to pay attention to. For example, about investment. Actually, business is the most profitable and easy form of investment because it can be done anywhere and by anyone.

    Building a business means that income will increase and we can manage it to continue to survive, or even grow for a long time. That way, our children and grandchildren can continue the business. Be a hereditary family business.

    Moreover, if the business being worked on does not have to rent additional space or land that requires more costs. The reason is, it is not certain that we or our business successors will be able to rent a place like that.

    With this in mind, the concept was born when our business can be carried out without additional space and only through our own housing. Now, this concept is also quite popular and has become a priority because of changes in people’s behavior.

    These changes are related to the perception that the home as a place of business will make it easier for us to control our business life while relaxing at home. It’s undeniable, we can better control things that are close together, right? Growing faster is not something that is impossible to achieve.

    To make this happen, there are several things that we must pay attention to when opening a shop at home. Because, the place of business does not always match a certain house. Several influencing factors that need to be considered are as follows:

    1. Separating the Home Room from the Shop Room

    Wouldn’t it be tidier if we used a separate room between the shop and the house with the family? This separation can help so that our home activities are not mixed with shop matters. Everyday mobility becomes smoother and more organized.

    Take advantage of an empty or rarely used room as a storage area for stock or even the shop itself. But before that, make sure the room is strategic enough. We also need a little renovation of the room to make it more functional and seem “alive”. Don’t forget to adjust it according to the type of business.

    What if we don’t have an empty room at home? No need to worry, we can use other rooms that are still used, but less often than other rooms. Move things in the room and combine it with other spaces.

    Generally, building a shop business at home often takes advantage of unused space. In fact, including the back porch of the house, guest rooms, front porch, even the attic or garage. So, there are various choices we can take.

    2. Get to know the type of business that will be used in the stall

    In addition to preparing the place, we also have to pay attention to the type of business we are. Perhaps, we have thought about the advantages to be gained in opening a business at home. However, of course, success is not only seen from the amount of our turnover, right?

    Remember that not all types of businesses can continue to be developed in our homes. There are several types of businesses that, if developed, will require a wider area of ​​land, not even impossible, new buildings.

    Of course, the size of our homes is more limited to keep up with these developments. It could be enough in a terraced or spacious house. However, the possibility is very less if our house is smaller. It takes deeper consideration when following the development of our type of business.

    For example, it is not possible for us to open a hydraulic car or motorbike wash business, until the workshop at home is of medium or small size. We also definitely need more land for food stalls that are starting to develop.

    However, for types of businesses such as groceries, children’s toy stores, or laundry, they can still be opened in the same location as a medium-sized house. We can put several washing machines in one room plus an ironing board in one corner.

    That way, narrow land can be utilized.

    3. Locations of houses that support business activities

    Apart from the various things above, of course a strategic location is needed to support a successful business. We have to understand the location of the house, is it close to the center of community activities or is it just on a street corner?

    Location determines the success of a business. In the concept of a business that opens at the same time as a house, no matter how strong the business plan we make, a location that is not affordable for buyers will make it difficult.

    Another case when our house is in a strategic environment such as near a market or highway. Starting from children playing, neighbors who need certain items, even strangers can reach our shop.

    Therefore, pay attention to the location of the house before deciding to use it as a place of business. It could be that the house is even wider and strategic so that it allows for business development in the future.

     

    You can learn about 150 Best Mini Interior Ideas

    by Francesc Zamora Mola

     

    9 Minimalist Warung Design Inspirations in Front of the House

    1. Modern Minimalist Warung

    The minimalist design will match the concept of a small shop at home. Because, this concept makes the shop look wider and simpler. Especially with a modern feel, the shop will also look “advanced”.

    We can make a minimalist and modern shop design by utilizing the living room area or the garage of the house. There, mini department stores or food stalls can be designed.

    So that security is maintained, don’t forget to add a rolling door in front of the shop.

    2. Unique Inspiring Clothing Stalls

    We can also use designs that take advantage of the garden area or front yard of the house. With a square shape plus walls with wooden nuances and black paint, we can create a small shop that sells fashion needs, such as clothes or other accessories.

    Not to be missed too, the name of the business brand that can be placed on the wall as a decoration and a characteristic that can attract buyers!

    3. Elegant Stall Design, More Classy

    Take advantage of the carport or garden area in front of the house to make a small shop or shop. We can make it look classy even though it’s small.

    This area can be used as a small shop, complete with a rolling door and a canopy roof at the front. This method helps to make the shop look cooler!

    We can use this shop design for various types of businesses, such as laundry, modern drinks, and so on. With an elegant design, visitors will definitely be tempted to come.

    4. Stalls in the open space

    Stalls can be placed at the front of the house close to the entrance. A design like this can appear minimalist with two open parts of the shop, so that buyers can enter in two directions.

    With this concept, we can build food stalls, clothes, and even a small salon!

    5. Factory-style industrial design in a shop

    Maybe the house is smaller, we can get around this by turning the inside of the house into a shop. For example, using the living room.

    Use black walls to make it seem more spacious and elegant. However, leave the other side exposed with exposed red bricks. We can also use doors made of clear glass which will look appropriate.

    This type of design is perfect for cake shops, small cafes, even co-working spaces .

    6. A simple tone stall in front of the house

    We are certainly no strangers to the simple concept of a warung. Because, this design is often seen in residential areas, where we live. For this design, usually the building used is integrated with the house.

    So, this concept would be very suitable for grocery businesses or delivery agents.

    7. Natural stalls with natural nuances

    This one concept looks very beautiful and beautiful because it is full of natural nuances from the plants on the right and left sides. Generally, we find this design in stalls in the garden area in front of the house.

    A shop with this design would be suitable for a clothing business because the concept is simple, natural, but luxurious at the same time.

    8. Size 8 × 12 M Can be for Stalls

    Spacious gardens and carports are usually found in houses measuring 8×12. With this area, we can use the area in front of the house to make a small, minimalist shop.

    This simple but modern concept can be used for a cake or boutique business.

    9. Stalls at the front of the house 9×10 M

    90 square meters of land can be used to build a shop. We can take advantage of the garden area in front of the house.

    Even though it looks simple, this concept is quite interesting because it looks modern and compact. With this design, a grocery store business to a laundry would be suitable to open.

  • Inspiration for the Contemporary Outdoor Cafe Design Concept

    Along with the times, the design concept of a coffee shop or cafe continues to develop and change. One of the most popular designs today is the open and outdoor concept.

    Cafes with this concept are sought after because they offer an atmosphere and feel that blends with nature.

    Things to consider when opening an outdoor cafe 

    Cafes and restaurants with an outdoor concept are now the target of many people. Apart from being safer and more comfortable during a pandemic like today, cafes with an outdoor concept will offer a different vibe or feel from cafes in general. This could be a business opportunity! Those of you who are interested and want to open an outdoor cafe can see the following tips before starting.

    1. Pay attention to the Outdoor Cafe Layout

    One of the main keys to the comfort of a cafe with an outdoor concept is the wide distance between tables. This is why the table layout is the main thing that needs to be considered.

    In addition to adjusting the distance between tables, make sure the outdoor roomy area has enough space to serve as a waiter and deliver orders. Also take into account the distance and flow from the outdoor area to the kitchen, so that orders can reach the hands of customers.

    2. Choose Special Outdoor Furniture

    Among the many things that can be explored, customer convenience must remain the main thing. In addition to installing chairs and tables with materials that are more durable outdoors, we can also add umbrella accents or canopy shapes as anticipation when the weather is hot or sunny.

    We can also customize equipment and furniture with the concept and theme of the cafe that we have. Never be afraid to experiment.

    3. Pay attention to the cleanliness of the outdoor cafe

    For this one thing it is mandatory to pay attention, to be able to maintain the safety and comfort of customers. Carry out this cleaning process regularly, and provide equipment such as hand sanitizers and hand washing sinks that are easily accessible in the outdoor area.

    4. Use the Digital Menu

    In order to make the flow of purchases and transactions more practical, you can alternatively use an online cashier application that has a digital menu feature. Apart from being more practical, the use of a digital menu with minimal contact will be a solution as a safe order during a pandemic.

     

    You can learn about the Blogging Guide

    by Jeffery Helianthusonfri

    5 Advantages of Outdoor Furniture for Cafes

    Furniture is an important aspect when planning to build a cafe or restaurant. Furniture that can be used, of course, is adjusted to the theme of the cafe that we are planning, as well as the budget or financial situation that we have. But did you know that to beautify the interior design of a cafe, you don’t have to always use furniture in the room. We can also use furniture both outdoors and outdoors. With the right form of selection, the advantages of outdoor furniture can help produce a unique and beautiful layout.

    As we already know, outdoor furniture is designed to be placed outdoors without any protection, so it will be resistant to extreme weather changes such as rain and heat. For indoor furniture itself, it is generally not designed to withstand changes in the weather, so it is damaged more quickly when exposed to excessive sunlight or heavy rain.

    Here are 5 advantages of outdoor furniture for cafes:

    1. More durable

    As has been said, outdoor furniture has been specially designed with quality materials that are resistant to extreme weather changes, so that the furniture will last longer. Especially in cafes and restaurants where the furniture is used continuously by many people, the use of outdoor furniture is very appropriate even for indoor use. So that the quality of outdoor furniture, will minimize the occurrence of damage and will last longer.

    2. Design of All Time

    This outdoor furniture may be considered old-fashioned for some people, the design tends to look similar over the years. But instead we can take advantage of this simple model to become a hallmark of cafes and restaurants. If you look at it from the other side, we will actually benefit from a design that is timeless as well as sturdy materials, no need to worry about furniture that will look old even though it has been used for a long time.

    3. Easy to clean

    Because it has been used by many people, it is not surprising that furniture in cafes and restaurants will get dirty faster. While cleanliness is the reason visitors will feel at home and will return to visit the cafe. So, the use of waterproof outdoor furniture will be easy to clean. Just use clean water, soap and a brush to clean outdoor furniture.

    4. Natural color

    Outdoor furniture comes with natural color choices such as white, green, brown, orange, and even other colors. Because of the advantages of outdoor furniture, namely that this furniture is made specifically to be placed in garden areas, patios or on terraces, the choice of colors will blend more with nature. With natural color choices, it’s easier to combine with cafe themes. In addition, outdoor furniture can give a natural touch to the cafe which can help reduce boredom.

    5. More efficient

    Prices for furniture vary, both for indoor furniture and outdoor furniture. However, with the advantages of outdoor furniture that lasts longer, we can unknowingly save on furniture spending for the foreseeable future. For outdoor furniture itself, we can use materials made of strong and sturdy plastic, aluminum or wood. The wood that will be suggested is a type of teak wood that is sturdy and resistant to rain and heat.

    Outdoor furniture will indeed have many types of choices. According to needs, also choose furniture that has high quality so that apart from beauty, comfort and even security will also be maintained.

    Tips for Designing a Contemporary Outdoor Cafe, Suitable During a Pandemic

    In the current cafe business, it is increasingly proliferating in various regions because most Indonesian people like to gather and chat with relatives and those closest to them, usually young people dominate cafe visitors in order to carry out socialite activities.

    Most of the cafes located in urban areas are usually made indoors, the reason is to avoid the scorching heat of the sun, rain and air pollution. On the other hand, cafes that are located in highlands or on the outskirts of cities are generally designed with an outdoor concept so that visitors can enjoy the cool air and even be supported by beautiful views.

    If any of you want to decide to build a cafe business, and choose to use the outdoor cafe design concept, it would be highly recommended, because it is not only instagramable but also has a contemporary feel. Even more so at this time if we are experiencing a covid-19 pandemic, because cafes that carry the outdoor concept will be very supportive of this because it will be safer as a place to greet.

     

    You can learn about the Blogging Guide

    by Jeffery Helianthusonfri

     

    5 Instagramable Outdoor Cafe Concepts

    This time, there are 5 examples of outdoor cafe design concepts that can support visitors in capturing their moments with friends and family. This happens because a cafe is visited more by millennials. Carrying out an outdoor theme in a cafe that is highly recommended, especially cafes located in suburban or highland environments, this is a form of instagramable outdoor cafe design.

    1. Outdoor cafe design with a natural touch

    One of these concepts is quite suitable to be held at a cafe that wants an outdoor concept. Because outdoor cafes are usually located in highland areas where the air is cool, and they look good when creating a natural cafe concept. Natural elements can be used, such as natural stones, or green plants.

    For the floor area, we can use wooden decking to minimize slippage when walking on the surface, because it is equipped with slip resistance, or use pebbles which can stagnate when it rains. So, in addition to covering the ground floor, it will benefit and add a natural impression.

    As for the table and chairs, you can use wood elements so that a natural and natural feel will really be felt, besides being suitable as a natural design but also has significant artistic value.

    2. Modern minimalist outdoor cafe design

    For an outdoor cafe design with a modern style and a bit of a simple or minimalist impression, it is perfect for us to be able to present a cheerful atmosphere without any decorations in it. The use of color and pattern will be one of the keys to being able to produce this outdoor cafe concept.

    We can get all of them in the form of long chairs, modern tables, unique and attractive patterns on the exterior, and coupled with a special color combination. In order for outdoor cafes to really look modern with a minimalist concept, we can add plug terminals to charge cellphones at the bottom of the table or present beautiful wall themes.

    3. Industrial outdoor cafe design

    In addition to cafe designs that are in great demand by millennials, there is one outdoor cafe design concept that is no less popular, namely the cafe concept with an industrial style, because of its shape and style that looks simple and looks as it is. The elements of decoration needed will not be complicated and many, enough with long tables and chairs or those made of concrete.

    For the ground floor, you can use a concrete floor to match the feel of a chair or table, also add green plants to the pots and lights to support additional decorative accents.

    So that this industrial-style outdoor cafe doesn’t seem cold, we need to use wooden accents from the shape of the tables and seats. And also present a green garden that adorns the walls of the cafe.

    4. Semi-indoor cafe design

    The design concept of this cafe will be quite unique because it can present indoor and outdoor concepts in one coherent with a minimalist concept, the use of material elements can use wood elements, starting from chairs, tables, floors, even wooden ceilings.

    This semi-indoor cafe design invites visitors to be able to enjoy the cool air without feeling the cramped atmosphere in the cafe area all the time. Even though the sun is hot and even when it’s raining, they will still be able to feel comfortable in the cafe.

    5. Simple outdoor cafe design

    As a beginner businessman who is already engaged in the cafe business, of course he will build a minimalist cafe with land use that is not too large and the theme is quite simple. Of course, this is very necessary, so we can use vintage and shabby chic styles.

    The decoration elements needed don’t take up much, as long as they are simple and can match the concept and style that we present in a cafe. Choose a table that has the dimensions of a small box or circle as well as the seat.

    As a sweetener, you can also add small ornamental plants in the corners of the room or place them in the middle of the table, and don’t forget to decorate the walls with unique and attractive display parts and decorative plants, you can also write slang or poetic. .

     

    You can learn about Cafe-style Coffee & Tea Variations

    by Anti Apriliyanti Suganti

    7 Outdoor Cafe Design Inspirations at Home

     

    1. Exposed Brick Outdoor Cafe Design

    If you want to make a small cafe behind the house, or design the rest of the land in a cafe-style house, this simple design concept can be your inspiration.

    The way to make it is quite easy by ignoring brick walls without being plastered or coated with cement. Then you can add cafe tables and chairs and some with ornamental plants. In addition to saving expenses, this design will also look unique.

     

    2. Home Cafe Design from Bamboo

    The next outdoor cafe design can look natural with the help of using bamboo and booths as a kitchen as well as a minimalist and simple bar table.

    The appearance will look simple, this can also be applied to an open kitchen in the house. Don’t forget to also add a canopy roof so that cooking activities will be more comfortable and not exposed to the hot sun.

     

    3. Simple Outdoor Cafe Design

    If you have a room or land that is not used at home, you can use it to become something useful, such as creating a simple cafe.

    As seen in the picture, you can see a small building in the form of a place to mix drink orders. On the outside you can add chairs or tables for visiting guests.

    To make it feel shady and comfortable, you can also add plants and trees around the area.

     

    4. Outdoor Cafe Design in a Wide Yard

    If you have a large yard, of course, it will provide a lot of advantages for the owner. Which, we can use to become a comfortable outdoor cafe.

    It is enough to add some furniture such as a number of neatly arranged chairs and cafe tables. In making the evening atmosphere warmer, we can also provide warm yellow string lights.

     

    5. Industrial Cafe Design

    Industrial is a design concept that is very suitable to be applied to cafes and coffee shops. If you like this concept, don’t hesitate to use it for a home cafe.

    In addition to the unique feel, this design concept is also fairly easy to implement. One that can be an inspiration is this one picture.

    For example, a small, industrial-style shop with glass doors and walls and exposed hebel brick walls painted white for the top of the cafe.

     

    1. Scandinavian Cafe Design

    Apart from the industrial design concept, Scandinavian design will also be a unique choice for an outdoor cafe.

    The way to design it is also quite easy and simple, just by presenting the predominance of white on the walls and roof.

    If you want to beautify the atmosphere, we can add wooden elements to the floor or table.

     

    1. Semi Outdoor Cafe

    If you want to make an outdoor cafe but still protected from the heat of the sun or rain, then designing a cafe with a semi-outdoor concept can be an attractive choice.

    We can provide a canopy with a wooden frame or alderon canopy so that sunlight will still penetrate into the cafe. The atmosphere will feel more comfortable and shady.

  • Innovators: Definition, Characteristics, Figures of Innovators

    Definition of Innovators and Figures of Innovators in Indonesia and the World – Life that goes hand in hand with the development of technology and science makes people required to be able to invent various new innovations. With a variety of new ideas and innovations, it can be said that a person shows his will and ability in certain fields. Someone with brilliant innovation spread across various scientific fields. This has led to exciting new breakthroughs and the opening of new jobs.

    In finding innovation, of course there are many obstacles and obstacles. Therefore, one still has to work diligently. We can also learn a variety of good new things from researchers or inventors of innovation who have previously had outstanding discoveries. The following is an explanation of various things about innovators and well-known innovators.

    Definition of Innovator

    In the Big Indonesian Dictionary, an innovator is defined as a person who introduces new ideas, methods, etc. Innovators can also be interpreted as people who have various innovations, meanwhile innovation according to the Big Indonesian Dictionary is the introduction or introduction of new things. Innovation is something that is attached and inseparable from an innovator, therefore, before discussing various things about innovators, here are some definitions of innovation according to experts.

    1. Stephen Robbins argues that innovation is a new idea that is applied to initiate or update a product or process and service.
    2. Everett M. Rogers argues that innovation is an idea, ideas, objects and practices that are based on and accepted as something new by a person or certain group to be applied or adopted.
    3. Kuniyoshi Urabe argues that innovation is not a one-time phenomenon, but a long and cumulative process that includes many decision-making processes in and by organizations starting from the discovery of ideas to their implementation in the market.
    4. Van de Ven, Andrew H argues that innovation is the development and implementation of new ideas by people within a certain period of time which is carried out with various transaction activities within a certain organizational setting.
    5. Sa’ud argues that innovation is a creative choice, arrangement and set of new human and material resources or using a unique method that will result in increased achievement of the expected goals.
    6. Nurdin argues that innovation is something new, namely by introducing and carrying out new practices or processes (goods or services) or by adopting new patterns from other organizations.

    It can be concluded that innovation is an idea, opinion, idea, to a creative idea from someone that is used to create something new and useful, while an innovator can also be interpreted as a person who has the capacity to transform knowledge, problems, and skills into a solution in the form of successful product or service.

    An innovator produces many big things and is recognized by many people. The results or output of an innovator are also very useful and bring positive changes to society.

    Although there are still many people who do not know the figures behind the sparking of ideas for the products and services they use. However, the public knows that these companies have a high innovative side.

    Innovator Type

    An innovator usually has ideas or ideas that are driven by stimulants and inspiration that come suddenly at a certain time, only then emerge to become a new innovation. These innovators certainly have their own way of finding innovation. Therefore an innovator has their own creativity model which can be divided into two types, namely as follows.

    a. Conceptual Innovator

    According to Weinberg and co-researcher David Galenson of the University of Chocago, people who tend to do their best work in their 20s are more likely conceptual investors.

    The younger conceptual innovator is usually seen as a creative thinker who has ideas that challenge current conditions. The art and science practice that they do is usually carried out practically and adapted to the paradigm

    b. Experimental Innovator

    Experimental innovator is someone who performs various productivity activities or in his work in his 50s. Those experimental innovators who are seen as older build their innovations on the great thinkers of the past, and use their own methods.

    Experimental innovators usually change their ideas from time to time based on experience, so they reinvent their own skills throughout their lives.

    Characteristics of a Good Innovator

    A good innovator, of course, has several characteristics that can be taken advantage of. These good characteristics make an innovator successful. Some of these characteristics include the following.

    1. Appreciate the Smallest Innovation

    A good innovator, will appreciate all forms of innovation, no matter how small. That’s because an investor also realizes that innovation is the only right way to be truly competitive.

    2. Dynamic and Open Minded

    Being able to commit to building a dynamic company is one of the characteristics of a good innovator. An innovator will give his workers the opportunity to grow, that is what will make him valued and respected.

    3. Dare to Take Risks

    Dare to take risks is very important for an innovator. With this courageous attitude, one means pushing new ideas and learning from failure. A good innovator will see it as a great opportunity to continue to develop in a better direction

    4. Persistent in Learning

    Good innovators realize that creating innovation is not something that is done only once. Therefore, an innovator will continue to try and be persistent in learning because they are aware that they still have to move forward and continue to innovate.

    5. Open to New Ideas

    Some people might think about moving forward if they are sure of an idea that they think is the best. However, a good innovator will realize that he will never know the idea is feasible or not without trying to execute it first. They will be open to new ideas coming in and not afraid to try them.

    6. Confident

    A good innovator must have high self-confidence. They will believe as much as possible that all problems must have their own solution. A good innovator will have high confidence in the opportunities that will come. This self-confidence is important, because an innovator must have a positive attitude even in less than ideal circumstances.

    Various Types of Innovators Personality

    An innovator certainly has personality types that we can feel the difference. This personality type is a manifestation of attitudes, priorities, behavior, and external factors that support their personality. The Forbes Insight has conducted a survey of more than 1,200 executives in Europe, the results are then described by the five types of personality that play a role in the innovation cycle. As reported by Forbes, here are the five personality types of innovators.

    1. Movers and Shakers

    Movers and Shakers can be interpreted as a strong personality and has the power to motivate and influence others. People with this personality usually like to be in front, they can give encouragement to others. However, this type has a downside, they can be a bit arrogant and impatient when working with a team.

    2. Experimenters

    Innovators with this personality type are usually persistent and open to trying new things. They will be good at processing new ideas from the stages of development to execution. Innovators with this personality usually tend to be perfectionists and have high enthusiasm when working which demands extraordinary dedication and time.

    3. Star Pupils

    Star pupils means star pupils. If interpreted, this star pupil is a term for people who are ambitious and will try in every way to develop themselves. The interesting thing about this personality type is that these people will be more able to grow and develop anywhere.

    4.Controllers _

    This controller personality type is the type that does not like risk and likes to be in control. They will desire to get things on track to where they belong. They will know exactly where they stand and control the things they can control. Usually innovators with the controller personality type are people who work in sales, marketing, and finance.

    5. Hangers-On

    This hangers-on personality type is almost the same as the controller. Innovators with this personality will be in a structured environment. They will tend to choose a further step and decide with conventional policies. They will like to take on challenges, one of which is trying something new and untested. They also tend to choose the middle ground when deciding something.

    Indonesian Innovators

    Many innovators from Indonesia are also widely known to the world for their extraordinary creations. This makes the assumption that local creations are not of better quality than imports to be incorrect. The following are Indonesian innovators from different fields.

    1. Prof. Dr. Khoirul Anwar: Broadband technology inventor

    Prof. Dr. Khoirul Anwar is one of the innovators from Indonesia who created broadband technology which is the first step in creating mobile 4G LTE which can be used in various cellphones today. He is an Indonesian citizen who works at the Nara Institute of Science and Technology, Japan.

    2. Yogi Ahmad Erlangga: inventor of the mathematical formula in petroleum problems

    Yogi Ahmad Erlangga is an Indonesian citizen who is studying at Delft University of Technology, the Netherlands. He is listed as the youngest doctor of mathematics. The formula he found was used to solve various problems in the petroleum sector. In fact, his discovery attracted the attention of one of the world’s oil companies of the caliber of Shell.

    3. Ir. RM Sedyatmo: inventor of the chicken claw foundation system

    Prof. Ir. RM Sedyatmo is an innovator from Indonesia who invented an infrastructure architectural system known as the chicken claw foundation in 1962. This system is so stable on unstable land, that it allows it to be used by many buildings around the world.

    4. Muhammad Nurhuda: Inventor of eco-friendly household stoves

    Muhammad Nurhuda is one of the innovators from Indonesia who is a lecturer at the Faculty of Mathematics and Natural Sciences, Brawijaya University, Malang. He managed to find an environmentally friendly household stove. He has succeeded in creating an environmentally friendly stove that has ‘waste’ that is below the minimum limit set by the WHO. His creation attracted the attention of Asia Pacific countries and America.

    5. Randall Hartolaksono: inventor of anti-heat and anti-fire ingredients from cassava

    Randall Hartolaksono is an innovator from Indonesia who graduated from the University of London and succeeded in creating heat-resistant and fire-resistant materials from cassava peels. His invention was also appreciated by the world’s automotive companies such as Petronas, Ford, and others.

    6. Tjokarda Raka Sukawati: inventor of the flyover support system

    Tjokarda Raka Sukawati is one of the innovators from Indonesia who created an overpass support system. The system is made parallel to the street below and can be rotated easily to adjust it. The system he created was later recognized by the world because it is able to save space and is very efficient for transportation.

    7. Warsito P. Taruno: the inventor of the cancer killing machine

    Warsito P. Taruno is an innovator from Indonesia who is the creator of a tool capable of killing cancer cells. His device has passed Lab in Vitri trials and is then declared to be truly capable of fighting cancer cells in the infectious body. In fact, the tool he created has been recognized and used by the Japanese state because it is considered effective as a cancer fighter.

    World Innovators

    Many of the world’s inventions were created by innovators so that they can change the world. Of course, without these innovations, the world would be very different. Here are some of the world’s innovators who created great inventions.

    1. Thomas Edison

    Thomas Edison was a world innovator who developed many devices in the fields of electric power generation, mass communication, sound recorders, and films. Some of his inventions include the phonograph, the moving picture camera, and an early version of the electric light bulb. Thanks to such miraculous innovations, Edison largely shaped the modern world.

    2.Leonardo da Vinci

    Leonardo da Vinci was a world painter, sculptor, architect, artist and innovator. Apart from creating the most influential paintings in world art, such as his Magnum opus and Mona Lisa , he conceptualized a flying machine, a type of armored fighting vehicle, to concentrated solar power. In addition, Leonardo da Vinci also made substantial discoveries in anatomy, civil engineering, hydrodynamics, geology, optics, and tribology, but did not publish them.

    3. Steve Jobs

    Steve Jobs is the creator of Apple’s world innovator. In 1985, he was fired from Apple but returned with even greater success, launching the iMac, iPod, and iPad. His uncompromising vision and talent has proven to have radically changed the world of technology.

    4.Galileo Galilei

    Galileo Galilei was a world innovator who was also an Italian astronomer, philosopher and physicist who played a major role in the scientific revolution. He is also called the “Father of the scientific method”. His role as a world innovator in the scientific field is the refinement of the telescope, as well as the first and second laws of motion (dynamics). His ideas and innovations are still alive today.

    5. The Wright Brothers

    The Wright Brothers were two American brothers who built and flew the world’s first effective airplane and made the first controlled flight using a heavier-than-air powered aircraft. Their design revolutionized aviation, especially the invention of the three-axis control. Due to the persistence of the two, they succeeded in achieving the world’s first powered flight which made modern flight possible.

    Conclusion

    Based on the explanation above, we can find out more about innovators and their various miraculous innovations that are able to provide benefits to people’s lives at this time. These innovators are able to create a change just like that, but with real effort. They are able to realize their brilliant ideas and ideas for something that is beneficial to many people.

    Through an innovator, we can learn how they come up with these ideas so they can realize them so as to create something new and useful for many people. We can learn good things from an innovator when paying attention to his various characteristics.

    So, that’s a complete explanation of the meaning of innovators, characteristics, and figures of Indonesian and world innovators that are expected to help Sinaumed’s get more in-depth information and new ideas.

    If Sinaumed’s has an interest in learning about innovators, you can learn about it by reading references on the internet and available books that you can get on the official website www.sinaumedia.com with various choices.

  • Informatics Management Department: Definition, Courses to Job Prospects

    Informatics Management – ​​Entering the final years of senior high school (SMA) education, students will be faced with the process of selecting universities and majors where they will continue their education. This activity should be carried out seriously so that students do not regret having chosen the wrong major.

    Some of the Sinaumed’s who are currently in class XII of high school may have started to feel this. Some of your friends or even yourself may have taken tutoring lessons or consulted with other people regarding the university and major that will be your choice later.

    Selection of majors and universities can be based on various factors. Starting from interests and talents, future study locations, to applicants from the desired university or major. This must be considered carefully in order to increase your chances of getting into the department or university.

    In this article, we will discuss a major that many Sinaumed’s may not know about, but which has interesting activities and job prospects for your future. The major that will be discussed in this article is the Department of Informatics Management.

    The hope is that this article can help Sinaumed’s to add to your references in choosing a major when entering college. Who knows, it might turn out that you are interested in studying Information Management because of the explanation in this article. Let’s look together at the discussion below.

    Definition of Informatics Management

    From the name of the department alone, there could be some from Sinaumed’s who think that the Informatics Management Department is a branch of the Management Department. However, this major also contains the word “informatics”, which is also a separate department.

    So, is the Informatics Management Department a part of the Management Department or the Informatics Department? In this session, together we will try to understand what is the Information Management Department, and what is the big picture of what will be studied in this department.

    Even though there is the word “management” in it, the Information Management Department is in fact part of the Faculty of Computer Science Technology or the Faculty of Information Science. So, basically what Sinaumed’s learns in this department is not much different from other Informatics Departments.

    The difference here is that Sinaumed’s will be focused on learning how to create programs or software that can later be useful for businesses. Here, programs that can address a variety of things for related businesses.

    The purpose of this program and software is so that the business of the company concerned will be more effective and efficient. This causes the company to get more profit because of the program or software that has been made before.

    For this reason, besides learning about programming languages, Sinaumed’s who are interested in entering the Informatics Management Department will also be equipped with business knowledge and management knowledge so that you can understand what a business needs and translate it into programming.

    It can be said that the Informatics Management Department is a 2 in 1 package, because you will get 2 knowledge at the same time in the same major. This can make you a very flexible person in the future when looking for work.

    With this, Sinaumed’s who are interested in informatics or management can try to enter this department. Of course, you don’t need to worry if you can’t program yet, because you will definitely be taught the basics of programming at the beginning of the lecture.

    Or Sinaumed’s can also learn programming on their own with various sources such as the internet or books. One of the books that Sinaumed’s can read to understand the basics of programming is the book “SMK/MAK Class X Basic Programming Computer & Informatics Technology Expertise Program” .

    Courses in the Department of Informatics Management

    It was discussed earlier that in the Informatics Management Department, Sinaumed’s will study several subjects or courses related to both informatics and management science. Both are equally important so that you can become Informatics Management graduates that suit the needs of the current job market.

    If Sinaumed’s is too focused on the management aspect, you may have difficulty in making programs or software. However, if you are only interested in the informatics aspect, you may not know what the business really needs.

    In order for Sinaumed’s to get a broader picture of what will be studied in the Informatics Management Department, here are some required courses that you should find if you decide to enter this department.
    Of course, each university will have different compulsory courses in the Informatics Management Department. So, what you find here will only be a big picture regarding courses in the Department of Informatics Management. Here’s the information.

    1. Software Development

    Sinaumed’s, who will later enter not only the Department of Informatics Management, but other departments in Informatics Science will certainly study software development . In the Informatics Management Department, this lesson will also narrow down from software as a whole to software that focuses on the business sector.

    2. Information System Design

    Information system design is also definitely something that any Informatics major student will learn. Here, they will later learn about how to design information systems, from finding problems with old systems to creating new systems as solutions to old system problems.

    3. Computer Network

    In addition to information systems, someone who deals with information technology, of course, also needs to understand things related to computers. For this reason, students from the Department of Informatics Management will later study computer network courses to find out the intricacies between one computer and another.

    4. Business Management

    It’s not the Department of Informatics Management if students don’t study things related to management. Although not much, this is essential so that someone can understand the business world in general. One of the courses that study this is the business management course, which will study the basics of business activities in general, starting from planning, monitoring and execution.

    5. Technopreneurship

    The last subject that will be discussed in this article is technopreneurship. This course will teach students to take advantage of information technology so that they can be self-employed without having to rely on other people to work.

    Informatics Management Job Prospects

    Based on several courses that will be studied by students of the Informatics Management Department, Sinaumed’s can conclude that the job prospects of this department will be quite broad because students will get provisions in the world of informatics and the world of management at the same time.

    Sinaumed’s who are interested in entering the Department of Informatics Management will usually be more focused on getting involved in the world of informatics. This is because what the majority of students learn is informatics.

    Even so, because they get provision related to a number of things regarding management knowledge, it is not impossible for them to work in the field of management itself. Moreover, if the person seriously studies the elements of management in the Information Management Department.

    Below, there will be an explanation of several job prospects for graduates of the Informatics Management Department. Of course, this, again, this job prospect is only an overview in accordance with what students learn when they are in college.

    1. Programmers

    Becoming a programmer is something that many Informatics students have been after after they graduate from campus. This is because they get provisions when they learn about various things related to programming systems.

    Of course, Information Management majors can also become programmers after they graduate from campus. What they learn is not much different from students from several other Informatics Departments, so this work is still within their reach.

    2. Web Designer

    As the name implies, a web designer is in charge of managing the appearance of a website or website for a company or agency. This one job might be said to be one of the most suitable jobs for Informatics Management graduates.
    This is because students should have been educated to know what a company or agency needs on their site so that visitors get a wearing and satisfying experience when they open the site.

    3. Software Engineer

    Software engineer is also a job that is quite common for graduates of the Informatics Management Department. In this job, someone is required to develop a software from scratch and test whether the software is feasible or not to be launched.

    Especially for graduates of the Informatics Management Department, your chances of being accepted at a business-based company are quite large, because again here they already have the basic knowledge to understand what is needed in a business.

    4. IT Consultants

    New graduates or fresh graduates may not be able to get this job right away, given their relatively large role in the company. However, with sufficient experience, graduates from the Department of Informatics including the Department of Informatics Management can work as IT Consultants.

    People who work as IT Consultants are tasked with helping develop technology within a company by providing advice and advice as well as monitoring and supervising technological developments. Naturally, someone who will work in this field must have quite a lot of experience first.

    5. Entrepreneurs

    Finally, Informatics Management students can start developing their careers as entrepreneurs or entrepreneurs because, as discussed several times above, they gain a number of knowledge related to management.

    Knowledge of this management can be useful for those who are already planning to become an entrepreneur after graduation. What’s more, this Informatics Management graduate has something that not many other entrepreneurs have, namely an understanding of programming that can help them later in entrepreneurship.

    That is why students studying in the Department of Informatics Management do not underestimate learning about management, because they do not know how much benefit they can get from knowledge related to this field. The book “Fundamentals of Management ” can be a reference in learning related to basic things about management.

    Other Informatics Majors

    From earlier, we have focused on discussing various things about the Information Management Department. However, there may be some from Sinaumed’s who are less interested in entering the Informatics Management Department for certain reasons.

    If that’s the case, don’t worry. In this last session, we will discuss other majors that are still related to informatics. Because even though they are the same, in fact each department has its own main focus so that their proficiency in informatics is not completely the same.

    Hopefully, this information can help Sinaumed’s who are interested in informatics so that they can choose the right major that suits your interests and talents. Or at least, if Sinaumed’s hasn’t found the above, you can get additional references for the future.

    Informatics Engineering

    Basically, informatics engineering is a science that studies various kinds of things regarding technology so that humans can use the existence of technology, especially computers, optimally in order to be able to help the advancement of human civilization.

    This goal seems quite heavy. However, in reality, for Sinaumed’s who are interested in the world of computer technology, you will learn various interesting things about computers later. Informatics Engineering will usually be very liked by people who like to think logically and solve a problem.

    Information Technology Department

    In fact, what the Information Technology Department learns from the Informatics Engineering Department is not much different. It’s just that the Information Technology Department will focus more on the application of technology, especially computers, to the wider community.

    So, students who enter this department will later use their technology-related knowledge to apply and apply it to various fields in the wider community, such as the health sector, the economics sector and also the education sector.

    Information Systems Major

    Finally, the Informatics Department that we will discuss at the end of this article is the Information Systems Department. Among the 2 other majors that we have discussed in this article, the Information Systems Department can be said to be the most similar to the

    Informatics Management

    This is because students of the Information Systems Department will later be required to do business-related programming. This allows students to learn a number of things in the field of business and management in order to make their work easier in the future.

    What is clear, what all these majors have in common is programming. If any of the Sinaumed’s are interested in getting into one of these majors, it would be wise for you to learn the basics of programming. One of the books that can help you achieve this is the book “Basic Computer Programming Logic (Update Version)” .

    With this, the articles that have discussed the Department of Informatics Management have ended. Hopefully some of the Sinaumed’s will find this article useful and can be of use to you both now and in the future.

    If Sinaumed’s is interested in buying the books mentioned above regarding Informatics Management, you can visit our site directly at sinaumedia.com . We, sinaumedia, #UnlimitedFriends , always try our best to provide quality reading books to increase your knowledge and insight #MoreWithReading .

    Author: M. Adrianto S.

    Also read:

  • Infinite Limit: Definition, Questions and Discussion, and History

    Infinite Limit – Does Sinaumed’s like math? If so, what material is your favorite, is it algebra or limits? Algebra and limits are different , yes , even though both of them have variables and various numbers in them. But don’t think that the material in mathematics is just calculations, but can also be applied in everyday life, you know… Then, what is an infinite limit? Who are the great figures who find limits in everyday life? What is the concept and nature of a limit? Come on, see the following reviews!

    The Concept and Nature of the Infinite Limit

    A simple concept so that Sinaumed’s understands what a limit is, you can take the following example. When at a shop, try to take the candy in the jar by holding it. On the first grip, you get 5 candy wrappers. Then on the second grip, get 6 candy wrappers. At hand when, get 5 candy wrappers. Then on the fourth grip, get 7 candy wrappers. Finally alias on the fifth grip, get 6 candy wrappers. So, the average of the five grips is 5 packs and is almost close to 6. Now, “almost close” is what is analogous to the concept of limit.

    Infinite Limit is a limit concept involving the symbols ∞ and -∞, that is, if the value of the function f(x) increases or decreases without limit or if x increases or decreases without limit. The first concept is about the limit of the function f at point c for the function f which is limited to an interval containing c. While the second concept is about the limit of the function f for a variable x that increases without limit (x→∞) or for a variable x that decreases without limit x→-∞), which is known as an infinite limit. 

    Then, the properties of the limit at one point and the limit of the composition function for functions that have limits, and the principle of clamping also applies to limits at infinity. The statement of the theorem is exactly the same, but x→c is replaced by x→∞, or replaced by x→ – ∞, and the origin of f is adjusted.

    In short, this infinite limit is a form of study to find out the trend of a function, if the value of the variable is indeed made bigger. If it is said that x goes to infinity, then it will be written as (x→∞). That is, the value of x will get bigger or bigger until it is unlimited.

    Infinite Limit Formula

    To calculate the tendency of a function that is made bigger, of course you have to use a certain formula. Reporting from edmodo.id , an infinite limit has its own formula depending on its shape.

    Infinite Limit Formula with Polynomial Form

    The polynomial form in variable X to the highest power of one, if depicted in a Cartesian diagram, will form a straight line. Well, the limit value in the polynomial form really depends on the highest power of the polynomial. The limit of a function that has a variable x, will have a direct effect on the function f(x).

    Infinite Limit Formula in Fractional Form

    Infinity Limit Formula in Trigonometry Form

    Infinite Limit Questions and Discussion

    Example Question 1

    DISCUSSION

    Example Problem 2

    DISCUSSION

    Example Problem 3

    DISCUSSION

    Know the History of Limits

    Before discussing what an infinite limit is, it would be nice if Sinaumed’s knew the history of limits first. Basically, the limit of a function is a misconception in calculus and analysis regarding the behavior of a function as it approaches a certain input point. A function will later map the output f(x) for each input x. The function has a limit L at the input point p, when f(x) is “approaching” to L, as well as when x is close to p. In other words, f(x) gets closer to L, as x also gets closer to p.

    If analyzed further, if f is applied to any input that is close enough to p, then the result is an output that is (arbitrarily) close to L. Well, if the input that is close to p turns out to be mapped to very different outputs, then the function f It can be said that there is no limit.

    Has Sinaumed’s ever wondered what the history of the existence of limits is? Well, it turns out that this definition of limit has been studied since the 19th century, you know…

    It should be noted that the history of the development of calculus can be seen from the period of ancient times, medieval times, and modern times. In the ancient period, some ideas about integral calculus arose, but unfortunately it was not developed properly and systematically. The reason was simple, because at that time there was a lack of knowledge or references related to calculus. Calculations of volume and area which are the main functions of integral calculus have been traced to and preserved in an Egyptian Moscow Papyrus (1800 BC). Here’s a little trivia, papyrus is a manuscript of material that resembles thick paper and is usually used for writing media in ancient times. Well, the Moscow Papyrus stated that the Egyptians had been able to calculate the volume of the pyramid which was later developed again by Archimedes and at the same time created a heuristic that resembled integral calculus.

    Continuing in the Middle Ages, an Indian mathematician named Aryabhata used the concept of infinity in 499 and at the same time expressed matters relating to astronomy in the form of basic differential equations. This equation was developed again by Bhaskara II in the 12th century to become the initial form of the derivative which represented infinitely small changes. This is also the initial form of Rolle’s Theorem.

    Around 1000, there was an Iraqi mathematician named Ibn al-Haytham, who became the first person to derive a formula for calculating the sum of the powers of four using mathematical induction. Ibn al-Haytham also developed a method for deriving the general formula from the product of the power of the integral, which of course became important in the development of integral calculus. Continuing in the 12th century, a Persian mathematician named Sharaf al-Din al-Tusi emerged who managed to find the derivative of cubic functions which became important in differential calculus.

    Meanwhile, in modern times, independent discoveries emerged, precisely at the beginning of the 17th century in Japan, which were initiated by a mathematician named Seki Kowa. Different countries, different mathematicians who sparked their discovery of limits. In Europe, there are several mathematicians who have made breakthroughs in calculus material, for example, there are John Wallis and Isaac Barrow. Even James Gregory also helped prove calculus with a special case of the fundamental theorem of calculus in 1886 to be exact.

    Some of the other notable experts who encouraged the discovery of this calculus are Leibniz and Newton. These two experts are considered to be the inventors of calculus separately but at about the same time. Newton applied calculus in general to physics, while Leibniz developed calculus in everyday life. So, when Leibniz and Newton succeeded in publishing the results of their research for the first time, a controversy arose which “debated” about which mathematician was more deserving of the award. Newton is considered to have completed his research results first, but Leibniz was the first to publish them. In fact, Newton accused Leibniz of stealing his ideas through his notes, which at that time he often lent to several members of the Royal Society.

    So, to solve this problem, a detailed examination was carried out to show that the two mathematicians were indeed working separately, with Leibniz starting from integrals, while Newton started from derivatives. After the examination, both Newton and Leibniz were declared mathematicians who played a major role in the field of calculus and received awards. Leibniz is considered to be the person who gave the name to this branch of mathematics namely “Calculus”, while Newton is considered to be the figure who gave the name “The Science of Fluxions”.

    Since then, many mathematicians have contributed to the development of calculus, one of which is Maria Gaetana Agnesi in 1748. Maria discovered further developments from calculus in the form of finite and infinitesimal analysis. Apart from that, there is also Cauchy who also discusses limits in his research entitled Cours d’analyse in 1821 and is considered a standard method for explaining limits.

    In general, this calculus was developed by manipulating very small quantities, of course the objects are numbers. An infinitely small dx number can be greater than 0, but can also be smaller than any number in the sequence 1, ½, ⅓, and so on; and any positive real number. Also, any multiplication by an ‘infinitely small’ number is still ‘infinitely small’. In other words, this infinitesimal does not satisfy Archimedes’ point of view. Therefore, calculus is a set of techniques for manipulating ‘small infinity’.

    In the 19th century, the concept of ‘infinitely small’ was abandoned as unconvincing and replaced by the concept of limit. Limit describes the value of a function at a certain input value with the result of the closest input value. It is from this point of view that calculus is a set of techniques for manipulating certain limits.

    If we analyze it again, the definition of the limit of a function is: “Given a function f(x) which is defined at intervals around p, with the possible exception of p itself. We say that the limit f(x) when x approaches p is L ”, then the writing is:

    Scientists Contributing to Limits

    1. Augustin-Louis Cauchy 

    Previously, Sinaumed’s must have realized that Cauchy’s name appeared in the history of Limit’s emergence. Yep, he was born on August 21, 1789 in Paris, France, and then died on May 23, 1857 at the age of 67, which was known as a French mathematician. Cauchy pursued his education at the Ecole Polytechnique, because his health was not so good, he made a career as a professor at the Ecole Polytechnique and the College de France.

    Although calculus was invented around the 17th century, its basics remained muddled and messy until Cauchy and his colleagues conducted further research.

    1. Sir Isaac Newton

    Newton, besides being a physicist, was also an English mathematician, astronomer, natural philosopher, to theologian, who was born on January 4, 1643 and died on March 31, 1727 at the age of 84. He was a follower of the heliocentric school and became the most influential scientist in history. Even Newton is also called the “Father of Classical Physics”.

    His book Philosophiæ Naturalis Principia Mathematica , published in 1687, is considered the most influential book in the history of science, because it discusses the foundations of classical mechanics. In the book, Newton helped to describe the law of gravity and the three laws of motion that dominated the scientific view of the universe for three centuries. Newton also managed to show that the motion of objects on Earth and other celestial bodies is governed by the same set of natural laws. Newton became a figure who was able to prove the relationship between Kepler’s laws of planetary motion and his theory of gravity.

    1. Gottfried Wilhelm Leibniz

    Leibniz is a German philosopher born on July 1, 1646 who is famous for the Theodicee concept he created. This understanding reveals that humans live in the best possible world because this world was created by a perfect God. Apart from being a philosopher, he is also a mathematician, diplomat, physicist, historian, and a doctorate in church law. His contribution to science was enormous, so many journals and manuscripts were published under his name.

    Also Read!

    • The formula for the surface area of ​​a block and examples of problems
    • Understanding and Steps to Determine Rotational Symmetry in Flat Figures
    • Definition of Inverse Matrix and its terms
    • Definition, Functions, Formulas, and Examples of Problems from Logarithms
    • What is Commutative Properties and Example Problems
    • The Distributive Property As A Way Of Solving Equations
    • Definition of Constants, Variables, and Terms Accompanied by Example Problems
    • Characteristics of Beams and Discussion of Problems
    • Formulas for Calculating Volume, Surface Area, and Base Circumference in Cylindrical Constructs
    • Who Invented Zero?
    • How to Convert Common Fractions to Decimals 
    • The Characteristics and Properties of Flat Shapes
    • How to Calculate the Volume of a Block
    • Getting to Know the Types of Angles

  • Ineffective Sentences: Definition, Characteristics, Elements and Examples

    Definition of Ineffective Sentences – In the science of Indonesian language certainly cannot be separated from the name of the sentence. Sentences themselves are formed from a collection of letters that make up a word, then words compose a clause, and clauses form a sentence.

    In making sentences, you should not be too wordy so that the reader or listener can easily understand the meaning of the sentence conveyed by the writer or speaker. If there is a sentence like this, then the sentence is an ineffective sentence.

    You need to know these ineffective sentences, starting from their meaning, characteristics, conditions, to examples of ineffective sentences. By knowing more about ineffective sentences, you can avoid making ineffective sentences. See an explanation of ineffective sentences below

    Definition of Ineffective Sentences

    Ineffective sentences are sentences whose sentence structure is not easy to understand and cannot convey a complete and clear message to the reader or listener. Because the message that the writer or speaker wants to convey is not easy to understand, it is very likely that the reader or listener misunderstands the intent and purpose of the message conveyed by the speaker or writer.

    In an academic environment, ineffective sentences are highly discouraged for use in various kinds of scientific writing, why is that? Because sentences are not effective, research results will not be easily understood by academics. Scientific work that is not accepted in an academic environment will not be developed. Even the author of the scientific paper will be considered less competent in his field.

    Therefore, when writing research results, writing scientific articles, and the like, it is appropriate for academics to use effective sentence structure so that it can be understood by many people, especially academics.

    So that you don’t make mistakes in writing effective sentences, you should recognize the characteristics of ineffective sentences. By knowing the characteristics of ineffective sentences, you can avoid ineffective sentences and immediately rewrite using effective sentences.

    The thing that needs to be underlined from writing effective sentences is that effective sentences can still be read or heard. Even though it can be read or heard, the message or intent of the sentence is difficult to convey to the reader or listener.

    Characteristics of Ineffective Sentences

    Same with other sentences that have characteristics. The following are the characteristics of ineffective sentences.

    1. Unclear Sentence Elements

    The first feature of an ineffective sentence is an unclear sentence element. You can see this unclear element in the building structure of the sentence itself. In general, every sentence will have a subject, object, predicate, and adverb. However, in an ineffective sentence there is no subject in the sentence. The absence of a subject in a sentence indicates that the sentence cannot be a main sentence.

    Sentence building structures are placed out of position so that the reader or listener takes a long time to understand the meaning of the sentence. In fact, some people don’t want to read or listen to sentences that have been conveyed by the author or speaker.

    2. Improper Use of Multiple Sentence Diction

    The use of inappropriate diction in a sentence has an influence on the content or intent of the sentence. Content that is not conveyed in a sentence can cause misunderstandings between readers and writers as well as listeners and speakers. The occurrence of misunderstandings in the sentences conveyed indicates that the sentences are difficult to understand.

    If there is no diction, a sentence will not be formed. Therefore, never underestimate the use of diction in sentences. Even though the use of diction is correct, it is better to use language that is easily understood by readers or listeners. Easy-to-understand works are likely to be liked by many people too. So, have you used diction correctly?

    3. The use of Indonesian spelling is not in accordance with PUEBI

    It is common that in writing it is best to refer to PUEBI (General Guidelines for Indonesian Spelling), especially writing scientific papers. In PUEBI, you will find out various ways to use spelling in accordance with PUEBI, such as writing capital letters, using italics, punctuation, and so on. In short, PUEBI is strongly recommended to be used as a reference in writing.

    However, in the ineffective sentence the use of Indonesian spelling is very inconsistent with PUEBI. Writing that is not in accordance with PUEBI will be difficult for readers to understand. For example, there is no comma before the word “but or but”, the beginning of a sentence that does not use capital letters, and so on.

    4. There is no main idea in the sentence

    The next characteristic of an ineffective sentence is that there is no main idea in a sentence. If there is no main idea in a sentence, the paragraph becomes incomplete. Therefore, ineffective sentences can reduce the information conveyed to readers or listeners.

    Thus, each sentence that is collected will produce a paragraph. Paragraphs are in an essay which usually contain one main idea. However, the main idea becomes invisible if using sentences is not effective. In the absence of a main idea, the information to be conveyed becomes less than optimal or incomplete. Information that is not optimal can lead to misunderstandings between writers and readers.

    5. Extravagant in the use of words

    In ineffective sentences, the use of words is very wasteful so that it makes a sentence less pleasant to read. We can see the wastage of words in sentences when reading sentences where there are lots of the same words. Besides being unpleasant to read, wastage of words can eliminate the message or intent of the sentence.

    In fact, there are various ways to increase vocabulary so that you can make sentences that interest readers. One way is to read books, articles, literary works, and so on. By reading various kinds of writing, indirectly your vocabulary will increase slowly.

    Writing Indonesian grammar should be taught since children are still in elementary school so that when they get older they are used to writing good and effective grammar. For you parents, you can teach your children who are still in elementary school to use the Indonesian Elementary School Sentence Book .

    Books that discuss Indonesian sentence grammar can be studied by students and teachers so that their writing is easily understood by many people. You want to get this book? Don’t worry, the method is very easy, just click the “buy now” button, all you have to do is wait for the book to arrive at its destination.

    Ineffective Sentence Elements

    Similar to other sentences that have elements, the ineffective sentence also has elements. The following are elements of an ineffective sentence.

    1. No subject or predicate
    2. Inappropriate Predicate Location
    3. Inappropriate Object Location
    4. Place Inappropriate Information
    5. Spelling Not In Accordance with PUEBI

    Ineffective Sentence Terms

    The formation of a sentence is not effective due to several conditions. Check out the conditions for forming ineffective sentences.

    1. Sentence structure is not one unit

    Sentences that have a good structure have one unit, such as a subject and predicate. However, in sentences that are not effective, the sentence structure does not have one unit, so it is very difficult to understand.

    2. Unparalleled Sentences

    The condition for making the next ineffective sentence is a misaligned sentence. Parallel sentences can be interpreted as sentences that do not have the same elements.

    3. Sentences Are Very Extravagant Or Long-winded

    Ineffective sentences are sentences that are convoluted or whose content is difficult to understand. Usually an ineffective sentence is proven by the presence of unnecessary repetition of words.

    4. Illogical Sentences

    In writing ineffective sentences, conditions are needed in the form of illogical or unacceptable sentence content. Therefore, ineffective sentences will be very difficult for many people to understand.

    5. Words in Sentences Overlap

    The existence of overlapping words in a sentence is a condition for the formation of an ineffective sentence. You can see overlapping words in the writing that places the words “so” and “so” close together.

    6. No subject or predicate

    The absence of a subject or predicate is a condition for the formation of an ineffective sentence. When the subject or predicate is not in a sentence, the information in the sentence will be difficult to understand.

    7. Wrong word formation

    As we know that Indonesia has a Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI) which contains the correct word writing. If in a sentence there are words that are not in accordance with KBBI, then the sentence can be said to be an ineffective sentence.

    8. Use of Unnecessary Prepositions

    Prepositions really help a sentence to make it easier to understand. However, this does not apply to ineffective sentences. The condition for making the last ineffective sentence is the use of unnecessary prepositions.

    5 Books That Make You More Understanding About Writing According to EYD

    1. Good at Writing Letters, Words, and Sentences

    2. Sentence Editing Practice

    3. The EYD Book

    4. General Guidelines for Indonesian Spelling

    5. Complete Guide to EYD with Terms Formation Guidelines

    The difference between Effective Sentences and Ineffective Sentences

    Ineffective sentences have some differences with effective sentences. As quoted from the book Indonesian in Higher Education Based on Active Learning  (2017), the difference between effective sentences and ineffective sentences is divided into five parts, namely:

    1. Based on Sentence Forms

    Effective sentence

    Effective sentences have a very concise and short sentence form so that the reader or listener really understands each sentence conveyed. Sentences that are easy to understand make the reader or listener want to read or listen to the sentence again.

    Ineffective Sentences

    Ineffective sentences have sentences that are not dense and wordy. Long-winded information contained in sentences will be difficult for readers or listeners to accept. This is because ineffective sentences are very difficult for readers or listeners to understand.

    2. Based on Reader’s Understanding

    Effective sentence

    Sentences that are made effectively will make it easier for the reader to accept the intent and purpose to be conveyed by the author. The large number of people who understand your writing, it is possible if your writing or work will be liked by many people.

    Ineffective Sentences

    Information in ineffective sentences will be difficult to understand or understand by readers or listeners. In fact, for some people feel confused when reading sentences is not effective. Readers will feel bored when the use of ineffective sentences is used continuously.

    3. Based on Completeness of Sentence Elements

    Effective sentence 

    In an effective sentence there are complete and explicit elements or at least there is a subject and predicate. This makes effective sentences easy to understand or understand. So, often use effective sentences in every writing you make.

    Ineffective Sentences

    Ineffective sentences do not have complete elements. Incomplete elements usually occur because of the loss of a subject or predicate in a sentence. Incomplete elements will make it difficult for the reader to understand ineffective sentences.

    4. Based on its nature

    Effective sentence

    The properties possessed by effective sentences are very logical and can be accepted by common sense. Sentences that are acceptable to common sense will make it easier for readers to understand the content or intent of effective sentences.

    Ineffective Sentences

    The nature of ineffective sentences is very illogical and cannot be accepted by common sense. In other words, ineffective sentences will make it difficult for the reader to get information so that the reader will quickly get bored.

    5. Based on the composition of the sentences

    Effective sentence

    Effective sentences have a very clear and concise sentence structure. Therefore, the information in effective sentences will be easy to understand so that readers really want to repeat their reading.

    Ineffective Sentences

    Sentences are not effective, the sentence structure is very ambiguous because it is not in accordance with the structure of the Indonesian language. The arrangement of sentences that are not in accordance with the Indonesian language structure makes it difficult for readers to understand the meaning of ineffective sentences.

    After discussing the differences between ineffective sentences and effective sentences, are you interested in learning how to write sentences? Writing sentences can be done by knowing letters and words. In order to know more about how to write sentences, you can learn through a book entitled Good at Writing Letters, Words and Sentences .

    This book is perfect for parents when they want to teach their children to be good at writing. This book is equipped with crossword puzzles (crosswords) to how to write simple sentences. Sinaumed’s, what are you waiting for, buy this book immediately. It’s very easy, just click the “buy now” button.

    Examples of Ineffective Sentences

    1. Andi and Budi play the ball on the field

    2. Counterfeit money must be checked because it is seen, touched, dreamy

    3. Andi lost his wallet at the market

    4. Agus planted fruit trees

    5. Workspace read newspapers

    6. Students study mathematics at school

    7. Burning trees causes pollution

    8. At school student council chairman Farhan

    9. The book can be sold, burned, thrown away

    10. All guests are welcome to take food

    11. To Mr. Anto, we welcome the time and place

    12. I exercise before I go to work

    13. Eating kale

    14. Grow guava

    15. Father’s car was taken since morning

    Conclusion

    In writing an article it is highly discouraged to use ineffective sentences because it will make it difficult for the reader to understand the message and intent of the sentence. Therefore, every individual must diligently read and understand the spelling of PUEBI, which is a way that can be used when writing so that the writing results are in the form of effective sentences.

  • Indonesia’s Geographical & Astronomical Location and Its Influence on Indonesia

    Geographical and astronomical location of Indonesia – Geographical and astronomical location of Indonesia is the position of the Indonesian state which is defined in the boundaries that surround Indonesia. This country has many islands that are composed from Sabang to Merauke.

    In this article, we will discuss more deeply the astronomical geographic location of Indonesia. For those of you who are curious about the explanation, see the information below.

    The appearance of Indonesia’s natural surface consists of land and water with a ratio of 4:1. The appearance of the land itself is in the form of the highest mountain, the longest river in Indonesia, the lake which makes Indonesia the 15th largest country in the world.

    Indonesia itself is an archipelagic country which is located in a strategic position and is described in terms of geographical position and astronomical position. The following is a full explanation.

    Indonesia is the largest archipelagic country in the world. This country also has a geographical position that is quite unique and makes it strategic. We can see this from the location of Indonesia which is between two oceans and also two continents and has waters which are one of the hearts of international trade.

    Geographical Location of Indonesia

    Geographical location is one of the determinants that will determine the future of a country in conducting international relations. Even though it is being ignored for the time being, the geographical conditions that exist in a country will determine various kinds of events that have a global impact.

    According to Robert Kaplan, geography broadly can be a determinant and influence various events more than ever before.

    In the future, Indonesia’s existence will be influenced by its geographical condition and location. Therefore, management of natural resources, capable defense, and qualified border areas are urgently needed.

    Due to its strategic location, Indonesia has long been an arena for foreign influence struggles. This country has gone through several periods of control and struggle for influence.

    Starting from the Netherlands, Portugal, to the United States and also the Soviet Union during the Cold War. In the future, it is possible that Indonesia will again become an area of ​​struggle for influence by other major powers. We can see this with the presence of China as the new hegemon in the region which has shifted the balance of power and also eroded America’s influence in the region.

    Not only that, Indonesia and the surrounding region can become areas prone to disputes. This dispute can occur because Indonesia still has not resolved issues such as maritime boundaries with Australia, the Philippines, Timor Leste, Papua New Guinea, and islands.

    The border negotiation process requires a lot of time, while it will make Indonesia more vulnerable to foreign influence due to weak border controls. Starting from terrorism to transnational crimes that may be committed in Indonesia which is very broad with its geographical conditions and quite limited supervision.

    When viewed geographically, the Indonesian Archipelago is between the Asian Continent and also the Australian Continent and between the Indian Ocean and the Pacific Ocean.

    For the borders of Indonesia itself, namely:

    1. To the north: the South China Sea and the Pacific Ocean.
    2. To the east: Papua New Guinea.
    3. To the south: Indian Ocean.
    4. West: Indian Ocean.

    Meanwhile, the area of ​​Indonesia reaches 5,194,143 km2 and two-thirds of Indonesia’s area is ocean.

    Indonesian Natural Appearance

    As we mentioned above, Indonesia is the largest archipelagic country in the world. Therefore, Indonesia is very rich in natural landscapes. In addition, the natural resources in Indonesia are also very abundant. Where natural wealth is one of the basic capital for Indonesia’s development. For that, it would be better if we use the existing natural wealth as well as possible.

    Several land areas in Indonesia were formed from volcanic activity. This is marked by the appearance of the islands which have shapes like mountains of dust, lava, and also mud from volcanic eruptions which make the surrounding soil more fertile. Therefore, most of Indonesia’s population utilizes existing land for plantations and also agriculture.

    While the series of mountains in Indonesia stretches from the tip of Sumatra Island to the northern tip of Sulawesi Island. One of the most famous mountains in Indonesia is Mount Anak Krakatau. This mountain is located between the islands of Java and Sumatra.

    In the past, a very powerful eruption of Mount Krakatau occurred in 1883. From the eruption, three-fourths of the volcanic island was destroyed and caused a tsunami wave that killed thousands of people.

    After the eruption of Mount Krakatau, a new mountain emerged which is now called Mount Anak Krakatau. The territory of Indonesia itself is located on the equator. This causes Indonesia to have a tropical climate.

    Meanwhile, the difference in temperature in each region tends to be very small, except in Puncak Jaya, which is in Papua Province. This mountain peak is covered with eternal snow. Puncak Jaya is located in the Sudirman Mountains area.

    Rainfall in various regions in Indonesia also varies. The wettest places in Indonesia are the mountains in Sumatra, Kalimantan, Sulawesi and Papua. Meanwhile, rainfall in these places reaches 3,000 mm per year.

    Title: Geographic Information System

    There are thousands of plant species that can be found in this region. The types of fauna in Indonesia are divided into two main groups, namely the Asian type and the Australian type. This Asian type of fauna lives in the northern and western regions. For example, Asian-type fauna, namely elephants and tigers.

    As for the Australian type fauna, it lives in the eastern part of Indonesia, especially Papua. On remote islands also found quite unique fauna. For example, the Komodo dragon on Rinca Island and Komodo Island.

    Condition of the Indonesian Population

    In 2006, Indonesia’s population reached 206,265,000 people. There are more than 300 ethnic groups in Indonesia. Where most of the population adheres to Islam. Other religions that are developing in Indonesia are Protestant, Catholic, Hindu, Buddhist and Confucianism.

    Meanwhile, the main economic activity of the Indonesian population is agriculture. Apart from rice, agriculture in Indonesia also produces cassava, corn, rubber, tea and soybeans. Other economic activities in Indonesia are animal husbandry, fishing, mining and industry.

    Location of Indonesian Astronomy

    In addition to geographical location, there is also an astronomical location in which Indonesia’s position is influenced by imaginary lines of the earth, namely the latitudes and longitudes that surround the earth. This imaginary line is called because it is actually on the surface of the earth.

    This one line does not only exist in the development of astronomy in the branches of biology. The following is the location of Indonesian astronomy based on latitude and longitude, namely:

    a. Latitude

    Latitude divides the structure of the earth into 2 equal parts, namely between north and south. Where is the line of latitude that is parallel to the imaginary equator (equator) that stretches to the north pole and south pole. The astronomical location of Indonesia is at 6o North Latitude (N) to 11o South Latitude (S).

    b. Longitude

    This longitude has divided the earth horizontally, namely from west to east. This longitude is also called the meridian which limits the astronomical position of Indonesia between 95o east longitude (BT) – 141o east longitude (BT).

    The Influence of Indonesia’s Geographical and Astronomical Positions

    The following are some of the things that affect Indonesia based on its geographical location.

    a. Influence Season

    Indonesia’s geographical location is traversed by monsoon or monsoon winds. This monsoon wind brings different seasons in Indonesia. Which will affect the process of rain in the rainy season and hot dry season. In addition, the monsoon itself will move alternately throughout the year twice.

    b. Strategic area

    As we have discussed above, the location of Indonesia itself is between two continents and two oceans. This makes Indonesia an international crossing route, be it by sea or by air. That way, this event will affect economic development in Indonesia’s exclusive economic zone which is passed by large industries.

    c. Having Cultural Diversity

    Because the location of Indonesia’s territory is between two continents, namely the Australian Continent and the Asian Continent, so that Indonesia is in a cross position. That reason makes Indonesia has cultural diversity in the form of language, art, religion, and also civilization.

    d. Has a Strategic Trading Location

    Indonesia’s geographical location makes this country a strategic trading location. This is because the territory of Indonesia is a distribution channel for trade goods. This reason makes Indonesia have trade partners with surrounding countries. So that trading activity is increasing.

    Furthermore, the following is the influence of Indonesia’s astronomical position, as follows:

    a. Affecting Climate

    Indonesia is located along the equator which means Indonesia has a tropical climate. Regions that have a tropical climate will get sunlight as the center of the solar system all the time. This of course will be different from what happens in countries that have a four-season subtropical climate. The same goes for polar climates.

    Characteristics of Regions with a Tropical Climate

    • High rainfall
    • There is a vast tropical rain forest
    • Sunshine all year round
    • High air humidity

    b. Affects the Time Difference

    This astronomical location can affect the time difference set starting from latitude and also 0 o longitude in Greenwich City, England. For Indonesia itself, it is divided into three time zones, namely WIB (West Indonesia Time), WIT (East Indonesia Time), and WITA (Central Indonesia Time) in accordance with Presidential Decree No.41 of 1987.

    • Western Indonesia Time (WIB): covers the western part of Indonesia such as Sumatra, Java, Madura, West Kalimantan, Central Kalimantan, and the surrounding small islands.
    • Central Indonesian Time (WITA): covers the central part of Indonesia such as Bali, Nusa Tenggara, South Kalimantan, East Kalimantan, Sulawesi, and the surrounding small islands.
    • Eastern Indonesia Time (WIT) covers the eastern part of Indonesia such as the Maluku Islands, Papua, West Papua and the surrounding small islands.

    This is an explanation of Indonesia’s astronomical geographical location that needs to be understood. With the brief explanation above, we can better understand how the location of a country affects natural conditions and its economy.

  • Indonesia’s attractiveness in the eyes of the world besides its natural beauty

    The attractiveness of Indonesia – Indonesia is a country that has its own uniqueness in it. Where Indonesia consists of various islands that stretch wide. Then, every island in Indonesia has a diversity of tribes, cultures, customs, flora and fauna.

    Even so, there are still some people who don’t know how unique the country of Indonesia is. In fact, if we dig deeper, the uniqueness of Indonesia may not be shared by other regions.

    So, for more details, we will study together related to the attractiveness of Indonesia.

    Indonesian Attraction

    As previously explained, Indonesia has its own charm in it. Every island in Indonesia has different characteristics. The flora, fauna and culture of the local people also differ from one island to another.

    It is very interesting for us to know more about the attractiveness of Indonesia. Besides being able to broaden our horizons, we as Indonesians will also love and understand more how interesting and unique this country is.

    1. The Existence of Natural Diversity and Rare Natural Phenomena

    Indonesia is located between the Pacific Ocean and the Indian Ocean making this country has a diverse climate and biosphere that stretches widely from Sabang to Merauke. Indonesia also has quite a variety of landscapes, ranging from tropical rain forests on the island of Kalimantan, monsoon forests producing timber and forest products in the Java region to vast expanses of savanna in the Nusa Tenggara Islands.

    This is very different from countries that only have one or only two kinds of landscapes. Apart from that, Indonesia also has several unique natural phenomena.

    One of them is Lake Toba which turns out to be the largest volcanic lake on earth. Lake Toba itself has an area of ​​about 100 x 300 square kilometers with a depth of about 505 meters.

    Apart from Lake Toba which is the largest volcanic lake in the world, Indonesia also has a three-colored lake, namely Kelimutu Lake in East Nusa Tenggara Province.

    It is undeniable that we will find a lot of natural uniqueness that is so beautiful in Indonesia, which of course we can enjoy as nature tourism. It should also be noted that we have a role in maintaining the beauty and preservation of this natural appearance.

    2. Indonesia is Home to Tens to Hundreds of Endemic Flora and Fauna Species

    Did you know that the diversity of climates and landscapes in Indonesia makes the land even more beautiful and very suitable for habitation by various types of native flora and fauna species.

    Based on estimates from various biologists, Indonesia has around 165 species of mammals, 397 birds, 150 reptiles and 100 amphibians which are endemic or can only be found in Indonesia. Of course, we often know these animals, starting from the one-horned rhinoceros, anoa, birds of paradise, which are examples of native animals that live in Indonesia.

    3. There is an Abundance of Natural Wealth Potential

    Indonesia is a country that has a diversity of landscapes that contribute to its abundant natural wealth. Starting from forest products, agricultural products to mining products. In addition, Indonesia is also included in the archipelago which is in the ring of fire area or is in a series of volcanoes.

    The many volcanoes in Indonesia are able to provide a lot of potential mining products such as minerals and rocks that are so high value. It should also be noted that Indonesia has one of the largest gold mining areas in the world, namely the Grasberg mine on the island of Papua.

    In addition, the soil in Indonesia is also classified as very fertile and very suitable for planting various types of crops. Soil fertility in Indonesia can occur because of the type of volcanic soil.

    4. The country with the largest archipelago in the world and inhabited by hundreds of tribes

    Indonesia is a country that is home to hundreds of ethnic groups from the archipelago. It has been recorded that there are around 742 indigenous tribes with different regional languages ​​in each tribe. As an example, there are tribes in the land of Papua with a total of around 270 indigenous Papuan tribes.

    This condition will be able to contribute to Indonesia’s cultural potential. In fact, Indonesia is able to have privileges regarding ethnic diversity and regional languages ​​because of this diversity.

     

    5. One of the Countries That Contributes the Largest Oxygen on Earth

    Indonesia is included in the ranks of countries that can contribute the largest oxygen in the world. The Kalimantan Islands are one of the lungs of the world which is so big. Where on the island of Borneo there are tropical forests that are able to provide the supply of oxygen needs on earth.

    Based on existing research, Indonesia is able to occupy the third limited ranking as the owner of the largest forest in the world. Seeing this, our duty as humans must be able to preserve forests and the environment.

    6. Has a Cultural Heritage Site

    It’s not only biodiversity that makes Indonesia so different from other countries, but Indonesia also has various types of cultural heritage that have been registered with UNESCO. Some of them are like Borobudur Temple, Prambanan Temple, Komodo National Park, Ujung Kulon National Park, Bali Cultural Landscape, Ombilin Coal Mine, Lorentz National Park, and Sangiran Prehistoric Man Area.

    7. Home to Giant Lizards

    Previously, it was explained that Indonesia is a country that is home to fauna. If you dig deeper, it turns out that there are giant lizards that are still alive today in Indonesia.

    Komodo dragons or commonly referred to as Komodo Dragons are animals that are only found on five Indonesian islands, starting from the islands of Komodo, Rinca, Flores, Gili Motang and Padar. The existence of Komodo dragons is a special attraction for tourists to foreign and domestic media to see and observe endemic animals in Indonesia directly.

    The researchers were so amazed when they witnessed the weight of the Komodo dragon directly and knew about the Komodo dragon’s bite which was so poisonous that it was possible to hunt or prey on animals larger than it.

    8. The price of needs is relatively affordable

    Quoted from the biennial World Economic Forum (WEF) Travel and Tourism Competitiveness report and seen from the price competitiveness factor, Indonesia is included in the best value ranking. This is what makes Indonesia the most favorite country for foreign tourists to vacation in Indonesia.

    9. Indonesia is the country with the largest Islamic religion in the world

    Judging from the number, Indonesia is a country with the largest Muslim population in the world. There are around 88 percent or around 216 million Indonesian people who embrace Islam. This also makes Indonesia the country with the largest number of mosques as well as the largest contributor of pilgrims in the world.

    10. Indonesia is the country that owns the largest Buddhist temple in the world

    Indonesia’s next attraction is as a country that has the largest Buddhist temple in the world. Where Borobudur Temple is one of the largest Buddhist temples in the world with reliefs located on the walls totaling 1,460. Because this makes the Borobudur Temple the owner of the most complete Buddhist reliefs in the world. Besides that, Borobudur Temple also has 504 Buddha statues. It should also be noted that Borobudur Temple is also a place of spiritual pilgrimage for Buddhists.

    11. There is the highest island peak in the world

    Indonesia is a country that has the highest island peak in the world. Where Puncak Jaya or better known as Carstensz Pyramid has a height of about 4,884 meters above sea level. The location of Puncak Jaya itself is on the island of New Guinea or New Guinea, Papua as well as the second largest island in the world.

    Even Puncak Jaya has also been named as one of the World Seven Summits or the 7 Peaks of the World. Apart from that Puncak Jaya also has snow on it.

    12. Owner of the Most Languages ​​in the World

    Previously, it was explained that Indonesia is a country that has many islands. Where every island in Indonesia is inhabited by various types of tribes. Every tribe in Indonesia has a language that is different from one another. There are about 707 languages ​​in the world. Because this number puts Indonesia in second place after Papua New Guinea as the owner of the most languages ​​in the world.

    So, those are some of Indonesia’s attractions that other countries don’t have. From the explanation above, we can see that Indonesia does have its own unique side.

    Animals in Indonesia that are Endangered with Extinction

    As we know, the fauna in Indonesia has its own charm. In fact, not infrequently the tourists always come to witness firsthand the beauty that is owned by every animal in Indonesia.

    However, as time goes by, the existence of various types of animals in Indonesia has begun to be threatened with extinction. One of the reasons is because of poaching from various irresponsible persons.

    Even though, as we know, the animals in Indonesia make a major contribution to the attractiveness that other countries don’t have. So, below are several types of animals in Indonesia that are endangered and are on the list of protected animals.

    1. Orangutans

    Not only in Indonesia, but throughout the world the number of orangutans is starting to decrease over time. Until now, there are only around 55,000 orangutans left. In fact, some of them live on the island of Borneo and 200 others are in Sumatra.

    The drastic decrease in the number of orangutans is due to the reduction in the habitat of their original population, for example, due to forced land clearing by irresponsible parties. But for now there are already many volunteers from all over the world working to help captive orangutans in Indonesia.

     

    2. Komodo

    Komodo is a giant lizard that is in Indonesia. In 2017, the number of Komodo species was only around 3,012. This figure has increased compared to previous years.

    Because of this scarcity, the government took action by making Komodo Island in East Nusa Tenggara a national park as well as the Komodo dragon’s natural habitat.

    One of the factors that influence the difficulty of Komodo dragon breeding is the mating process. Where the male Komodo has to do the marriage first before marrying the female Komodo. In addition, dragons that have just hatched their eggs are more vulnerable to being preyed upon by other predators.

    3. Turtle

    Sea turtles are one of the species that successfully live in Indonesia. The government has also made turtles a protected animal and has made them captives in various regions. One of the turtle hatcheries in Indonesia is on Tanjung Benoa Island, Bali, the Thousand Islands and Lombok. Interestingly, the Indonesian people always help in the process of raising turtles so they can continue to exist.

    4. Sumatran tiger

    The Sumatran tiger is one of the endangered animals in Indonesia. Currently there are only about 300 to 400 Sumatran tigers that can live in the wild. The large amount of illegal oil palm land clearing is one of the factors that has disturbed the Sumatran tiger’s habitat.

    5. Bird of Paradise

    Although every type of bird of paradise has been sent to various countries. However, for the four types of birds of paradise, they can only be found in Papua. Bird-of-paradise monitoring tours can be visited at Isio, Jalan Korea, and Gantebang which are in the Nimbokrang district, Jayapura Regency.

    Plants in Indonesia that are Endangered with Extinction

    Indonesia is not only inhabited by various types of animals. However, Indonesia is also home to flora that is so beautiful and rare. Even some of the plants in Indonesia are also included in the endangered group. So, below are some plants in Indonesia that are endangered.

    1. Tall Ancung

    The tall Acung or Amorphophallus decus-silvae Backer & Aldrew is an endemic plant that can be found in West and Central Java. This tamanan is a corpse flower that can reach a height of about 2 to 3.5 meters. This plant also has a characteristic grayish color of the petioles with dark brown pickle spots.

    Just like the corpse flower in general, the tall flower will also emit an unpleasant odor when it blooms. It should be noted that the tall acung population has decreased progressively until it is estimated that it will be able to reach just under 10,000 plants. One of the causes of the decline in the tall acung population is the widespread conversion of land functions.

    2. The Palahlar Tree

    The palahlar tree or the owner of the Latin name Dipterocarpus littoralis Blume is one of the endemic plants originating from the island of Nusakambangan. The palalar tree is about 35 meters high and has the potential to produce quality wood. In addition, the palahlar tree also has a function as a medicinal plant that utilizes the anti-bacterial parts of the bark and leaves.

    3. Semar bag

    Nepenthes or the owner of the Latin name Nepenthaceae is one of the beautiful ornamental plants. Where semar bags are found in the West Kalimantan region. However, due to poaching and destruction of native habitat caused by forest fires, this is one of the factors causing the pitcher plant to experience a decline in population.

    4. Black Orchid

    The black orchid is also included in the list of endangered plants in Indonesia. The black orchid has the Latin name Coelogyne pandurata L which is commonly found on the island of Borneo, especially in the East Kalimantan region.

    Even though it has the name black orchid, this plant does not have a completely black color. This is because the black color of this type of orchid is only found on the tongue of the flower. As for the color of the petals is yellowish green.

    Well, that’s an explanation related to the attractiveness that is owned by Indonesia. It cannot be denied that Indonesia has a diversity that is so unique and must be maintained. If you want to find books about Indonesia, then you can get them at sinaumedia.com .

    To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

    Author: Hendrik Nuryanto

    Reference:

    • https://www.idntimes.com/travel/destination/berlian-rahmy/dinding-langka-indonesia-yang-terancam-punah?page=all
    • https://www.cnnindonesia.com/gaya-hidup/20220316103010-284-771892/4-tanaman-endemik-di-indonesia-yang-virtual-punah
    • https://www.idntimes.com/science/discovery/eka-amira/hak-seputar-indonesia-yang-jadi-daya-tarik- Masyarakat-mancanegara-exp-c1c2?page=all
    • https://jadiberita.com/114400/5-keunggulan-indonesia-yang-tak-owned-negara-lain.html/2
    • https://travel.okezone.com/read/2022/03/02/406/2555147/7-keunikan-di-indonesia-yang-jarang-diketahui-punya-language-terbanyak-kedua-di-dunia?page= 4
    • https://yoursay.voice.com/kolom/2021/08/12/200758/5-keunikan-indonesia-yang-ntak-dimiliki-negara-lain

     

  • Inclusive Learning Methods and Their Benefits in Education

    Recognizing the Effectiveness of Inclusive Learning Methods – Many of us as someone who
    has studied at both private and public schools have their own obstacles in the process of understanding the
    subjects taught by our teachers at school.     Such as complaints, complicated subject matter,
    teachers who are too firm and even seem fierce who are usually called “killer” teachers, or teaching methods
    that are so boring that we often fall asleep during class lessons which result in a lack of absorption of
    knowledge from these subjects.

    The learning method that seems boring indeed has quite a big impact on the responses of students who are
    studying, so students are not optimal in understanding the material provided.     Methods that are
    too old-fashioned by way of memorization, for example, are not very effective in practice for today’s
    students because memorization is easily forgotten if we don’t understand the material being taught
    properly.

    Therefore, education in Indonesia in particular should be very aware of re-evaluating teaching methods that
    are easier for students to understand so that there is harmonization between teachers who teach and students
    who are taught.     If we complain about the dilapidated education system without being given a way
    out, such as evaluating teaching methods in education, the results will be the same.     Do not
    change.

    Currently, along with the times, there is a new teaching method called the “inclusion” method.
    But what is the “inclusion” method? and how does it apply in education?
    Let’s look at the following explanation.

  • Inclusive: Definition, Benefits, and the Concept of Inclusive Education

    Inclusive – Sinaumed’s must have often heard or read the word “inclusive”, both in the mass media and on posters stuck somewhere. Usually, the word “inclusive” is attached to an invitation for society to embrace and respect differences. Since our country is multicultural, of course the invitation to create an inclusive environment is very important.

    The existence of this inclusive environment is also implemented in an educational concept which is also supported by the state through the Constitution. Then actually, what does inclusion mean? How is it applied in the concept of education that has been proclaimed by this country? So, so that Sinaumed’s isn’t confused, let’s look at the following review!

    Definition of Inclusive

    The word “inclusive” comes from English, namely “Inclusion” which means ‘to invite in’ or ‘to include’. Meanwhile, the opposite of “inclusive” is “exclusive” which means ‘to exclude’ or ‘to separate. If you look at the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), this word has a definition of ‘including’ and ‘counting’. So, it can be concluded that “inclusive” is an attempt to accept as well as interact with other people even though that person has differences from us. In short, this is almost the same as tolerance which must be applied in a multicultural society.

    This attitude indirectly invites us to understand the problems experienced by other people, so we don’t just judge . Therefore, this attitude can be applied in a multicultural society, starting from the family, school, and community environment. Simple examples of this attitude include respecting someone who is older, respecting other people’s worship time, and many others. The existence of an inclusive attitude should be taught by families and schools from an early age, so that it can “stick” into adulthood. Because later when we grow up, we will meet many people with different ethnicities, cultures, backgrounds, statuses, and mindsets, so we must respect these differences.

    The application of this attitude is actually simple, it is even possible that Sinaumed’s often does it but does not know that even this action is included in an inclusive attitude. Here are some examples of the application of this attitude in everyday life.

    • Doing mutual cooperation to clean up the village or housing complex.
    • Make friends with everyone regardless of their ethnicity, race, or religion.
    • Do not just patronize others who are being hit by problems and calamities.
    • Provide priority seats for the elderly and pregnant women when taking public transportation.
    • Help crossing the elderly on the road.
    • Not ridiculing other cultures and traditions, even if they seem “foreign” to us.
    • Don’t just speak rudely when chatting with other people.
    • Be friendly to everyone, not just certain people.

    Inclusive Benefits

    The application of this attitude certainly provides various benefits to us, especially those living in a multicultural society. Even as much as possible, this attitude should be taught from an early age. If Sinaumed’s has children, younger siblings or nephews who are still young, it is very important to teach them this attitude, right ?

    1. Reducing discriminatory attitudes, because basically all human beings have the same position and should not be differentiated.
    2. Can respect yourself as well as others who have differences with us.
    3. Participate in developing a society with an open and intelligent mindset.
    4. Develop productivity to build a better life.
    5. Knowing the obstacles to social problems.
    6. As an attitude of respect for cultural differences and traditions that exist in the surrounding environment.

    Education Concept

    Sinaumed’s needs to know that this attitude has been implemented in an educational concept which was proclaimed by our country itself. Yep, the term education was actually coined by UNESCO which was then echoed by many countries in the world, one of which is Indonesia. Basically, this inclusive education is child-friendly, because the target is children with special needs so that they can continue to study at school just like other children.

    The term inclusive education or inclusive education was coined by UNESCO (United Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural Organization) aka the United Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural Organization with its jargon in the form of Education for All . That is, this education must be friendly to everyone and reach everyone without exception. Everyone has the same rights and opportunities to get the maximum benefit from education. These rights and opportunities are not differentiated based on physical, mental, social, emotional, even socio-economic status, so that everyone, whoever it may be, can access education.

    Well, this is of course in line with our country’s national education philosophy, which does not limit students’ access to school with any background. The term “inclusive” in inclusive education is not only inclined to those who have special needs, but all children.

    According to a professor of inclusive education from Syracuse University named Sapon Shevin, inclusive education is an educational service system that requires children with special needs to study in nearby schools with friends of their age. Usually, the school education institution that runs this school is able to accommodate all students to be in the same class. This school will also provide educational programs that are appropriate and challenging, but still adapted to the abilities and needs of each student. Not only that, inclusive schools also provide assistance and support from teachers so that their students are successful.

    On this basis, the concept of inclusive education is an education service system that includes children with special needs to study together with their peers in regular schools around their homes. The aim of this school is that all children can access the widest possible education without discrimination.

    Since inclusive education “unites” children with special needs and regular children, the school that organizes it must also adapt the needs of students, starting from the curriculum, educational facilities, to the learning system. For educators, efforts are made to those who are trained and professional in their fields so that they can objectively develop educational programs.

    History of Educational Development

    The beginning of the existence of this inclusive education was in Scandinavian countries namely in Denmark, Sweden and Norway. At that time in the 1960s, the President of the United States, JF Kennedy sent Special Education experts to Scandinavia to study mainstreaming and Least Restrictive Environment , which turned out to be suitable for application in the United States.

    Then in 1991, England began to introduce the concept of inclusive education which was initially segregative to integrative. Segregation is the separation of racial or ethnic groups by force. The demand for implementation of inclusive education to be implemented throughout the world has increasingly been realized since a world conference on children’s rights was held in 1989. Furthermore, in 1991, Bangkok, Thailand, succeeded in declaring the “Education for All” campaign. The conferences and campaigns bind all its members so that children without exception (including children with special needs) can obtain adequate educational services and without discrimination.

    As an effort to follow up on the previous campaign declaration held in Bangkok, in 1994 an educational convention was held in Salamanca, Spain. In the education convention stated that inclusive education is needed, hereinafter known as “The Salamanca statement on inclusive education”. Since countries in the world have been trying to develop inclusive education, Indonesia is also doing it.

    In 2004, the Indonesian government held a national convention and produced a Bandung Declaration which stated that Indonesia was committed to moving towards inclusive education. Followed in the following year, an international symposium was held in Bukittinggi to produce a Bukittinggi Recommendation. The recommendation contains many things, including emphasizing the need to develop inclusive education programs as a way to ensure that children receive quality and proper education and care.

    Managerial Implications of Inclusive Education

    A regular school that implements this inclusive education program will have implications or involve the following:

    1. Regular schools will provide class conditions that are friendly, warm, while accepting diversity and respecting the differences of their students.
    2. Regular schools must be prepared to manage heterogeneous classes, namely by implementing a shared curriculum and learning.
    3. Teachers who teach in class must implement interactive learning.
    4. Teachers are required to involve parents in the process of organizing their education.

    Inclusive Education Goals

    This inclusive education is held in Indonesia not only because other countries also do it, but because there are goals that affect the Indonesian people, namely:

    1. Providing the widest opportunity for all children, including children with special needs, so that they can access proper education according to their needs.
    2. Help accelerate the 12-year compulsory basic education program.
    3. To help improve the quality of primary and secondary education, by reducing the number of school leavers and dropouts.
    4. Realizing the mandate of the 1945 Constitution, especially in article 31 paragraph 1 which reads “Every citizen has the right to education”, while paragraph 2 reads “Every citizen is obliged to attend basic education and the government is obliged to finance it.”
    5. Realizing Law No. 20/2003 concerning the National Education System, especially in article 5 paragraph 1 which reads “Every citizen has the same right to obtain quality education”. While in Law No. 23 of 2002 Article 51 concerning Child Protection, it reads “Children with physical and/or mental disabilities are given equal opportunities and accessibility to obtain ordinary education and special education.”

    Basic Principles of Inclusive Education

    The basic principle of inclusive education emphasizes openness and respect for children with special needs. Through this basic principle which is directly related to guaranteeing access and opportunities for all children in obtaining education regardless of their background in life. According to Usman Abu Bakar (2012), there are two principles in education, namely:

    a) The Principle of Equal Rights in Education

    In this principle, inclusive education accommodates all children so that they get proper and quality education, respecting diversity and recognizing individual differences.

    b) Principles of School Quality Improvement

    In this principle, inclusive education will always strive to improve its quality and quality, starting from the provision of facilities and infrastructure, the ability of teachers and education staff, changing schools’ views regarding children’s needs, collaborating with other institutions as partners to improve school quality, to creating a child-friendly school.

    Meanwhile, in a book entitled Inclusive Education Training Module written by the Ministry of National Education in collaboration with the Australian government through the Australia-Indonesia Partnership, explains that there are five principles in implementing inclusive education, namely as follows:

    a) Principles of Equality and Quality Improvement

    In this principle it becomes one of the efforts to equalize opportunities to obtain education because through schools providing inclusive education, a number of children with special needs are not reached by Special Schools.

    b) The Principle of Individual Needs

    Since every child has different abilities and needs, education must be endeavored to adapt to the child’s condition.

    c) The Principle of Meaningfulness

    Inclusive education must create and maintain a friendly class community, accept diversity, and respect differences. This principle requires that no party is harmed by the existence of inclusive education.

    d) Principles of Sustainability

    Inclusive education must be carried out in a sustainable manner at all levels of education, from elementary school to senior high school.

    e) The Principle of Engagement

    In implementing inclusive education, it must involve all related components. Especially by collaborating with fellow teachers and non-teachers in order to get quality learning that suits their individual needs.

    Pros and Cons of Education

    Even though inclusive education has been recognized throughout the world as an effort to accelerate the fulfillment of the right to education for every child, its existence actually raises pros and cons. So, here are the pros and cons of inclusive education.

    Pro Education

    1. There is no strong evidence yet that Special Schools are the only best system for fulfilling the education of children with special needs.
    2. The cost of implementing inclusive education is much more expensive than regular schools.
    3. The implementation of Special Schools has implications for the labeling that children who attend these schools are ‘disabled’ children so that many people do not want to send their children to these schools.
    4. Many children with special needs who live in areas cannot attend special schools due to the long distance and unaffordable costs.
    5. Through inclusive education, there will be a process of educating the public about how to respect the differences that exist.
    6. There is a lot of evidence in regular schools, that there are children with special needs who do not get appropriate services.

    Counter Education

    1. Many parents whose children do not want to attend regular schools.
    2. Many regular schools do not yet have full preparation for implementing inclusive education, because it is related to limited resources.
    3. Special Schools are considered more effective for children with special needs to attend.

    So, that’s a review of what is inclusive and its application to the concept of the education system that exists throughout the world, especially in Indonesia. Has Sinaumed’s ever seen how this inclusive education system works?

    Also Read!

    • Definition of Inclusive Education and the Difference with Exclusive
    • What is Education Administration?
    • Definition of Consensus Deliberation and the Values ​​contained therein
    • Book Recommendations About Education
    • How to Respect and Appreciate Teachers
    • Objectives and Benefits of the ASEAN Economic Community (AEC)
    • Objectives and Types of National Education
    • The Meaning and Principles of Bhinneka Tunggal Ika
    • National Development Goals and Development in Indonesia

  • Incentives Are: Definition, Type and Purpose

    Incentives are – For employees, the term incentive is of course familiar. Incentive is a term that is often equated with bonus. This is not wrong, because according to the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI) incentives are additional income in the form of goods, money and so on that are given to someone to increase enthusiasm at work. Another term for incentives is stimulus money. Incentives are often given to employees as a form of appreciation from the company.

    For this reason, giving incentive money is usually related to the performance of an employee who has been evaluated by the company. If there is an employee who has good performance, he will get an incentive in a certain form. For more about incentives, check out this one article!

    Definition of Incentives

    Incentives are not salaries, even though both are rewards or tokens of service, but salary and incentives need to be distinguished. Salary is the basic right of employees who have worked in a company. Meanwhile, incentives are motivation or stimulus for employees who are able to improve their performance at work.

    Incentives are often seen as bonuses and are one of the good news for employees who get them. By providing a number of incentives, every job that has high dedication will feel valued by the company where it works.

    In other words, incentives are a form of reward or additional service marks beyond the basic rights of employees such as salary. Incentives can be in the form of money, goods or in other forms provided by the company to improve the performance of employees at work.

    Apart from money or goods, incentives can also be given in other forms, for example, loans, additional allowances or even promotions.

    Definition of Incentives According to Experts

    Several experts in the book Human Resource Management: Theory and Cases expressed their opinions regarding the meaning of the term incentives, along with their explanations.

    1. Hasibuan

    Hasibuan argues that incentives are additional remuneration given to certain employees who have achievements above the standard achievements of other employees. Incentives are a tool used by companies to support the fair principle of compensation.

    2. Heidjrachman

    According to Heidjrachman, incentives are actions that aim to provide different wages or salaries, due to different work performance.

    3. Andrew F. Sikula

    Andrew F. Sikula expressed his opinion that an incentive is something that can encourage or has a tendency to stimulate an activity. Incentives are motives and rewards that are formed to improve production.

    4. Pangabean

    Pangabean defines the term incentive as a direct reward given to employees for having achievements that exceed standards and is determined on the assumption that money can encourage the performance of an employee to be even better, therefore those who work productively prefer their salary to be paid according to results. Work.

    5. Samsudin

    According to Samsudin, incentives are the provision of different wages or salaries and not based on evaluation of employee positions, but because of differences in work performance.

    6. Gorda

    Gorda expressed the opinion that incentives are a means to provide motivation to employees in the form of material that is given as a stimulant or stimulant intentionally to workers to be able to increase work productivity in the organization.

    7. Simamora

    Simamora believes that incentives are a program related to pay and work productivity of an employee.

    Incentive Forms

    According to the book Human Resource Management (2018) there are three forms of incentives provided by companies to employees. These forms of incentives are divided into individual incentives, team incentives and organizational incentives. Here’s an explanation.

    1. Individual Incentives

    The first form of incentives is individual incentives given to employees as a reward from the company for the performance and productivity of these employees. The advantages of individual incentives are as an additional source of income for employees, so employees who get incentives will feel motivated to work better.

    Even so, these individual incentives have the potential to make employees become selfish individuals, because employees become too focused on themselves to achieve their targets and sometimes suppress the performance of other employees who are considered competitors.

    2. Team Incentives

    The second form of incentive is a team incentive given by the company to teams that achieve predetermined targets. The advantage of this team incentive is that it can motivate employees to be able to work together in teams. Meanwhile, the weakness of team incentives is that the team can be too competitive to get incentives.

    3. Organizational Incentives

    The third form of incentive is the incentive given by the company if the performance of a company exceeds the planned target. This organizational incentive assumes that all employees work together diligently to achieve the company’s short-term goals, namely achieving a target.

    The advantage of organizational incentives is that they can make all members of the organization receive fairly, so that cooperation occurs and there is no competitive atmosphere in an organization.

    Meanwhile, the weakness of organizational incentives is that some employees can become lazy, because incentives are still given to each individual as a whole and do not depend on the performance of the individual.

    Types of Incentives

    Those are the three forms of incentives, besides the forms of incentives there are also types of incentives which are divided into two, namely positive incentives and negative incentives. Here’s an explanation.

    1. Positive Incentives

    Positive incentives are incentives that provide positive guarantees to be able to fulfill needs and desires. In general, positive incentives have an optimistic attitude and are given to be able to meet one’s psychological needs. Examples of positive incentives are praise, promotions, benefits, recognition, loans and so on.

    There are two types of positive incentives, among which are the following:

    Monetary incentive

    Monetary incentives are positive incentives in the form of money.

    Non-monetary incentives

    Non-monetary incentives are types of positive incentives that can be in the form of security services, praise, recognition, suggestion schemes, job enrichment and promotion.

    2. Negative Incentives

    The second type of incentive is negative incentives, namely incentives given to correct one’s mistakes or standards. The purpose of negative incentives is to correct mistakes, so that the company will get effective results.

    Negative incentives are generally forced to be given to someone when positive incentives are no longer working as a motivator or encouragement. Examples of negative incentives are transfers, demotions, fines and punishments.

    Reasons for Providing Incentives to Employees

    From the forms and types of incentives above, in general, the provision of incentives is carried out with due regard to the basis and not just random. Here are some of the basics used to provide incentives to employees, teams and organizations.

    1. Performance

    The first basis for giving incentives is the performance of an employee. Usually employees who have achievements or show that they have performance above average, will generally get special incentives from the company.

    2. Employee Working Time

    The second basis is the working time given to employees according to the working time in completing the job. For example, if there is an employee who can work on a project faster and better or has to work overtime, then that employee deserves an incentive.

    3. Employee Seniority

    The third basis is a person’s tenure in an organization. If an employee has worked for a company for a long time, he will generally get a greater incentive than an employee who has just worked for that company.

    4. Employee Needs

    Giving incentives to an employee is based on the level of urgency or the need for a better quality of life of an employee.

    5. Fairness and Equity

    The next basis for providing incentives is fairness and equity. Incentives will be given according to the work sacrifices that have been made by an employee.

    6. Evaluation of Employee Positions

    The position level of each employee can be a factor or indicator in giving incentives.

    Purpose of Giving Incentives

    From the notion of incentives, of course Sinaumed’s already knows that one of the goals of giving incentives is to provide motivation, so that employee performance will increase and ultimately benefit the company.

    Giving incentives to employees is not without consideration, but has the basics described earlier. Companies or officials who provide incentives, in general, will have the expectation that rewards are not wasted and employees can realize the goals of the company.

    If employees become more enthusiastic and motivated when working, then the company will also get significant benefits from the work of employees. The most visible thing from giving incentives is that the company’s productivity will be better and it can grow more rapidly.

    In general, the objectives of being given incentives are as follows:

    • Increase employee productivity
    • Encourage and generate work stimulus from an employee
    • Increase commitment in employee performance
    • Shaping behavior and views about work
    • Instill enthusiasm and enthusiasm for work

    In addition to these incentive objectives, there are also several reasons why companies provide incentives to employees. Here’s an explanation.

    1. The Employee Has Performed a Job Outside His Duties

    The first purpose of providing incentives is to appreciate employees who have done something outside of their duties. As a rule, employees who have achieved or achieved more than the company’s goals, will receive a number of performance bonuses.

    This is done by the company as an acknowledgment of the results of the employee’s efforts. Providing the best and most profitable service for the company.

    2. Employees Participate in a Series of Training Activities

    In order to increase the capacity of its employees, the company will usually send several employee delegations to attend courses or training. Employees who are delegated, will get a number of incentives.

    3. Employees Who Become Business Representatives at an Event

    Another purpose of providing incentives to employees is as a form of compensation. Because it is not uncommon for companies to send company representatives to visit an event.

    Employees who become representatives, will get incentives. The goal is for employees to carry out their duties as company representatives in a better and more enthusiastic manner, so that they can grow the company’s image at certain events.

    4. Employees have done important things for the safety of the company’s business

    If there are employees who have done important things to maintain company security and the safety of the company’s business, then these employees will get incentives. The purpose of this incentive is to thank the company for the efforts of the employee in bringing the company’s business to a more stable position.

    Benefits of Providing Incentives for Employees

    In addition to these objectives, there are also benefits from providing incentives both for employees and for the company. Here’s an explanation.

    The benefits of incentives for employees are of course quite clear, the first is that incentives can be a source of additional income for employees. But besides these benefits, there are also several other benefits.

    1. Increase Work Motivation

    The effect of incentives on employee performance is very significant. When employees are more motivated and have higher morale, they will do the best work for the company. In addition, employees will also feel happier, when they have passion and motivation at work.

    2. Receiving income other than basic salary

    Another advantage of providing incentives for employees is that employees will receive additional income apart from their basic salary. This of course can increase revenue and can be utilized by employees to meet their personal needs.

    3. Will Feel Appreciated

    The achievements achieved by employees are the result of their hard work and efforts to advance the company. That way, an employee who has made these efforts will certainly feel happy if he gets an award for his work.

    Incentives can be a form of appreciation or a sign of gratitude from the company for the work of its employees. Because the commitment of an employee is measured qualitatively and quantitatively through the provision of incentives.

    Incentive Benefits for Companies

    Besides being beneficial for employees, giving incentives is also beneficial for the company. Sinaumed’s may think that giving a bonus for incentives can hurt the company, but giving incentives actually brings benefits. Anything? Here’s an explanation.

    1. Employee Performance will Get Better

    Incentives are a motivational boost from the company for its employees. Providing incentive funds is expected to be able to encourage the performance of employees to be even better. If employee performance gets better, this will also affect the progress of the company. Then the company will be more profitable.

    2. Leaders will Get Respect from Employees

    Another benefit of providing incentives for companies is employees who will respect the leadership of the company. By providing incentives, both monetary and in-kind incentives will make employees feel more valued. That way, it will increase respect on the part of company management and leaders.

    3. Employees Who Have a Sense of Ownership of the Company

    When a company recognizes the hard work and performance of employees by providing incentives, the company has a strong sense of ownership of employees. And vice versa, when something happens, employees will be loyal because of this sense of ownership.

    4. Low Employee Turnover

    With the provision of incentive money, it will make employees feel comfortable working in the company, so that in the end, work turnover will decrease, because there are many employees who choose to stay in the company.

    5. Employees are willing to do something outside of their main duties

    When they get incentives for working outside their main duties, employees will feel willing to do something outside their main duties. Employees will also be willing to work hard, because they feel happy because they have received incentives from the company.

    That is the explanation of incentives is income in addition to basic salary. If Sinaumed’s is interested in knowing material about finance such as incentives, salaries or other things, then Sinaumed’s can find information by reading books.

    As #SahabatUnlimits , sinaumedia.com provides books about salaries and incentives for Sinaumed’s. Reading lots of books and articles will never hurt you, because Sinaumed’s will get #MoreWithReading information and knowledge .

    Don’t hesitate to buy books at sinaumedia.com because they are guaranteed to be original and of good quality!

    Author: Khansa

    Also read:

    https://sinaumedia.com/products/menyusun-skala-gaji-1?queryID=27eb2f4718a1fb37b5ca86cb081fc025

    https://sinaumedia.com/products/incentive-pajak-ketahanan-fiskal-di-masa-pandemi-covid-19?queryID=0e02ef1aa219034866533973bbb5c194

    https://sinaumedia.com/products/kebijakan-perpajakan-optimalisasi-insentif-dan-kesinambunga?queryID=0e02ef1aa219034866533973bbb5c194

  • Incandescent Lamp Inventor: Biography and History

    Inventor of the Incandescent Lamp – From ancient times, humans definitely needed something called light, because it is to provide lighting for daily activities. The development of an increasingly advanced era makes lighting that comes from light also more advanced. Natural lighting comes from the sun, while artificial lighting is usually used at night.

    At first, artificial lighting only came from fire, but as electricity continued to grow, light at night also developed. Lighting at night usually comes from lamps.

    Even though, nowadays many people in some areas use lamps more often, but sometimes some people still use fire as a source of lighting. Usually in modern times, lighting with fire is done when there is a “lights out”, the absence of light during a “lights out” disrupts activities. In fact, when the “lights go out” it’s not uncommon for us to get hit by something when walking in a room. Both the light that comes from a lamp or that comes from a fire, is still needed by humans.

    The lamps that are used by many people do not just appear or you could say someone invented or created the lamp. Almost everyone knows who invented the lamp. This is because the lesson about who is the inventor of the lamp has been taught since Elementary School (SD). By knowing who is the inventor of the lamp, then our knowledge about the lamp is increasing.

    However, most people only know the name of the inventor of the lamp, but there are still some people who know a brief biography of the inventor of the lamp. For Sinaumed’s, who wants to know more about the inventor of the lamp, reading this article is one way. Below, we will explain more about the inventor of the lamp, see this article, Sinaumed’s.

    Incandescent lamps

    The incandescent lamp is an invention developed by Thomas Alva Edison. An incandescent lamp can be interpreted as a source of artificial light that can only function (give off light) if it is supplied with electricity. Meanwhile, in the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI) an incandescent lamp is a lamp that emits light from a glowing wire inside a light bulb, when it gets an electric current.

    An incandescent lamp consists of a filament and glass. The glass on the incandescent lamp serves to prevent air from getting inside until it hits the filament. If the air enters the filament, it will be damaged and the lamp will not function or will not emit light. The new filament can function if it is electrified.

    Incandescent lamps that are sold in various shops have very diverse shapes and also have various types of voltage (voltage), some are 1.25 volts to 300 volts. The bigger the incandescent bulb needs, the brighter the incandescent light will be, and vice versa.

    In fact, incandescent lamps do not only function as lighting, in some cases, incandescent lamps function as room heaters or increase the room temperature. One of the functions of an incandescent lamp is as a space heater when placed in a chicken coop. The chicken will feel warm at night, so its health will be maintained.

     

    Get to know Thomas Alva Edison, the inventor of the incandescent light bulb

    Thomas Alva Edison is a world scientist who played a role in the development of the incandescent lamp, where his invention of the incandescent lamp has so far been felt by many people. Edison was born in the city of Milan, Ohio, United States on February 11, 1841. He was the youngest of 7 children and was born in a simple family.

    However, Edison had a hearing impairment, but his mother loved him very much. This is shown by the affection given when caring for Edison even though his body has weaknesses. What’s more, Edison was a child who liked to hear advice from his parents.

    Edison did have a weakness in the sense of hearing since he was 12 years old which was caused by a fever he had suffered since childhood. Edison always believed that behind human deficiencies, God would surely give his servants advantages. Therefore, Edison remained humble and always hoped for the best things for himself.

    Thomas Alva Edison loved to read so much that he has already read countless books. The books he often reads are books on mechanical science. For Edison, mechanical science has always been the main attraction for development because machines will always experience developments to keep up with the times.

    Apart from being fond of reading, he also really hopes to become a person who can benefit the nation and the country and can make his parents proud. Curiosity about new things made Edison learn or explore new things. However, Edison’s education was very limited due to very simple family conditions, which forced Edison to stop continuing his education.

    For Edison, knowledge can be obtained anywhere, it does not have to be obtained at school. Thanks to this concept of his life, Edison began to seek knowledge everywhere, so that almost all of his life he could not be separated from seeking knowledge. In fact, he grew into a person who never gave up. The knowledge he gets most often comes from the books he reads.

    The condition of the family which is far from affluent means that Edison, at his young age, can easily help his parents to make a living. He sells newspapers and candy at a station to earn extra income to fulfill his daily life. In between selling, he takes the time to read books.

    Career Journey

    As he got older, Thomas Alva Edison started looking for work so that he would have income and be able to help or offset the living expenses of his parents. Edison began working as a telegraph operator. While working, Edison knew how to run a telegraph machine. The job of being a telegraph operator was used by Edison to add to his knowledge, especially in the field of machinery.

    The telegraph can be likened to a communication tool that can send messages to people who are far away. At that time, when they wanted to send messages via telegraph, they still used Morse codes. In other words, the use of the telegraph is still very manual. Therefore, the telegraph can be likened to sending SMS, sending emails, and sending chats . However, currently, the telegraph is almost no longer used by humans because they cannot compete with technological developments.

    During his many years of work, Edison always observed the workings of the telegraph machine in detail. While working at the telegraph company, Edison always prioritized to provide the best results for himself and the company. Thanks to his persistence when working as a telegraph machine operator and tenacity in operating the telegraph machine, he was appointed head of the telegraph machine.

    Developing the Telegraph Machine

    Thanks to his hard work while working at the telegraph company, Thomas Alva Edison gained a lot of knowledge from the work he had done. The important thing to get while working as a telegraph machine operator is to know how the telegraph machine works. From the knowledge gained during his work, he used it to conduct research and experiments.

    Edison, who already understood how the telegraph machine worked, made a very important discovery. The discovery was in the form of a telegraph machine that was developed. Edison made this discovery because he felt that the previous telegraph machine still had some drawbacks, so Edison wanted to make the telegraph machine better than the previous one.

    The discovery of the telegraph machine that had been developed occurred in 1870. Curiosity about various kinds of new things would always benefit Edison. As time went on, Edison began to feel that he did not want to work under a leadership or you could say he really wanted to have a company so he could become a leader. In addition, he thinks that being an employee in a company can make the knowledge that is in him not develop.

    Again and again, thanks to the nature of his hard work, Edison managed to build a telegraph company. His telegraph company was used by many people in the United States (at that time). What’s even better is the profit from this telegraph machine, he saved for capital to build a new company.

    By building a new company, Edison could try many new things, especially in terms of inventions. In 1869, Edison moved to New York, United States and in that city, he started trying new things and hoped to develop various kinds of inventions.

    Getting Interested In Electricity

    Thomas Alva Edison worked for a telegraph company as a machine operator for a long time and there he gained a lot of knowledge about how the telegraph worked. After getting this knowledge, Edison began to develop his telegraph machine. Thanks to the telegraph machine that had been developed, Edison started building a telegraph machine company. In fact, he saved the profits from the telegraph machine sold for the sake of expanding his business.

    After working in the world of telegraph machines for a long time, Edison became interested in electricity when he met Rutherford in the United States. The world of electricity is a new thing, so it needs to be studied more deeply by Edison. When studying electricity, Edison began to think that he would find something useful for the nation and state, especially his parents.

    In his mind, Edison felt challenged to make an invention from the world of electricity. One of the things that challenged Edison to have an invention was the existence of an electric light bulb. Basically, at that time, research and experiments on electric light balls had been discovered by many scientists. However, Edison still thought that the previous invention of the electric light bulb still had some drawbacks.

    Seeing the lack of previously found objects can be said to be one of the things that motivated Edison to create an invention. This is the same as when he developed the telegraph machine. At the beginning of the world of electricity began to develop, that’s when Edison began to study and explore the science of electricity.

    At that time, there were actually scientists who had developed an electric light bulb, but according to Edison, it still had drawbacks. The drawback is that it can harm humans when an electric light bulb is installed or used at home.

    The Journey to Invent the Incandescent Lamp

    The electric light bulb invented by the previous inventor is considered to still have flaws. On that basis, Thomas Alva Edison began to conduct various kinds of incandescent lamp experiments to perfect his previous inventions. The first thing that Edison learned when developing an incandescent lamp was to study and explore the workings of an electric light bulb or incandescent lamp.

    With tenacity, faith, and not giving up easily, Edison began to do several experiments. None of the experiments that have been carried out have been successful, so Edison continues to carry out subsequent experiments. In fact, experiments on incandescent lamps have been carried out hundreds of times or more precisely about 900 times.

    Every failed attempt is always marked by the breaking of a glass ball of electric light or an incandescent lamp. Even though, the glass of the incandescent lamp experiment had been broken several times, the excitement of finding a discovery never disappeared. From the experiments that had been carried out, Edison finally succeeded in finding or perfecting the invention of an electric light bulb or incandescent lamp.

    The light emitted from Thomas Alva Edison’s incandescent lamp did not break. Not only that, the light emitted from incandescent lamps is also very bright, so they can be used as room lighting at home. The light from this incandescent lamp is golden yellow. At that time, people slowly began to use these incandescent lamps.

    Creating an Electric Company

    Thanks to an invention, Thomas Alva Edison began to develop his invention by building an electricity-based company. At that time, every technology related or related to electricity, it would be developed by Edison, especially incandescent lamp technology.

    Edison did not hesitate to develop the invention of the incandescent lamp, even during a demonstration in December 1879 at Menlo Park, many people were amazed. People’s admiration for incandescent lamps is because when incandescent lamps can illuminate the house at night. The light from the incandescent lamp was something new at that time, so many people were surprised.

    Edison saw that the development of electricity would always be used by the community, so he tried to build an electricity-based company. Until 1889, Thomas Alva Edison started to build a company under the name Edison General Electric . Edison realized that he was a scientist, so he worked with JP Morgan. Edison did this because he realized that it was not smart to manage a company.

    The company experienced quite good growth, so Edison began to cooperate again with Thompson-Houston in 1892. When the collaboration took place, Edison’s company name changed to Simply General Electric.

    Conclusion

    The incandescent lamp that was well developed by Thomas Alva Edison, at that time was widely used by many people and was usually used to illuminate the yard, living room, bathroom, bedroom, kitchen, and so on. In addition, the price of these incandescent lamps varies widely, some are affordable and some are quite expensive. Along with the times, the shape of the incandescent lamp is very diverse, so that the buyer or user can adjust the lamp according to his wishes.

    However, the development of the times has made incandescent lamps begin to lose to fluorescent lamps. Incandescent lamps have a golden yellow color, while fluorescent lamps have a white color. Although, nowadays, fluorescent lamps are often used by many people, but without the invention of the incandescent lamp, neon lamps have not been invented.

  • Impressionism Flow: Definition and Examples of Impressionism Works

    Impressionism Stream – Impressionism painting is a painting style that presents depictions of objects in accordance with the impression when the object is painted. This art flow emphasizes the impression of lighting that is quite strong compared to forming the object itself.

    This picture or painting from the Impressionist school has a simple but slightly dramatic style. Apart from that, this painting also comes with a different perception and point of view compared to other realistic paintings, such as Naturalism and Realism paintings. Impressionism paintings will create a blurry and blurry impression, due to the impression of excessive lighting. The painters will also depict a simple impression compared to what is depicted. Painted objects are made as closely as possible but do not display accurate details.

    Definition of Impressionism

    Impressionism is one of the currents in painting which tends to emphasize the power of lighting by playing with the colors. In addition, impressionism also focused more on bright lighting, for example, to describe the atmosphere in the morning or afternoon. However, Impressionism tends to pay less attention to the shape of the object. Where the forms in the flow of Impressionism are not clearly described. Even so, the flow of impressionism can still attract art connoisseurs with the power of lighting and bright washes of color.

    Generally, painters who are Impressionists use painting techniques with thick and short brushes. So that in his painting it will give an impression that makes it easier for painters and art connoisseurs to guess a shape and object in the painting.

    Impressionist artists were strongly against using dark colors, especially black as shadow coloring, because black was not the typical color of Impressionism. So, the shadows can be created using the mixing of complementary colors. Complementary colors are colors that are opposite, which form a 180 degree angle on the color circle or what is commonly called the color wheel. Two different colors will be mixed and will produce complementary colors. That’s the color that will be used in the flow of Impressionism.

     

    Characteristics of Impressionist Painting

    Paintings from the Impressionism school are almost the same as paintings from the Naturalism school. This was justified because Impressionist paintings tended to present simple and plain painting objects, such as paintings of the natural surroundings without anything exaggerated or contrived. Then the painted objects are also made as closely as possible but do not depict accurate details like Naturalism paintings. However, Impressionism paintings also seem like paintings from Romanticism and Expressionism schools. This happened because of the impressions and also the impressions shown. So that it becomes one of the highlighted characteristics.

    The following are some of the characteristics of Impressionism paintings that need to be understood:

    1. Objects in the painting do not display sharp details and only display impressions and show bright color impressions.
    2. Have an open composition, both outdoor and indoor painting objects.
    3. The color palette used tends to be contrasting and bright based on the color grouping. Short, thick brush strokes that resemble a sketch painting technique. So it creates the essence of the subject rather than the details.
    4. Brush marks in paintings tend to be more visible and not covered up. The paint used is not allowed to dry to be overwritten again with the next color.
    5. The reflection of light becomes a variety of secondary objects that are more highlighted in this painting.
    6. Do not use black and other dark colors on all layers of the painting. When you want to make a shadow of an object, the color choice will use a complementary color that comes from the mixed colors.
    7. Often paints natural landscapes and is painted spontaneously in the open by artists.
    8. Paintings from the school of Impressionism present a different style of painting on purpose and are based on the tastes of the painters.

    History of Impressionism

    The flow of Impressionism was present in the 19th century, to be precise in France when there was an artistic rebellion against the construction of standardized art. In 1974, a group of painters held their first exhibition which eventually led to the birth of Impressionism.

    The group of painters included Claude Monet, Alfred Sisley, Pierre-Auguste and Frederic Bazille. The four painters have the same interests and art streams, namely painting scenes from contemporary life and are less interested in paintings about historical stories. Until the same year, there was a tradition of holding exhibitions of paintings. Where is one of the works created by Monet and his friends. Which they also have the same flow, always rejected by various curators on the grounds that it displays objects in a center-centric position.

    At that time, the term Impressionism meant that Impressionism was a term for cynical comments from critics because their paintings were seen as sketches and looked unfinished. The critic is Louis Leroy, where he wrote his opinion through writing in a French newspaper. With the rejection received by the four painters earlier, this did not make them disappointed but instead made them more active in pursuing the idealism of painting in the Impressionist style so that it would be better known to the world.

    The influence of Impressionism does not only exist in painting, but also extends to several other fields such as music and literature. In the field of literature, in 1880 in France there was an Impressionism movement. Where the movement aims to convey an opinion through a gesture compared to a direct statement. Then in the field of music, Impressionism became a style that seemed blurry, because it was caused by the ambiguity of harmony created by the chromatic and pentatonic steps. Music with Impressionism flow can make the atmosphere more impressionistic compared to other musical arts.

    In the 19th century, it became historical for the emergence of Impressionism. This art genre was born to bridge the road to a more modern era by presenting diversity and experimentation that had never been done before.

     

     

    The Influence of Color Theory on the Flow of Impressionism

    The flow of Impressionism was influenced by the color theory that was coined by Sir Isaac and also Eugene Chevreul. Where Newton was one of the scientists who first researched the process of forming a color. In the 1671s, he discovered the origin of color when shining light on a prism which then produced rainbow colors. His experiments showed that color is felt and exists in light. Then followed by the theory of color distribution based on prime colors and also the process of mixing them with the aim of forming other colors.

    This color grouping ultimately had quite a drastic impact on the works created by Impressionist artists. They abandoned the idea of ​​using black or brown to create a shadow. Instead, Impressionist artists used Newton’s Color Theory to create an image that assumed that black did not actually exist. The black color is just a sign that an object is getting less light. Therefore, they used the opposite color to make the shadow color.

    Sunlight actually has a yellow color. Therefore, they use a lot of yellow for human skin color. While the shadow is the opposite color of the reflection of light that touches human skin. Therefore, they used purple as the opposite of yellow to be used as the shadow color.

    Characters & Examples of Impressionism Works

    It seems incomplete to talk about an art movement without discussing the figures behind the art movement. The following are some of the artists who were quite important and influential in developing the school of Impressionism. In addition, there will be examples of their work and analysis. For those of you who are curious, see the explanation below:

    1. Claude Monet

    Claude Monet is the originator of the Impressionism movement in France. As a great and inspirational artist, Monet was one of the important figures who formed an independent art group that became the impetus for the birth of Impressionism. Monet himself preferred a style of painting outside, in the open air, and capturing light events at certain times. One of Monet’s works that is quite well-known is the series of paintings that are produced by painting the same scenic object repeatedly at various times, namely morning, afternoon, evening, night.

    Water Lilies Impressionism Painting & Its Analysis

    Water Lilies is one of the paintings from a series of landscapes of his courtyard which were painted around 1890. Monet depicts the exact same scenery as above at various times, namely morning, noon, evening, until night, just like the other series of paintings. Even though he uses imprecise and fast brush strokes, Monet succeeds in painting the water scene in this painting. Reflections made using semi-abstract indications but work quite effectively. The Water Lilies series is rated as one of the Masterpieces of this one Impressionist Maestro.

    2. Berthe Morisot

    Berthe Marie Pauline Morisot is a female painter who is a member of the independent painters group founded by Monet. When the exhibition of the two Impressionist groups opened, one art critic referred to the participants as “five or six madmen”. Because, one of them is a woman, namely Morisot. So, Morisot himself has achieved success at a relatively young age of 23 years. As a female painter at that time, Morisot experienced various obstacles because of her gender. Morisot had opportunities that tended to be more limited compared to male artists. Where she is forbidden to pursue the same education as her male friends. Even though, Morisot continues to seek to develop connections and support from family, which will allow her to pursue an independent career as a female artist. Morisot himself has had a successful career as an artist for more than three decades. He successfully wrote his name in the history of French art, even world art.

    Eugene Manet and His Daughter at Bougival & Its Analysis

    Brush strokes with contrasting colors in seconds can invite our eyes to pay more attention to it. Morisot made the painting above seem to be a camera Snapshot that was taken spontaneously and captured the moment of a father and son enjoying time together. The impression of the portrait is very pronounced and has a more attractive aesthetic when compared to photographic shots. The mood in the painting is very well formed and can provide quite pleasing imagery in what looks like a simple garden around the house.

    3. Pierre-Auguste Renoir

    Pierre-Auguste Renoir is a French Impressionist artist who has had a major influence on the development of this genre. As one of the artists who focused on beauty, especially feminine beauty, Renoir was said to be one of the last representatives of a tradition that went from Rubens to Watteau. He is the father of actor Pierre Renoir, the filmmaker Jean Renoir and ceramic artist Claude Renoir.

    Dance at Le moulin de la Galette & Its Analysis

    The painting above is one of the most famous works of painting in Impressionism. Where the painting displays a very typical Sunday afternoon atmosphere at the Moulin de la Galette, Paris. In the late 19th century, workers in Paris would gather and spend time together dancing, drinking and eating until the early hours of the morning. The bustling and boisterous atmosphere in the painting ironically calms the eyes of anyone who sees it. The painting doesn’t seem to have a definite focus, but when we start to look at it more deeply, we won’t be able to stop looking at just one side. Our gaze will lead to various angles of the painting through a dynamic rhythm and culminate in the warm atmosphere of the party.

    Types of Impressionism and Examples

    There are several other artistic streams apart from fine art which were also influenced by the Impressionism movement, including:

    1. Impressionism music

    Music with the flow of Impressionism is a movement in European classical music that emerged at the end of the 19th century. This Impressionism music genre has a characteristic suggestive and atmosphere. Not only that, this type of music also avoids the emotional excesses of the Romantic era. The composers of the Impressionist school liked short forms such as nocturnes, preludes, and arabesques. They often explore uncommon scales such as the Whole Scale.

    Following are some examples of Impressionism Composers are
    Claude Debussy : Clair de Lune
    Maurice Ravel : Bolero

    2. Literary Impressionism

    Literary Impressionism has been influenced by the European Impressionist art movement. Where many writers adopted or imitated styles that tried to incorporate Impressionism in a poem, prose, and other literary works. Various types of literature influenced by Impressionism are Symbolism, which focuses on the perception of certain characters in an event. However, reality is obscured by choosing a viewpoint that is outside the norm.

    The following are some examples of Impressionist writers, including:
    Stéphane Mallarmé
    Joseph Conrad

  • Impression: Definition, Types, Functions, Benefits, and How It Works

    Impression is – Some say first impression is important because it will determine other decisions. Maybe because this is also the impression in digital marketing that must be considered.

    For those of you who work in digital marketing or actively play social media and websites every day, you must be familiar with the term impression. Some of you may already understand 100% what it means, some others may know what it means but don’t understand what it does.

    Therefore, in this article, we will discuss impressions and everything related to them. Listen carefully, okay!

    Definition of Impressions

    The Internet has taken product and brand marketing to a more advanced stage. If in the past, companies that put up billboards couldn’t know how many times their ad was viewed, in the digital marketing era like now, this has become more measurable.

    All advertisements that appear on the internet can be measured by various metrics provided by platforms, such as social media, websites or Youtube. The data displayed in metrics can be analyzed in depth to determine the right digital marketing strategy. Well, impressions are one of the metrics that must be considered.

    However, what exactly is an impression? In short, impression is a term used to measure the appearance of digital content and the interactions made by internet users. There are various types of digital content here, starting from advertisements, website pages, articles, social media posts, videos on Youtube, and the like.

    In the context of advertisements or advertisements, impressions can also be considered as the number of times an advertisement appears on the user’s screen. Usually, the number of impressions will determine the costs required when placing an ad.

    In addition, impressions can also be used to measure the performance of a brand or company’s digital campaign. Related to this, sometimes there are people who think that impressions show the number of clicks that the ads they post get. When in fact, impressions only show the number of times the ad appears, which means it has nothing to do with the number of clicks, not even necessarily that the ad has been viewed.

    For example, on Instagram, ads can appear in your “story” section but you don’t see them at all. By advertiser service providers, this is still counted as one impression.

    Because of this, the debate about the accuracy of impression metrics to measure digital campaign performance has never been completed to date. Even so, impressions are still useful for measuring ad or content performance in several ways, namely:

    • Pay per Click (PPC)
    • How many times the ad or content is displayed
    • How many times the call-to-action on the website has appeared

    The difference between Impressions and Reach

    Not infrequently, digital marketers, especially beginners, are confused about the difference between impressions and reach. As a result, when evaluating content performance, the results can be erroneous.

    In fact, the key difference between these two metrics is in the words “view” and “view”. To make it clearer, try to pay attention to the difference in the meaning of the two below.

    Reach is the number of people who saw your ad or content. Meanwhile, impressions are the number of times your ad or content appears on the screens of internet users.

    For example, like this, you uploaded a photo on Instagram three days ago, when I checked it today, it turns out that the photo got 100 reach and 500 impressions. This means that the photo has been seen by 100 people and has appeared 500 times on other people’s Instagram.

    As explained by Jefferly Helianthusonfri in his book entitled Instagram Marketing for Beginners. This book is a complete guide to learning Instagram marketing for beginners that will guide you to learn Instagram marketing from scratch.

    Why is the number of impressions greater than the reach? Because one user can generate more than one impression depending on the frequency with which your content appears, while one person can only be counted as one reach, even if he views your content 50 times.

    Impression Types

    Basically, impressions are divided into two types, namely served impressions and viewable impressions. Here is the full explanation.

    1. Served Impressions

    Served Impression can be regarded as a standard used to measure the impression of a content on the internet. This Served Impression only relies on data obtained organically, aka not paid, so it’s easier to calculate.

    Unfortunately, this type has a weakness, namely limited data. In the context of website advertising, for example, served impressions only show that the ad has been installed on the web without indicating whether the ad is actually displayed or seen by its web visitors.

    In fact, served impressions also count ads that don’t fully serve when the web content isn’t 100% loaded. In addition, visitors who use ad-blockers are also counted.

    As a result, served impressions are very difficult to analyze to measure the performance of an advertisement or content.

    2. Viewable impression

    The second type is viewable impression which is often used to enhance analysis because this type collects data from users. Typically, the way to measure this is to exclude conditions in which it is highly unlikely that the user will see the content. For example like:

    • Users using ad-blockers
    • Users whose device screens are too small
    • There is a plug-in that is damaged so that it blocks the ad from appearing
    • Users who closed their browser tabs
    • Tabs that load in the background and never open

    In other words, viewable impressions have more accurate data, so they can be used to assess content performance and determine what strategy to do next.

    Types of Impressions

    So, because impressions are closely related to the digital world, they can be further divided into several types based on existing digital content, namely:

    1. Page Impressions

    Page impressions are views that are calculated after the website page is loaded by the user’s device.

    2. Ads Impression

    Ad impressions (ad impressions) are impressions that show ads that have been loaded on website pages.

    3. General impression

    General impressions are impressions that can be seen in general.

    4. Social Media Impressions

    Social media impressions (social media impressions) are impressions that show a post has been loaded by a social media user.

    5. Advertising Impressions

    Advertising impressions (impressions of advertisers) are the types of impressions that exist in online advertising.

    How Metric Impressions Work

    When dealing with impression metrics you have to remember that one impression is worth the same as one content display, whether it’s a website page, ad, or post on social media.

    Of all the existing metrics, impressions are often used as an economical way to determine whether a content or ad is viewed or not by users.

    In addition, most online advertising service providers have their own impression calculation criteria related to the calculation of advertising costs.

    There are at least two ways of calculating advertising costs used by online advertising service providers, namely:

    1. Cost per Impression (CPI)

    CPI is a way of calculating that requires advertisers to pay per impression. Usually payments can be paid directly to the service provider.

    For example, you want to create an ad to sell a new product to a specific market, you can use this CPI calculation method. Generally, costs are calculated in the following way:

    required advertising costs / number of impressions obtained

    2. Cost per Mile (CPM)

    CPM is a cost calculation method that is widely used by online advertising service providers, especially in search engines and social media. In this way, the server will record the number of times the ad is loaded and the advertiser is asked to pay per 1000 impressions. That is, advertising costs can be calculated in the following way:

    required advertising costs / total number of impressions x 1,000 = CPM value

    The Impression function in digital marketing

    The main function of impressions in digital marketing is as a tool that makes it easy for advertisers to measure the number of impressions of a content (ads, websites, posts) regardless of user activity.

    On social media such as Facebook, Twitter, Instagram, LinkedIn, TikTok and the like, impressions are a very important metric. Because, from here the platform owner can make offers to potential advertisers.

    For potential advertisers, impressions play an important role in making effective digital marketing plans, especially when it comes to calculating costs.

    In addition, impressions will also be used as a tool to measure the performance of an ongoing digital marketing strategy. Therefore, a digital marketer or advertiser must understand impression metrics well.

    To find out what digital marketing strategies you can choose, the book The Fundamental Of Digital Marketing by Andreas Agung is very suitable as the main reference because it contains 3 Fundamental Steps to Digital Marketing for anyone who wants to start Digital Marketing or take their business online. .

    At the very least, they should know that page impressions don’t mean the same as online ad impressions. Because on one website page, you can get many ad impressions.

    In addition, they must also understand that impression data is very influential with digital campaigns that aim to increase brand awareness and build branding.

    In other words, every time a brand or product requires maximum exposure, impressions must be a metric that is included in the initial calculations and when analyzing the results.

    That way digital marketers or companies can find out which digital marketing channels get the most exposure and need to be optimized again.

    The Benefits Obtained from Measuring the Number of Impressions

    The benefit of measuring the number of impressions is that it determines the performance of your marketing campaign. Did the campaign succeed in reaching the predetermined target or not.

    In digital marketing, interactions and relationships with target markets are very important, especially predetermined target markets. But on the other hand, reaching as many potential target markets as possible must also be carried out to determine new target markets and increase brand awareness in leads.

    Leads themselves are customers who respond or are interested in the product or service you offer after seeing the campaign. In the right way, you can turn leads into new customers.

    Especially now that consumer trends are always changing and digital marketers are required to continue to test the effectiveness of the campaigns or marketing strategies being implemented.

    By looking at the data on impressions, you can find out whether the strategy being implemented is effective or not, the results are in accordance with the target or not. If not, then there must be changes to make it more effective.

    How to calculate Impressions

    To calculate impressions you can use several ways, including:

    Click-through Rate (CTR)

    CTR is the percentage of internet users who click on your content compared to those who see it. If the ad or content that you post has a high impression but a low CTR, it can be concluded that the content is not interesting. Therefore you have to re-evaluate the content and target audience.

    The formula for calculating CTR is as follows:

    Cost per Mile (CPM)

    As previously explained, CPM is a cost that needs to be spent every 1,000 ad impressions. As a marketer or advertiser you need to know how to calculate it, namely:

    Meaning of Impressions on Instagram, Google Ads, Facebook, and Search Console

    It has been explained above that impressions are very important on social media. The reason is because currently social media marketing is a strategy that must be implemented by brands or companies to increase sales or other goals.

    Below is an explanation of the meaning of impressions on each social media that you need to know.

    1. Impressions on Instagram

    Instagram provides an “insights” feature to every business account or content creator on its platform. This feature serves to show the performance of a content or post. So, in this “insight” you can see 4 sources of impressions received by your content:

    1. Home means Instagram users see your content from their homepage
    2. Profile means Instagram users see content from your account profile
    3. Hashtag means Instagram users see the content from the hashtag that you put in the caption
    4. Others (others) means Instagram users see your content because it is shared, tagged, or mentioned by other users.

    In this case, “Instagram users” can mean followers or non-followers, yes.

    2. Impressions on Google Ads

    In Google Ads, impressions mean the number of times an ad is seen by internet users either in search results or other sites that have entered Google’s network.

    You need to remember, impressions on Google ads are somewhat different from others because ad performance is not always measured by the number of impressions you get, but the keyword type you choose.

    If you choose “broad match”, impressions can be obtained from various words, including those that are not in accordance with your business. Therefore, you have to evaluate regularly and use “negative keywords”.

    In addition, there is a possibility that you will not get an impression at all in Google Ads Search. Usually because the search volume is low, the bid you set is too low, or the quality score is low.

    In Google Ads there is also the term “Impression Share” which means an indicator of potential missed impressions due to a reduced budget or too low a bid. If the number is low, you can still try to make ads appear more by optimizing bids, budgets, and ad quality.

    3. Impressions on Facebook Ads

    Just like Google Ads, impressions on Facebook Ads are also calculated every time the ad that you post is seen by a Facebook user. The difference is, on Facebook Ads the expenses incurred can be greater because the payment system that is widely used is Cost per Mile (CPM).

    In addition, impressions are also often used to calculate the average frequency of each Facebook user seeing your ad. This frequency can be calculated by:

    To learn other things about Google Search Console or SEO, you can read the Ultimate SEO book written by Su Rahman. This is a book that describes step by step how to optimize a website, so that websites can be found more easily through Google searches.

    4. Impressions in Search Console

    If you are a blogger or are responsible for managing a company website, you will often see the data in Google Search Console. Inside there is an impression that is usually calculated every time your website URL appears on a search page and is seen by internet users organically.

    Google Search Console can display a site’s total satiation impressions in detail based on:

    1. Page/URL
    2. Queries
    3. Device
    4. Country
    5. Date

    Usually, this impression is used to see and measure the performance of pages/URLs based on Click Through Rate (CTR) and then optimize keywords based on query results so that your website can get a higher ranking on search engines.

    Thus the discussion about impressions is a term used to measure the appearance of digital content and the interactions made by internet users. Hopefully all the discussion in this article can add to your insight in the field of digital marketing.

    If you want to find books on digital marketing or SEO, you can get them at sinaumedia.com . Reading lots of books and articles will never hurt you, because Sinaumed’s will get #MoreWithReading information and knowledge.

  • Implicit Cost: Definition, Examples, Application & Calculation

    Implicit Costs – Maybe there are some of you who don’t understand clearly what implicit costs mean. Implicit cost as a type of opportunity cost used in the company’s internal resources where this type of cost is then not displayed in the financial statements. Check out the explanation of what implicit costs are for a company and the calculation steps:

    Definition of Implicit Cost

    Implicit cost or implicit cost as a type of opportunity cost used in the company’s internal resources where this type of cost will not be displayed in the financial statements or reported in a separate cost. Opportunity costs arise when a company uses internal resources in a project or operational activity without explicit compensation for using these resources.

    This type of cost itself is generally very difficult to calculate because in calculating this type of implicit cost there is no physical or cash exchange in its activities. If the company then decides to use the resources, there will be a potential loss of the ability to obtain new funds or profits from various other activities on the resources they have.

    In simple terms there is no cash exchange if the assets are used for operational needs. But in short, this type of implicit cost then comes from using the assets, not from renting or buying. In addition, this type of implicit cost or implicit cost also shows a loss of potential income, but opens up profit opportunities.

    This fee can also be an amount of money that is potentially lost by choosing to use internal resources rather than receiving payments from third parties for the use of these resources. For example, implicit costs in a company then earn income by utilizing business buildings and producing and selling products, compared to obtaining income from renting out the building.

    Examples and How to Calculate Implicit Costs

    Implicit costs also play an important role when it comes to determining the economic profit earned by a business. Economic profit itself is determined as the difference between the total revenue derived from the business and the sum of its implicit and explicit costs.

    Explicit costs are also reported on a business’ income statement because a business, however, must determine implicit costs by utilizing scenarios as well as a comparative analysis of available options. Because of this, economists carefully observe the implicit costs associated with business, and generally construct them as part of economic analysis.

    It can be concluded that implicit cost is a very important cost both for business operations and for economists in analyzing the nation’s economy. Implicit costs to the company itself depend on the type of company assets associated. But in general, implicit costs are opportunities or costs that are not chosen by a company. Examples of implicit costs for the company itself can be seen in the list below:

    1. Employee Training Time

    The time spent on production activities so that the implicit opportunity cost of training employees can then be estimated by the amount of output lost during the training period.

    2. Machine Repair

    The machine repair period when it finally reaches a certain time will also be the same as the duration of the machine in producing output, so it is like an implicit cost for the company. For example, the time for repairing a machine is 3 hours and every hour the machine can then produce 100 units of output, then in repairing a machine, the implicit cost is 100 units x 3 hours = 300 units of output.

    3. Sending Employees to Continuing Studies

    The same with providing training to employees i.e. giving him time to get an education as well as reduced output over a period of time. But that doesn’t mean that it shouldn’t be done. Companies can do these things as long as the implicit costs do not exceed the estimated profit earned by the company.

    4. Business Owners Who Manage Their Own Companies

    When a new company is built, the owner may not have pocketed enough capital to employ his employees, so he does some of the tasks in it alone. Then the implicit cost is also an opportunity for the owner of the company to hire a more qualified workforce. Because by doing all the tasks yourself, the work will take longer to complete and will be ineffective. This is a cost or opportunity that the owner then passes up when choosing not to hire someone else.

    The Difference between Explicit and Implicit Costs

    If the example of implicit costs is the potential loss of income due to the use of company assets, know the difference between them and explicit costs. The definition of explicit costs itself is all types of costs that are budgeted in the production process. Thus, the difference between explicit and implicit costs can be seen in terms of the money actually allocated. The definition of explicit costs can also include costs such as employee salaries, rental expenses and capital repair costs, and others.

    Implicit and explicit costs are also two types of company expenses, although there are some differences in their application. In addition to financial reports, records, differences in explicit and implicit costs can also be seen from how companies use them. Implicit costs are a material consideration for deciding and utilizing company assets, while explicit costs are costs that come out and affect various production processes directly.

    Basically, in business accounting, when there are explicit costs, there will also be implicit costs. After knowing and understanding explicit costs know what is the difference between implicit and explicit costs.

    Thus, as a business owner, you will also be good at sorting out which costs can be categorized as explicit costs and which are included in implicit costs. In short, explicit costs are costs that are certain or real and are directly related to assets or assets, and are in the form of financial transactions, so that they finally provide real business opportunities for the company.

    Explicit expenses are also easy to identify, record and audit. Unlike the case with implicit costs. Forms are difficult to identify, even to report in terms of costs. This is because, implicit costs are directly related to intangible things, or commonly described as opportunity costs.

    One easy-to-understand example of implicit cost is the time spent doing a business activity, usually this time can then be used in carrying out a different business approach.

    Implementation of Implicit Cost Calculation

    First Example

    If a manufacturing company with its own building uses various operational activities and business production in it. Then, this company then prefers to use the building as a company operational activity rather than renting out the building to other parties.

    This company can then generate a net profit of IDR 600 million per month, while if the building is leased to another party, the opportunity cost that will be obtained is IDR 40 million per month. The way to calculate this implicit cost itself is very easy, as it is known before that there has been an actual economic profit from a manufacturing company of IDR 600 million, then we can subtract IDR 40 million. That is, the implicit cost of this manufacturing company is 560 million rupiah per month.

    Because manufacturing companies utilize their own resources in the form of buildings, these companies do not derive income from assets and will not report it as explicit or to use the building for operational activities. For this reason, the company must also be willing to lose its potential income of IDR 40 million. This is what we usually call the implicit cost.

    Second Example

    Say there is someone who wants to allocate Rp. 150 million of money that can be used to start a new business. Then, this money is then allocated and has the potential to earn deposit interest income of IDR 10 million in one year if you keep it as a deposit at a bank. So, this Rp. 10 million is what is then commonly referred to as the implicit cost.

    Other Things to Look For

    The management of a company really needs to make careful calculations when determining production costs, both in terms of explicit and implicit costs. Therefore there are several important things that cannot be overlooked in calculating production costs so that the company is then still able to obtain maximum profit. Here are some things to watch for about implicit costs. What are they? Check these out:

    • Distinguish between surcharges and margin costs. Margin costs themselves are changes in fixed costs in a unit of output changes, while additional costs are changes in the total cost of applying certain managerial decisions.
    • Enter the opportunity cost across all inputs, whether owned or purchased by the company. This is then done because the company will not be able to hold the leased inputs. If a payment value is then lower than the price paid by other companies.
    • Do not ignore the existence of accounting costs because it is very necessary in the company’s financial reports and taxes.
    • Include alternative costs or opportunity costs on all inputs, whether owned or purchased by a company. The reasons include the company will not be able to retain the inputs that are leased if these inputs are paid for at a price lower than the price paid by other companies.
    • Accounting or historical costs themselves are very important for a company’s financial statements as well as taxes. When a managerial decision-making objective occurs, then the economic cost or opportunity cost will then be considered as a relevant cost concept that should be used by companies.
    • In discussing product costs, there are marginal costs and additional costs that must be distinguished. Marginal Cost as a fixed cost change in a unit of output change, for example in the total force is $ 140 to be able to produce 10 units of output and $ 150 to produce 11 units of output, then the marginal cost of the company in the 11th unit is $ 10.
    • Additional costs on the other hand are a broader concept and refer to changes in the total cost of implementing certain managerial decisions, such as introducing a new product, carrying out a certain advertising campaign, or producing components that they previously purchased themselves.

    Implicit costs are a cost component that is not easy to measure and assess objectively. However, based on the examples above, the implicit costs which are then able to provide distinct advantages over company resources are perhaps often overlooked.

    However, on the other hand, such as the implicit costs above, it also shows that these opportunity costs have the potential to provide even better benefits. Therefore, every management must be able to make very careful calculations so that the company can obtain maximum profitability and profits.

    Books Regarding Implicit Costs

    1. Cost Analysis and Estimation

    This book is the work of Didi Asmadi, Sri Rahmawati, containing In this book, the discussion material is arranged systematically in seven chapters, accompanied by case studies and practice questions. This Textbook of Cost Analysis and Estimation presents various examples of cases that were solved using various managerial accounting approaches and adds practice questions that are expected to improve students’ understanding and ability in the Cost Analysis and Estimation course. The presence of this textbook is expected to be able to contribute knowledge and learning for academics in achieving learning objectives in accordance with predetermined instructions.

    2. Cost Accounting Accountant

    Book by Drs. Harnanto, M. Soc. Sc., Is a textbook that is simple, concise, yet fully discloses the collection of production cost data and the determination of the cost of products based on the historical cost system; which is absolutely necessary to be used as a basis for evaluating inventory of products in process and finished products in accordance with standards or Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (PABU) at manufacturing company lines.

    This book is written using jargon and a straightforward style, so that ordinary people can easily understand its contents. This book explains everything related to measurement, systems and procedures for collecting and recording production cost data and determining or calculating the cost of products based on a historical cost system. The discussion in this book covers the collection of data on material costs, labor costs, and factory overhead costs; both according to the cost of orders method and the cost of processes in the historical cost system, including the various issues that surround it such as: damaged products, defective products and leftover materials.

    This book also provides realistic case examples that are easy to understand. With content or discussion material that is quite comprehensive, it is no doubt that this book is very useful for practitioners (public accountants, management accountants, production managers, financial managers), and students of diploma programs, undergraduate programs taking accounting courses in particular .

    3. Accurate Costing with Microsoft Excel

    Are you confused about how to calculate the cost of goods sold? Starting from allocating the costs one by one and then putting them into cost items. It’s really hard huh? Now you don’t have to worry anymore! This book will answer all your questions starting from: What is cost, Easy cost allocation with excel, Calculation of depreciation and allocation to cost of goods sold.

    Integrating all costs into cost of goods sold You will also get information about real costing calculations that can be applied immediately. Everything is done with the help of Microsoft Excel which makes your work easier and can produce accurate, fast and precise costing.

  • Implementing Effective Communication in Social Life

    Effective Communication – Sinaumed’s must have experienced clashes in a conversation. Maybe differences of opinion or disputes are things that are considered normal as long as humans apply social life. However, this can also be a sign that we lack effective communication.

    An ineffective communication process makes the message conveyed difficult to understand by the recipient of the message. Not infrequently misunderstandings occur during the communication process and even trigger conflicts between the sender of the message and the recipient of the message so that later communication becomes hampered. Then, how to overcome this?

    Definition of Effective  Communication

    Effective communication is the process of transmitting ideas, thoughts or information from the sender of the message (communicator) to the recipient of the message (communicant) which results in a positive relationship or reciprocity for both parties. Effective communication is characterized by the achievement of goals through the communication process carried out. In addition, understanding the information received and feedback is an important indicator of effective communication.

    Effective communication combines a range of skills including nonverbal communication, attentive listening, the ability to manage stress during communication, and the capacity to recognize and understand emotions in oneself and those with whom we communicate.

    For this reason, effective communication requires a communicator who is able to convey information naturally and a communicant who receives information actively. Both of these things seem to be done spontaneously but are actually based on effective communication methods.

    Benefits of Effective Communication

    Effective communication can improve the quality of relationships at home, at work, and in social situations by deepening our bonds with others. Effective communication also strengthens teamwork, decision making, and problem solving abilities. This allows us to communicate negative or difficult messages without creating conflict or breaking trust.

    Various studies show that effective communication is the foundation that must be built by every organization regardless of its size and structure. Effective communication is also very important to achieve an organizational goal.

    Effective communication that is right on target and effective will certainly support the sustainability of an organization. By supporting the creation of effective communication between individuals in an organization, work productivity or professionalism can increase.

    The following are some of the benefits that can be obtained if an organization or company can implement effective communication.

    1. Increase job satisfaction

    Effective communication that continues to be supported in the workplace can help build loyalty and trust which ultimately contributes to greater job satisfaction. Surveys also show that organizations that encourage open communication between superiors and subordinates can reduce employee turnover cycles.

    2. Increasing work productivity

    When workers in an organization are able to implement effective communication, the potential for conflict will be reduced. Effective communication at work can also help clarify information. This greatly affects a person’s performance at work.

    3. Professional advancement

    Effective communication encourages conflicts that occur during the communication process to be resolved openly and as soon as possible. This positive effort leads to individual growth to become a professional person.

     

    Principles in Effective Communication

    In realizing effective communication, both communicators and communicants must remember and apply several principles. The following are the principles from Mangal in the book  Essentials of Educational Technology  which play a very important role in determining the success of effective communication.

    • The principle of readiness and motivation . This principle requires that communicators and recipients must be ready and remain motivated during the communication process so that effective communication can take place. Lack of interest, enthusiasm and enthusiasm from one of the parties involved in communication can affect the process and product of communication.
    • The principle of having competent communication skills . This principle emphasizes that both the communicator and the recipient must be competent and efficient enough in terms of communicating both giving and receiving the desired information or message. Having the necessary communication skills is very important, so that the communication process, in terms of transmission and reception, can be carried out by both parties effectively.
    • The principle of sharing and interaction . In principle, communication is not just giving and receiving information. Communication is a two-way process so that the success of effective communication lies in allowing as much exchange of ideas as possible and maintaining mutual interaction between the giver and receiver of information.
    • The principle of conformity of the content of communication . Effective communication is greatly influenced by the content of the message. The content of what will be communicated must be easy to understand and in accordance with the communicator and recipient.
    • Principles of proper media and channels . The effectiveness of the communication process will depend on the type of media or communication channel used. Therefore, both communicators and communicants must agree on the media and channels to be used during the effective communication process by considering the contents of the message to be conveyed.
    • The principle of proper feedback . Effective communication can be said to be successful if during the communication process the communicator receives the desired feedback from the recipient and vice versa.
    • The principle of the facilitator and communication barriers . Realizing effective communication is not an easy matter. Misunderstandings between communicators and communicants during the communication process often occur. There are many variables that intervene between the source and receiver of information during the communication process. The influence of these variables on both positive and negative senders and recipients of messages is a determining factor for the success or failure of effective communication.

    Factors Inhibiting Effective Communication

    There are several factors that become obstacles in effective communication. The main problem in effective communication lies in the ability of the communicator and communicant when conveying and absorbing messages. In the journal  Importance of Effective Communication Strategies to Improve Workplace Communication , Shruti Shrivastava and Vineeta Prasad describe several factors inhibiting effective communication.

    • Use of abstract words/phrases . One of the main factors contributing to a lack of effective communication is the use of abstract words. Abstraction in expressions creates confusion and ambiguity in conversation.
    • Lack of use of specific words . This factor is also an important obstacle in communicating effectively and leads to confusion in speech.
    • Lack of using the right tone when conveying the message. One word can be pronounced in various tones that give rise to various meanings. Tones that are not in accordance with the context of the conversation we mean can cause misunderstandings and make communication ineffective.
    • Repetitive use of vocabulary when speaking. This factor is a common problem for most speakers that can interfere with effective communication. In this case, communicators do not use all the words from their own vocabulary bank in communication, causing the quality of the resulting information to be poor.
    • Weak pronunciation is also a big factor affecting fluency. The influence of local accents, regional speech styles, and tongue stiffness can be several factors that hinder effective communication.
    • Inability to clarify information . During meetings and discussions, it is important to understand the complete information being discussed. We need to dig again or probe to make sure the information we receive from the speaker is not distorted. This clarifying technique is one of the keys to successful effective communication that can help the communicant understand the message correctly.
    • Inability to paraphrase . Paraphrasing is a very important strategy used in discussions to achieve effective communication. This is the ability to clearly convey back the information we receive from the speaker during the interaction. The inability to paraphrase the message and confirm it with the speaker is one of the main problems in effective communication.

    The paraphrasing technique will enable the listener to understand the key issues better and the speaker to understand whether the message has been fully received or not. When listening to the communicant paraphrase, speakers can always fill in missing information and achieve greater clarity in communication with each other.

    • Lack of confidence . Low self-confidence in speaking fluently is a key factor affecting effective communication. This is mainly due to a lack of practice in talking about different issues.

    Referring to the journal The Role of Effective Communication in Strategic Management of Organizations , there are several other factors which are said to be obstacles to effective communication.

    • Noise  or other sounds outside of conversation are a serious barrier to effective communication. Noise can come from the environment around us such as when people try to repair tools or other loud noises that are commonly made by people.
    • The credibility of the source  allows information to be doubted when the source of the sender is ambiguous, which hinders effective communication. The level of trust or credibility that the recipient has towards the source will certainly affect the recipient’s perception of the message.
    • Information overload  is another reason that hinders effective communication. Generally in competitive business dealings, the available data is complex because managerial ranks need all sources and types of information for decision making. This very large data causes information to become overloaded so that managers cannot easily interpret and understand the messages received.
    • Perception  is one factor that often hinders the process of effective communication. Perception makes the recipient filter and interpret the information he receives in a way that makes sense to him or according to his personal understanding. This situation creates misunderstandings that affect the true meaning of the message and results in the wrong interpretation of the message.
    • Emotions  play an important role in determining the success of effective communication. Effective communication is not just about exchanging information, it is also about understanding the emotions behind that information.

    When the communicator communicates with bad emotions, the message to be conveyed may not be well understood by the listener. Such emotional conditions do not allow the communicant to listen objectively and assimilate information effectively. Emotional states can be angry, scared, sad, happy etc.

     

    Overcoming Barriers to Effective Communication

    The most important part of effective communication is not what we say, but how we say it and the attitude we take when saying it. To be able to carry out effective communication, then we need to overcome the obstacles that become barriers. Hambagda in the book  Communication for Management  and Hybels and Weaver in the book  Communicating Effectively  provides several suggestions for communicators in overcoming obstacles to effective communication.

    1.  Communicators need to avoid information overload. A message sender must be able to estimate the message delivered in the right amount so that it can be interpreted or read easily by the recipient in order to create effective communication.
    2. The communicator must repeat the message conveyed to prevent misunderstandings. Repetition of messages is important in an effective communication process to ensure that the information that reaches the recipient is understood correctly. If there are problems or obstacles in the communication process, this must also be discussed immediately, because delaying resolution will cost more.
    3. Communicators are required to choose the right communication media used to transmit information. Adjusting the communication media with the message to be conveyed precisely will create effective communication. For example, communicators must choose whether to convey design revisions in a project preferably via  e-mail  or telephone. The choice of communication media must be adjusted to the nature of the message to be transmitted.
    4. Communication is considered complete when feedback is provided on the message. The communicator must encourage the communicant to provide feedback as a way to confirm whether effective communication has been achieved.

    In addition there are several effective communication strategies that can be applied by the communicant.

    1. The communicant needs to be an active listener. Maybe the active listener is an odd concept of effective communication that we encounter. Basically being an active listener requires us to not only listen with our ears, but also listen with our other senses.

    Communication expert Kenneth H. Cohn who introduced this concept revealed that effective communication can be created if the listener places full attention on the conversation. A communicant is asked to maintain body language while listening, such as not talking to other people, keeping eye contact at the same level, etc. The communicant was also asked to utter a short sentence indicating interest in the ongoing communication.

    2. The communicant is obliged to give feedback on the message that has been received. Effective communication is successful when the communication that occurs is not only unidirectional – there is feedback that the communicant conveys.

    There are procedures that must be carried out as long as the communicant submits questions, suggestions, or criticism. Before providing feedback, the communicant needs to determine what information is already known to other listeners or has been conveyed by the communicator. After knowing the missing information, the communicant fills this gap with feedback.

    3. The communicant needs to paraphrase or confirm the information obtained. Effective communication requires the active role of the communicant during the communication process. This can be done by providing feedback.

    However, before giving feedback, the communicant needs to review the information received in a concise and concise manner. By paraphrasing, the communicator knows that a communicant is fully involved in the communication process. Paraphrasing is also a communicant’s effort to ensure that the information received is correct and not distorted.

    Conclusion

    Effective communication cannot be done in a short time. Both communicators and communicants need to go through a long process of training habits and communication skills that can support effective communication.

    It takes time and effort to develop the skills to become an effective communicator and communicator. The more effort and practice you put into it, the more instinctive and spontaneous your Sinaumed’s communication skills will be.

    So, that was an explanation of effective communication that Sinaumed’s can practice in everyday life. If Sinaumed’s is interested in becoming an accomplished communicator or communicant, Sinaumed’s can study communication through books that can be obtained by accessing www.sinaumedia.com.

    Author: Anendya Niervana

    Book Recommendations & Related Articles

  • Implementation: Definition, Purpose, and Types

    Definition of Implementation – Sinaumed’s friends , have you ever heard the word implementation? yaps, it’s true we must have heard the word implementation. This term is often used to refer to the means to achieve or make something happen. So what’s the proper implementation? Here’s the full explanation.

    More and more discussions were conducted with many experts who gave ideas about implementation. Implementation is important to realize an idea.

    One has to implement the idea to reach the goal. Implementation is a process that is applied without any restrictions in various fields, ranging from education, society, politics, technology, health, information and others.

    Its implementation is quite widely understood in various fields. To achieve a goal, at least you need to know some basic things, such as definitions and implementation examples.

    Definition of Implementation

    Etymologically, the concept of Implementation according to Webster’s dictionary comes from English, namely Implement. In the dictionary, Implements means to provide the means to do something and have an actual effect.

    Meanwhile, in the Big Indonesian Dictionary, implementation is implementation or implementation. Another definition of implementation is providing the means to do something that has an effect or influence on something. Definition Implications or implementation may also vary according to experts.

    Therefore, it will give you an idea of ​​how you should behave towards your goals. Apart from that, here is information about Implementation made by experts

    Definition of Implementation According to Experts

    1. Nurman Usman

    Implementation is the existence of an activity, action, action or system mechanism that leads to the existence of not only an activity, but an activity planned and an activity carried out to achieve a goal.

    2. Purwanto and Sulistyastuti

    According to Purwanto and Sulistyastuti, implementation is essentially the activity of distributing the output of a policy implemented by an implementer (to deliver policy output) to a target group in an effort to achieve the policy.

    3. Sudarsono

    According to Sudarsono in his book “Public Policy Analysis”, implementation is an activity related to the completion of a job, through the use of means (tools) to obtain the desired end result.

    4. Solichin Abdul Wahab

    According to Solichin, implementation is an action taken by an individual or by an official, government or private group to achieve the goals outlined in a policy decision.

    5. Widodo

    Implementation means providing the means to carry out a policy and possibly having an impact or influence on something.

    6. According to Mazmanian and Sabatier

    Mazmanian and Sabatier understand that implementation is the implementation of basic legal policies, also in the form of orders or decisions or, or court decisions.

    The enforcement process occurs after going through several stages, such as going through legal stages, then issuing several enforcement policy decisions, and so on, until corrective policies are involved.

    7. Daniel A. Mazmanian and Paul Sabatier (1979)

    According to Daniel A. Mazmanian and Paul Sabatier, the concept of implementation is an understanding that occurs after the preparation of a plan that is the focus of implementing government-designed policies.

    There are also those who say that implementation is an event that occurs after the formulation and ratification of national policy guidelines.

    8. Hanifah Harsono

    According to Hanifah Harsono, implementation is the process of implementing a policy into policy action from politics to administration. Develop policies to improve programs.

    9. Prof. H. Tachjan (2006: 25)

    Professor H. Tachjan defines implementation as public policy, the process of administrative activities after the policy is established/approved. This activity falls between policy development and policy implementation. Policy evaluation contains top-down logic, which implies lower/alternative interpretations.

    10. Van Meter and Van Horn

    Implementation, as defined by Van Meter and Van Horn, is an action taken by individuals, officials, government agencies, or private groups to achieve the goals outlined in several decisions. These agencies perform governmental tasks affecting citizens.

    11. Frederick

    Implementation is a policy that refers to the actions of individuals, groups or governments in a certain environment, in relation to certain obstacles, while looking for opportunities to achieve goals or achieve desired goals, thereby achieving goals.

    Implementation Goals

    As previously mentioned, implementation is an activity that is carried out systematically and connected by mechanisms to achieve certain goals. Referring to the notion of implementation, several implementation objectives are:

    • The main objective of implementation is to achieve a mature plan, both individually and as a team.
    • Examine and document procedures in implementing plans or policies.
    • Achieve the goals to be achieved in the plans or policies designed.
    • To determine the capacity of the community to implement the policy or plan as intended.
    • To determine how successful a policy or plan has been designed to improve or enhance quality.

    Types of Implementation

    1. Policy Implementation

    Policy implementation is in principle a means by which a policy can achieve its goals. Lester and Stewart (Winarno, 2012: 101-102) explain that policy enforcement is a legal management tool where various actors, organizations, procedures and techniques work together to implement policies to achieve the desired effect or goal.

    Therefore, implementation is according to the steps taken by the government to achieve the goals set in the political decisions. However, the government in making policies must also first consider whether the policy can have a negative impact on society.

    The goal is a policy that will not conflict with society, so it will not cause harm to society.

    According to Nugroho (2003: 158), there are two choices of policy implementation, namely direct implementation in the form of programs and through the formulation of policies that originate or are derived from these policies.

    Therefore, the implementation of the policy outlined by Nugroho has two options where the first is implemented directly in the form of a program and the second is through policy formulation.

    According to Edward (in Winarno, 2002: 125), policy implementation is the stage of policy making between policy formulation and the consequences of the policy for the people it influences.

    If a policy is inappropriate or does not reduce the problem that is the goal of the policy, then the policy can fail, although a brilliant policy can also fail if the policy is not implemented by the people who implement it.

    Implementation is the most important stage in the formulation of public policy. A political program must be implemented to have the desired impact and goals.

    According to William. N. Dun (2000:2-25) recommends that at every stage of the public policy formulation process, including the stages of policy implementation, it is important to carry out an analysis. The analysis in question is not the same as the evaluation because from the stage of setting the agenda to evaluating the policy, an analysis must be carried out.

    2. Implementation of Information Systems or Technology

    System implementation are the steps or procedures taken to complete the approved system design, install, test, and start up a new or upgraded system. The objectives of implementing this system are:

    1. Completing the pre-approved system design.
    2. Make sure users can use the new system
    3. Check if the new system is suitable for users.
    4. Make sure the transition to the new system goes well by planning, monitoring, and executing the new installation.

    Main Components in System Implementation

    In order for the design system that we are working on to run well, it is necessary to test the system that we are working on. For this reason, several key components are required, including hardware hardware , software software , and human brainware .

    Hardware Hardware

    Hardware is a number of components that are visible physically, which work together in inputting data. Computer equipment used includes:

    1. Screen
    2. CPU central processing unit
    3. The hard disk is the place to run the system and storage media
    4. Minimum memory of 128 MG e. Keyboard and Mouse Software.

    Software Software

    Software is a set of instructions or computer programs that can be used by a computer to provide the desired function and appearance. In this case the software used by the author for web design applications are:

    1. Windows XP operating system.
    2. MySQL as a programming language for databases in SQL language.
    3. Macromedia Dreamweaver 8 as a design editor.
    4. PHP as a server side programming language.
    5. Web server as a local server to test web pages.
    6. Browser as a medium for viewing web pages. Such as: Mozilla.

    Elements of Human Brainware

    Brain software is the human element that manages existing computer facilities. The human factor is mentioned as a party that plays a role in system management, and human factors include:

    1. System analyst, namely the person who establishes and builds facilities or designs system programs.
    2. Programmers, namely people who understand the programming language used to create and build a program.
    3. Operations administrator, i.e. the person who operates the system, such as computer-operated data entry to generate information, etc.
    4. Public users, namely those who use the system designed to obtain the necessary information.

    3. Implementation of Education

    The term implementation is not new in the world of education or in the world of management, every teacher after designing certain programs and plans will try his best to carry out these plans to achieve success and achieve the desired goals. with the rules in force.

    Implementation of education means everything that is carried out and implemented in accordance with a program designed to be fully implemented in accordance with predetermined regulations.

    Thus, program implementation also needs to fully carry out what is planned in the program. Problems will arise if what is done deviates from what was planned or not designed, then there will be futility between design and implementation.

    Main Activities of Education Implementation

    • Program Development

    Curriculum development includes developing an annual syllabus (general syllabus for each subject), semester syllabus (containing items to be delivered during the semester), modular syllabus, modules/subjects (sheets, courses, questions and answers), weekly programs and daily programs ( for student progress and difficulties), enrichment and tutoring programs, and Guidance and Counseling programs

    • Implementation of Learning

    In learning, the main task of a teacher is to create an environment that supports changes in student behavior. In general, the implementation of KTSP-based learning and the 2013 curriculum consists of three contents, namely introduction, basic activities, and closing section.

    • Evaluation of Learning Outcomes

    Evaluation is a process of collecting data to determine how, how, and how educational goals are achieved, where the results of this assessment can be used as a reference in making decisions. Included in this assessment are ways to overcome problems encountered when they arise in learning.

    Implementation is not limited to implementing a program (curriculum, learning) but before implementation, the teacher has designed a lesson plan in accordance with the applicable program, the next task is the implementation of work and finally evaluation.

    From the results of the evaluation a decision will be made whether the design meets the objectives or requires re-planning.

    4. Strategy Implementation

    Strategy implementation is the fourth step in the strategy management process and is where you turn strategic plans into action. From implementing a new marketing plan to increase sales to implementing new task management software to increase the efficiency of internal teams.

    Having a strategic plan is good. However, if you don’t have the bandwidth, resources, and support to execute, a strategic plan isn’t going to make any real change in the organization.

    We’ll cover the key steps for implementing a strategy, including the potential risks and how to avoid them, and introduce some frameworks to help you successfully implement the strategy you’re currently using.

    Steps to Implement Business Strategy

    Strategy execution is very important to ensure that all plans that have been prepared can be executed properly. There are six steps you can take to make the strategy implementation process easier. Whatever?

    a. Define a Strategic Framework

    on the one hand, strategy must be integrated into all aspects of your business. Strategy must be in the DNA of the organization and its creators. However, if you don’t try to explain it clearly, it will be very difficult for you to focus on achieving it.

    Start by creating a simple framework that someone can easily understand. When someone questions the purpose of the strategy, everyone must be on the same page for the process to work smoothly.

    b. Build Your Plan

    Now that you’ve created a plan, it’s time to start making actual strategic plans. There are several steps in developing a plan that you can follow:

    • Bring all stakeholders together in a meeting. In the meeting, start writing down the values ​​that the company upholds.
    • Represents Score 3- an area of ​​focus that your team thinks needs to work on to achieve their vision
    • Have all team members contribute independently on strategic objective items
    • Discuss together what parts will be pursued and included in the strategy implementation process.

    c. Define KPIs (Key Performance Indicators)

    The third step you need to take is to define your KPIs or Key Performance Indicators. This is a tool that has been around for a long time but is still used today. With KPIs, it’s easier to measure your achievements and focus on the results you want to achieve.

    d. Apply a Strategy Rhythm

    The next thing you need to do to ensure that strategy execution can go according to plan is to follow your strategy. Often, company employees are so focused on their daily tasks that they forget what the main goal of moving the business forward is. This is what makes many strategies unworkable.

    How to appease this strategy? You can start with monthly meetings to check the progress of strategy implementation. Involve everyone to share their opinion on the whole process.

    If something needs fixing, please update immediately. It is important to ensure that everyone has the same views and goals.

    e. Implement Strategy Reporting

    After holding the meeting, you need to find a way to consistently report on the status of implementing the company-led strategy. The main objectives of this report are:

    • Consistency. Everyone knows what to expect and what needs to be updated prior to the Sample meeting
    • Simple. The report should provide an overview of the progress of strategy implementation
    • Accountability. Make sure the report lists the names of each person and their duties and who actually gets the job done
    • Informative. These reports provide not only an overview of the current state of strategy implementation, but also its evolution over time. Try to include comparable time periods using charts to clearly see changes and ensure the pace is being maintained as planned.

    5. Implementation of Nursing

    According to Gordon (1994), nursing practice is a series of activities carried out by nurses to help clients move from problems with their health status to a state of good health that describes the expected results, expectations.

    The purpose of implementation is to help clients achieve the goals that have been set, including:

    • Improve health
    • Prevent disease
    • Restore health
    • Facilitate treatment deputy

    6. Implementation of Public Policy

    The basic concept of public policy implementation refers to the actions taken to achieve the goals set in a decision. Public policy implementation is an important stage in the entire public policy cycle.

    For this reason, several comments appear below regarding the implementation of public policy. According to Nugroho (2014: 657), “the implementation of a policy is in principle a means by which a policy achieves its goals”.

    According to Huntington (Mulyadi, 2015: 24), the most important difference between one country and another lies not in form or ideology, but in the level of leadership. This level of competition can be seen from the ability to carry out every decision or policy of a political office, cabinet or president of the country.

    Grindle (Waluyo, 2007: 49) states: “Practical implementation is not only about the mechanism of making policy decisions according to normal procedures through bureaucratic channels, but more than that, it’s about conflict, whose decision do you get from a policy.

    Author: Ziaggi Fadhil Zahran

    Also Read Related Articles

  • Implantation Bleeding and First Trimester Pregnancy Guide

    Implantation Bleeding – Implantation bleeding is a common spotting of blood as a sign of pregnancy. Then is the bleeding dangerous? How can you tell the difference between implantation bleeding and menstruation? Come on, see the full explanation below!

    What Is Implantation Bleeding?

    Implantation bleeding is spotting that resembles a period. Very little blood loss, such as during the first few days of menstruation or if Sinaumed’s has light menstruation.

    The bloodstains may make you confused and disappointed, especially if Sinaumed’s is craving a baby. Even so, Sinaumed’s should not immediately be sad and worried if he finds these bloodstains.

    This is because the blood spots may be implantation which is one of the common signs of pregnancy. Reporting from The National Institutes of Health, one in four women experience blood spots as an early sign of their pregnancy.

    Why Does Implantation Bleeding Occur?

    Implantation bleeding as a sign of pregnancy is bleeding that occurs when the fertilized egg attaches to the uterine wall.

    Why is it bleeding? Because when the fertilized egg (embryo) attaches to the uterine wall, there will be infiltration (entry) of blood vessels which results in damage to the endometrium / lining of the uterine wall.

    When Does Implantation Bleeding Come Out?

    Implantation bleeding usually appears about a week after ovulation or about 6 to 12 days after conception. Implantation bleeding will occur before the expected start of the new menstrual cycle.

    What is the Difference between Menstrual Blood Spots and Implantation Bleeding as a Sign of Pregnancy?

    Blood spots as a sign of pregnancy or implantation will look very similar to menstrual blood. To tell the difference, consider the following tips.

    1. Watch the Blood Flow

    Implantation is just a light spotting of blood and the amount is very small, in the form of spotting and will remain like that until the bleeding stops. In contrast to menstrual blood which is light at first, then gets thicker and heavier.

    2. Pay attention to the color

    Menstrual blood has a bright red blood color, while implantation usually tends to be brown or pink in color. Although there is a possibility of red implantation blood that resembles menstruation, this is quite rare.

    3. Pay attention to the shape

    Implantation bleeding does not contain blood clots as it usually appears in menstrual blood. It’s just a drop of liquid blood.

    4. Check the duration

    Menstrual blood will come out continuously during the duration of Sinaumed’s’ menstruation without stopping, while implantation bleeding is generally only in the form of spotting which sometimes appears for 1-2 days.

    5. Cramp Severity

    Implantation bleeding is often painless. Meanwhile, menstruation often triggers pain, ranging from mild to severe pain. The pain triggers cramps due to menstruation.

    Apart from Implantation Bleeding, What are the Other Symptoms of Pregnancy?

    If the appearance of blood spots is accompanied by a number of other symptoms, there is a very high possibility that the blood spots are actually a sign of pregnancy.

    The symptoms are:

    • nauseous
    • lack of appetite
    • changes in the sense of taste
    • drastic increase in body temperature
    • rise in body temperature in the morning
    • breast pain
    • late menstruation

    Because this bleeding only occurs a few days after conception, implantation bleeding is one of the first signs of pregnancy that appears, even before Sinaumed’s starts experiencing nausea or morning sickness .

    Check with the doctor to confirm menstrual blood or implantation

    For many women, implantation blood and menstrual blood do not make a difference. Therefore, the best way to find out whether Sinaumed’s is pregnant or not is to wait a few days later and have a pregnancy test or hCG blood test at the hospital.

    When to Watch Out for Bloodstains?

    Light spotting during menstruation is usually normal. However, if it is confirmed that she is positively pregnant, then blood spots appear, then Sinaumed’s must be vigilant. Because this might be a sign of a pregnancy disorder.

    Reporting from the Better Health Channel, some disorders are characterized by the appearance of blood spots during pregnancy, namely:

    • ectopic pregnancy (pregnancy outside the womb)
    • molar pregnancy (molar pregnancy)
    • placenta previa

    If the streaks of blood continue to flow profusely, with or without pain or cramping, contact your doctor for further examination.

    Guide to Living the First Trimester of Pregnancy

    The following list can help Sinaumed’s to build a foundation for the first trimester and pave the way for the rest of Sinaumed’s’ pregnancy journey . Sinaumed’s can do every point, or just use this list for general guidance. In essence, do what feels right for Sinaumed’s himself.

    1. Take Prenatal Vitamins

    If Sinaumed’s is not already taking prenatal vitamins in the first trimester of pregnancy, start them as soon as possible. In particular, the folic acid vitamin is essential for reducing the risk of spinal disorders, such as spina bifida and birth defects.

    Sinaumed’s should take 400-600 micrograms (mcg) of folic acid (vitamin B9) supplements daily during the first trimester.

    In addition to folic acid, Sinaumed’s is also required to meet the needs of 10 mcg of vitamin D every day. Sinaumed’s can take special multivitamins for pregnant women, but still nothing can beat the natural nutrition that Sinaumed’s gets from fresh foods such as vegetables, fruit and animal protein.

    2. Start Looking for the Right Midwife or Doctor

    Which is right for Sinaumed’s , midwife or obstetrician? Choosing a medical companion for Sinaumed’s’ pregnancy will be very important for Sinaumed’s’ health and for the future Sinaumed’s baby in the months to come.

    If Sinaumed’s already has professional medical personnel who are comfortable and reliable, Sinaumed’s is ready to take the next step. Even so, if you haven’t yet, seek recommendations from people who Sinaumed’s trust, ask for advice from general practitioners who are regulars of the Sinaumed’s family, as well as from valid health forums.

    3. Make an appointment to check the content

    After finding the right midwife or obstetrician for Sinaumed’s , immediately make an obstetric consultation appointment as soon as possible. Sinaumed’s should have had at least one consultation around the 8th week of pregnancy.

    During the consultation, the Sinaumed’s midwife/doctor will:

    • Ask about Sinaumed’s’ health and lifestyle history , including history of previous pregnancies (if any). In general, Sinaumed’s will also get a complete physical examination, including a Pap smear and pelvic exam.
    • Provide information on how to care for and take care of yourself during pregnancy, such as exercising safely and starting to manage a healthy diet.
    • Check blood pressure.
    • Measuring Sinaumed’s’ height and weight . The Sinaumed’s midwife/doctor will use these numbers to calculate Sinaumed’s’ body mass index (BMI) .
    • Testing for the presence or absence of sexually transmitted infections (if not, Sinaumed’s may request one).
    • Predict the estimated day of birth (HPL) of the baby. It is customary for doctors to set the date of birth by ultrasound.

    If Sinaumed’s is currently on medication or taking any medication to treat Sinaumed’s’ health condition (whether mild or chronic), do not stop the dose of the drug suddenly. Talk when Sinaumed’s consults with a doctor about a list of medicines Sinaumed’s is currently using, and find out which ones are safe and which are not.

    Many drugs, even nonprescription ones, are not safe for consumption during pregnancy. Mention thoroughly and in detail, even the supplements, vitamins, and various herbal products that Sinaumed’s uses.

    4. If Smoking and Drinking Alcohol, Stop Now

    Smoking and drinking alcohol while pregnant can increase the risk of a number of serious complications, including placental problems, premature birth, and miscarriage.

    Smoking can slow the growth of the fetus, increase the risk of stillbirth and infant death after birth. Several studies have even proven the linkage of smoking habits with an increased risk of babies being born with cleft lip or palate defects.

    It’s never too late to stop. Every cigarette and glass of alcohol that Sinaumed’s does not consume provides a better chance for Sinaumed’s’s baby to grow up healthy.

    5. Research Health Insurance

    While you are still in your first trimester of pregnancy, immediately make sure about Sinaumed’s personal or office insurance whether it facilitates the costs of pregnancy care and delivery costs, and care for Sinaumed’s’ newborns later. Find out by contacting a Sinaumed’s insurance broker or discussing it with the Sinaumed’s office HRD manager .

    Things to remember: before planning a discussion with HRD at where Sinaumed’s works, don’t forget to also find out and ensure Sinaumed’s’ maternity leave and maternity leave rights .

    If Sinaumed’s does not have health insurance, find out how Sinaumed’s can get financial assistance and start planning accordingly.

    6. Sort out the foods you should and shouldn’t eat

    Designing a healthy and balanced diet can ensure that Sinaumed’s gets all the nutrients needed to ensure the health of Sinaumed’s and the baby.

    Remember that Sinaumed’s does not need extra calories during the first trimester of Sinaumed’s . Instead, design the Sinaumed’s meal menu so that you can meet your intake of the five main nutrients: folic acid, iron, calcium, zinc, and fiber.

    Sinaumed’s must avoid certain foods in the first trimester of pregnancy, especially unhygienic, undercooked, undercooked or undercooked foods, as well as animal offal. Also don’t overdo it in consuming carbohydrates such as white rice and white bread which can increase Sinaumed’s’ blood sugar levels during pregnancy.

    Adequate intake of omega-3 fatty acids is also sufficient to support the development of the baby’s nerves and brain before birth. These fatty acids can also reduce Sinaumed’s’ risk of developing postpartum depression.

    In addition, make sure Sinaumed’s consumes enough fluids or is adequately hydrated to avoid the dangers of dehydration during pregnancy. Dehydration can cause fatigue, constipation, and even premature labor.

    Sinaumed’s also needs to cut back on caffeine. Research has proven the link between excessive caffeine consumption and the possible risk of miscarriage. Limit your caffeine intake to less than 200 mg per day (about one medium cup of coffee).

    7. Keep Exercising Routine

    There are various benefits of exercise during pregnancy for Sinaumed’s and babies — which can be a great motivation to get 30 minutes of physical activity every day of the week.

    Moderate exercise is a great energy booster . Consult the matter with the Sinaumed’s doctor regarding which limits are safe and which are not, and good and appropriate exercise advice for Sinaumed’s pregnancy .

    8. Enough Rest

    It is normal for pregnant women to feel tired and tired during the first trimester. This is because Sinaumed’s’ body is getting used to the very rapid hormonal changes. Get in the habit of resting with as much of it as Sinaumed’s can, even though it might be difficult when Sinaumed’s is at work.

    Take a little time to take a nap (even in the office) if the situation allows it. Sinaumed’s’ body is growing and changing — and Sinaumed’s’ baby-to-be needs parents to stay alert and healthy.

    After baby Sinaumed’s is born, sleep will become a luxury. So enjoy it while Sinaumed’s can.

    9. Consider Genetic Testing

    During the first trimester of pregnancy, Sinaumed’s midwives/doctors will offer various genetic screening tests between weeks 11-14 of age with the aim of monitoring the baby’s risk of having birth defects, such as Down syndrome .

    Based on Sinaumed’s ‘ risk , the Sinaumed’s midwife/doctor may also recommend NIPT around the 9th week which is useful for detecting chromosomal abnormalities and/or prenatal screening such as amniocentesis or chorionic villus sampling. However, both of these things should be done once Sinaumed’s has reached the second trimester.

    10. Design a Future Financial Plan

    Building a family is an excellent and necessary moment to review Sinaumed’s’ monthly expenses .

    Thinking about how Sinaumed’s will handle the cost of food, clothing, diapers, toys and baby equipment can add up quickly. Discuss with the couple where Sinaumed’s can cut the budget to make room to provide for Sinaumed’s’ baby .

    Sinaumed’s can save money by using “inherited” items from Sinaumed’s’ mothers, brothers, sisters or friends or renting baby equipment, compared to having to buy new ones.

    • Definition of the Embryo and Other Pregnancy Phases
    • Definition of Stunting: Causes, Symptoms, Impact
    • What is IVF? Here are 5 Processes
    • Inflammation of the Mammary Glands: Definition, Causes, Treatment
    • What is angina: Symptoms, triggers, and how to treat it

  • Imperative Sentences & Verbs: Definition, Types, Functions and Examples

    Imperative Verbs – In linguistic works the term imperative uses the term imperative sentence. In his book entitled Composition: An Introduction to Language Proficiency , Keraf explains that a command sentence or what is also known as an imperative sentence is a sentence that contains an order or a request for someone to another person to do something he wants. This order can be given in written or oral form.

    Meanwhile, according to the Big Indonesian Dictionary or KBBI, imperative has the meaning of a sentence that is giving orders or giving commands, has the right to give commands, and is obligatory.

    In a book entitled Kelas Kata in Indonesian , Kridalaksana explains that imperative sentences are sentences or verbs that are commonly used to express imperatives, prohibitions and orders to perform certain actions.

    This is also in line with the explanation in the book entitled Indonesian Standard Grammar , Alwi explained that an imperative sentence is a sentence that is used in accordance with a contest to order something.

    Definition of Imperative Sentences

    Previously, it has been explained briefly related to what imperative sentences are. Well, in this point we will explain further related to the meaning of the imperative sentence itself.

    Rahardi explained in a book entitled Pragmatics: Indonesian Imperative Unity if an imperative sentence is a sentence which contains a request for the person who is given the order to take action according to what he said.

    Imperative sentences are grouped into five types. The five kinds of imperative sentences are as follows.

    1. Regular imperative sentences;
    2. Request imperative sentence;
    3. Imperative sentence granting permission;
    4. Invitation imperative sentence;
    5. Command imperative sentence.

    A study entitled Forms of Indonesian Imperative Speech , Adriyanto explained that interactive sentences are useful as imperative sentences, namely utterances which contain ordering, forcing, ordering, inviting and asking that the person who is ordered to do something according to what is ordered. When communicating, the form of the imperative has a more significant communicative function.

    This was also emphasized by Rahardi who explained that the form of the imperative is indeed interesting to study, examine and study. One of the reasons is because this linguistic form has a significant communicative function.

    When carrying out daily communication, language is indeed the main medium. Therefore, the imperative form is always present in every communication made by humans. This also further emphasizes that imperative forms are always present in human communication, including in the da’wah communication of a religious leader to the participants.

    From some of the opinions above, it can be concluded that imperative sentences are words that contain imperative sentences. Humans in their lives will never be separated from the name of communication. Where every communication that will be carried out by humans will have imperative sentences to the interlocutor to take action according to the wishes of the speaker.

    Sentence Functions and Imperative Verbs

    Judging from the explanation of the meaning of the imperative above, it can be concluded that the presence of imperative verbs is used in sentences of commands or instructions. Keraf explained that utterances that use imperative verbs can be conveyed in the form of demanding responses or reactions.

    Where the response can be in the form of a verbal or nonverbal reaction until in the end the form of the reaction can lead to a certain action. Simply put, the function of the imperative sentence is to ask someone to act or do something.

    So, the explanation of the function of sentences and imperative verbs is as follows.

    1. Give a Prohibition

    The function of imperative sentences is not only related to commands. But another function of the imperative sentence is as a prohibition in doing something. Of course, a prohibition is also related to things that should be avoided.

    The following is an example of an imperative sentence with the function of a prohibition.

    • “Don’t eat in a hurry!”
      Reason: Eating in a hurry can cause us to choke and even bite our tongue.
    • “Don’t be noisy in the middle of the night!”
      Reason: Being noisy in the middle of the night can disturb other people who are resting.
    • “Don’t read in the dark!”
      Reason: Reading in a dark place can cause our eyes to hurt and it’s hard to focus.

    2. Giving a Command

    Previously, it was explained that imperative sentences according to the Big Indonesian Dictionary or KBBI are related to orders and commands. The command function in imperative sentences is more formal in nature and will usually be used by those who have a certain position.

    Then, an example of an imperative sentence with a command function is as follows.

    • “Perform an attack at night with the tactics we have learned so far!”
    • “Immediately surround the opponent’s fort so that our goal is successful!”
    • “Just do what you’ve been told to do!”

    3. Delivering a Sign

    Imperative sentences can function to convey a sign or a code to the other person. Where the existence of this signal or code will usually be understood by the other person alone.

    • “No need to hesitate, if you like it, just take it!”
    • “Eat something you like!”
    • “Buy what you want!”

    If we look at some of the examples above, according to the context, a sign is something that can only be understood by the other person and the speaker. Whereas other people outside the interlocutor or speaker usually will not understand something conveyed through imperative sentences with the function of the sign.

    4. Giving an Order

    In general, imperative sentences do have the function of giving orders to the other person so they can do something the speaker wants. Imperative sentences with command functions will be accompanied by certain sentences such as Please, Please, Come on, Please, Wish to still have a subtle and polite impression.

    So for an example is as follows.

    • “Please take care of my sister for a while, I’m going to dry the clothes for a while.”
    • “Please take me to school later at 8 in the morning!”
    • “Please buy me a pack of nasi padang at the stall in front of the alley!”

    5. Offer an Invitation

    The existence of imperative sentences can also have a function as an invitation. The core function of imperative sentences is almost the same as persuasive sentences. Even so specifically for imperative sentences it functions more to offer invitations but in a more general context.

    To make it easier to understand, here is an example of an imperative sentence with an invitation function.

    • “Come on, put your shoes on!”
    • “Let’s quickly get ready to head to the church!”
    • “Let’s go to the central building to watch the exhibition preparations!”

    Characteristics of Imperative Sentences

    In general, imperative sentences have the main characteristics as sentences with the nature of ordering or giving commands. Now for more details, below are some of the characteristics of imperative sentences that can distinguish them from other sentences.

    1. At the end of the imperative sentence will be followed by special punctuation marks such as exclamation marks (!) and not periods (.).
    2. When imperative sentences are spoken in spoken form, there will be a high enough emphasis and intonation at the end of the sentence.
    3. Imperative sentences will have a structure in the form of a predicate that precedes the subject.
    4. At the end of the sentence you will usually find an affix in the form of -lah or -kan.
    5. Imperative sentences tend to have the character of forcing the other party which seems to require the other person to do something according to what he said.
    6. When the imperative sentence has the function of giving orders, it will be accompanied by these words such as Please, Please, Come, Please, Want and so on.

    Types of Imperative Sentences

    As previously explained, imperative sentences can be divided into several types. There are at least five types of imperative sentences. Starting from ordinary imperative sentences, imperative sentences of requests, imperative sentences of granting permission, imperative sentences of solicitation and imperative sentences of orders.

    Where each type of imperative sentence has its own meaning and function. So that you understand better, here is a description of the types of imperative sentences.

    1. Ordinary Imperative Sentences

    Rahardi explained that an ordinary imperative sentence is a simple form of a command sentence that is carried out directly. In the imperative sentence of this ordinary type it has several characteristics in it as explained below.

    • Have basic verbs
    • Use loud intonation
    • There are particles.
    • There are basic verbs.
    • Using exclamation marks (!)
    • Verbs usually end in -an, -I, and -kan.

    For example: Drive the chicken away quickly!

    Context: someone may have annoyance with chickens because they throw dirt in their yard area and then give orders to other people to drive away the chickens.

    2. Imperative Sentence Request

    Imperative sentences of the request type will usually be carried out smoothly and politely in their pronunciation.

    An example of a request imperative sentence is as follows.

    • “Children… Try not to make a lot of noise, I want to explain an announcement related to Kartini’s Day tomorrow!”
      Context: A teacher standing in front of students who are in a noisy classroom situation.

    3. Imperative Sentence Granting Permission

    The next imperative sentence is a type of granting permission. Usually, the type of imperative sentence giving permission will be marked with words of politeness. For example, the word Please, Let, Introduced, Allowed, Welcome, and so forth.

    An example of an imperative sentence granting permission is as follows.

    • “Mother… Please take and taste this nastar cake if you want! This is my own handmade, guaranteed delicious!”
      Context: A home owner is giving permission to his guests to taste his pineapple cakes.

    4. Inviting Imperative Sentences

    Invitation imperative sentence is a sentence that basically invites other people to do something together. Interactive sentences of this type will usually use unit markers such as Come, Let, Try, Come, Hope, Should, Should, and others. To make it clearer for you, here is an example.

    • “Bima, let’s move this clothes basket to the back room! You lift the red basket, I lift the green basket!”
      Context: An older sibling invites his younger sibling named Bima to move the clothes basket to the back room together.

    5. Commanding Imperative Sentences

    The type of imperative interactive sentence will be in the form of an imperative sentence to do something.

    Examples of Imperative Sentences

    Previously, several examples of imperative sentences have been explained according to their function. Apart from that, there are still lots of examples of imperative sentences that you might have said before but didn’t know if these sentences were included in the imperative sentence category.

    So that you understand more about imperative sentences. The following is an example of an imperative sentence quoted from the official sinaumedia.com website .

    1. Please take out the trash!
    2. Sabda, get into the house immediately because it’s very cold outside!
    3. Guys, please pay attention for a moment!
    4. Come on, put on the mask!
    5. Let him cry as much as he wants first, then we’ll ask what caused it!
    6. Please take a closer look, if you really don’t need it, maybe you can just delete the writing!
    7. Please sign this letter immediately so that it can be processed further!
    8. Calm down, kids!
    9. Don’t read in a dark place.
    10. Please sit quietly!
    11. Don’t doubt yourself!
    12. Please come to the village hall this afternoon to discuss the Karang Taruna work program!
    13. Don’t be late for class!
    14. Immediately turn off the lights when it is noon!
    15. Please help Meta lift that chair!
    16. Bring this food for your lunch later!
    17. Don’t forget to stop by Grandma’s house after school!
    18. Let’s get to work right away!
    19. Quickly vacate this room!
    20. Clean the stains on your clothes before Mom knows!
    21. Please send this letter to the Village Secretary.
    22. Try to understand our current situation.
    23. Please convey our apologies to Billy’s family.
    24. Please give this nastar cake to your next door neighbor.
    25. Race participants are requested not to leave the field area.
    26. Obey all the rules in this school.
    27. Try not to be late for class again.
    28. Ask for proof of payment after making this transaction.
    29. Library visitors are requested to immediately return books to their respective places because the library is almost closed.
    30. Remove all the weeds so that your house looks clean.
    31. Please calm down, because the exam is in progress.
    32. Please close the door again as this room is air-conditioned.
    33. Let’s observe a moment of silence to commemorate the services of heroes who have sacrificed for the independence of this country.
    34. Take it easy and don’t move!
    35. Don’t rush, or you might fall!
    36. Put the dirty laundry in the washing machine, please!
    37. Obey traffic signs!
    38. Get up soon, the dawn call to prayer is heard!
    39. Do whatever makes you happy, as long as it doesn’t harm others!
    40. Get out of the room!
    41. Show us that you really mean it!
    42. It’s getting late, go to bed because tomorrow is school!
    43. Don’t listen to other people’s words that hurt you!
    44. Come on kids, cross with me!
    45. Be careful with the road because it is very slippery!
    46. Please turn off the faucet after use.
    47. Let’s work together to clean up the ditches around where we live!
    48. Don’t get used to sleeping with the window open!
    49. Do not bring outside food into this place!
    50. Don’t spit in public!
    51. No parking in front of the gate!
    52. Clean that floor immediately!
    53. Please fry the seasoned fish.
    54. Please don’t make noise while the exam is in progress.
    55. Wait a minute.

    So, those are some summaries of imperative verbs that you can read in full above. Hopefully all the discussion above makes it easier for you to determine or make imperative sentences and verbs.

  • IMC Is: Definition, Elements, Processes, and Their Implementation in Companies

    IMC Is – In the business world, marketing strategy is the most important point to attract potential customers. Especially in the midst of advancing times like today, the business world will also develop, not only buying and selling transactions, but also having to think about good communication with potential customers.

    IMC stands for Integrated Marketing Communication , which in short will be a marketing strategy that prioritizes alignment between your brand and consumers. As with social life, implementing this marketing strategy must also be accompanied by in-depth communication.

    This IMC or Integrated Marketing Communication strategy has been widely implemented in various large companies in Indonesia, because it is considered effective for building deep, sustainable relationships with consumers from various economic classes. Then actually, what is IMC? What elements must be included in this IMC? How is the implementation of this IMC marketing strategy in large companies?

    So, so that Sinaumed’s isn’t confused about this, let’s look at the following review!

    Definition of IMC ( Integrated Marketing Communication )

    Basically, communication is the main thing in the marketing process, because in essence, marketing is also a communication process that is created flexibly between companies and consumers. Therefore, communication and marketing have an attachment that cannot be separated from one another, so that the two must integrate with each other.

    According to The American Association of Advertising Agencies , IMC or Integrated Marketing Communication is marketing communications implemented in an integrated manner. In the concept of communication planning, it emphasizes the study of strategic messages in each form of communication which are then combined to obtain message clarity, consistency, and maximum communication impact through message integration.

    Meanwhile, according to Kotler and Armstrong (2004) in a book entitled Marketing Fundamentals , revealed that IMC or Integrated Marketing Communication is a concept applied in a company that is carried out carefully, especially in coordinating its communication channels, which will convey messages clearly, consistently, and convince consumers of the company and its products.

    Then, according to Belch, he provides a definition of IMC or Integrated Marketing Communication as a business strategy used to develop, execute, evaluate, and measure a brand communication program within a certain period of time to many people. The many people referred to here are consumers, customers, employees, and other target markets. The goal of IMC is of course to benefit the brand financially, both for the short and long term, which in turn can simultaneously increase the value of a brand.

    Furthermore, according to Shimp (2003), states that IMC or Integrated Marketing Communication is the process of developing and implementing various forms of persuasive communication programs to customers or even potential customers on an ongoing basis.

    So, based on several expert opinions related to IMC or Integrated Marketing Communication , it can be concluded that IMC is a marketing strategy used in a company that relies on communication with consumers in the form of promotions and is persuasive, aimed at customers or even prospective customers on an ongoing basis. . 

    Elements In IMC Promotion

    Previously, it was mentioned that to achieve IMC goals, companies must use a tool called promotion. This is because the IMC marketing strategy will later integrate various promotional tools so that the message to be conveyed is actually received by customers. So, here are 9 elements contained in an IMC promotion or Promotion Mix :

    1. Advertising ( Advertising )

    Advertising is a form of non-personal communication that is “shared” in various mass media, from TV, radio, newspapers to magazines that contain information about the company and its products and services to be introduced to customers. This advertisement is a communication element that is most widely used by companies, especially companies that produce goods for services to the wider community.

    2. Direct Marketing ( Direct Marketing )

    This second element is a marketing activity whose communication techniques are carried out by the company directly to its consumers. Usually, activities from Direct Marketing are carried out by sending direct mail , telemarketing, to direct selling to target consumers.

    Direct Marketing aims to get a direct relationship (either in the form of responses or buying and selling transactions) with consumers. Usually, this direct marketing relies on sales.

    3. Interactive/Internet Marketing ( Interactive/Internet Marketing )

    This type of promotion is quite widely carried out by companies, because currently the internet network is indeed relied on for the needs of various fields, not least in marketing strategy. This marketing activity is carried out interactively, namely through digital mobile phones or online interactive TV , which of course uses the internet network.

    Through this activity, companies and consumers will be able to communicate in two directions.

    4. Sales Promotion ( Sales Promotion )

    This promotional activity will later be carried out by distributing product samples or coupons to potential customers, so that it will indirectly encourage them to be willing to make a purchase transaction. Meanwhile, for sales promotion aimed at distributors and traders, this can be done by holding sales contests, giving special prices, and providing merchandise directly from the company.

    5. Publicity and Public Relations

    Publicity is of course different from advertising , because in this case it will enter the company’s mass media network in the form of news about products and services, to carry out events which will be covered and then published by the mass media .

    Meanwhile, Public Relations will later carry out management functions in the form of evaluating public behavior, identifying individual policies and procedures for public interest , and executing a program that is acceptable to the public.

    6. Personal Selling (Personal Selling )

    In this promotion, various communication activities will be carried out directly or face to face between the seller and potential customers. Activities can be in the form of making presentations, answering questions from consumers related to the product being offered, to getting prospects for orders.

    7. Word of Mouth Marketing

    In this case, it is an activity carried out individually and is oral, written, or through electronic media. The things conveyed are about his experience when making a purchase transaction or consuming related products and services.

    8. Events and Experiences

    In this case, it will be in the form of corporate activities that sponsor activities and programs through prior planning. These activities and programs will later be designed for the benefit of the company’s interaction related to the brand with the target community. This event and experience includes sporting activities, shows, and donation activities.

    9. Point-of-Purchase Communication

    In this case, it will involve posters, signs, and various other materials specifically designed to influence the decision of potential consumers to be willing to make transactions at the point of purchase. Usually, the layout of goods in a store as a place of purchase is very important to attract the attention of consumers so they are willing to try the product.

    Why is the IMC Strategy Important to Do?

    Especially for companies that are marketing their products or services to consumers, IMC or Integrated Marketing Communication is very important to do for the following reasons.

    1. IMC aims to convey consistent messages related to products or services to the general public. Due to this consistency, potential customers will actually get and understand messages related to the product or service.
    2. The IMC strategy can also play a role in maintaining clear messages and goals in a business, because they are done consistently.
    3. IMC is done to create customer experience. The point is, through this IMC strategy, customers will be able to contribute in determining how business messages are conveyed, so of course the results will be positive.
    4. IMC can be useful for building the image of a brand. Especially on characteristics, logos, to content that will maximize the delivery of messages to customers.

    According to Sulaksana (2007), the popularity of this IMC strategy can certainly bring about a new paradigm in corporate marketing. If previously, brand managers, advertising, promotion, sales to public relations only worked in their respective fields, through this IMC they will combine their “strength” in an integrated manner. Apart from that, nowadays there is also a growing awareness of the consistency of marketing campaign messages, as well as the relevance of the communication media that will be used. This is so that it can produce reputation consistency between the brand image (product) and the company image.

    IMC Strategy Implementation Process

    In implementing the IMC or Integrated Marketing Communication strategy , there are six steps, namely as follows:

    1. Situation, Condition and Target Market Analysis ( Analysis of Promotional Program Situation )

    In this stage, the company must analyze the strengths and weaknesses of the data on the target market. After finding the strengths and weaknesses, then they will try to find the point of the problem as well as the solution.

    2. Analysis of the Purpose of Using IMC (Analysis of Communication Process)

    Next is a step that requires the company to analyze the response from the recipient of the information so that the end result is in accordance with the company’s own goals. Companies can also start setting goals by considering the cognitive stages of potential customers when deciding to buy a product or service that has been offered.

    3. Arrange the Budget ( Budget determination)

    The next step is to prepare a budget or budget, whether the capital budget is already available at the beginning ( top-down ) or has just been prepared based on how the budget is allocated ( bottom-up ). In this step, it will be easier for the company to prioritize which activities to carry out.

    Things that must be included in the structure are resources, which will then be communicated in a planned and transparent manner to various divisions.

    4. Development of the IMC Program

    In this step, later the company will develop a marketing communication program that will be pursued.

    5. Integrate and Implement IMC Strategist

    In this stage, it will usually be combined with a marketing mix strategy. Then, there will be activities to produce advertisements, buy media time and space , and carry out previously planned designs. The combination process is so that marketing within a company can merge into one and be easily managed. Even so, every employee must continue to carry out their work in a responsible manner.

    6. Monitoring, Evaluation, and Control of IMC ( Monitor, Evaluate, and Control IMC program)

    In this last stage, later the company will evaluate the performance results of the employees involved whether the program being implemented has been effective or not. Not only that, the central company will see whether the strategy and tactics being pursued are appropriate or not.

    To do this, the company must develop what criteria are needed for the evaluation results and then adjust them to what is happening in the field. Even though this is the last stage, of course it is very important, especially to determine how the previous stages can be carried out successfully or failed.

    Implementation of IMC ( Integrated Marketing Communication ) at PT Tokopedia

    IMC or Integrated Marketing Communication is very important to be implemented in an organization or company to retain its customers. This also applies to a large company, namely PT Tokopedia. Surely Sinaumed’s is no stranger to the existence of this company?

    Yep, Tokopedia is known as a company that is the most popular buying and selling site, so of course implementing this IMC in its promotional activities to maintain or even increase the number of customers. According to Tokopedia’s marketing manager, this IMC strategy is considered to be able to attract a number of customers, especially when there are currently more and more competitors in terms of e-Commerce .

    The forms of marketing communication activities implemented at Tokopedia are advertising, direct marketing, public relations, sponsorship , souvenirs, social media, and websites. Not only that, in terms of advertising , Tokopedia is also careful in using below the line media , for example in the form of X-Banners, Billboards, pamphlets, banners, to POP Booths. The installation of banners is also often done even though there are still many considerations, such as from a busy traffic area so that it can be easily seen by many people. Tokopedia also uses Brand Ambassadors, namely actress and singer Isyana Sarasvati.

    From the various IMC activities within the Tokopedia company, of course there are still various obstacles, especially in terms of the ability to cooperate in human resources which is still lacking. Not infrequently, when activities related to the public directly, often get complaints from customers. Even so, Tokopedia still managed to overcome the existing obstacles and most events were able to run smoothly.

    So, that’s an explanation of what IMC or Integrated Marketing Communication is , which is one of the most popular marketing strategies, especially for well-known companies. Even so, companies that are just starting their business can also apply this marketing strategy to break financial gains in the business world.

    Source:

    Dawn, Adityo. (2017). Implementation of Integrated Marketing Communication (IMC) at PT Tokopedia in Retaining Customers. Communication Journal, Vol VIII (3). 

    Also Read!

    • What is Direct Marketing?
    • Understanding Digital Marketing and Its Advantages
    • Understanding What Marketing Is and How to Become a Marketer
    • Definition and Types of Promotion ( Promotion )
    • Definition and Benefits of Advertising ( Advertising )
    • Definition and Process of Personal Selling
    • Definition and Types of Prices
    • Understanding Wholesale and the difference with Retail
    • Benefits of Understanding Market Segments
    • Definition and Levels of Brand Loyalty
    • 12 Examples of Marketing Strategies Worth Trying
    • Definition and Types of Marketing

  • Illuminating Conjunctions: Definition, Types, and Examples

    Illuminating Conjunctions – In writing Indonesian sentences, a liaison (conjunction) is needed to connect between sentences. One type of liaison that can be found in a sentence is an illuminative conjunction. An illuminating conjunction is a conjunction used to explain or explain an event in a sentence.

    Conjunctions in writing Indonesian sentences themselves cannot connect objects and explain words, but their function is more of a liaison so that a sentence becomes easy to understand. Illuminating conjunctions are divided into 10 types.

    Consider the following explanation to find out the meaning, types, and examples of explanatory conjunctions.

    Definition of Conjunction Conjunction

    Illuminative conjunctions are conjunctions used to connect phrases or sentences with the aim of explaining. Some say that an explanatory conjunction is used to describe an event or thing in a sentence, phrase, or clause.

    Illuminative conjunctions are usually found in direct sentences, which are then changed to indirect sentences. However, in its use it is not to associate objects or words. Its main characteristics are to explain the purpose of the sentence to make it easier to understand.

    In general, the conjunctions used in this type of explanatory conjunction include “that”, “is”, “is”, and “that”. However, when elaborated further, this type of conjunction is further divided into several categories.


    Types of Illuminating Conjunctions

    Illuminative conjunctions themselves are divided into several types, in the following we provide examples in sentences.

    1. Additive conjunctions are conjunctions that connect two grammatical elements such as phrases, clauses, sentences or paragraphs. The words included in this conjunction are and , as well as , and besides .
    2. Disjunctive conjunctions are conjunctions that connect two opposite elements of a sentence. The words included in this conjunction are and , either…. well , or somehow…. who knows.
    3. Contrasting conjunctions, namely conjunctions to show contradictory sentences. The words that are included in this conjunction are whereas, whereas, but, and in the meantime.
    4. Final conjunctions, namely conjunctions that function to connect two elements that have content. The words included in this conjunction are so, for , and so.
    5. Time conjunctions, namely conjunctions that connect sentences that have an adverb of time.
    6. Causal conjunctions, namely conjunctions used to connect sentences that have an element of cause. The words that are included in this conjunction are because, because, because of that , and because of that.
    7. Conditional conjunctions, namely conjunctions that connect sentences that have elements of conditions in them. The words included in this conjunction are if, as long as, if , and if.
    8. Conjunction conjunctions, namely conjunctions that connect two elements of a sentence that have a consequence relationship. The words included in this conjunction are consequently and so.
    9. Comparative conjunctions are conjunctions that connect two sentences that are comparing. The words that are included in this conjunction are like, like, like , and like.
    10. Unconditional conjunctions are conjunctions that connect two unconditional sentences. The words included in this conjunction are the words even though, although , and even though .

     

     

    Examples of Explanatory Conjunction Sentences

    We usually find conjunctions or conjunctions in sentences in Indonesian. Conjunctions function to connect main clauses and subordinate clauses to create sentences that are interconnected. There are types of conjunctions or types of connecting words, and one of them is the conjunction of explanations. Illuminative conjunctions function to explain or explain an event in a sentence.

    To understand more about the use of conjunctions, here are some examples of conjunctions:

    1. Examples of Sentences with the Conjunction “namely”

    Usually, when given an Indonesian assignment that asks you to make a sentence with an illuminative conjunction, you must use the conjunction “namely”. The following are examples of sentences using the conjunction “that”.

    • Devita has a younger brother, named Adit.
    • Nita has a very beautiful sister, namely Malika.
    • Budi has a younger cousin, namely Susanti.
    • Lestari indeed comes from abroad, namely Australia.
    • Dita was born abroad, namely the Netherlands.
    • My mother bought my sister a cake that tasted really good, namely shredded cake.
    • Mother bought a very delicious cake, namely pancong cake.
    • The woman’s house is indeed far from her office, namely in Surabaya.
    • Pak Ari’s house is far from his office, which is in Bandung.
    • He always uses illogical excuses to skip work, namely losing his wallet.
    • The novel has an unusual storyline, which is about an alien world.
    • This book has unusual content, which is about the world of spirits.
    • He accidentally kicked the ball into someone’s house, namely Pak Budi’s house.
    • The ball kicked by Koko entered someone’s house, namely Wak Anas’ house.
    • There is a secret recipe that makes this dish very distinctive, namely the original Balinese spices.
    • This dish uses a secret recipe, which is an abundance of spices.
    • The road leading to the new office is not far from the old office, which is right next to the mosque at the end of the alley.
    • The road to the Old Cemetery is not far from here, which is right at the crossroad there.
    • Nindy has very noble aspirations, namely to become a teacher of reading and writing for children in her village.
    • Dini has very noble aspirations, namely to become a teacher for children who cannot read in her village.
    • Alex was sentenced to suffer from a serious illness, namely bone cancer.
    • Adi was sentenced to suffer from a serious illness, namely lung cancer.
    • For the last few years, Ijah’s grandmother has suffered from a rare disease, namely Parkinson’s.
    • Azrul’s grandmother suffers from a rare disease, namely Parkinson’s.
    • The fairy tale is very heartbreaking, which tells of a child who was abandoned by his parents.
    • This watch is a very special gift because it was a gift from someone, namely my husband.
    • This gift seemed special because it was a gift from someone so special too, namely my mother.
    • Who would have thought, the first goal in the match was created by a new player, namely Cristiano Ronaldo.
    • The second goal in the match was scored by a new player, namely Asensio.
    • He uses an unreasonable excuse for not going to school, namely losing his bag.
    • The story in this fairy tale tells about the life of a poor girl, namely Cinderella.
    • The President will come to visit the place that was hit by the disaster last night, namely Jombang.
    • The pungent stench in Lita’s room was actually from that object, namely her socks.
    • The child’s skin was injured by a sharp object, namely a knife.
    • To get the ideal body weight is not difficult, namely by doing regular exercise and maintaining a healthy and balanced diet.
    • The use of family planning (KB) pills can increase the disease that is feared by many women, namely breast cancer.
    • Contraceptives that are very suitable for breastfeeding mothers, namely the three-month Family Planning (KB) injection because it will not affect the amount of breast milk.
    • It’s very easy to make a National Identity Card (KTP) nowadays, namely by bringing the KK directly to the Civil Registry Population Service (Dukcapil).

    2. Examples of Sentences with the Conjunction “namely”

    In addition to using the conjunction “ie”, this type of conjunction also often uses the word “ie” as a liaison. The function of the two is not much different because it aims to explain something. The following are examples of sentences using the conjunction “namely”.

    • There is still one thing stuck in my mind, namely the reason you left me just like that.
    • One of the causes of acid reflux disease, namely unhealthy and irregular eating patterns
    • He already has a high position in his office, namely as head of finance
    • I’ve lost weight since going on a healthy diet, which is 48 kg
    • After January, that is February
    • It is known that the cause of the fire in the village was a leak of LPG cylinders
    • I was mad at him for accidentally losing my favorite item, which was a bracelet my mom gave me last year
    • One of the infectious diseases, namely smallpox
    • The appropriate punishment for disobedient children, namely not getting a share of the inheritance
    • An easy way to cut cayenne pepper is to use scissors
    • First place in the inter-provincial school badminton championship, a student from Harapan Bangsa High School.
    • There is still one house that has not received compensation money for releasing the toll road land, namely the family of Mr. Budi
    • Indonesia has a motto, namely Bhineka Tunggal Ika.
    • Lita’s laptop was borrowed by her friend, Sista, yesterday afternoon.
    • Doni’s father is working outside the city, namely Palembang City.

    3. Example Sentences with Additive Conjunctions

    Additive conjunctions are one of these types of conjunctions whose function is to connect two grammatical elements using conjunctions such as as well as, and, besides. This conjunction is usually used to connect two sentences that are of equal or equal rank. The following are examples of sentences or phrases that use additive conjunctions:

    • Mother went to the market to buy vegetables and fruits.
    • Next week I will go to the beach and swim.
    • An example sentence with the next conjunction, today dad plans to wash the car and clean the fish pond.
    • At his age, he should be able to read and write.
    • You better stop paying attention to him, after all he already has a partner.
    • You should be apologizing, after all you’re the one who made a mistake.

    4. Examples of Sentences with Disjunctive Conjunctions

    In this conjunction, the disjunctive conjunction is also known, which is used to connect two equal elements, but its function is to choose one of the two things. Sentences that use conjunctions usually have the words or, or, or, either… I don’t know. For more details, here we provide examples of explanatory conjunction sentences that use disjunctive conjunctions:

    • If asked to choose, would you join a football or badminton community?
    • Should we eat at a restaurant or on a roadside?
    • Do you prefer Indonesian or Korean films?
    • To this day he is still confused about whether to take math or English lessons.
    • He was still confused whether to tell the truth or lie.
    • The next example of a coordinating conjunction. The man still didn’t know whether to go or stay there.
    • Today I will give cake to mom and dad.
    • Whether accepted or not, I’m still faithfully waiting for the announcement from the company.
    • I will try to accept my parents’ decision whether it is what I want or not.
    • Dina always does good to everyone whether she knows her or not.
    • I’m confused which one to buy, red or blue.
    • He was known as a rich merchant because all his houses were luxurious, both in the city and in the village.
    • Budi insisted on applying for a job at the company, both accepted and rejected.
    • We go straight home or stop first at a restaurant.
    • Whether because of her husband, whether because of other things, she looked gloomy since this morning.
    • Whether he comes home or not, his wife really doesn’t care about him.
    • Aunt Rita is very generous, both to her family and neighbors.
    • The parents are lucky because they have two smart children, both science and social studies.

    5. Examples of sentences with contrasting conjunctions

    As the name implies, this type of conjunction aims to connect two contradictory sentences. Usually synonymous with the conjunctions “while”, “but”, “on the contrary”, “meanwhile”. Examples of phrases or sentences that use this type of conjunction include the following:

    • Actually I wanted to come to your birthday party yesterday but unfortunately I was out of town.
    • We used to be classmates in high school, but he pretended not to know me when he passed by.
    • His older brother always looks happy, while his younger brother seems often gloomy and looks depressed all the time.
    • Dina is still late for work even though she has tried to come earlier.
    • Vita learned how to cook fried rice, but it was very salty.
    • I do have quite a lot of savings, but I will use it for the cost of continuing my master’s degree.
    • His father was a cloth seller in Tanah Abang while his mother worked as a private employee.
    • I plan to give him a watch as a gift for his birthday, but so far my savings haven’t been enough.
    • Nova really likes cats, while Novi is allergic to cat hair.
    • I had planned to go on vacation to Bali next week, but I had to cancel this intention because my father’s health suddenly declined.
    • His wife has been working from morning to night, while her husband only sleeps all day.
    • Every day he comes home with durian, while his mother doesn’t like the smell of durian.
    • Rina has to work every day, meanwhile her child is entrusted to her parents.

    6. Example Sentences with Final Conjunctions

    The final conjunction is also a type of explanatory conjunction, which connects 2 sentences that contain the elements “in order”, “for” and “so that”. Examples of phrases or clauses that use this conjunction include the following:

    • Vanessa studies desperately from morning to night so she can enter her dream state university.
    • Tomorrow I will come as early as possible so as not to be late for work on the first day.
    • All parents will certainly give their best so that their children can become successful people.
    • He should be punished as severely as possible so that he will not repeat his actions.
    • He deliberately did that to attract the attention of the opposite sex.
    • Brother has to go to the motorcycle repair shop tomorrow to repair his vehicle.
    • I plan to go to the resident’s office tomorrow morning to arrange a new family card.
    • At least I will soon find a job to ease the burden on my parents.
    • You have to come to the hospital immediately to get well soon.
    • Just leave now, so you don’t miss the train.
    • He was already planning to resign from the company in order to get another job with a higher salary.
    • It’s better if we talk in a quiet place so as not to cause a scene here.

    7. Examples of Sentences with Conjunctions for Explanation of Time

    Conjunctions that describe time are used to explain two sentences that have an element of time. The characteristics of this conjunction of light is like a conjunction. Such as when, when, until, when, after, during, until, after, before, since, if, while. Here are some sentences that use the time-illuminating conjunction:

    • The ornamental plants will change color in the afternoon.
    • Mother had finished cooking the opor ayam when father came home from work.
    • His wife always knits and protests with her husband’s salary until she has to be divorced.
    • He still likes to sit and read books there until the library is about to close.
    • Mother had gone to the market this morning when my sister was still sleeping.
    • I prefer to take shelter when it rains very hard.
    • We plan to meet at the restaurant after work.
    • I will come to your house immediately after finishing all this work.
    • Come on, let’s go on vacation to Bali as long as it doesn’t disturb your activities.
    • I will stay in Bandung for one full month.
    • Anna still hasn’t finished her work until it’s almost time to go home from work.
    • He didn’t sleep until morning.
    • Though he was a cheerful child before his father died.
    • I have to hurry home before the boss comes.
    • I prefer to go when he comes.
    • Why did he come back when I’ve tried to forget him.

     

     

    8. Examples of Sentences with Conjunctions for

    Sentences that use this type of explanatory conjunction usually contain conjunctions such as “because”, “because”, “therefore”, “because of that”, here are examples of their use:

    • He didn’t want to eat for days because of a breakup.
    • She was divorced by her husband because he was caught having an affair.
    • I didn’t buy the vehicle because it was so expensive.
    • It is better not to choose ornamental plants because they are poisonous.
    • Today mom chose to take time off work because dad was sick.
    • Nita did not pass the college test because the questions were indeed very difficult to do.
    • The child was forced to stay in class because his grades were way below the average.
    • His father had suffered from diabetes for a long time, so he decided to resign from his job outside the island.
    • His parents have retired, so he must immediately find a job.
    • He was jailed for life for premeditated murder.
    • Ranti cancels her marriage because her future husband is having an affair.
    • Devi refuses to work in a private office because she is only a contract employee.
    • His parents always fight, so he decided not to live in his house.
    • Her husband always behaved violently, so she chose to leave the house.

    9. Example Sentences with Unconditional Conjunctions

    What is meant by an unconditional conjunction? Sentences that use this conjunction usually do not require certain conditions. The characteristics of sentences with unconditional explanatory phrases are usually the conjunctions “even though”, “even though”, “even though”. Here’s an example:

    • I won’t come to her wedding even if invited.
    • Dian is still unemployed even though she has long graduated from college.
    • Toni is never lonely even though he is an only child.
    • Sela used to go abroad even alone.
    • The father still loves his hobby of fishing even though he is almost seventeen.
    • Her husband still hasn’t come home even though they have made up.
    • My weight hasn’t gone down even though I’ve been on a healthy diet this week.
    • You still have to be careful when driving even though you are healthy.

    10. Example Sentences with Conditional Illuminating Conjunctions

    Conditional conjunctions are explanatory conjunctions to connect two sentences that have a conditional element in them, including “if”, “if”, “if”, here are examples of sentences:

    • Marina will only come to the reunion tomorrow if Adit doesn’t come.
    • You should have graduated from college this year if you worked hard on your thesis.
    • You can receive a large salary if you work in a well-known company.
    • It’s not difficult to become a medical worker as long as you want to try.
    • It’s not difficult to get his heart as long as you are willing to sacrifice.
    • I will come to your house tomorrow if not absent.
    • Mother does not go to work if father is sick.
    • Mother will not get angry as long as you want to learn.

    11. Example sentences with comparative conjunctions

    A conjunction used to compare two phrases, clauses or sentences. Its characteristics are usually the conjunctions “like”, “like”, “like”, “for example”.

    • Where I live now is as comfortable as where I live in the village.
    • Often village children are seen as less skilled than city children.
    • Your gaze looks empty as if there is no light.
    • His attitude today was as if he was facing a lot of trouble.
    • Putri’s beauty is like an orchid blooming in the garden.
    • Tono’s behavior towards his mother is like a disobedient child.
    • I am not prettier than when I was young, but my husband still loves me.

    Those are some examples of descriptive conjunctions in Indonesian. There are many types of conjunctions as explanations or explanations. You can use some of these conjunctions as a reference if you have assignments in Indonesian or other subjects. Hopefully helpful, and thank you.

  • Ikhfa: Definition, Types, Reading Examples, and Meaning

    Ikhfa means – Understanding tajwid certainly makes our reading of the Qur’an avoid mistakes and changes in meaning. Studying the types of legal recitation includes fardhu kifayah, while reading the Qur’an according to the legal recitation is fardlu ain. Therefore, for Muslims when reading the Qur’an it must be in accordance with the tajwid.

    If Sinaumed’s reads the Qur’an, he will often hear about the law of reciting the Qur’an and tajwid. In addition, verses in the Qur’an are also recommended to be read correctly because it will have a different meaning if the pronunciation is wrong.

    By continuing to diligently learn to read the Qur’an, the reading of the Qur’an can be better. Apart from that, every Muslim must also continue to try to perfect his reading while learning the science of recitation.

    The science of recitation is a science whose content is learning how to pronounce the letters contained in the Al-Qur’an. Mastering the science of recitation is necessary so that the reading of the Qur’an that we say will avoid mistakes. Wrong pronunciation of Al-Qur’an verses can cause fatal changes in meaning.

    The science of tajwid itself is very much, one of the tajwid sciences that needs to be learned is ikhfa. For some Muslims, they may already know what ikhfa is. However, for those who don’t know, don’t worry, because in this article we will discuss further about ikhfa, the meaning of which is an example of the ikhfa letter.

    In order not to be curious, in this article we have summarized all the explanations regarding the meaning of ikhfa, types of ikhfa and how to read ikhfa. The following is an explanation about Ikhfa, Sinaumed’s.

    Definition of Ikhfa

    Ikhfa as one of the tajwid that enters into the law of nun mati and tanwin. Apart from the dead and tanwin laws, there are still a number of tajwid that we need to learn.

    Ikhfa means to cover or disguise. In the meaning of ikhfa is to disguise nun breadfruit or tanwin because there is a buzzing sound when it meets the letter ikhfa.

    Therefore, to master this law, we must memorize the 15 letters of ikhfa. As much as possible we must recognize the meeting between the letters of ikhfa and nun mati or tanwin in the Qur’an.

    The ikhfa letters are 15 in number, namely Ta’, Tsa’, Jim. Dal, Dzal, Zay, Sin, Syin, Sod, Dhod, Tha’, Zha, Fa’, Qof, Kaf. The law of ikhfa can occur when nun breadfruit or tanwin that meets one of the ikhfa letters becomes the law of ikhfa reading, so we have to read it to cover or disguise the ikhfa letter.

    The Law of the Dead Nun and Tanwin

    Before getting to know more about ikhfa, we need to understand the tajwid of the dead and tanwin laws first. The recitation of the dead nun and tanwin is the law of reading the dead nun and tanwin meeting one of the letters that have been divided into several categories.

    There are five categories in the law of nun breadfruit and tanwin, namely izhar halqi, idgham bighunnah, idgham bilaghunnah, iqlab and ikhfa haqiqi.

    1. Izhar Halqi

    Izhar halqi is the law of reading when nun dies or tanwin meets one of the letters of izhar halqi. The meaning of izhar is clear and halqi itself means throat.

    The letters referred to are included in izhar halqi, namely Alif or Hamzah, Kha’, ‘Ain. Ha’, Ghain, Ha. How to read it, namely nun breadfruit or tanwin when you meet one of these letters, then read it clearly, clearly and briefly, and the sound remains clear, not faint and not buzzing.

    2. Iqlab

    Iqlab is a law of reciting the Qur’an that occurs when nun dies or tanwin meets only one letter, namely the letter Ba’. In this reading, reading nun mati or tanwin is no longer read as nun or tanwin, it changes to the sound of the letter mim.

    3. Ikhfa Haqiqi

    The meaning of Ikhfa haqiqi is to disguise. This reading law applies when the letters nun mati or tanwin meet with the letters ikhfa as many as 15 letters, namely Ta’, Tsa’, Jim, Dal, Dzal. Zay, Sin, Syin, Sod, Dhoh, Tha’, Zha, Fa’, Qof, Kaf. When meeting these letters, the nun mati or tanwin must be read in a faint way or between the Izhar and Idgham readings.

    4. Idgham Bighunnah

    Idgham Bighunnah is a reading that dissolves and is accompanied by a hum or which means inserting one of the dead or tanwin letters into the next letter. The pronunciation of the bighunnah idgham must hum when it meets four letters, namely Nun, Mim, Wau and Ya’.

    5. Idgham Bilaghunnah

    Idgham bilaghunnah means to melt without buzzing or inserting the letters nun mati or tanwin into the letters Lam and Ra’. However, this law does not apply if nun dies or tanwin and these letters do not appear in one word.

    Kinds of Ikhfa

    Before discussing how to read the law of ikhfa, we need to know the types of ikhfa. The law of reading ikhfa is divided into several types, including the following:

    1. Ikhfa Kubra or Ikhfa Aqrab

    Ikhfa Aqrab is nun breadfruit or tanwin which meets the letter ikhfa which is closer to the letter hijaiyah, with the makhraj letter nun. The letters include, Ta’, Dal, Tha’. The sound produced from the ikhfa kubra will then approach the sound of N and a buzzing sound and then hold down two beats.

    2. Ikhfa haqiqi

    Ikhfa means to disguise. The law of reading ikhfa haqiqi applies if there are dead nun and tanwin letters that meet ikhfa letters, namely Ta’, Tsa’, Jim, Dal, Dzal, Zay, Sin, Syin, Sod, Dhod, Tha’, Zha, Fa’, Qof , caf.

    When encountering these letters, the nun mati or tanwin must be read incognito or between the izhar reading and the idgham reading.

    3. Ikhfa Sughra or Ikhfa Ab’ad

    Ikhfa sughra and ikhfa ab’ad are nun breadfruit or tanwin meeting with the ikhfa letter which is further removed from the hijaiyah letter than the nun letter. The letters of this ikhfa sughra are Qof and Kaf. Ikhfa sughra is read with a buzz, but with a short tone of voice. Ikhfa sughra reading itself will usually lead to the sound “ng”.

    4. Ikhfa Wustho or Ikhfa Ausat

    Ikhfa wusta if nun breadfruit or tanwin meets the ikhfa letter which is close to and not close to the nun letter. The reading of ikhfa wustho or ikhfa ausath will lead to “n-ng” while the letter fa will lead to the sound “mf”. The letters of the ikhfa wusta are Ta’, Jim, Dzal. Zayn, Sin, Syin, Sod, Dhod, Zha, Fa’.

    5. Ikhfa Syafawi

    Ikhfa Syafawi is read in a vague way on the lips and also by echoing it. Syafawi’s ikhfa reading can occur because there is a makhraj of the hijaiyah letters Mim and the hijaiyah letters Ba which meet between the lower and upper lips so that they are called ikhfa syafawi.

    Syafawi’s ikhfa is different from haqiqi’s ikhfa. The difference is that the ikhfa syafawi is not the nun mati that meets the letter ikhfa but the letter mim mati that meets the letter Ba’.

    However, in the Syafawi ikhfa law, it is still obligatory to read with a hum of about 2-3 vowels or 1 ½ alif. Therefore, if the Ikhfa Syafawi law is not echoed, then the law will turn into an izhar law whose reading law is read clearly.

    The way to read Ikhfa Syafawi is by reading Mim Mati and the letters are disguised. Apart from that, there is also no strong deep emphasis on the lips, and reading it is accompanied by buzzing or ghunnah.

    How to Read Ikhfa

    After discussing the law of ikhfa and the types of ikhfa, then we will discuss how to discuss the law of ikhfa. There are several guidelines and examples that need to be underlined when applying ikhfa readings, which are as follows:

    • The tip of the tongue must be kept so that it does not touch the upper front gums. Because there is the place makhraj nun. The sound of nun or tanwin will not be seen clearly if the tip of our tongue touches the upper front gum. Meanwhile, what must be read clearly is for Izhar’s reading.
    • Make sure there are no elements of nun or tanwin combinations with letters after it because ikhfa is located in the middle of the sentence reading.

    Examples of Ikhfa Letters

    As for examples of ikhfa reading in the Qur’an that must be read faintly and buzzingly, these examples are taken or summarized from the book Practical & Complete Guide to Tahsin, Tajwid, Tahfiz For Beginners by Raisya Maula Ibnu Rusyd. The following is an example of the law of ikhfa based on its 15 letters.

    1. Ikhfa The letter ت in QS. Al-Baqarah verse 64

    ٱلْخَٰسِرِينَ مِّنَ لَكُنتُم رَحْمَتُهُAP

    The Latin reading: “Tsumma tawallaitum mim ba’di zalika falau la fadlullahi ‘alaikum wa Rahmatuhu lakuntum minal-khasirin.”

    Meaning: “Then you turn away after (the existence of the agreement), then if there is no grace of Allah and His mercy upon you, surely you are among the losers,” (QS. Al-Baqarah [2]: 64).

    2. Ikhfa Letter ج QS. Abasa Verse 8

    يَسْعَىٰ جَآءَكَ مَن وَأَمَّا

    Latin reading: “Wa amma man ja aka yas’a”.

    Meaning: “And as for those who come to you in haste (to get teaching),” (QS. Abasa [80]: 8).

    3. Ikhfa Letter ث in QS. An-Naba Verse 13

    وَأَنزَلْنَا مِنَ ٱلْمُعْصِرَٰتِ مَآءً ثَجَّاجًا

    Latin reading: “Wa anzalna minal-mus’siratima ‘an tsajjaja”.

    Meaning: “And We sent down from the clouds a lot of water pouring out,” (QS. An-Naba [78]: 13).

    4. Ikhfa Letter د in QS. An-Naba Verse 34

    وَكَأْسًا دِهَاقًا

    Latin reading: “Wa ka’san dihaqa”.

    Meaning: “And glasses full (filled with drinks),” (QS. An-Naba [78]: 34).

    5. Ikhfa Letter ذ in QS. Al-Lahab Verse 3

    سَيَصۡلٰى نَارًا ذَاتَ لَهَبٍ

    Latin reading: “Sa yas laa naran zaata lahab”.

    Meaning: “Later he will enter into a turbulent fire (hell),” (QS. Al – Lahab [111]: 3).

    6. Ikhfa Letter ز in QS. An-Naba Verse 13

    وَأَنزَلْنَا مِنَ ٱلْمُعْصِرَٰتِ مَآءً ثَجَّاجًا

    Latin reading: “Wa anzalna minal – mu’siratima ‘an tsajjaja”.

    Meaning: “And We sent down from the clouds a lot of water pouring out,” (QS. An – Naba [78]: 13).

    7. Ikhfa Letter س Abasa Verse 17

    قُتِلَ ٱلْإِنسَٰنُ مَآ أَكْفَرَهُ

    Latin reading: “Qutilal – insanu ma akfarah”

    Meaning: “Human perish; how great is his disbelief?” (QS. Abasa [80]: 17).

    8. Ikhfa Letter ش QS. Al-Faraq Verse 2

    مِنۡ شَرِّ مَا خَلَقَۙ

    Latin reading: “Min sharri ma khala”

    Meaning: “From the evil (creatures) He created,” (QS. Al – Falaq [113]: 2).

    9. Ikhfa Letter ص in QS. Al-Maun Verse 5

    الَّذِيْنَ هُمْ عَنْ صَلَاتِهِمْ سَاهُوْنَ

    Latin reading: “Al laziina hum ‘an salaatihim sahuun”

    Meaning: “(That is) people – people who are negligent towards their prayers,” (QS. Al – Maun [107]: 5).

    10. Ikhfa Letter ض in QS. Al-Anbiya Verse 84

    اتَيْنَٰهُ أَهْلَهُۥ وَمِثْلَهُم مَّعَهُمْ رَحْمَةً مِّنْ عِندِنَا وَذِكْرَىٰ لِلْعَٰبِدِين فَٱسْتَجَبْنَا لَهُۥ فَكَشَفْنَا مَا بِهِۦ مِن ضُرٍّ ۖ وَءَ

    Latin reading: “Fastajabna lahu fa kasyafna ma bihi min durriw wa atainahu ahlahu wa mislahum ma’ahum Rahmatam min indina wa zikra lil – abidin”

    Meaning: “So We also allowed his call, then We eliminated the disease that was in him and We returned his family to him, and We multiplied their number, as a mercy from Our side and to be a warning to all who worship Allah,” (QS. Al – Anbiya [21]: 84).

    11. Ikhfa Letter ط in QS. Al-Maidah Verse 6

    God bless you

    The Latin reading: “Fa tayammamu sa’idan thayyiban famsahu biwujuhikum wa aidkum min-hu…”

    Meaning: “Then do tayammum with good (clean) soil; wipe your face and your hands with it.” (QS. Al – Maidah [5]: 6).

    12. Ikhfa Letter ظ in QS. An-Naba Verse 40

    تُ تُرَٰبًۢا إِنَّآ أَنذَرْنَٰكُمْ عَذَاب knob

    Latin reading: “Inna anzarnakum azabang qaribay yauma yansurul – ma’u mar’u am qodammat yadahu wa yaqulul – kafiru ya laitni kuntu turaba”

    Meaning: “Indeed, We have warned you (O disbelievers) the imminent punishment, today humans see what has been done by the two hands and the infidels say:” It would be nice if I used to be the ground. (QS. An – Naba [78]: 40).

    13. Ikhfa Letter ك in QS. As–Shaff Verse 4

     ا كَأَنَّهُم بُنْيَٰنٌ مَّرْصُوصٌ إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ يُحِبُّ ٱلَّذِينَ يُقَٰتِلُونَ فِى سَبِيلًِفَِهِے

    Latin reading: “Innallahu yuhinnullazina yuqatiluna fi sabilihi saffang ke annahum bun yanum marsuss”

    Meaning: “Indeed, Allah loves those who fight in His way in orderly rows as if they were like a solidly structured building,” (QS. As – Shaff [61]: 4).

    14. Ikhfa Letter ف in Al-Baqarah Verse 38

    يَحْزَنُونَ هُمْ قُلْنَا ٱهْبِطُوا۟ مِنْهَا جَtery

    Latin reading: “Qulnahbitu min – ha jami’a. fa imam ya tiyannakum minni hudan fa man tabi’a hudaya fa la khaufun ‘alaihim wa la hum yahzanun”

    Meaning: “We said:” Come down all of you from heaven! Then if My instructions come to you, then whoever follows My instructions, surely there will be no worry for them, nor will they grieve,” (Surah Al-Baqarah [2]: 38).

    15. Ikhfa Letter ق in QS. Al-Bayyinah Verse 3

    فِيهَا كُتُبٌ قَيِّمَةٌ

    Latin reading: “Fiiha Poles qayyimah”

    Meaning: “In it are (contents) books – straight books,” (QS. Al – Bayyinah [98]: 3)

    That is an explanation of the meaning of ikhfa and the types of ikhfa. This ikhfa letter tends to be more difficult to memorize because there are quite a lot of them. However, if you can understand the concept, it will be easy to memorize yourself later.

  • Iftitah Prayer: Definition, Kinds, Terms of Sunnah, and Its Priorities

    Iftitah Prayer – For Sinaumed’s who are Muslim, must they always pray ? Yep, prayer is the second pillar of Islam after the sentence of the Creed as well as being a mandatory worship for Muslims around the world. When carrying out prayer services, of course it must be carried out with predetermined movements along with the prayer readings. One of the prayer readings in prayer is Iftitah which is in the first cycle.

    This iftitah reading is mandatory to be recited, both in the heart and verbally. Even though there are 4 types of iftitah prayers, Sinaumed’s doesn’t have to memorize all of them, just read one iftitah prayer that needs to be applied when praying. Then, what is the sound of the iftitah prayer? What are the different types of this iftitah prayer? Is there the virtue of reading iftitah prayers when carrying out prayer services? So, so that Sinaumed’s understands these things, let’s look at the following review!

    What is Iftitah Prayer?

    Basically, the iftitah prayer is a mandatory prayer that is read by Muslims when they want to start the fardhu prayer or sunnah prayer, except for the funeral prayer. This iftitah prayer is also called the istiftah prayer which is read after takbiratul ihram. The existence of this iftitah prayer is indeed not included in the pillars of prayer, but Muslims are strongly advised not to skip this prayer on the pretext of shortening the prayer. Therefore, as usual, keep reading this iftitah prayer .

    As with other Islamic services, reading this iftitah prayer also includes advice from Rasulullah SAW and even became a habit for him when he wanted to pray. Once, he was asked by a friend about this and then enshrined in the hadith narrated by Abu Hurairah, which reads:

    It means:

    “Rasulullah Shallallahu ‘alaihi Wasallam when takbir in prayer, he was silent for a moment before reading the verses of the Qur’an. Then I asked, O Messenger of Allah, I redeemed you with the names of my father and mother, I saw you silent between the takbir and the recitation of the verses of the Qur’an. What are you reading? He replied:… (he recited the prayer of istiftah / iftitah)” (Muttafaq ‘alaih).

    Rules for Reading the Iftitah Prayer

    So, in reading this iftitah prayer, of course, it has its own rules that cannot be violated. The following are the rules or sequences in reading iftitah prayers in the implementation of prayer services:

    1. Iftitah prayer is only read in the first cycle.
    2. Iftitah prayer is read after Takbiratul Ihram and before reading Surah Al-Fatihah.
    3. If you forget to read the iftitah prayer in the first cycle, you may read it in the next cycle.
    4. For those who are drunk or those who come late and are left behind by the recitation of Al-Fatihah by the imam, it is permissible not to read it.

    Adab and Ethics of Reading Iftitah Prayers

    Apart from having certain rules or sequences, iftitah prayers also have manners and ethics that should not be violated. So, here are the manners and ethics when reading iftitah prayers.

    • Read in a low voice and should not disturb the solemnity of other people’s worship.
    • If you are worried that you will miss reading Surah Al-Fatihah with the priest, then it is sunnah to read the iftitah prayer in a short version.
    • Makruh to read aloud
    • Sunnah to combine it with reading takbiratul ihram.
    • It may be combined with several versions of the iftitah prayer, as long as certain conditions are met.

    Kinds of Iftitah Prayers

    The existence of this iftitah prayer turns out to have several forms , you know , which are based on hadith narrations. There is an iftitah prayer with a short version that can be read according to our conditions, especially if we don’t have much time. However, if we are not in a hurry, then we can read the reading of the iftitah prayer in general. In the book Nihayatuz Zain also mentions what kinds of iftitah prayers are, namely:

    1. Short Iftitah Prayer Version 1

    O Allah

    Allohu akbar kabiroo wal hamdu lillaahi katsiiroo wa subhaanalloohi bukrotaw wa asyiilaa

    Meaning: “Allah is the Greatest with greatness, all praise is only for Allah with very much praise. Glory be to Allah in the morning and evening.”

    In this first short prayer, it can be applied when we are in a situation where we don’t have much time, aka we are in a hurry. Initially, this prayer was said by a friend of the Prophet and Rasulullah SAW and then responded by saying “I am amazed by the prayer, the doors of heaven are open because of the iftitah prayer”.

    2. Short Iftitah Prayer Version 2

    Allah

    Alhamdulillahi hamdan kasiiroon toyyiban mubaarokan fiihi.

    Meaning: “All praise is due to Allah with very much praise, good and full of blessings.”

    3. Public Iftitah Prayer Version 1

    It is called a general iftitah prayer because it is widely read by Muslims, especially in Indonesia, in two Islamic organizations. This version of the iftitah prayer is not too long to read, so it is considered appropriate and sufficient to be read when praying and not in a hurry.

    O Allah

    اِنِّى وَجَّهْتُ وَجْهِيَ لِلَّذِيْ فَطَرَالسَّمَاوَاتِ وَالْاَرْضَ حَنِيْفًا مُسْلِم mind

    ???

    لاَ شَرِيْكَ لَهُ وَبِذَ لِكَ اُمِرْتُ وَاَنَ مِنَ الْمُسْلِمِيْنَ

    Alloohu akbar Kabiroo Wal hamdu lillaahi Katsiiroo, Wa Subhaanalloohi Bukrotan Wa’asyiilaa.

    Innii Wajjahtu Wajhiya Lilladzii Fathoros Samaawaati Wal Ardho Haniifan Musliman Wa maa Anaa Minal Musyrikiin.

    Inna Syolaatii Wa Nusukii Wa Mahyaa ya Wa Mamaatii Lillaahi Robbil ‘Aalamiina.

    Laa Syariika lahu Wa Bidzaalika Umirtu Wa Ana Minal Muslimiin.

    Meaning: “Allah is the Greatest with the greatest, all praise is only for Allah with very much praise. Glory be to Allah in the morning and evening.

    Truly I turn my face to Allah who has created the heavens and the earth with all obedience or submission, and I am not one of those who associate partners with Him.

    Truly my prayer, my worship, my life and my death are only for Allah, the Lord of the Universe, who has no partner for Him. Thus I was ordered. And I am one of the Muslims (those who surrender).”

    4. Public Iftitah Prayer Version 2

    In this second version of the iftitah prayer, it was narrated by Imam Bukhari and Imam Muslim, which the Prophet Muhammad used to read when he was performing the obligatory prayers. Here’s the prayer reading:

    Allah, the Most High

    Allah _

    Allah, the Most High, the Most Merciful

    Allahumma baa’id bainii wabaina khathaayaaya kamaa baa’adta bainal masyriqi wa maghribi.

    Allahumma naqinii min khathaayaaya kamaa yunaqats tsaubul abyadhu minad danas.

    Allahummaghsilnii min khathaayaaya bil maa’i wats tsalji.

    It means :

    “O Allah, keep between me and my mistakes, as you keep the east and west.

    O Allah, cleanse me and my mistakes, like a white dress that is cleaned from dirt.

    O Allah, wash my (heart) from my mistakes with water and snow.”

    5. Public Iftitah Prayer Version 3

    اِنِّى وَجَّهْتُ وَجْهِىَ لِلَّذِى فَطَرَ السَّمَوَ اتِ وَالْاَرْضَ حَنِيفًا وَمَا اَنَا مِنَ الْمُشْرِ كِيْنَ اِنَّ صَلاَتِى وَنُسُكِى وَمَحْيَايَ وَمَمَاتِى لِلَّهِ رَبِّ الْعَالَمِيْنَ لاَ

    شَرِيكَ لَهُ وَبِذَلِكَ اُمِرْتُ وَ اَنَا اَوَّلُ الْمُسْلِمِينَ

    Innii wajjahtu wajhiya lil ladzii fathoros samaawaati wal ardho haniifan mushliman wa maa ana minal musyrikiin, innaa sholaatii wanusukii wamahyaaya wamamaatii lillahi rabbil aalamiin. Laa syariika lahu wa bidzaalika umirtu wa ana minal muslimin.

    It means :

    “Indeed I turn my face to Allah, the creator of the heavens and submit, and I am not from among the polytheists. Truly my prayers, my sacrifices, my life and my death are only for Allah, the Lord of the universe. There is no partner for Him. And thus I was ordered. I was the first to surrender

    6. Long Version of Iftitah Prayer

    In the iftitah prayer, which has a long version, it can be read when we are expecting an intense relationship with Allah SWT. This version of the iftitah reading can also be read when performing night prayers, because at that time we are free from the demands of time and work. Based on the authentic hadith narrated by Imam Muslim, sometimes Rasulullah SAW also read this long version of the iftitah prayer while carrying out sunnah prayers. So, here is the prayer reading:

    وَجَّهْتُ وَجْهِيَ لِلَّذِى فَطَرَ السَّمَوَ اتِ وَالاَرْضَ حَنِيفًا (مُسْلِمًا) وَمَا اَنَا مِنَ الْمِيِْ

    اِنَّ صَلاَتِى وَنُسُكِى وَمَحْيَاىَ وَمَمَمَاتِى الِلهِ رَبِّ الْعَالَمِيْنَ لاَ شَرِ يْكَ لَهُ وَبِree ابِذَل ل ا ri الْعَالَمِيْنَ لاَ شَرِ

    اللَّهُمَّ اِلاَّ اَنْتَ . ???

    اِنَّهُ لاَ يَغْفِرُ الذُّنُوبَ اِلاَّ ???

    وَاصْرِفْ عَنِّى سَيِّئَهَا لاَ يَصْرِفُ عَنِّى سَيِّئَهَا اِلاَّ اَنّتَ لبَّيْكَ سَعْدَيْكَ ْ ike ل لَيْسَ

    ???

    Wajjahtu wajhiya lilladzii fathoros samaawaati wal ardho hanifan wa maa ana minal musyrikiin.

    Inna sholaatii wa nusukii, wa mahyaa ya wa mamaatii lillahi rabbil ‘aalamiina. Laa syariikalahu wa bidzalika umirtu wa ana minal muslimiin.

    Allohumma antal malika laa ilaha illaa anta, anta rabii wa anaa ‘abuka dzolamtu nafsii wa’taraftu bidzambii faghafirlii dzunuubii jamii’aa.

    Innahu laa yaghfirudz dzunuuba ilaa anta, wahdinii li ah sanil akhlaaqi laa yahdii li ahsanihaa illa anta, washrif ‘anni sayyi ahaa, laa yashrifu ‘annii sayyiahaa illa anta.

    labbaika wa sa’daika, wal khoiru kulluhu bi yadaika, wasyarru laisa ilaika.

    ana bika wa ilaika tabaarakta wa ta’aalaita, astaghfiruka wa atuubu ilaik.

    It means :

    “I turn to God, the Creator of the heavens and the earth, holding a straight religion and I am not one of the polytheists.

    Truly my prayers, worship and life and death are for Allah. Lord of the worlds, there is no partner for Him, and because of that, I am ruled and I am among the Muslims.

    O Allah, You are the king, there is no god (who has the right to be worshiped) except You, You are My Lord and I am Your servant. I wronged myself, I confessed my sins (which I have committed).

    Therefore forgive all my sins, truly no one will be able to forgive sins, except You.

    Guide me to the best morals, no one can but You.

    Keep me from bad morals, no one can, except You. I fulfill Your call with joy, all goodness is in Your power, ugliness is not attributed to You.

    I live by Your help and grace, and to You (I return). Glory be to You and Most High. I ask forgiveness and repent to You.”

    Requirements for Sunnah Prayer Iftitah Reading

    Reporting from NU Online , the sunnah in reading iftitah has four conditions. If one of the following conditions is not met, then the sunnah will be aborted or lost. So, here are the sunnah requirements for reading iftitah prayers.

    1. The prayer that is performed is in addition to the funeral prayer

    Yep, the reading of the iftitah prayer is required in all prayers, except for the funeral prayer. This is because the funeral prayer is recommended to be accelerated. Even though the funeral prayer is carried out over the grave or the occult prayer. Please note that during this occult prayer, the corpse will be in an area far from the area used for prayer.

    2. The time is enough to do the prayer

    That is, we have enough time to pray until the end accompanied by the reading of iftitah prayers as well. But if we are too worried about not having enough time to pray, it may be done only with the obligatory pillars of prayer.

    3. When you become a mother, you worry about missing out

    When we become makmum, it is sunnah for us to read the iftitah prayer if we really wish to follow the imam in a standing position, namely before reading the Al-Fatihah letter.

    4. When you become a congregation, do not meet the priest other than a standing position.

    Well, when this happens, we become makmum masbuq those who arrive late and are left behind by the recitation of Al-Fatihah by the imam, so it is permissible not to read it. If you become a makmum masbuq and meet the imam in a position other than standing, for example bowing, prostration, and so on, then it is not sunnah for us to read the iftitah prayer, but just follow him to the priest’s position.

    In addition, what needs to be considered is that someone should immediately read the iftitah prayer after takbiratul ihram. Because, if before reading the iftitah prayer, he reads other readings such as ta’awudz, basmalah or something else, whether on purpose or forgetting, then the sunnah of reading the iftitah prayer will be lost in vain. Sheikh an-Nawawi said,

    ويفوت دعاء الافتتاح بالشروع فيما بعده عمداً أو سهواً 

    “The sunnah of the iftitah prayer is lost because of reading things after it (such as ta’awudz and basmalah).”

    The Virtue of Reading the Iftitah Prayer

    As with other prayer readings, this iftitah prayer, even though it is not included in the pillars of prayer, still has priority in reading it. The following are the virtues of reading iftitah prayers when performing prayer services:

    1. Acknowledge God’s Greatness.
    2. Classified as Grateful People.
    3. Praise the Most Holy God.
    4. Face God with Sincerity.
    5. The pledge confesses submission to God.
    6. Acknowledging the Oneness of God.
    7. Surrender and Don’t Rely on Charity.
    8. Pledge as a Muslim.
    9. Prayers are easily answered because they are lifted up by angels.
    10. The doors of heaven are open to make it easier for our prayers to reach Allah SWT.

    So, that’s a description of what an iftitah prayer is and the various forms of versions that Sinaumed’s can apply according to the situation and conditions. With the various versions of this iftitah prayer, it is hoped that Sinaumed’s will not miss the prayer again, OK? 

    Book Recommendations & Related Articles

    Source: 

    https://islam.nu.or.id/

    Also Read!

    • Definition and Procedures for Idain Prayer
    • The Correct Procedure for Prostrating Gratitude
    • Arabic, Latin and Translation of Ayat Kursi
    • The Meaning of Azan and Its History in Islam
    • When is the Time for the Midnight Prayer?
    • Short Surahs To Read During Prayer
    • Dhikr and Prayer After the Five Daily Prayers
    • The Law and Virtue of Congregational Prayer
    • The Virtue of Surah Al-Insyirah and How to Practice It
    • Best Hours for Tahajjud Prayers and Their Virtue
    • Arabic, Latin Readings, Translations and Stories From Surah Al-Fil

  • Idzhar letters and how to pronounce them

    Letter Idzhar – One of the noble practices in Islam is reading the Koran. The reward is no joke, each reading of the letter is equivalent to ten goodness or rewards. This was conveyed by the Prophet Muhammad SAW in one of the hadiths as follows.

    Rasulullah SAW said: “Whoever reads one letter from the Book of Allah (the Koran), then for him one good, and one kindness is rewarded with tenfold.” (Narrated by At-Tirmidhi).

    Reading the Koran has knowledge in the form of recitation. One cannot just read the Koran. They have to pay attention to the short length, the procedure for reading the letters, whether they are clear or slightly buzzing, the short length of the pronunciation, and so on.

    The science of tajwid is a reference for Muslims in reading the Koran. Without it, humans will find it difficult to read the Koran uniformly and precisely according to the rules. Tajwid is usually taught in recitation classes either in the form of schools or private tutors.

    Reading the Koran must be done and practiced in everyday life. This is described in surah Al-Muzzammil verse 4. The following is a fragment of the meaning of the letter.

    “ Or more than (half of) that, and read the Qur’an slowly. or more than half that, and read the Qur’an slowly with good and correct reading. (QS. Al-Muzzammil: 4)

    Based on this verse, the scholars concluded that the law of learning tajwid for Muslims is fardu kifayah. However, if you already have knowledge of tajwid, then practicing it by reading the Koran becomes fardu ain.

    Tajwid has various types. There are regulations regarding short lengths to the law of certain letters or vowels when meeting other letters or groups of letters. In tajwid there are laws for nun breadfruit and tanwin including idzhar, idgham, iqlab, ikhfak.

    On this occasion, You will get to know more about the law of tajwid idzhar.

    Understanding and How to Read Idzhar

    In language, idzhar means to clarify or reveal clarity or light. Meanwhile, according to the term, idzhar is a way of reading hijaiyah letters which are pronounced clearly without ghunnah or hum.

    The idzhar law will occur when nun breadfruit or tanwin meets the idzhar letter. The idzhar letters consist of hamzah (ء), ha (هـ), ha (ح), kha (خ), ​​’ain (ع), ghain (غ). The six letters have makhraj in the throat so they are often called idzhar halqi.

    Types of Idzhar

    Idzhar is divided into two types, namely idzhar halqi and idzhar syafawi. The following describes the two types.

    1. Izhar Halqi

    The letter idzhar halqi is the law of reading if the death or tanwin meets one of the letters idzhar halqi. Idzhar literally means clear and halqi literally means throat.

    How to read it must be clear and not use ghunnah or drone. The letters included in idzhar halqi are hamzah (ء), ha (هـ), ha (ح), kha (خ), ​​’ain (ع), ghain (غ).

    • Ar-Ra’d: 7

    قَوْمٍ هَادٍ

    qau min hadd . Tanwin is read clearly when meeting with the letter ha’.

    • Al Kauthar verse 2

    فَصَلِّ لِرَبِّكَ وَانْحَرْ

    Fa salli li rabbika wanhar

    • Al An’aam: 26)

    يَنْأَوْنَ

    yes n`a una. Nun breadfruit is read clearly when meeting with the hamzah letters.

    • Al Qadr verse 5

    سَلَامٌ هِيَ حَتَّىٰ مَطْلَعِ الْفَجْرِ

    Salaa mun hi ya hattaa mat la’il fajr

    • Al Lahab verse 2

    مَا أَغْنَىٰ عَنْهُ مَالُهُ وَمَا كَسَبَ

    Maa aghna ‘anhu maaluhu wa ma kasab

    • Al Quraysh verse 4

    ٱلَّذِىٓ أَطْعَمَهُم مِّن جُوعٍ وَءَامَنَهُم مِّنْ خَوْفٍۭ

    Allazi at’amahum min ju ‘inw-wa-aamana hum min khawf

    2. Izhar Syafawi

    Idzhar Syafawi occurs when the letter mim dies meets one of the hijaiyyah letters, except for the letters mim (م) and ba’ (ب). The pronunciation must also be clear on the lips while closing the mouth.

    The way to read it must also be clear or bright, no ghunnah or buzzing. The following is an example of idzhar Halqi in the Koran.

    • Al Ikhlas verse 3

    لَمْ يَلِدْ وَلَمْ يُولَدْ

    lam ya lid walam yuulad

    • Al Ikhlas verse 4

    وَلَمْ يَكُنْ لَهُ كُفُوًا أَحَدٌ

    wa lam ya kulahu kufuwan ahad

    • Al Kafirun verse 3

    وَلَا أَنْتُمْ عَابِدُونَ مَا أَعْبُدُ

    wa laa ann tum ‘aa biduuna maa a’bud

    • Al Quraysh verse 2

    إِيلَافِهِمْ رِحْلَةَ الشِّتَاءِ وَالصَّيْف

    iilaafi him rih latas syitaai washoiif

    • Al Lahab verse 4

    وَامْرَأَتُهُ حَمَّالَةَ الْحَطَبِ

    wa amro atuhu hammaa latalhatob

    Definition and Law of Studying Tajweed

    Tajwid is a branch of knowledge of the Qur’an to understand how to pronounce, sound or pronounce various letters whether they are contained in the holy book of the Qur’an or not.

    In tajwid reading skills or qira’at science, tajwid has the meaning of removing one letter by giving various characteristics in it. Tajweed itself is important to learn because it relates to one’s way of reading the Koran.

    The areas of ability to learn tajwid are as follows.

    1. Place of entry and exit of letters (makharijul letters)
    2. How to pronounce letters (shifatul letters)
    3. Relations between letters (ahkamul letters)
    4. The short length of a reading (ahkamul maddi wal qasr)
    5. Ruling on starting or stopping reading (ahkamul waqaf wal ibtida’)
    6. Al-Khat Al-Otsmani.

    The purpose of studying tajwid science is to be able to read or recite the Koran with the correct reading according to the nature of each hijaiyah letter. Thus, the purity of reading the Koran can be maintained.

    Most of the scholars say that studying the science of tajwid is fardu kifayah. However, practicing the science of recitation when reading the Koran has a fardu ain law (absolute obligation).

    When reading the Koran, it is obligatory to apply tajiwd knowledge. Because in Arabic when one word is pronounced incorrectly it will change the meaning of the verse.

    Proof of the Science of Tajwid

    The following is the argument that emphasizes the importance of learning tajwid.

    1. On QS. Al-Muzammil verse 4, means “ Or more than (half) that, and read the Qur’an slowly. or more than half that, and read the Qur’an slowly with good and correct reading.
    2. The narrated hadith explains that Umm Salamah (wife of the Prophet Muhammad) exemplified the Prophet’s way of reading by showing (one) reading which explains a sentence from the letters one by one. Umm Salamah gave an example of this reading when she was asked how the Prophet’s prayer was recited.
    3. Ijma’ (agreement) of the scholars starting from the time of the Prophet until now which states that it is obligatory to read the Koran using tajwid so that the law becomes fardhu.

    Benefits of Studying Tajweed

    The following are the benefits of learning tajwid for people who embrace Islam.

    1. Can Read the Koran According to the Correct Rules

    When studying the science of recitation, you will know how to recite verses properly and correctly in practice. This will maintain the purity of the reading of the Koran and the quality of the reader will be even better.

    2. Know how to read the Koran properly and correctly

    The main goal of learning tajwid is knowing how to read the Koran. Starting from reciting the correct makhraj to various reading laws, endowments, and so on.

    3. Protecting the Tongue from Mistakes When Reading the Koran

    How to read the Koran is different from reading hadith or other Arabic sentences. Mispronunciation of vowels, letters, or a sentence will change the meaning of the verses of the Koran.

    Therefore, we are not allowed to replace sentences in the Koran with other Arabic equivalents. This is because even though they have the same meaning. These sentences actually have different meanings.

    Benefits of Reading the Koran

    Reading the Koran should not only be done during the five daily prayers. Reading the Koran also needs to be done outside of prayer. However, if you can’t then just pray five times a day and recite verses from the Koran during prayer.

    This will help in various matters, especially those related to mysticism. Here are the benefits of reading the Koran.

    1. Obtaining Merit and Kindness

    When a person reads the Koran every day then the reward and goodness will come to him. Not only that, reading the Koran will make the atmosphere around it more calm, peaceful, and full of blessings.

    The virtue of reading the Koran every day is emphasized in the hadith narrated by Tirmidhi.

    “Whoever reads just one letter from the book of Allah, someone will get goodness once. but every kindness will be rewarded tenfold.” (Narrated by Tirmidhi)

    2. Providing Intercession on the Day of Judgment

    Someone who regularly reads the Koran has a great possibility of getting benefits on the Day of Judgment. This is confirmed in the following hadith narrated by Muslim.

    “Read the verses of the Qur’an because in fact on the Day of Resurrection it will come to give good intercession to its readers.” (HR. Muslim)

    3. Provides Better Degree and Authority

    Someone who regularly reads the Koran will get a better degree and authority. He will look more radiant and full of authority. This will certainly make a person more loved, respected by many people, and respected.

    This is in accordance with the hadith narrated by Bukhari regarding the virtue of reading the Koran which can increase one’s degree and authority.

    “People who are great at reciting the Qur’an will always be accompanied by the most glorified and obedient recording angels to Allah SWT and those who stutter reading the Qur’an and then struggle to learn it will get double the reward. .” (HR. Bukhari)

    4. Calms the Heart

    By reading the Koran, peace of mind will come by itself. It can also increase faith and love for Allah, prophets and apostles and angels. As for the primacy of reading the Koran every heart is emphasized by Allah in surah Ar-Ra’ad in verse 28. The following is the meaning of the verse.

    “Those who believe will have a calm and peaceful heart if they always remember Allah SWT, so remember because only by remembering Allah, your heart becomes peaceful.”

    5. Increasing the Degree of Parents

    For children who get used to reading the Koran because of their love for Allah and their two parents. So Allah will protect his parents and give him pleasure including crowns on their heads as a sign of honor.

    The virtue of reading the Koran which can elevate parents is explained in the following hadith narrated by Abu Daud.

    “Whoever reads the Qur’an and practices it solely for the sake of Allah SWT, Allah will give him a crown on the head of his parents and enjoyment on the Day of Resurrection and will be seen brighter than the sun’s rays so you will not suspect that the reward is due to his deeds the practice of the reciter of the Qur’an.” (Narrated by Abu Dawud)

  • Ideology: Definition, Function, History and Types

    Definition of Ideology – Ideology is a form of thought and action. Ideology in every country is different. Knowing what ideology is and interacting with it is important for the people themselves to achieve the wishes and ideals of the state.

    Ideology is an idea that contains certain ideas, culture and lifestyle. Knowledge of ideology is important to learn for people who study politics. Ideology becomes the lens through which you view the world. The article below will explain the ideology further.

    Definition of Ideology

    Ideology is a set of beliefs or philosophies associated with a person or group of people, especially for reasons that are not purely epistemic, in which the practical element is as prominent as the theoretical element.

    The term ideology comes from the French idéologie, which comes from a combination of Greek: idéā which means ‘idea, pattern’ and -logíā which means ‘study of, study of knowledge’. The term was coined by Antoine Destutt de Tracy, a French aristocrat and Enlightenment philosopher.

    In 1796 Tracy understood that the term ideology was a “science of ideas” to develop a rational system of ideas.

    He understood ideology as a liberal philosophy that would defend individual freedom, property, free markets, and constitutional limits on state power.

    He argues that, among these aspects, ideology is the most general term because the ‘science of ideas’ also contains the study of their expression and deduction. The coup that overthrew Maximilien Robespierre makes Tracy continue his work.

    Tracy reacts to the revolutionary terrorism phase during the Napoleonic regime. He tries to devise a system of rational ideas to fight against the irrational people who nearly destroy him.

    Expert opinion on the meaning of ideology:

    Terry Eagleton: According to Eagleton, ideology is a system of concepts and views that has the function of understanding the world and also obscures the social interests that exist within it.

    Eagleton argues that ideology is accompanied by internal consistency which tends to form a closed system to defend itself when faced with contradictions.

    Malcolm Hamilton: Hamilton stated that ideology is a system of ideas that are normative, factual and collectively have attitudes that support and justify certain patterns of governance, political and economic behavior. 

    Michael Hunt: Ideology is a set of beliefs or assumptions concerned with reducing the complexity of a particular reality to an understandable term and suggesting the right way to deal with that reality.

    Karl Marx: According to Karl Marx, ideology is a tool that functions to achieve equality and prosperity with society. According to him, ideology emerges from the pattern of the society.

    Marx put the ideological approach in his theory of base and superstructure. Marx believed that the realm of ideology reflects the interests of the ruling class and justifies the status quo so that those in power can remain in power.

    Ideological history 

    The term ideology first appeared in French as ideologie during the French Revolution, which was introduced by a philosopher, A.-L.-C.

    Destutt de Tracy, as a short term for what he called “the science of ideas”, which he claimed had adapted from the epistemology of the philosophers John Locke and Etienne Bonnot de Condillac, for whom all human knowledge was knowledge of ideas.

    The fact is, however, that he owed more to the English philosopher Francis Bacon, whom he respected.

    It was Bacon who had argued that the goal of science is not only to expand human knowledge, but also to improve human life on earth, and it is this fusion of program with intellectuals that distinguishes Destutt de Tracy’s ideology from any underlying theory, system, or philosophy.

    The science of ideas is a science with a mission that aims to serve people, even save them, by clearing their minds of prejudice and preparing them for the sovereignty of reason and integrity.

    Destutt de Tracy and his fellow ideologues devised a national education system that they believed would turn France into a rational and scientific society. Their teachings combined a strong belief in individual liberty with an elaborate program of state planning, and for a short time became the official doctrine of the French Republic.

    Napoleon at first supported Destutt de Tracy and his friends, but he soon turned against them. In December 1812 he went even further by attributing blame for the French military defeat to the influence of ideologues.

    Napoleon associated the name ideologie with what was considered the most abhorrent element in Revolutionary thought, he invested the same word with all his resistance and disbelief.

    Ideology has, since then, played the dual role of a good and bad term not only in French but also in German, English, Italian and all other languages ​​of the world where it is translated or transliterated.

    Some historians of philosophy call the 19th century the age of ideology, not because the word itself was so widely used at that time, but because so much thought was at that time.

    It can even be distinguished from the thinking that prevailed in previous centuries by different characteristics which are called ideological. The subject of ideology is a controversial one, and it could be argued that at least part of this controversy stems from disagreements over the definition of the word ideology.

    Although the word ideology in the sense derived from Destutt de Tracy’s understanding has been used in modern ways, it is important to note the special sense that ideology is given in Hegelian and Marxist philosophy, where it is used in a derogatory manner.

    Ideology there becomes the word for what these philosophers also call false consciousness. GWF Hegel argues that people or society are instruments of history, they play the roles assigned to them.

    Marx was inconsistent in his use of the word ideology, as he did not always use the term pejoratively, and some of his references clearly imply the possibility of an ideology being true.

    Twentieth-century Marxists, who often discarded the derogatory notions of ideology, spoke of Marxism as an ideology in itself. In certain communist countries, many ideological institutions were established, and party philosophers are usually referred to as party ideologues. Marxism is a very good example, a paradigm, of an ideology.

    Ideology Function 

    The role of ideology in international relations can be analyzed in two parts, namely, the role of general ideology as an element of state behavior and the role of certain ideologies in the making and implementation of foreign policy.

    1. The role of general ideology 

    In this day and age, the ideologies of liberalism and communism have become two main common ideologies that play an important role in influencing state behavior in international relations.

    Since the 17th century, the ideology of liberalism has been the foundation stone of western social, economic and political systems. In the 20th century it later developed into the doctrine of Liberal Democracy, Democratic Capitalism and even Modern Liberalism.

    The ideology of Communism is the opposite of Liberalism. Based on the philosophy of Marxism-Leninism, he considers equality more important than freedom.

    He prioritizes economic factors from social relations and considers them as the determinants of all good behavior in terms of social, political, cultural, and others.

    Common ideologies are widely used to cover up the goals of a nation’s power. This is evident from the fact that despite being the strongest champion of liberalism, the United States has not hesitated to have good relations with some totalitarian and authoritarian regimes and military dictatorships, such as the state of Pakistan, to the detriment of the interests of the world’s largest democracy i.e. India.

    The United States continues to follow a policy of fostering relations with the Chinese Communists and at the same time continues to follow a policy of supporting Liberalism and Human Rights. Likewise, no country is now ready to let ideological differences get in the way of relations with other countries.

    Thus general ideologies are factors of international relations in our time, but are not determinants of the behavior of states in the international environment. It affects the course of relations between nations only in a limited way.

    2. The role of certain ideologies  

    The contemporary era clearly reflects the role played by certain ideologies in international politics such as the Status Quo Ideology, Imperialism Ideology, and Ambiguous Ideology. Nations seeking to maintain existing positions of power are pursuing a status quo policy.

    This principle has the view that “what exists must have something to its advantage, otherwise it would not exist.” This policy applies to Switzerland, Denmark, Norway and Sweden.

    Policies that seek to change the status quo or a certain distribution of power are considered imperialist ideology. Imperialism policies always require justification for changing existing territorial arrangements.

    In order to secure the desired goals, many countries use certain ideologies which are quite vague and ambiguous. This ambiguous ideology is popularly called the ideology of anti-imperialism, all with the aim of denouncing the actions of their opponents as ‘acts of imperialism’.

    Even in this era, certain ideologies continue to serve the decision-makers of every country in the world, the basis for formulating, justifying and securing the goals of their national interests. Ideology in international relations is a factor of national strength and foreign policy.

    However, now ‘interests’ have emerged as a more resilient factor of international relations than ideology. In fact, the role of ideology is increasingly eroded.

    Types of Ideology 

    The following types of ideology exist in the world: 

    1. Capitalism 

    Capitalism is an economic system based on private ownership of the means of production and their operation for profit. The main features of capitalism include capital accumulation, competitive markets, price system, private property and recognition of property rights, voluntary exchange and wage labour.

    In a capitalist market economy, decision-making and investment are determined by the owners of wealth. Meanwhile, prices and distribution of goods and services are determined by the market economy in the competition for goods and services.

    Market economies have existed under many different forms of government, times, places, and cultures. Modern capitalist society developed in Western Europe in the process that led to the Industrial Revolution.

    The capitalist system has since become dominant in the Western world. the ideology of capitalism spread rapidly. Economic growth is a characteristic tendency of a capitalist economy.

    2. Liberalism 

    Liberalism is a political and moral philosophy based on freedom, consent of the governed and equality before the law.

    Liberals support a variety of views depending on their understanding of these principles, but they generally support individual rights including civil and human rights, democracy, secularism, free speech, free press, freedom of religion and the market economy.

    Liberalism became a distinct movement in the Age of Enlightenment, when it became popular among Western philosophers and economists.

    Liberalism seeks to replace hereditary norms or privileges, state religion, absolute monarchy, the divine right of the king and traditional conservatism with representative democracy and the rule of law.

    Liberalism was also a means of ending mercantilist policies, royal monopolies and other trade barriers.

     

    4. Communism 

    Communism is an ideology and a philosophical, social, political and economic movement whose goal is the establishment of a communist society, that is, a socio-economic order structured on the idea of ​​common ownership of the means of production and the absence of social classes, money and the state. Communism is a specific, yet distinct, form of socialism.

    Modern communist ideology began to develop during the French Revolution. The “Communist Manifesto” by Karl Marx and Friedrich Engels, published in 1848. The pamphlet rejected the Christian principles of earlier communist philosophy.

    The Communist Manifesto presents the French Revolution as a major historical turning point when the bourgeoisie overthrew the feudal power structures and ushered in the modern capitalist era.

    5. Socialism 

    Socialism is a populist economic and political system based on public ownership. Socialism is also known as collective or shared ownership of the means of production.

    These facilities include machinery, equipment, and factories used to produce goods that aim to meet human needs directly.

    Communism and socialism are umbrella terms that refer to two schools of left-wing economic thought. Both of these ideologies oppose capitalism.

    In a purely socialist system, all legitimate production and distribution decisions are made by the government, and individuals depend on the state for everything from food to health care. The government determines the level of output and prices of these goods and services.

    6. Nationalism

    Nationalism is an ideology in which people believe that their nation is superior to others. This sense of superiority is often rooted in shared ethnicity.

    In other situations, nationalism is built around a common language, religion, culture, or set of social values. Nations emphasize shared symbols, folklore, and mythology. Sharing music, literature and sport can further strengthen nationalism.

    Nationalists demand independence from other countries. They do not join global organizations or collaborate with other countries in common endeavors. If the people belong to another nation, then they will want their own freedom and country, because they believe in their own superiority.

    7. Fascism 

    Fascism is generally associated with the Italian and German regimes that came to power after World War I, although other countries have also been ruled by fascist regimes. Adolf Hitler in Germany, Benito Mussolini in Italy, Francisco Franco in Spain and Juan Perón in Argentina are the most famous fascist leaders of the 20th century.

    fascism uses propaganda to promote anti-liberalism, rejects individual rights, civil liberties, free enterprise and democracy anti-socialism, rejects economic principles based on a socialist framework excludes certain groups, often through nationalism they also use violence to expand influence and power nation.

    8. Feminism 

    Feminism is a social, political and economic movement. Feminism is an ideology about changing the way people see the rights of men and women (especially women), and campaigning for gender equality.

    Someone who follows feminism is called a feminist. Feminism started in the 18th century with the Enlightenment. Controversy over differences between the sexes led to discussions about equality.

    Feminism started with the idea that human rights should be granted to women. This idea was advanced by several philosophers in the 18th and 19th centuries such as Mary Wollstonecraft and John Stuart Mill.

    Feminists later in the early 20th century also said that women should be allowed to vote in a democracy. Many women felt very strongly that they should be allowed to vote and there were many protests.

    • Dimensions of Pancasila as an Open Ideology
    • History of Pancasila
    • History of PPKI
    • Understanding Pancasila as a Source of Value
    • The Meaning and Meaning of Pancasila as State Ideology
    • Understanding Pancasila Democracy
    • History of the Garuda Pancasila Coat of Arms
    • Understanding Archipelagic Insight
    • The Meaning of Pancasila as the Source of All Sources of Law
    • Meaning of the Youth Pledge
    • The Practice of Pancasila Values

  • Identifying the Concepts of Reduction and Oxidation (Redox) Reactions

    Definition of Reduction Reaction – Reduction and reducing agent are two words that are
    related to one another.     These two words are often found in chemistry lessons at the junior high
    school (SMP) and high school (SMA) levels.

    For ordinary people, the word is rarely heard and the use of the word is also very rare, even though the
    two words have the meaning of something that happens in everyday life.     It’s just that most
    people don’t know about it.

    So, what is meant by reduction, along with reduction reactions, and examples of reduction reactions?
    Check out the following explanation.

    Definition of Redox Reactions

    What is a redox reaction? Redox reaction stands for reduction and oxidation reactions that
    take place in electrochemical processes.     In general, redox is a term that describes changes in
    the oxidation number (oxidation state) of atoms in a chemical reaction.     This can be a simple
    redox process, such as the oxidation of carbon to give carbon dioxide, or the reduction of carbon by
    hydrogen to give methane (CH     4 ), or it can be a complex process such as the
    oxidation of sugar in the human body through a complicated sequence of electron transfers.

    The term redox comes from two concepts, namely reduction and
    oxidation . The concept can be explained easily as
    follows.

    • Oxidation describes the loss of electrons by a molecule, atom, or ion.
    • Reduction describes the gain of electrons by a molecule, atom, or ion.

    Although quite appropriate for use in various purposes, the above explanation is not exactly correct.
    Oxidation and reduction precisely refer to changes in oxidation number because
    actual transfer of electrons will not always occur.     Therefore, oxidation is better defined
    as     an increase in oxidation number , while reduction as a decrease in
    oxidation number .

    In practice, the transfer of electrons will always change the oxidation number, but there are many
    reactions that are classified as “redox”, even though there is no transfer of electrons in those reactions
    (eg those involving covalent bonds).     Non-redox reactions that do not involve a change in formal
    charge     are known as metathesis reactions.

    The following is the meaning of the two terms.

    1. Definition of Reduction

    Reduction is an electron capture reaction or a reduction in oxidation number reaction, while a reducing
    agent is a substance that carries out the process of reducing other substances.     Reduction is a
    reaction event that experiences a decrease in oxidation number and an increase in electrons.
    Based on this explanation, reduction can be said to be a reaction when a substance loses
    oxygen.

    According to the Big Indonesian Dictionary
    (KBBI),     reduction is a reduction or reduction (price and so on).
    Example of use: the store provides a 20% reduction ahead of Eid.

    a. Definition
    of Data Reduction

    Data reduction is a form of analysis with the aim of sharpening, directing, classifying, organizing data, and
    removing unnecessary things in such a way, so that final conclusions can be drawn and verified.

    According to Sugiyono, data reduction is summarizing, choosing the main things, focusing on important things that
    are appropriate to the research topic, looking for themes and patterns, which in turn provide a clearer picture
    and make it easier to carry out further data collection.

    b. Definition of
    Reduction Reaction

    A reduction reaction is a reaction when an atom experiences a decrease in its oxidation number.
    It can be said that a reduction reaction is a reaction when a substance loses oxygen.
    Examples of redox reactions in everyday life are rusting, combustion, decay, photosynthesis and
    metabolism.

    Many things can be done with reduction events, for example dissolving nitric acid for raw materials for the
    chemical industry or agricultural fertilizers, testing for sulfate content in salt, avoiding seawater
    contamination in the process of cyanidation of gold minerals, and the chemical element arsenic.

    2. Definition of Oxidation

    Oxidation is a term that you need to understand, especially when studying chemistry. KBBI
    states that oxidation is the combination of a substance with oxygen.     Oxidation itself is the
    loss of electrons by a molecule, atom or ion.     This is different from reduction which is the
    gain of electrons by a molecule, atom, or ion.

    Oxidation state in chemistry is an indicator of the degree of oxidation of an atom in a chemical compound.
    The oxidation state includes an integer consisting of a positive, negative or zero value.
    For pure compound elements themselves the oxidation state is zero.

    —–

    Oxidation and reduction of course refer to changes in oxidation number, because the actual transfer of
    electrons will not always occur, so oxidation is better defined as an increase in oxidation number and
    reduction as a decrease in oxidation number.     Such reactions involve the transfer of
    electrons.

    If based on the transfer or transfer of electrons, the reduction reaction is a point electron capture
    reaction Meanwhile, the oxidation reaction is a reaction of releasing electrons.     In practice,
    the transfer of electrons will always change oxidation number, but there are many reactions that need to be
    classified as redox, even though there is no transfer of electrons in the reaction, such as something
    involving covalent bonds.     A non-redox reaction that does not involve a change in formal
    charge is known as a metathesis reaction.

    Redox concept

    So, to find out more clearly about redox reactions, the following has presented a discussion of the concept
    of redox.     Chemical reactions involving redox or reduction-oxide reactions are more frequently
    used in titrimetric analysis than acid-base reactions, complex formation or precipitation.     The
    ions of various elements exist in different oxidation states, which is why there are so many possible redox
    or oxidation-reduction reactions.

    The development of the redox reaction concept resulted in three concepts, namely classical theory, modern
    theory, and the concept of numbers.     Then, what are the differences between the three?
    Come on, pay attention to the full discussion below.

    1. Classical Theory

    The classical theory says that oxidation is a process of capturing oxygen and losing hydrogen.
    However, on the other hand reduction is a process of losing oxygen and capturing hydrogen.

    2. Modern Theory

    The concept of redox has developed through various experiments, giving rise to the modern theory.
    Where, this modern theory says that oxidation is a process that results in the loss of one or more
    electrons from a substance.     Substances that undergo oxidation will turn out to be more
    positive.

    Meanwhile, reduction itself is a process that results in the acquisition of one or more electrons by a
    substance.     Where, substances that undergo this reduction process will become more negative.
    From these two theories and reduction which is not only seen from the capture of oxygen and
    hydrogen but as a process of transferring electrons from one substance to another.

    3. Concept of Oxidation Numbers

    The concept of a redox reaction involving the transfer of electrons can only occur in ionic compounds.
    Meanwhile, in covalent compounds it is not. For this reason, a third redox concept
    emerged, which is based on changes in oxidation numbers or also called oxidation states.

    Oxidation number is the positive and negative charges on an atom. The positive oxidation
    number element itself is generally an atom of a metal element, for example Na, Fe, Mg, Ca, and other metal
    elements.     Meanwhile, elements with negative oxidation numbers are generally atoms of
    non-metallic elements, for example O, Cl, F, and other non-metallic elements.

    According to the concept of change in oxidation number, states that a reduction reaction is a reaction in
    which the oxidation number decreases.     Meanwhile, the oxidation reaction itself is a reaction
    that experiences an increase in oxidation number.

    Where, there are 8 (eight) rules in determining the oxidation number of an atom that you must know, including the
    following:

    1. The concept of the oxidation number of free elements in the form of atoms and molecules, namely
    O

    Atomic free samples.
    C, Ca, Cu, Na, Fe, Al, Ne = 0
    Free examples are
    molecules.
    For example H2, O2, CI2, P4, S8, = 0.

    2. The concept of the oxidation number of monoatomic and polyatomic ions according to the type of ionic
    charge

    For example:
    The oxidation numbers of monoatomic ions Na+, Mg2+, and AI3+ are +1, +2, and +3,
    respectively.
    The oxidation numbers of polyatomic ions NH4+, SO42-, and PO43- are +1, -2,
    and -3, respectively.

    3. The concept of the oxidation number of elements in metal groups IA, IIA, and IIIA according to
    group

    An example of the oxidation number of Na in a NaCl compound is +1
    Such as: IA = H, Li, Na, K, Rb, Cs, Fr
    = +1.
    An example of the oxidation number of Mg in the compound MgSO2 is
    +2.
    Such as: IIA = Be, Mg, Ca, Sr, Ba, Ra = +2.
    An example of the oxidation
    number of Al in the AI203 compound is +3.
    Like IIIA = B, Al, Ga, In, Tl = +3.

    4. The concept of oxidation numbers for more than one transition group or group B elements

    Example:
    Oxidation numbers of Cu = +1 and +2.
    Au oxidation number = +1 and
    +3.
    Sn oxidation numbers = +3 and +4.

    5. The concept of the total oxidation number of the elements that form ions = the total charge

    For example: NH4+ = +1

    6. The concept of the sum of the oxidation numbers of the elements that form compounds = 0

    For example: H2O = 0

    7. The concept of Hydrogen Oxidation Number (H) When Associated with Metals = -1 But when H is related to
    non-metals = +1

    For example: The oxidation number of H in AIH3 = -1

    8. Concept of Oxygen Number (O) in Peroxide Compounds = -1 and Oxidation Number of O in Non Peroxide
    Compounds = -2

    For example: The oxidation number of O in the compound BaO2 = -1.

    How to Determine Reduction and Oxidation (Redox) Reactions Based on the Concept of Increasing and
    Decreasing Oxidation Numbers

    In reduction and oxidation (redox) reactions, there are several elements that act as reducing agents and
    oxidizing agents.     Where, the substance that is being oxidized is called a reducing agent, while
    the substance that is being reduced is called an oxidizing agent.

    Try to look at the following example:
    Reaction Mg(s) + 2HCl —–> MgCl2(aq) +
    H2(g)
    Because Mg is a free element, so the oxidation number of Mg = 0. Then, the
    oxidation number of H in the 2HCl compound is +1 because H elements are related to other elements and H
    is a group of IA.     Furthermore, because H = +1, it means that Cl = -1 so that the total
    oxidation number of 2HCl = 0.

    On the right-hand side, the oxidation number of Mg in the compound MgCl is +2 because Mg is bonded and is a
    group IIA element.     This is because Cl has an index of 2, so the oxidation number of Cl = -1 so
    that the total oxidation number of MgCl2 = 0. In addition, because H2 is a free element, the oxidation
    number has a value of 0. Where, the element Mg experiences an increase in oxidation number from 0 to +2 So
    it will undergo an oxidation reaction.

    So that the element Mg can be said to be a reducing agent. Meanwhile, element H will
    experience a decrease in its oxidation number from +1 to 0, so it will undergo a reduction reaction.
    Therefore, HCl is called an oxidizing agent.

    Examples of Redox Reactions

    One example of a redox reaction is between hydrogen and fluorine:
    H2 + F2 a 2 HF

    You can write all these reactions as 2 (two) half reactions:
    Oxidation reaction: H2 a 2H+ +
    2e-
    Reduction reaction: F2 + 2e- a 2F-

    Analyzing each half reaction will make the whole chemical process appear more clearly. That is
    because there is no change in total charge during a redox reaction, the total excess electrons in an
    oxidation reaction must equal the number consumed in a reduction reaction.

    Elements even in this molecular form often have an oxidation number of zero. In the above
    reaction hydrogen is oxidized from 0 to +1, while fluorine is reduced from 0 to -1.     When
    oxidation and reduction reactions are combined the electrons involved reduce each other:

    H2 a 2H+ + 2e-
    F2 + 2e- à 2F-
    ______________________
    H2 + F2 a 2H+ +
    2F-
    And the ions combine to form hydrogen fluoride:
    H2 + F2 a 2H+ + 2F- a 2
    HF

    Example of Reduction Reaction

    Examples of reduction reactions can occur when chlorine gas Cl2 turns into chlorine ions Cl-, Iron Cation III
    (Fe3+) changes to Iron II (Fe2+) or iron (Fe), or when copper Cation II (Cu2+) changes to copper metal Cu.

    An example of a reduction reaction is as follows.

    The two reactions above are events of the release of oxygen by a substance.

    The two reactions above are events of binding electrons by a substance.

    The oxidation number of S drops from +6 to +4.

    Difference between
    Reduction and Oxidation

    The notions of reduction and reducer are interrelated. If you look at the context of the word,
    the word reduction is a word that contains the meaning of an event.     While the reducer is an
    object that functions to carry out the event.

    In reduction there is an event of gaining electrons, or decreasing the oxidation number of an atom,
    molecule, or ion.     While reducing agents are substances that carry out the process of reducing
    other substances.

    Reduction occurs due to the presence of a reducing agent, which is a material in the form of molecules,
    atoms, or ions, which reduces other molecules, atoms, or ions.     When the process occurs, the
    reducing agent actually undergoes the opposite process, namely oxidation.

    Oxidation is the loss of electrons or the addition (increase) of oxidation number. Reduction
    has events that are always stimulants with oxidation events, meaning that each reduction event always causes
    an oxidation reaction.     The words reduction and reducing agent in a chemical reaction always
    meet with pairs of words oxidizing and oxidizing.

    Oxidizing and Reducing

    Compounds that have the ability to oxidize other compounds are said to be
    oxidative and are known as oxidizing agents or oxidizing
    agents     . The oxidizing agent removes electrons from other compounds,
    thereby reducing itself.     Because it “accepts” electrons, it is also called an electron
    acceptor.     Oxidizing agents are usually compounds that have elements with a high oxidation
    number (such as H, MnO, CrO     3 , Cr, OsO 4 ) or
    compounds that are very electronegative, so they can gain one or two more electrons by oxidizing a compounds
    (eg oxygen, fluorine, chlorine, and bromine).

    Compounds that have the ability to reduce other compounds are said to be
    reductive and are known as reducing agents or reducing
    agents     . The reducing agent gives up its electrons to another compound, so
    that it itself is oxidized.     Because it “donates” electrons, it is also known as an electron
    donor.     Compounds that are reducing agents vary widely.

    Metal elements such as Li, Na, Mg, Fe, Zn, and Al can be used as reducing agents. These metals
    will     give their electrons easily. Another type of reducing agent is
    the hydride transfer reagents , for example NaBH 4 and LiAlH
    4 ), these reagents are used extensively in organic chemistry, especially in the
    reduction of carbonyl compounds to alcohols.

    Another useful reduction method involves gaseous hydrogen (H 2 ) over a palladium, platinum, or
    nickel catalyst. This     catalytic reduction is primarily used in the reduction of
    carbon-carbon double or triple bonds.     An easy way to look at redox processes is, the
    reducing agent transfers its electrons to the oxidizing agent.     So in a reaction, the
    reducing agent loses electrons and is oxidized, and the oxidizing agent gains electrons and is reduced.
    The oxidizing and reducing pairs involved in a reaction are known as
    redox pairs .

    So, that’s an explanatory article about reduction along with the process and examples of reduction
    reactions.     These are articles that can be shared by sinaumedia. Hope it is
    useful!

  • Ibn Sabil is a traveler who has the right to receive zakat!

    Ibnu sabil is – Sinaumed’s friends, Zakat is one of the worships that must be carried out by Muslims because it is the fourth pillar of Islam. The payment of zakat is obligatory for everyone whose wealth has reached the nishab, haul, and other conditions.

    Quoted from the book Everyday Muslim Guide by DR. KH. M. Hamdan Rasyid, MA and Saiful Hadi El-Sutha , Zakat comes from the word zakaa-yazkuu-zakaatan which means holy, growing, good and growing.

    While the concept of zakat according to the term is a collection of funds that must be issued by every Muslim whose wealth has reached the nishab for those who are entitled to receive it. Zakat orders are listed in paragraph 11 of At-Taubah letter.

    فَإِن تَابُوا۟ وَأَقَامُوا۟ ٱلcel

    Meaning: ” If they repent, pray and pay zakat, then (they) are your brothers in the same religion. And We explain its verses to those who know it.”

    Payment of zakat fitrah is obligatory for Muslims except 8 people who are included in mustahiq. This is because there is a verse in the Qur’an which discusses the groups of people who are entitled to receive zakat, namely the word of Allah SWT in Surah At Tawbah verse 60 which means:

    “Indeed, zakat is only for groups of poor people, poor people, amil zakat, people whose hearts are softened (converts), to (liberate) slaves, to (free) people who have debts (Gharimin), for people who struggle in way of Allah and for people who are traveling (Ibnu sabil), as an obligation from Allah. Surely Allah is All-Knowing and All-Wise.” 

    In the Al-Quran letter At Taubah verse 60 above, who is Ibn Sabil who has the right to receive zakat? What are the criteria? If sinaumedia’s friends don’t know what Ibn Sabil is, it would be nice to listen to the discussion on Ibn Sabil below, because sinaumedia will discuss more about Ibn Sabil from several sources. Come on, see the explanation!

    What is Ibn Sabil?

    Ibnu Sabil was a traveler who could not return to his hometown due to lack of provisions or funds. Because Ibnu Sabil was a person who had difficulty paying for the return journey. So zakat for Ibn Sabil is intended to prevent their suffering along the way.

    In language, this term has two basic words, namely Ibn or bin (ابن) which means child, and sabil (السبيل) which means way. So that when it is interpreted to be someone who walks on it because the road is fixed.

    Ibn Sabil (ابن سبيل) is a figurative word for traveler, i.e. walking from one area to another.

    Imam Ibn Uthaymeen said:

    السبيل : الطريق ، وابن السبيل أي : المسافر ، وسمي بابن السبيل ؛ لأنه ملازم للطريق ، والملازم للشيء قد يضاف إليه بوصف البنوة ، كما يقولون : ابن الماء ، لطير الماء ، فعلى هذا يكون المراد بابن السبيل المسافر الملازم للسفر ، والمراد المسافر الذي انقطع به السفر أي نفدت نفقته ، فليس معه ما يوصله إلى بلده

    “As-Sabil means way. Ibn Sabil means traveler. Called Ibn Sabil (street child) because he was always traveling. And people who are always in a certain position sometimes associate it with child relationships. Like, Ibnul Maa (child of water), because he is always where there is water.” (as-Syarh al-Mumthi’, 6/154-156)

    Therefore, the meaning of Ibn Sabil is a traveler on a journey. While the meaning of a traveler who cannot continue his journey means that he has run out of provisions, so he does not have provisions for the journey back to his area.

    he continued,

    وأما من كان في بلده ويريد أن يسافر فإنه ليس ابن سبيل ، فلا يعطى من الزكاة لهذا الوصف … وابن السبيل

    “For people who are in his area and want to continue their journey, he is not called Ibn Sabil. Therefore, it is not permissible to issue zakat for this condition. Ibn Sabil received zakat to cover his needs, and it was not a requirement for him to be a poor person in his area. (as-Syarh al-Mumthi’, 6/154-156)

    From this understanding, Ibn Sabil is included in the group of people who are entitled to receive zakat.

    According to the scholars of the Shafi’i and Hanbali schools, what is included in the category of Ibn Sabil is someone who runs out of provisions during his journey, even though he is actually a person who has enough at home, although some other scholars are of the opinion that this kind of person should just owe money, and not give zakat money.

    However, Ibnu Sabil did not say that if a person runs out of reserves while traveling, he has an ATM card in his wallet, which can easily withdraw his savings at any time.

    Not everyone can be called ibn sabil, unless they meet the following conditions.

    Ibn Sabil’s Conditions

    Reporting from various sources, there are several conditions that are included in Ibn Sabil, which are as follows:

    1. Has no other assets 

    Previously it was mentioned that Ibn Sabil was a foreigner who had no money to return to his homeland. So, if there are still other assets in his hands, then he is not considered a recipient of zakat like Ibn Sabil.

    2. Travel is not for immorality 

    An Ibn Sabil who is entitled to receive zakat does not travel for purposes that are immoral or not pleasing to Allah. A good example of a trip is a trip for the purpose of worship, for example studying knowledge and going to Hajj.

    3. No one gives loans 

    At that time, he didn’t have the money to return to his country, even though he was a rich man in his country. If he has unpaid debts, or with other people whose whereabouts are unknown, or with people who are having financial difficulties, or with people who have reneged on their debts, all of that does not prevent him from being entitled to receive zakat.

    Example

    • In the current context, it can be said as ibnu sabil for Indonesian Migrant Workers (TKI) who are stuck in other countries, so that, let alone earning a decent living, even returning to their home country is difficult, because they do not have the money to buy tickets back to Indonesia.
    • Likewise for those who are victims of human trafficking or human trafficking which incidentally mostly affects poor people, then in the concept of zakat they must also be included in the list of mustahiq zakat just like Ibnu Sabil.

    Who are the people who are entitled to receive zakat besides Ibn Sabil?

    Zakat in Islam is divided into two types, namely zakat fitrah and zakat mal. Muzakki must issue zakat which will later be distributed to mustahiq or groups of people who are entitled to receive zakat.

    This has been explained in QS. At-Taubah verse 60 above that people who are entitled to receive zakat are divided into 8 groups including Ibn Sabil, including:

    1. Fakir

    Fakir is a group that is included in the recipient of zakat. They say zakat mustahik because they do not have their own source of income. He had neither the wealth nor the proper means of support to support himself with clothing, housing, and food.

    Often, a lack of a source of income is due to several factors, such as a serious problem or serious illness. Giving zakat to the poor can be given in two ways. You do this by giving zakat for daily living needs or as business capital.

    2. Poor

    The poor are another group of people who can be classified as recipients of zakat. Often equated with the poor, they are people who have a source of income but not enough to live on.

    In addition, they are also unable to fulfill their responsibilities including food, clothing, shelter and other needs. Jumhur Ulama considers the needy and poor to be among the groups targeted by the lack of necessities.

    3. Riqab

    Zakat mustahik is followed by riqab, slave or slave. In Arabic, the word raqabah means slave. This servant is a mercenary. Riqab here includes Mutabtab, namely a slave who is bound by a contract with his master. Nothing else, it is to make up for or inspire the precursor.

    In this case, zakat is used to free slaves from their masters, so that they can live properly. Giving zakat to riqab occurred in the early days of the development of Islam.

    However, in a study by the DKI Jakarta Province Indonesian Ulema Council, riqab was omitted from mustahik zakat in Indonesia. In fact, the riba or slave in question can be considered human trafficking or human trafficking.

    4. Gharimin or Gharim

    Mustahik zakat or the next group of zakat recipients is gharimin or gharim. In language, the meaning of gharimin or gharim is a person who is in debt.

    There are 2 groups that benefit from this zakat, namely:

    • Gharim mashlahati nafsihi : Debt for one’s own interests or needs
    • Gharim li ishlâhi dzatil : in debt to reconcile people, qabilah or tribe

    Ustadz Abu Riyadl Nurcholis bin Mursidi explained that the two types of Al-Gharim are entitled to receive zakat, but with additional conditions.

    For example, in ghârim linafsihi, it means that someone must be in a bad condition. As for ghârim li ishlâhi dzatil bain, he can get zakat even though he is rich.

    Following are the conditions for gharim to receive zakat, including:

    • Islamic religion
    • Al-Faqr (poor)
    • Debt is not due to immorality
    • No more income
    • Not descendants of Bani Hasyim (descendants of Rasulullah SAW’s parents)
    • Debt payment due date
    • Gharim is not the responsibility of muzaki (people who give zakat)
    • Zakat assets from baitul mal to gharim depend on debts that must be paid.

    Ibn Qudamah Rahimahullah said, ” Gharim was given zakat to cover his debts even though they were very large.”

    5. Converts

    Converts or people who have just converted to Islam are also included in mustahik zakat.

    The zakat received by converts is intended to help strengthen their faith and diversity by following Islam.

    Zakat recipients of the convert group (asnaf) can be divided into 4, namely:

    • New converts to Islam
    • Those whose faith is weak
    • A group whose faith is vulnerable
    • Owners of power from non-Muslims who avoid evil

    In addition, zakat for converts also has a social role because it can strengthen kinship ties.

    6. Fisabilillah

    Apart from converts, the next mustahiq of zakat is fisabilillah (a person or institution whose main activity is fighting on the side of Allah SWT. Their main goal is to uphold Islam.

    The fisabilillah here are not just one person, but an Islamic broadcasting institution in big cities or Islamic symbols in remote areas who are entitled to receive zakat.

    Examples of fisabilillah here are preachers, education development, health, orphanages, madrasah diniyah, and so on.

    Therefore, they all have the right to receive zakat assistance because they are willing to sacrifice for the sake of upholding Islamic law.

    7. Amil Zakat

    The last mustahiq of zakat is the amil zakat, namely the person whose job is to collect zakat funds that have been given by muzakki (people who are subject to the obligation to pay zakat) and distribute them to mustahiq.

    This can be an institution or the local community who are given the responsibility to collect zakat assets. This Amil belongs to the last group of all the groups described above who deserve their rights.

    The people who are entitled to receive zakat above have been determined by the Al-Qur’an so that the distribution of zakat may only be carried out by 8 groups of mustahiq zakat.

    Benefits of Paying Zakat to Ibn Sabil

    Basically the command to pay zakat has been discussed in the Al-Qur’an and the hadith of the Prophet. Zakat also needs to give it to people who are entitled to receive zakat. As for there are still some benefits of paying zakat to Ibn Sabil, namely:

    1. Bringing Good

    First, the benefit of paying zakat to Ibn Sabil is that it can increase sustenance, improve the quality of life, the heart feels calm, and life feels more peaceful because of the good things we have done.

    When humans do good throughout their lives, people will be kind to them and will bring happiness not only in this world, but in the hereafter also get the same pleasure.

    2. Getting the Best Reward

    Another benefit of zakat is that Allah will give his servant the best reward. In addition, every Muslim who pays zakat will also be more supported by Allah. As in the following verses of Al-Qur’an An-Nur 37-38 which means:

    “(They do that) so that Allah will repay them (with a reward) that is better than what they did, and so that Allah will increase His goodness to them . (QS An-Nur: 37 – 38).

    3. Forgiven his sins

    A Muslim pays zakat, then his mistakes and sins will be forgiven by Allah SWT. Not only that, Allah SWT also ensures that every Muslim who prays and pays zakat is guaranteed to enter heaven. As in Al-Qur’an Surat Al-Maidah: 12, Allah SWT says:

    “And verily Allah has taken the covenant (of) the children of Israel, and We have appointed leaders among them, and Allah said: “Verily, I am with you, verily if you will perform your prayers and pay zakat and believe in my Messenger, help them and lent generous loans to God

    Truly I will cover my sins your mistakes and the fact that I will take you to heaven where there are rivers, so whoever among you does not believe after this, then that person has really strayed from the right path “(QS) Al -Maidah: 12).

    4. Achieve Perfect Faith

    As explained in the hadith of Rasulullah SAW, he said:

    “One of you will not believe (with perfect faith) until he loves his brother as he loves himself.” (Narrated by Bukhari: 13)

    There is a relationship between the meaning of hadith and zakat, because being a human being is not only concerned with self-pleasure. However, humans also need to care for people who are less able and help those in need.

    5. The Ticket Road to Heaven

    When the muzakki have paid their zakat perfectly to the group of people who are entitled to receive zakat. So, zakat is a ware for someone to achieve goodness.

    In relation to heaven, another benefit of zakat is that the reward obtained can be a ticket that can launch and ensure people to enter Heaven.

    Closing

    This is a review of the meaning of Ibn Sabil, conditions, examples, and the benefits of paying zakat to Ibn Sabil. For Sinaumed’s who want to know more about other ibnu sabil, you can visit sinaumedia.com to get related books.